Users Manual Aspen Distriview

ASPEN
DistriView
Version 10
Users Manual
Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc.

NOTICE
ASPEN DistriView is a proprietary computer program of Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc.
(ASPEN). The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Advanced Systems for Power
Engineering,
Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this
document.
Copyright 1988-2015 Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc. All rights
reserved.
HOW TO ORDER MORE

MANUALS
This User's Manual may be duplicated by the Licensee for its own use. (All the manuals are available as pdf files
in the .\manuals directory of the program CD.) You can order a new copy by writing to the address below. Please
refer to document DV-UM-2015
HOW TO REACH
ASPEN
Mailing address: ASPEN

49 N. San Mateo
Drive San Mateo, CA
94401 U.S.A.
Telephone: (650)347-3997
Fax: (650)347-0233
eMail (English): support@aspeninc.com
eMail (Spanish and Portuguese): suporte@aspeninc.com
Web Site: www.aspeninc.com
Our office hours are from 8:30 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. Pacific time (GMT-8 in the winter; GMT-7 in the
summer), Monday through Friday.
ASPEN DistriView, ASPEN OneLiner, ASPEN Power Flow, ASPEN Breaker Rating Module, ASPEN
Relay Database, ASPEN Line Database and ASPEN Line Constants Program are trademarks of Advanced
Systems for Power Engineering, Inc.
MultiSpeak is a registered trademark of National Rural Electric Cooperative Association.

Windows, Word and Excel are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
AutoCad is a registered trademark of AutoDesk
Corporation. PhotoShop is a registered trademark Adobe
Corporation.
Contents
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................... 9
1.1 FEATURES................................................................................................................................................9
1.2 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................16
1.3 NETWORK SUPPORT ...........................................................................................................................16
1.4 SYSTEM SIZE LIMITATION ............................................................................................................... 16
SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL .................................................................................. 17

2.1 INSTALLING THE WORKING MODEL .............................................................................................17
2.2 STARTING THE WORKING MODEL .................................................................................................18
2.3 INSTALLING THE PRODUCTION VERSION ...................................................................................18
2.4 STARTING THE PRODUCTION VERSION ....................................................................................... 19
2.5 FILES .......................................................................................................................................................19
2.6 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................21
2.7 ONE-LINE SYMBOLS ...........................................................................................................................22
2.8 QUICK TUTORIAL ............................................................................................................................... 23
SECTION 3 COMMAND REFERENCE .............................................................................................. 77

3.1 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................77
3.2 MAIN WINDOW COMMANDS ........................................................................................................... 78
FILE MENU .........................................................................................................................................81
NEW COMMAND ....................................................................................................................................81
OPEN BINARY DATA FILE COMMAND ..............................................................................................82
OPEN ONELINER FILE COMMAND .....................................................................................................83
OPEN TEXT DATA FILE COMMAND ...................................................................................................84
CLOSE COMMAND ................................................................................................................................85
SAVE COMMAND ...................................................................................................................................85
SAVE AS COMMAND .............................................................................................................................86
EXPORT NETWORK COMMAND .........................................................................................................86
FILE COMMENTS COMMAND .............................................................................................................87
STATISTICS COMMAND .......................................................................................................................88
CHANGE BASE MVA COMMAND .......................................................................................................89
MERGE FILE COMMAND ......................................................................................................................90
READ CHANGE FILE COMMAND ........................................................................................................91
PRINT SETUP COMMAND .....................................................................................................................92
PRINT ONE-LINE COMMAND ..............................................................................................................93
EXPORT ONE-LINE COMMAND ...........................................................................................................95
EXIT COMMAND ....................................................................................................................................96
NETWORK MENU ...............................................................................................................................96
PROPERTIES COMMAND ......................................................................................................................96
NEW | SUBSTATION BUS COMMAND ................................................................................................97
NEW | DISTRIBUTION NODE COMMAND ........................................................................................100
NEW | SPOT LOAD COMMAND ..........................................................................................................102
NEW | SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR/GENERATOR COMMAND .......................................................... 104
NEW | 3-PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR/GENERATOR COMMAND ................................................. 107
NEW | 1-PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR/GENERATOR COMMAND ................................................. 111
NEW | CAPACITOR/REACTOR/HARMONIC FILTER COMMAND ................................................. 115
DistriView Version 10 Contents

NEW | GROUNDING TRANSFORMER COMMAND .......................................................................... 119
NEW | 3-PHASE LINE/CABLE COMMAND ........................................................................................121
NEW | 2-PHASE LINE/CABLE COMMAND ........................................................................................ 129
NEW | 1-PHASE LINE/CABLE COMMAND ........................................................................................131
NEW | 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER-BALANCED COMMAND ...................................................... 133
NEW | 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER-GENERAL COMMAND ......................................................... 137
NEW | 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER COMMAND ............................................................................ 140
NEW | VOLTAGE REGULATOR COMMAND ..................................................................................... 145
NEW | SWITCH COMMAND ................................................................................................................151
NEW | 3-WAY SWITCH COMMAND ...................................................................................................153
NEW | ANNOTATION COMMAND ......................................................................................................155
DELETE COMMAND ............................................................................................................................157
DELETE ALL IN REGION COMMAND ..............................................................................................158
DELETE ALL OUTSIDE REGION COMMAND ..................................................................................159
RESTORE | BUS COMMAND ...............................................................................................................160
RESTORE | GEN., LOAD, SHUNT COMMAND .................................................................................. 161
RESTORE | BRANCH COMMAND ......................................................................................................162
CONVERT | LINE TO SWITCH COMMAND .......................................................................................163
CONVERT | 2-PHASE LINE TO 3-PHASE COMMAND ..................................................................... 164
CONVERT | GENERATOR NODE TO SUBSTATION COMMAND ................................................... 165
CONVERT | SUBSTATION TO GENERATOR NODE COMMAND ................................................... 166
IN/OUT OF SERVICE COMMAND ......................................................................................................167
TOGGLE SWITCH COMMAND ...........................................................................................................168
COPY COMMAND .................................................................................................................................169
PASTE COMMAND ...............................................................................................................................170
PASTE GENERATOR TO FEEDER COMMAND ................................................................................172
CHANGE NOMINAL kV COMMAND .................................................................................................174
SPLIT BUS COMMAND ........................................................................................................................176
MERGE BUSES COMMAND ................................................................................................................177
INSERT/REMOVE TAP NODE COMMAND .......................................................................................178
REMOVE TAP NODES RUN BATCH COMMAND ......................................................................... 180
SECTION LOAD | ALLOCATE COMMAND .......................................................................................181
SECTION LOAD | ALLOCATION HISTORY COMMAND ................................................................. 184
SECTION LOAD | EDIT LOAD GROUPS COMMAND ...................................................................... 185
EDIT NODE AREA COMMAND ..........................................................................................................186
EDIT LOAD ZONE COMMAND ...........................................................................................................188
RELOAD LINE RATING FROM LIBRARY COMMAND ................................................................... 190
RECALC LINE IMPEDANCES COMMAND .......................................................................................192
SWAP PHASE COMMAND ...................................................................................................................192
DIAGRAM MENU ..............................................................................................................................193
OPTIONS COMMAND ..........................................................................................................................193
kV COLOR CODE COMMAND ............................................................................................................196
PLACE BUSES COMMAND .................................................................................................................197
HIDE BUS COMMAND .........................................................................................................................199
BUS SYMBOL COMMANDS ................................................................................................................200
HIDE ALL BUT SELECTED TRUNK COMMAND ............................................................................. 203
HIDE ALL BUT THE SELECTED FEEDER COMMAND ................................................................... 203
MAKE ALL HIDDEN BUSES VISIBLE COMMAND .......................................................................... 204
SNAP TO STATE PLANE COORDINATES COMMAND ................................................................... 205
ACQUIRE GRAPHICS FROM ANOTHER FILE COMMAND ............................................................ 206
INSERT LINE KINK COMMAND .........................................................................................................206
RESET TEXT POSITION COMMAND .................................................................................................207
ATTACH/DETACH ANNOTATION TO/FROM OBJECT COMMAND ............................................... 208
COPY 1-LINE REGION TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND ...................................................................... 209
SCALE/SHIFT ONE-LINE COMMAND ...............................................................................................210
VIEW MENU ......................................................................................................................................211
ZOOM COMMANDS .............................................................................................................................211
FIND BUS BY NAME COMMAND ......................................................................................................212
FIND BUS BY NUMBER COMMAND .................................................................................................213
FIND ANNOTATION COMMAND .......................................................................................................214
HIGHLIGHT ATTACHED OBJECT COMMAND .................................................................................215
GO TO COMMANDS .............................................................................................................................216

PLAIN 1-LINE COMMAND ..................................................................................................................218
IMPEDANCES ON 1-LINE COMMAND ..............................................................................................219
BRANCH NAMES ON 1-LINE COMMAND ........................................................................................220
PHASES ON 1-LINE COMMAND ........................................................................................................221
SECTION LOAD ON 1-LINE COMMAND ...........................................................................................222
LINE LENGTH AND TYPE ON 1-LINE COMMAND ......................................................................... 223
EQUIPMENT RELIABILITY PARAMETERS COMMAND ................................................................ 224
SOLUTION | POSITIVE-SEQUENCE QUANTITIES COMMAND ..................................................... 225
SOLUTION | NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE QUANTITIES COMMAND ................................................... 226
SOLUTION | NEUTRAL QUANTITIES COMMAND .......................................................................... 227
SOLUTION | PHASE A/B/C QUANTITIES COMMAND .................................................................... 228
SOLUTION | RELAY OPERATING TIME COMMAND ...................................................................... 230
SOLUTION | REAL AND REACTIVE POWER COMMAND .............................................................. 231
SOLUTION | LOSSES COMMAND ......................................................................................................232
SOLUTION | PHASORS COMMAND ...................................................................................................233
SOLUTION | APPARENT IMPEDANCE AB, BC AND CA COMMANDS ......................................... 236
SOLUTION | ALL-BUS FAULT RESULTS ON 1-LINE COMMAND ................................................. 237
VOLTAGE PROFILE COMMAND ........................................................................................................238
POWER PROFILE COMMAND ............................................................................................................239
NEUTRAL CURRENT PROFILE COMMAND ....................................................................................240
ALL-BUS-FAULT CURRENT PROFILE COMMAND ........................................................................ 241
SHOW NEXT/PREVIOUS FAULT RESULT COMMANDS ................................................................. 242
TTY WINDOW COMMAND .................................................................................................................243
TOOLBAR COMMAND ........................................................................................................................244
DEVICE PALETTE COMMAND ..........................................................................................................245
REFRESH SCREEN COMMAND ..........................................................................................................246
RELAY MENU ....................................................................................................................................247
PROPERTIES COMMAND ....................................................................................................................247
OPTIONS COMMAND ..........................................................................................................................248
NEW BREAKER/RELAY GROUP COMMAND ..................................................................................250
NEW FUSE COMMAND .......................................................................................................................268
NEW COMPOUNDED CURVE OC DEVICE COMMAND ................................................................. 271
NEW RECLOSER COMMAND .............................................................................................................275
NEW SECTIONALIZER COMMAND ...................................................................................................279
VIEW RELAY CURVES COMMAND ..................................................................................................281
OPEN CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND .........................................................................................283
DELETE COMMAND ............................................................................................................................285
IMPORT RELAY COMMAND ..............................................................................................................286
EXPORT RELAY COMMAND ..............................................................................................................287
S_CKT MENU ....................................................................................................................................288
SOLVE SHORT CIRCUIT COMMAND ................................................................................................288
SIMULATE LOCKED ROTOR COMMAND ........................................................................................291
VIEW SHORT CIRCUIT OR LOCKED ROTOR SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND ....................292
SIMULATE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER FAULT COMMAND ............................................... 294
FAULT ALL BUSES COMMAND .........................................................................................................296
ARC-FLASH HAZARD CALCULATOR COMMAND ........................................................................ 300
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN COMMAND ................................................................................302
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | SHOW FAULTS SOLUTION ON 1 -LINE COMMAND ....................306
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN BATCH COMMAND .................................................................. 307
STEPPED EVENT ANALYSIS .............................................................................................................. 310
SHORT CIRCUIT & LOCKED ROTOR OPTIONS COMMAND ......................................................... 313
V_DROP MENU ................................................................................................................................315
SOLVE VOLTAGE DROP COMMAND ................................................................................................315
VIEW VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND .......................................................... 318
SOLUTION BROWSER COMMAND ...................................................................................................320
LOSES PROBE COMMAND .................................................................................................................321
SIMULATE N-1 CONTINGENCIES COMMAND ................................................................................322
CAPACITOR PLACEMENT COMMAND ............................................................................................324
VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION PARAMETERS COMMAND .............................................................. 325
RELIABILITY MENU .........................................................................................................................326
FEEDER RELIABILITY REPORT COMMAND ...................................................................................326

HARMONIC MENU ...........................................................................................................................329
FREQUENCY SCAN COMMAND ........................................................................................................329
SOLVE HARMONIC LOAD FLOW COMMAND ................................................................................331
VIEW HARMONIC SOLUTION | THD COMMAND ........................................................................... 333
VIEW HARMONIC SOLUTION | I.T COMMAND .............................................................................. 333
VIEW HARMONIC SOLUTION | HARMONIC PROBE COMMAND ................................................ 334
CHECK MENU ..................................................................................................................................336
SWITCHED CAPACITOR VOLTAGE RISE COMMAND ................................................................... 336
RELAY TRIPPING UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS COMMAND .................................................. 338
PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION COMMAND ..................................................................... 340
FEEDER PROTECTION COMMAND ...................................................................................................344
POLICY FOR COORDINATION CHECKING COMMAND ................................................................ 350
INTERRUPTING DEVICE RATING COMMAND ...............................................................................351
I2T LIMIT OF LINES AND CABLES COMMAND .............................................................................. 354
REPORT MENU .................................................................................................................................356
SOLUTION REPORT COMMAND .......................................................................................................356
TOOLS MENU ...................................................................................................................................360
UNDO COMMAND ................................................................................................................................360
DATA BROWSER COMMAND ............................................................................................................361
GENERATE LIST OF NODES COMMAND .........................................................................................366
CHANGE MISC. PARAMETERS ON FEEDER COMMAND .............................................................. 369
CONFIGURATION DASHBOARD COMMAND .................................................................................370
RUN COMMANDS ................................................................................................................................374
UPDATE KEY MEMORY COMMAND ................................................................................................375
HELP CONTENTS COMMANDS .........................................................................................................376
DEVICE LIST COMMANDS .................................................................................................................377
3.3 CURVES WINDOW COMMAND .......................................................................................................378
MISC MENU ......................................................................................................................................379
SELECT PRINTER COMMAND ...........................................................................................................379
PRINT GRAPH COMMAND .................................................................................................................380
COPY GRAPH TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND .....................................................................................382
EXPORT GRAPH COMMAND .............................................................................................................382
VIEW CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND .........................................................................................383
SAVE THIS CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND ...............................................................................384
OPTIONS COMMAND ..........................................................................................................................386
CLOSE WINDOW COMMAND ............................................................................................................388
ADD MENU .......................................................................................................................................389
RELAY CURVES IN VICINITY COMMAND ......................................................................................389
CONDUCTOR DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND ..................................................................................390
TRANSFORMER DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND .............................................................................392
DAMAGE CURVE FROM LIBRARY COMMAND .............................................................................397
ANNOTATION COMMAND .................................................................................................................398
TIME DIFFERENCE SLIDERS COMMAND ........................................................................................399
PICTURE FROM CLIPBOARD COMMAND .......................................................................................400
REMOVE MENU ................................................................................................................................401
RELAY CURVE COMMAND ................................................................................................................401
DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND ...........................................................................................................402
ALL BUT 1ST RELAY CURVE COMMAND ........................................................................................403
PICTURE COMMAND ...........................................................................................................................403
FAULT COMMAND ...............................................................................................................................404
TIME DIFFERENCE DIVIDER COMMAND ........................................................................................404
EDIT MENU .......................................................................................................................................405
CURVE PROPERTIES COMMAND .....................................................................................................405
TRIAL RELAY ADJUSTMENT COMMAND .......................................................................................406
SHIFTING FACTOR COMMAND ........................................................................................................410
DAMAGE CURVE PROPERTIES COMMAND ...................................................................................412
LEGEND COMMAND ...........................................................................................................................413
TRANSPARENT PICTURE COMMAND .............................................................................................414
REARRANGE CAPTIONS COMMAND ...............................................................................................415

SHOW MENU ....................................................................................................................................416
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS COMMAND .................................................................... 416
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR 1 FAULT COMMAND ............................................................................ 417
RELAY AND RECLOSER TEST VALUES COMMAND .................................................................... 420
CURVE SEPARATION COMMAND ....................................................................................................422
3.4 DS RELAYS WINDOW COMMANDS ............................................................................................. 424
MISC MENU ......................................................................................................................................425
SELECT PRINTER COMMAND ...........................................................................................................425
PRINT GRAPH COMMAND .................................................................................................................426
EXPORT GRAPH COMMAND .............................................................................................................427
OPTIONS COMMAND ..........................................................................................................................429
GRID ON/OFF COMMAND ..................................................................................................................430
LOAD REGION COMMAND ................................................................................................................431
ADD MENU .......................................................................................................................................433
RELAY IN VINCINITY COMMAND ....................................................................................................433
REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES COMMAND ...............................................................................435
PICTURE FROM CLIPBOARD COMMAND .......................................................................................436
REMOVE MENU ................................................................................................................................438
ALL BUT 1ST RELAY COMMAND .......................................................................................................438
REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES COMMAND ...............................................................................439
PICTURE COMMAND ...........................................................................................................................440
EDIT MENU .......................................................................................................................................442
RELAY SETTING COMMAND .............................................................................................................442
TRANSPARENT PICTURE COMMAND .............................................................................................444
FIND ORIGIN COMMAND ...................................................................................................................444
SECOND RELAY ORIGIN COMMAND ...............................................................................................445
REARRANGE CAPTIONS COMMAND ...............................................................................................446
SHOW MENU ....................................................................................................................................447
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS COMMAND .................................................................... 447
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR 1 FAULT COMMAND ............................................................................ 448
3.5 TTY WINDOW COMMANDS ............................................................................................................ 451
TTY MENU .........................................................................................................................................452
CLEAR TTY COMMAND .....................................................................................................................452
SELECT FONT COMMAND .................................................................................................................452
PRINT SELECTED TEXT COMMAND ................................................................................................453
SAVE SELECTED TEXT COMMAND .................................................................................................454
EDIT MENU .......................................................................................................................................455
SELECT ALL COMMAND ....................................................................................................................455
COPY SELECTED TEXT TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND .................................................................... 455
FIND COMMAND ..................................................................................................................................456
3.6 PROFILE WINDOW COMMAND ......................................................................................................457
MISC MENU ......................................................................................................................................458
PRINT COMMAND ................................................................................................................................458
SAVE GRAPH TO FILE COMMAND ...................................................................................................458
EXPORT PROFILE DATA COMMAND ...............................................................................................459
PREFERENCES COMMAND ................................................................................................................460
SECTION 4 NETWORK DAT A FORM AT ........................................................................................ 461

4.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................461
4.2 FILE HEADER .....................................................................................................................................462

4.3 SYSTEM PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................................462
4.4 FILE COMMENTS ..............................................................................................................................464
4.5 BUS DATA .......................................................................................................................................... 464
4.6 SPOT LOAD DATA ............................................................................................................................466
4.7 INDUCTION MACHINE DATA ........................................................................................................467
4.8 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE DATA ................................................................................................469
4.9 SHUNT AND HARMONIC FILTER DATA ......................................................................................471
4.10 LOAD GROUP DATA ...................................................................................................................... 473
4.11 GROUNDING TRANSFORMER DATA .........................................................................................473
4.12 LINE AND CABLE DATA ...............................................................................................................474
4.13 SECTION LOAD DATA ...................................................................................................................477
4.14 LOAD ALLOCATION PARAMETERS ...........................................................................................479
4.15 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER DATA ............................................................................................481
4.16 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER DATA ............................................................................................486
4.17 VOLTAGE REGULATOR DATA ....................................................................................................489
4.18 SWITCH DATA .................................................................................................................................491
4.19 3-WAY SWITCH DATA ...................................................................................................................492
4.20 HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCE DATA ......................................................................................493
4.21 PROTECTIVE DEVICE DATA ........................................................................................................494
4.22 CONFIGURATION DATA ...............................................................................................................495
SECTION 5 CHANGE FILE FORM AT ............................................................................................. 497

5.1 INTRODUCTION TO CHANGE FILE .............................................................................................. 497
5.2 FILE HEADER .....................................................................................................................................498
5.3 BUS DATA .......................................................................................................................................... 498
5.4 SPOT LOAD DATA ............................................................................................................................499
5.5 SECTION LOAD DATA .....................................................................................................................499
5.6 SECTION LOAD ALLOCATION PARAMETERS ...........................................................................499
5.7 ALLOCATE SECTION LOAD ...........................................................................................................500
SECTION 6 PROTECTIVE DEVICE FORMAT ................................................................................ 503

6.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................503
6.2 FILE HEADER .....................................................................................................................................504
6.3 OC PHASE RELAY DATA ................................................................................................................ 504
6.4 OC GROUND RELAY DATA ............................................................................................................ 506
6.5 OC FUSE DATA ..................................................................................................................................508
6.6 DISTANCE PHASE RELAY DATA ..................................................................................................509
6.7 DISTANCE GROUND RELAY DATA ..............................................................................................511
6.8 BREAKER DATA ............................................................................................................................... 514
6.9 RECLOSER DATA ..............................................................................................................................515
6.10 SECTIONALIZER DATA .................................................................................................................517
6.11 COMPOUNDED CURVE OC DEVICE DATA ...............................................................................518
SECTION 7 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION REPORT ....................................................................... 521

7.1 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION IN TEXT FORMAT .........................................................................521
7.2 TITLE PAGE ........................................................................................................................................521
7.3 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTIONS .........................................................................................................522
SECTION 8 VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION REPORT ...................................................................... 525

8.1 VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION IN TEXT FORMAT ........................................................................ 525
8.2 TITLE PAGE ........................................................................................................................................525
8.3 NODE ORIENTED REPORT ..............................................................................................................526
8.4 SUMMARIES .......................................................................................................................................528

SECTION 9 DET AILS AND TECHNIQUES ..................................................................................... 533
9.1 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MAIN WINDOW........................................................................................533
9.2 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CURVES WINDOW...................................................................................534
9.3 SHORTCUTS FOR THE DS RELAY WINDOW...............................................................................534
9.4 SHORTCUTS FOR THE TTY WINDOW...........................................................................................535
9.5 SHORTCUTS FOR THE DIALOG BOXES........................................................................................535
9.6 KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS.........................................................................................................535
9.7 ONLINE HELP..................................................................................................................................... 537
9.8 COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS....................................................................................................537
APPENDIX 539
APPENDIX A: OVERCURRENT CURVE LIBRARY......................................................................... 540
A.1 INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................................540
A.2 OVERCURRENT CURVE LIBRARY........................................................................................... 540
APPENDIX B: DISTANCE RELAY LIBRARY....................................................................................542
B.1 INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................................542
B.2 THE DISTANCE RELAY LIBRARY..............................................................................................542
APPENDIX C: CONDUCTOR LIBRARY EDITOR.............................................................................543
INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................543
How to Start the Conductor Library Editor........................................................................................543
How to Create a New Conductor Library File....................................................................................544
How to Open an Existing Conductor Library File..............................................................................544
How to Add Data from a Conductor Text Data File...........................................................................545
How to Add Data from an Existing CDB file......................................................................................545
How to Add a New Wire......................................................................................................................546
How to Edit the Data for an Existing Wire..........................................................................................547
How to Add a New Cable.................................................................................................................... 548
How to Edit the Data for an Existing Cable........................................................................................550
How to Add a Construction.................................................................................................................550
How to Edit a Construction.................................................................................................................552
How to Add a Line Table Entry...........................................................................................................552
How to Edit a Line Table Entry...........................................................................................................553
How to Exit the Conductor Library Editor..........................................................................................553
APPENDIX D: VOLTAGE REGULATOR MODELING..................................................................... 559
APPENDIX E: RELIABILITY CLASS LIBRARY............................................................................... 561
E.1 RELIABILITY CLASS BROWSER................................................................................................561
E.2 RELIABILITY CLASS LIBRARY FILE FORMAT........................................................................561
APPENDIX F: HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCES............................................................................563
F.1 INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................................................563
F.2 HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCE INFO DIALOG BOX...........................................................563
APPENDIX G: ASYMMETRIC FAULT CURRENT............................................................................565
G.1 ASYMMETRIC AND SYMMETRIC FAULT CURRENTS........................................................... 565
Index 567

viii Contents DistriView Version 10
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 FEATURES
ASPEN DistriView is an integrated suite of voltage drop, short circuit, and relay coordination software for
utility distribution systems. DistriView is designed for networks that have a mixture of 3-phase, 2-phase
and single-phase network components, including unbalanced loads and shunts. The user interface is
similar to that of ASPEN OneLiner, with a drag-and-drop palette, split windows, etc. Some highlights of
DistriView are these:
Models the distribution network in the phase domain (and not in the sequence domain) for
short- circuit, locked-rotor and voltage-drop (load-flow) studies.
Handles radial or network systems. Each network can have multiple feeders. Each feeder
can be fed by any number of substation buses.
Simulate short circuits: bus faults, close-in faults, line-end faults and intermediate faults.
Simulates lock-rotor condition for single- and 3-phase induction machines, with a variety
of starting methods.
Simulates distribution transformer faults and reports on fault current on the low side.
Simulates voltage drop with a true 3-phase load flow algorithm.
Simulates n-1 contingencies with voltage drop solutions.
Short-circuit and locked-rotor studies can use a voltage-drop solution as initial condition.
Has advanced analysis tools: stepped-event analysis, voltage sag analysis, arc-flash
calculation and more.
Has built-in harmonic analysis engine for frequency scan and harmonic load-flow solution.
Has the ability to calculate feeder reliability.
Has built-in calculator for overhead-lines and cable impedances. Has library of large number
of commonly used conductors, pole constructions and underground cable circuits.
Advanced network modeling:
o 2-winding transformers: Balanced 3-phase, as well as transformers that are made up of one, two
or three single-phase banks with different kVA ratings and impedances.
o 3-winding transformers without fictitious buses.
o 2- and 3-way switches, circuit breakers, voltage regulators and boosters, switchable capacitors
and reactors, grounding banks, and single-, 2-phase and 3-phase lines and cables.
o Spot loads and section loads modeled as a mixture of constant power, constant impedance
and constant current components in voltage drop studies.
o Distributed loads: modeled as section loads on lines and cables. The total source load can
be allocated to section loads using REA, kWh and kVA methods, as well as using line length.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

o Synchronous machines and synchronous condensers: Each machine can be controlled to
hold constant voltage or constant power in a voltage-drop study.
o Induction generators and motors: both 3-phase and single-phase.
Advanced relay modeling:
o Overcurrent relays, fuses, reclosers, sectionalizers and compounded-curve overcurrent
(CCOC) devices: The program comes with curves for about 3000 relay, fuse, recloser and
CCOC types. The relay library is user modifiable.
o Distance relays: Has generic mho and quadrilateral characteristics, as well as manufacturer-
specific models that mimics the fault-detection and tripping logic of commercial relays from
ABB, GE, SEL, Areva, Siemens, and others.
Has the ability to import distance-relay setting parameters from files generated by GE, SEL
and other relay manufacturers.
Has automatic coordination checking algorithms for any mix of fuses, reclosers and relays.
Has the ability to allocate loads in a batch mode using billing data or other sources.
Plots transformer damage curve and inrush curves automatically.
Choice of IEC or American transformer symbols, 50 or 60 Hz, English or metric units.
Displays results of voltage-drop, short-circuit and locked-rotor simulations graphically
with color visualization of over- and under-voltage areas.
Has capacitor placement algorithm for loss reduction.
Can read ASPEN OneLiner data files.
Comes with data conversion program for PTI ADEPT (PSS/U) data files.
Proven GIS interface.
Licensed to over 110 electric utilities worldwide.
Figure 1.1: Birds-eye view of a large feeder in which the nodes are placed according to their GPS
coordinates.
10 DistriView Version 10
Figure 1.1: DistriView shows the voltages and currents on the one-line diagram for a single-line-to-
ground fault on phase a of node 1250 at the lower left corner. The branch currents shown in this case are
Ia.
Figure 1.2: DistriView displays the relay operating time for the same fault. The relay operating time is
shown next to each breaker/relay group and other protective device. The operating time in seconds is
preceded by OP if from an overcurrent ground relay, and FU if from a fuse.

Figure 1.3: DistriView displays the solution of a voltage-drop study on the one-line diagram. The real
and reactive power (kW+jkVAR) flow is shown. The flow on overloaded branches is highlighted in red.
The under voltage nodes are highlighted with green halos. The user can elect to have other values
displayed, such as the losses or individual phase voltages and currents. The feeder losses and the number
of iterations required for convergence are shown in the status bar, at the bottom of the window.
Figure 1.4: A phasor probe feature allows the user to see readily the voltage and current phasors at any
point in the one-line diagram for a voltage-drop, short-circuit or locked-rotor solution. The above picture
clearly shows that in this line-to-line fault, the current in phase 'a' leads the quadrature voltage Vb-Vc.
Figure 1.5: DistriView simulates all possible 3LG, 2LG, 1LG and L-L bus faults on each of the nodes in
the feeder and displays the fault current in a tabular form (top). These values are also displayed on the
one- line diagram (bottom).
Figure 1.6: DistriView displays an x-y plot of the voltage magnitude along a feeder. The voltage-profile
shows the rise and fall of the voltage between the substation bus (on the left) and a selected distribution
node (on the right). The phases are identified by different colors. A similar plot can be generated
showing bus fault currents.

Figure 1.7: DistriView displays the characteristics of fuses and relays for a fault. The relay current and
operating time are shown in text and as points on the relay curves. The user has the option of having the
curves shifted automatically or manually. (This figure shows the curves without shifting. See figure on
next page for a set of shifted curves.) The user can also store a series of curve collections in a binary file
for later recalling.
Figure 1.8: An un-retouched printed output showing overcurrent relay and fuse curves and a transformer damage
curve. The relay current and operating times are shown graphically and in text. A picture of the relevant portion of
the one-line diagram has been copied from the program main window and pasted on this graph.

1.2 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
Hardware Requirements
DistriView runs on Pentium-based PCs and compatibles. Other hardware requirements include:
A color monitor with 1024x768 resolution or better.
Memory: 2 Gbytes is recommended.
A full installation of the software requires approximately 60 Mbytes of disk space. You should allow
some additional disk space for data files. As a rough rule of thumb, the binary data file takes about
100 Kbytes for each 1000 nodes.
A 2- or 3-button mouse.
Any graphics-capable plotter, ink-jet or laser printer that works under Windows.
Software Requirements
Microsoft Windows XP, Vista, 7 or 8.
1.3 NETWORK SUPPORT

DistriView can be setup for either single-user or network access. With a network setup, any PC on a
local- or wide-area network can execute the program as long as the number of simultaneous executions
does not exceed the license limit. The network configuration is a cost-effective way to share DistriView
software among different engineers in the company.
DistriView works on networks that support the TCP/IP protocol.
1.4 SYSTEM SIZE LIMITATION

DistriView can handle power systems with up to 32,000 nodes. DistriView-100 has an artificial limit of
300 nodes per file.
SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL
2.1 INSTALLING THE WORKING MODEL

The installation of the Working Model will only take a few minutes.
1. Unzip the file you downloaded from ASPENs ftp server.
You will get a setup file named setup_wm3_dv.exe.
2. Execute the setup file to install the working model.
Follow the instructions on the screen. The working model requires
about 14 Mbytes of free space on your hard disk. The default directory is
C:\Program Files\ASPEN\WM3
3. Proceed to Section 2.2 to start the working model.
Note: When you are done with the working model, you can uninstall it
using the Add/Remove Program icon within the Control Panel.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2.2 STARTING THE WORKING MODEL
1. On the Windows desktop, click on Start, then on All Programs.
Look for a folder named DistriView Working Model. Click on the
DistriView icon within the folder to start the program.
DistriView will start, and it will open the sample file automatically. The
Main Window will look like this.
We suggest that you follow the tutorial of Section 2.8 to learn about the
capabilities of DistriView.
2.3 INSTALLING THE PRODUCTION VERSION

The instructions to install the Production version are in a separate document entitled, Getting Started with
ASPEN DistriView. An on-line version of this document is available under the Getting Started icon.
2.4 STARTING THE PRODUCTION VERSION
1. On the Windows desktop, click on Start, then on All Programs.
Look for a DistriView icon. Click on it to start the program.
You will see the Main Window when the program starts up.
2.5 FILES
This section describes all the input and output files of ASPEN DistriView. The input data files are these:
Binary data files with .DTV extension. These are binary files that contain the system parameters as
well as graphical and relay information.
Text data files with .DVT extension. These are text files that contain the network data. Most commonly,
text data files came from a data conversion program. Text data files can be imported into the program with
the File | Open Text Data File command in the Main Window and saved as DistriView binary data files.
The text data file format is described in Section 4.
Relay data files with .RYT extension. These are text files with relay data created by the Relay | Export
Relay command in the Main Window. Relay data files can be imported into DistriView using the Relay
| Import Relay command. The relay data format is described in Section 6.
Overcurrent Curve Library. This is a collection of over 40 files in a directory called the Library
Directory. The files are named after the relay manufacturer, e.g., ABB.RLY and SEL.RLY. DistriView
reads these .RLY files to get the curve parameters for overcurrent relays, fuses and reclosers. You can use
the Overcurrent Relay Editor to edit existing curves and create new curves. The path name of the Library
Directory for DistriView is stored in the Windows registry. You can change the location of this directory by
running the configuration program, CFGDV.EXE.
Note: The curves in the relay library were created by ASPEN as well as users of OneLiner and DistriView.
ASPEN collects the relay curves periodically and distributes them to all the users. ASPEN has not
verified the correctness of the relay curves. It is important for users to check these curves against the
manufacturers' specifications before applying them.

Distance Relay Library ASPEN.DRL. DistriView reads this library file to get the type names, the
method name and parameter list for distance relays. You can use the Distance Relay Editor to edit the
existing relay types and to create new types. The distance relay library must reside in the Library
Directory.
Note: It is important for users to check the distance relay models against the manufacturers' specifications
before applying them.
Reliability Class Library ASPEN.RLB. DistriView reads this library file to get typical value of
reliability parameters of lines, cables, transformers and voltage regulators. You can use any text editor to
edit the library (see APPENDIX E: RELIABILITY CLASS LIBRARY). The reliability class library
must reside in the Library Directory.
Previous Curve Collection Files with .PCC extension. These are binary files created by DistriView
when you ask to save the curve collections. Each Curve Collection File can have many collections of
curves. When you recall a previous curve collection, the program will display the curves, descriptions and
annotation in the exact position as before.
Conductor Library ASPEN.CDB. This binary data files containing parameters of various types of lines
and cables. The program reads this file when it begins execution. The conductor Library must reside in
the Library Directory.
Note: For users who are upgrading from DistriView v1: This library file replaces the Line Table File of
version 1. You must import previous Line Table types into the Conductor Library file using the File |
Import Line Table command in the Conductor Library Editor. See APPENDIX C: CONDUCTOR
LIBRARY EDITOR for more information.
DistriView generates the following files:
Report file with .TXT extension. The report files for short circuit, locked rotor and voltage drop
solutions can be outputted in the traditional text form when you invoke the Report | Solution Report
command of the Main Window and select the output to file option.
Report file with .CSV extension. The report files for bus-fault summary and voltage sag analysis are in
the CSV format which can be imported to any spreadsheet program.
Temporary files with .TMP extension and names that begin with ~DS. While it is running,
DistriView creates a number of temporary files in the root directory or in the directory specified in the
TEMP environment variable. DistriView deletes the temporary files automatically at the end of each
session. In the event the program bombs out before the end of a session, the temporary files will be left
behind on the
disk. If you see any of the temporary files on the directory when DistriView is not running, you can
reclaim the disk space by deleting them. DO NOT delete these files while DistriView is running.
Backup files with .BAK extension. When you update an existing binary data file using the File | Save or
File | Save As commands, DistriView saves the original data file under the .BAK extension. This file
serves as a backup in case you want to revert back to the original file.
Windows metafiles with .WMF or .EMF extension. When you save the screen graphics using the File |
Export One-Line command in the Main Window, or the Misc | Export Graph command in the relay-curve
windows, DistriView creates a Window Metafile or Enhanced Window Metafile with extensions .WMF
or
.EMF. These are vector graphic files that can be imported to other Windows programs, such as MS Word.
2.6 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
You need to be familiar with a few basic terms that are used throughout this manual.
Click: Quickly press and release the mouse button.
Drag: Hold down the mouse button while moving the mouse.
Double click: Click the mouse button twice in rapid succession.
Dialog box: A pop-up window used for various purposes. The picture below
illustrates several terms commonly used to describe the
different parts of a dialog box:
Message box: A simple dialog box that contains a message and one or more push
buttons.

2.7 ONE-LINE SYMBOLS
The one-line diagram symbols are labeled in the figures below using annotations.
WITH IEC TRANSFOMER SYMBOLS AND SMALL SWITCH
2.8 QUICK TUTORIAL
This tutorial is designed to acquaint new users with the basic functions of DistriView. We assume you
have installed DistriView (Section 2.1 or 2.3) and started the program (Section 2.2 or 2.4). If not, do so
now. This tutorial will take about an hour to complete.
OPENING A BINARY DATA FILE
A 15-node system is used in most of this tutorial. If you are using the Working Model, you can skip this
step and proceed to the next topic, Moving Symbols on the One-Line Diagram because the sample file
is already opened. Otherwise, please follow these steps to open the binary data file.
1. Select the File | Open Binary Data File command.
A dialog box will appear asking you which file to open.
2. Open the file SAMPLE1.DTV as follows.

Click once on the file name 'SAMPLE1.DTV' in the list box. The name
will appear in the File Name edit box. Press Open.
The dialog box will disappear. After a brief pause, the one-line diagram
of the 15-node system will appear in the Main Window.
Note: See Section 2.7 if you are unsure of the meanings of the various symbols.

MOVING SYMBOLS ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM
You can manipulate the symbols on the one-line diagram by dragging them with the mouse. You never have to
type in x-y coordinates. Try it now!
Note: Dragging means to first click the left mouse button on the symbol you want to move and then move
the mouse while you continue to hold down the mouse button. When you release the mouse button, the move is
completed.
1. Move a distribution line, transformer, or voltage regulator by
dragging the symbol.
The horizontal segments can be moved vertically and vertical
segments can be moved horizontally. Segments attached to a bus are
constrained by the extent of the bus symbol.
2. Move a bus by dragging the bus symbol.
The bus symbol can be moved anywhere. The bus name and all the
equipment attached to the bus will automatically move with the bus.
3. Move a bus name by dragging the name.
The bus name will be replaced by a rectangle while it is being moved.
The bus name can only be moved within a certain distance from the bus
symbol.
4. Move a generator, load, capacitor or grounding bank by dragging
the symbol.
If the symbol is on a horizontal or vertical bus bar, you can move the
symbol along the bus bar. You can also flip the symbol over to the other
side of the bus bar.
If the symbol is on a dot-shaped bus, you can rotate it in 90-degree
increments.
GETTING AROUND
In most cases, your computer monitor can display only a portion of your system's one-line diagram. DistriView
has several features that let you navigate from one part of the system to another:
Find Bus: Center the viewport on the bus you are seeking. This can
be accomplished by using either the bus name or number.
Scroll: Move the viewport horizontally or vertically using
the scrollbars.
Panning: Move the viewport with the mouse.
Zoom: Show the one-line diagram with different magnifications.
Split Screen: View one-line diagram in two different panes at the
same time.
These features are described in the following.
FINDING A BUS BY NAME:
1. Press the letter 'F' on the keyboard.
'F' is the accelerator key for the View | Find Bus By Name command.
You can find a complete list of accelerator keys in Section 9.5.
A dialog box will appear showing an alphabetical listing of all the buses
in the network.
2. Click on the name 1260B 12kV 9 in the list box.

The number 9 is an optional bus number.
3. Click on the "OK" button.
The selected bus will appear at the center of the screen. Note the big
green arrow next to the bus. You can remove the arrow by clicking the
mouse on any empty spot on the one-line diagram.
Note: There is a similar command to locate a bus by its number. Press
the letter N on the keyboard to start.
SCROLLING TO VIEW DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF THE NETWORK:
1. Scroll the one-line diagram vertically and horizontally by clicking
the mouse on the scroll bars of the window or by dragging the scroll
bar button.
Note: If the network disappears, use the Find Bus command mentioned
above to get reoriented.
PANNING THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Drag the mouse with the <Alt> key held down. The mouse cursor
will turn into a hand-shape icon during the panning operation.
Note: If your mouse has a wheel, you can pan the one-line diagram by
dragging the mouse with the wheel pressed down.
VIEWING THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM UNDER DIFFERENT MAGNIFICATIONS:
1. Change the zoom setting by moving the zoom slider bar on the right
side of the toolbar.
The one-line diagram will be shown in different magnifications as you

change the zoom setting.
Move the zoom slider bar to the right to get a birds-eye view.

ZOOM IN ON AN AREA:
1. Trace a rectangle with the right mouse button held down. Release
the mouse button.
A red dotted rectangle and a floating menu will appear, like this.
2. Click on the "Zoom In" command in the floating menu.

The screen will show a detailed view of the feeder that was enclosed in
the dotted rectangle.
USING THE SPLIT SCREEN OPTION:
You can split the Main Window into two panes, side by side. The panes have independent zoom and scroll
controls, and may display different quantities. You can edit the one-line in either pane. The other pane is updated
automatically. The split window improves the ease of use for certain applications: When you are coordinating the
relays at two ends of a branch, you can position the split window to see what is happening at both ends at the
same time. You can also view in the two panes the fault currents and relay operating times at the same time. The
possibilities are endless.
1. Move the arrow cursor over to the left side of the view port until it
turns into two double bars with arrows pointing outward, as shown
below.
2. Now drag the double bars to the center of the screen.

The viewport will now be split into two panes. The active pane will
have a yellow tint at the bottom of the screen.
3. Close the left pane by dragging the double bars back to the left edge
of the window.

REVIEWING AND EDITING EQUIPMENT PARAMETERS
You can review and edit the parameters of any piece of equipment by pointing and clicking with the
mouse. The procedure below is for a 3-phase line. The same procedure can be used to review and edit
other types of equipment, except for relays (which will be covered next).
1. Double click the LEFT mouse button on the distribution line
between 1201BusA and 1250 as indicated by the arrow cursor.
The line symbol will turn dotted red. A dialog box for this line will
appear.
2. Examine the distribution line parameters.

You can enter the impedances of the lines using one of three methods:
1. Manual: You will enter the overall R, X, and B manually.
2. Predefined 'Constructions': The line parameters will be
calculated using a construction for which the geometry of the
phase and neutral conductors has been predefined. You will
enter only the conductor types and the line length.
3. Line Table: Select a line-table entry for which the R, X, and B per
unit length have been predefined. You will enter only the line
length.
Notice that the Manual' option within the 'Impedances' group box is selected
for this line.
Click on the 'Parameters' tab at the top of the dialog box to see details
of the line-table type.
The per-unit values of positive- and zero-sequence impedance and shunt

susceptance of the line are shown in this dialog box.
Click on the 'General' tab at the top of the dialog box to return
to the top page.
3. Click on the edit load button .
A dialog box will show you the section loads, or customer loads that are
distributed over the length of the line. You can model the load as members
of four load groups. (You can change the name and composition of the
load groups, as well as the allocation method, with the Network | Edit Load
Group command.)

Large loads should be modeled as "Spot Loads" attached to nodes, and
not to lines. More on this later.
Click on Cancel to close the Section Load dialog box.
4. Click on the "Cancel" button to close the 3-Phase Line dialog
box without saving the changes.
The dialog box will disappear.
VIEWING AND EDITING PARAMETERS OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
You can model relays, fuses, reclosers, sectionalizers and CCOC devices in DistriView. You can review and edit the
parameters of these devices by pointing and clicking with the mouse.
1. Click the right mouse button on the breaker/relay group below the
distribution node labeled 1201BusA as indicated by the arrow cursor.
The symbol for a breaker/relay group is a small rectangle that looks
like the traditional circuit breaker symbol. When you click the right
mouse button on the breaker/relay group symbol, it will turn dotted
red, and a floating menu will appear.
2. Click on the Properties command in the floating menu.

A dialog box will appear listing the breaker parameters and a list of
relays in this location which we call a "breaker/relay group".

There are two relays in this group: a phase overcurrent relay and a
ground overcurrent relay. In general, you can have any number of
overcurrent relays and distance relays in a breaker/relay group.
3. Select the 1201/51 phase relay to be edited.
Click once on "OC Phase 1201/51" in the list box. Press Edit.
A dialog box with the parameters for this relay will appear.
Press Help to see the on-line help. Close on-line help when done.
Click on the "Cancel" button to close the Relay dialog box.
4. Click on the "Done" button to close the Breaker/ Relays Info dialog box.
5. Double-click the left mouse button on the fuse below the substation
bus, NW Sub. 69 kV as shown by the arrow cursor.
A dialog box with the fuse parameters will appear.
For more information on the fuse parameters, click on the Help button.
Click on the "Cancel" button to close the fuse dialog box.
6. Double click the left mouse button on the recloser below the
node, 1201BusB 12 kV as shown by the arrow cursor.
A dialog box with the recloser parameters will appear. The recloser has a
phase and a ground unit, each of which has two fast operations and two
slow operations.
For more information on the recloser parameters, press the Help button.

Click on the "Cancel" button to close the recloser dialog box.
The recloser dialog box will disappear.
DELETING AND RESTORING EQUIPMENT
You can delete any piece of equipment by pointing and clicking with the mouse. The procedure below is for a
3- phase line. Similar procedures work for other types of equipment.
DELETING A LINE:
1. Click the right mouse button on the 3-phase line between 1201BusA
and 1250.
The line symbol will become dotted red, and a floating menu will appear.
2. Click on the Delete command in the floating menu.

A message box will appear asking you to confirm the deletion.
3. Click on the "OK" button in the message box.

The selected line will disappear from the one-line diagram. DistriView
will automatically update the system model.
RESTORING A DELETED LINE WITH THE UNDO COMMAND:
1. Select the Tools | Undo Delete Line command.
Note: The name of the Undo command changes depending on what the
program logic is capable of undoing next.
The line you deleted will reappear on the one-line diagram. DistriView
will update the system model automatically.
At any time, DistriView lets undo up to the last 10 menu commands and
graphical operations (such as moving a bus). The shortcut to the Undo
command is <Ctrl>Z.

ADDING A 3-PHASE LINE:
You will now add a new 3-phase line using the drag-and-drop method. For this operation, you will
need the Device Palette, which looks like this:
1. If you cannot see the Device Palette, press the button on the toolbar
to bring it up.
2. Click the New 3-phase line button on the Device Palette.
The cursor will change into a cross with a very small line symbol next
to it. This special cursor alerts you that you are now in the add line
mode.
3. Drag the mouse with the left mouse button starting on the bar of node
1201BusA. Move the mouse downward about an inch (2.5 cm) and
release the mouse over an empty spot in the one-line diagram.
While you are dragging the mouse, you will see a new line with one end
attached to bus 1201BusA and the other end moving with the cursor.
See picture below.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the data of the new line when
you release the mouse button. In this example you will use the
construction method for entering the line parameters. A
construction defines the geometry of the conductors. (You can define
the constructions using an auxiliary program called Conductor Library
Editor. See APPENDIX C: CONDUCTOR LIBRARY EDITOR
for more information.) DistriView will calculate the electrical
parameters of the line after you have specified (1) the construction
name, (2) the length of the line, and (3) the wire for each of the phases
and the neutral conductor.
3. Enter data in the General page of the line dialog box.
Enter "1" for the circuit ID.
Enter "1.0" in the edit box labeled 'Length'.
Select mi as the unit of length.
Click on the radio button labeled "Construction" in the 'Impedances'
group box.
The dialog box should look something like this.
3. Enter the construction parameters.

Click on the 'Parameters' tab at the top of the dialog box.
Click on the Name= drop-down list box and select 'LINE:Constr1'.
Click on "Fill" to instruct the program to the same wire for the
remaining conductors.

Note: You can actually use different wires for different phases.
You will select a different wire for the neutral.
Click on the button labeled >> to the right of the 'Neutral' drop-
down list box.
A dialog box will appear with a list of wires in the Conductor Library.
Select the STEELUTL .360 7/0 3/8 10A' conductor and click on
"OK".
Note: The last entry in the list box is NO_Neutral, which is for lines
with no neutral wire.
The Parameters page of the line dialog box should look like this.
Click on the "OK" button to finish creating the new 3-phase line.
4. Exit the add line mode by press the <Esc> key on the keyboard.
The mouse cursor will return to the normal arrow pointer.
CLOSE AND RE-OPEN THE BINARY DATA FILE:
This step ensures that you will start with a clean slate as we explore the next topic: short circuit simulation.
1. Close the file.
Select the File | Close command.
A dialog box will appear asking you whether you want to save changes.
Click on "No".
The current 15-bus example file will close. The Main Window of
DistriView will show the word ASPEN on a gray background.
2. Re-Open the example file using the recent-files-list feature of
DistriView.
Click on the File menu and select the item
1: C:\ASPENDV07\SAMPLE1 just above the Exit command.
After a very brief pause, the Main Window will again show the one-line
diagram of the 15-bus example system.

SIMULATING A SHORT CIRCUIT
The following instructions show you how to simulate a short circuit (or fault) at a node.
1. Click the right mouse button on the node 1250.
The symbol will turn dotted red, and a floating menu will appear.
2. Click on the Specify Fault command in the floating menu.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the faults to be simulated.
Note the five check boxes for the fault types:

3LG Ungrounded: Three phase fault but not grounded.
3LG: Three-phase fault to ground.
1LG: Single-line-to-ground fault.
2LG: Two-phase-to-ground fault. L-
L: Line-to-line fault.
The radio buttons to the right of these check boxes let you select with
the exception of the 3-phase faults which phase or phases are to be
short-circuited.
3. Leave the options at their default settings to simulate a single-line-
to- ground fault on phase a.
Click on "Simulate".
After a very brief pause, you will see the solution on the screen, and a
line that reads "1LG (A) Bus fault on: 1250 12kV" in the status area
at the very bottom of the Main Window.
The quantities being displayed are the phase a voltages and currents.
The bus voltages (in per-unit times 120 volts) are shown directly beneath
the bus name and nominal kV. The branch currents in amperes are
shown at the ends of the branch symbols. Both the voltage and the
current are shown as complex numbers in polar coordinates. The letter
'A' separates the magnitude on the left from the phase angle (in degrees)
on the right and at the same time identifies the value as being that of
phase 'a'.
The total fault current, 2867 amperes, is shown to the right of the red X.
Note: You can direct the program to show the bus voltages in kV or in
per-unit by pressing the button on the toolbar.
4. View other solution quantities by pressing the toolbar buttons. Try it!
Click on the button 0 to see the neutral currents (3Io) and voltages
(Vo).
Click on the button + to see the positive-sequence voltages and
currents.
Click on the button - to see the negative-sequence voltages and
currents.
Click on the button a, b or c to see the phase voltages and
currents.
Click on the clock button to see the relay operating time. See
picture below.

The operating time of the protective devices is displayed adjacent to
the device symbols. The value of 9999 is displayed when a device
does not operate. The operating time in seconds is preceded by the
symbol:
CC: if it is from a compounded curve overcurrent
device. FU: if it is from a fuse.
OG: if it is from an overcurrent ground
relay. OP: if it is from an overcurrent phase relay.
ZGx: if it is from a distance ground relay, where x is the
zone. ZPx: if it is from a distance phase relay, where x is
the zone. RP: if it is from the phase unit of a recloser.
RG: if it is from the ground unit of a recloser.
In this picture you can see the ground relay at 1201BusA operates
at
0.19 seconds. If this relay does not open the circuit breaker, the fuses
on the high side of the transformers will operate at 0.30 seconds.
USING THE PHASOR PROBE
You can view the current and voltage phasors at any location with the Phasor Probe.
1. Click the right mouse button on the transformer connecting 1201BusA
to the substation NW Sub. 69 kV.
The transformer will become highlighted, and a floating menu will appear.
Click on the View Phasors command in the floating menu.

A pop-up window will show you the voltage and current phasors at the
low-voltage terminal of the transformer.
Note the prominent phase-a current phasor. The screen also shows
apparent impedance to the fault seen from this point on the feeder.

2. Click on the Show Opposite Bus button near the bottom.
The phasors at the 69 kV end of the selected transformer will appear.
3. Click on the "Done" button to close the phasor dialog box.
DISPLAYING RELAY, FUSE AND RECLOSER CURVES

DistriView lets you draw the relay, fuse and recloser curves on a standard log-log plot. It will also display
the relay operating times and shift the curves appropriately.
1. Click the right mouse button on the breaker/relay group on the
line between 1201BusA and 1250 as indicated by the arrow cursor.
A floating menu will appear.
2. Click on the View Relay Curves command in the floating menu.

A dialog box will appear asking you to select a relay to be displayed.
3. Click on the entry "OC Ground relay 1201/50" in the list box.
Click on the "OK" button.
The Curves Window will appear showing the characteristics of the
selected relay. A summary of the relay parameters is shown to the right
of the plot.
If you cannot see the relay parameters, make the window narrow.
This will cause the program to resize the plot to fit the window,
effectively changing the zoom setting.
If the text is too small or too big, you can change the font size by
executing the Misc | Options command on this window.
4. Add one more curves to this plot.

Select the Add | Relay Curves in Vicinity command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the curves to be added.

The list box contains the relays, fuses and recloser that are in the vicinity
of the first relay being displayed.
With the mouse, select the device NW69 Fuse1 as shown.
Click on OK.
The dialog box will disappear. An additional fuse curve will appear
on the plot. The parameters of the added fuse are drawn to the right of
the curves.
All the curves are plotted in time versus primary current. The program has not
shifted the curves at this point, even though the fuse and the relays are on
different voltage levels. We are ready to display the relay operations.
5. Display the curves for a fault.
Select the Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the fault of interest. There
is only one fault in this case, and it is already highlighted.
Under Horizontal Shift, select the most commonly used option:
Align curves with total fault current. DistriView will not shift the relay
curve because the device is seeing the total fault current. The fuse,
however, will be shifted so that it can be viewed on the same basis as the
relay. The shifting algorithm automatically takes into account the
transformers turn ratio (69 kV to 12 kV) and the winding configuration
(delta-wye).
Press the Display button.
The plot will be updated for the single-line-to-ground fault. The fault
description is shown below the parameter captions. The program will also
display in each device's caption box the operating current and trip time.
6. With the mouse, tidy up the plot by moving the device captions and
the fault description away from the curves.

7. Speed up the ground relay.
Double click the left mouse button on the caption of the ground relay.
The dialog box of the ground relay will appear.
Change the time dial from 1.0 to 0.73.
Click OK.
The updated curves should look like this. Note the ground-relay curve has
moved downward from 0.189s to 0.128s because of the lower time dial
setting.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL 49
TRIAL ADJUSTMENT OF OVERCURRENT RELAYS
DistriView lets you experiment with the time-dial setting to see its effects on the relay's time delay
without actually changing the relay parameters. Once you have the desired time dial setting you can
direct the program to implement it.
In this example we will adjust the time-dial setting of the ground relay to achieve a time delay of exactly
1.101 seconds.
1. Click the right mouse button on the caption of the ground relay.
A floating menu will appear when you release the button.
Click on "Relay Trial Adjustment" in the floating
menu.
A dialog box will appear.
The relay type and the relay current are shown at the top of the
dialog box. The relay operating time in seconds (0.128s) is shown
inside the box labeled "Operating Time".
The vertical scroll bar allows you to vary the time-dial setting and see
the resulting change in time delay.
Using the mouse, click on the up arrow of the vertical scroll bar to
increase the time dial setting.
As you click on the vertical scroll bar, the time dial value, as well as
the relay's time delay, will change.
Continue changing the time dial setting until the operating time is
exactly 0.1 seconds, as shown below.
4. Click on "Apply It" to implement the new time dial setting.
The dialog box will disappear and the ground relays curve will be
redrawn. The new operating time of the relay should read 0.101
seconds.
GETTING RELAY TEST VALUES

After changing the settings of a relay, the program gives you the test values that are necessary to set the
relay in the field or in the relay shop. We will use the ground relay again in the following.
1. Click the right mouse button on the caption of the ground relay.
A floating menu will appear when you release the button.
2. Click on "Show Relay Test Values" in the floating menu.

The TTY Window will appear with a table of test values. This table can
be printed or copied to the Windows clipboard.
Click on TTY | Close Window to close the TTY Window.

CHECKING THE FUSE AGAINST THE TRANSFORMER INRUSH AND DAMAGE CURVES
1. Click the right mouse button on the caption for the fuse. When
the floating menu appears, select Add Transformer Damage
Curve
A dialog box will appear. The Automatic feature is already selected.
2. Press OK.
The damage curve and the inrush curve will appear.
It is clear in this case that the fuse size has to increase slightly to clear the
inrush curve.
3. Close the Curves Window.
The Curves Window will disappear. You are back to the Main Window
with the one-line diagram.

GENERATING AN ALL-BUS FAULT SOLUTION
The Fault All Buses command automatically simulates all possible bus faults in a feeder and display the
maximum fault currents on the one-line diagram.
1. Select the S_Ckt | Fault All Buses command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the various options.
2. Select the feeder of interest.

Select "NW Sub 69 kV" in the drop down list box.
Leave all other options unchanged.
3. Click on "Simulate" to start the solution process.
After a brief pause, the TTY Window will appear with a table of fault
currents, X/R ratios and Thevenin impedances. Each row of this table is
for a node or a substation bus.
4. Click on TTY | Close Window to close the TTY Window.
When the TTY Window disappears, you will the Main Window with a
graphical depiction of the All Bus Fault solution. Note that there are four
fault currents next to each of the nodes.
3LG: The 3-phase fault current.
2LG: The maximum 2-line-to-ground fault current.
1LG: The maximum single-line-to-ground fault
current. L-L: The maximum line-to-line fault current.
All the currents are in amperes.
5. Show the bus-fault current profile.

Scroll the viewport until you can see the node 1251C 12kV.
Right click on node 1251C. Select View All-Bus-Fault Current
Profile as shown below.

The profile window will appear showing bus-fault current on every
node between selected node and the substation bus. The current for
three fault types are plotted: 3-phase fault, single-line-to-ground fault,
and line-to- line fault.
6. Close the Profile Window.

Click on the System Menu at the upper left corner. Select Close.
PERFORMING A LOCKED-ROTOR STUDY
The locked-rotor condition simulates the first moment when a large single- or 3-phase induction motor is
energized and before its rotor begins to rotate.
1. Optional: Click on View | Plain 1-Line to clear the all-bus-fault results.
2. Click the right mouse button on the 3-phase induction motor on the
node 1250 12kV. Select the Simulate Locked Rotor command in the
floating menu, as shown below.
3. Click on the Simulate Locked Rotor command in the floating menu.

The Locked-Rotor Simulation dialog box will appear.
Leave all the options unchanged. Press Simulate.

After a brief pause, the program will show the locked-rotor solution on
the one-line diagram.

The quantities shown initially are the phase a voltage and currents. The
green halos highlight nodes with voltage below a threshold. (You can set
this using the command S_Ckt | Short Circuit and Locked Rotor
Options.) You can view the other quantities the same way as for short
circuit solutions. Make a mental note of the voltage drop at the bus 1250,
which is 0.827 per unit.
4. Change the starting method.
Double click the left mouse button on the same induction machine.
The induction machine dialog box will appear.
Click on drop-down list box in the Starting Method group and

change the starting method from Direct to Wye-delta switch.
Click on OK to close the induction machine dialog box.
4. Simulate the locked-rotor condition again.
Click the right mouse button on the same induction machine.
When the floating menu appears, select the Simulate Locked Rotor
command.
After a brief pause, you will see the locked-rotor solution for the new starting
method. Note the voltage, 0.939 per-unit at the bus 1250 is higher than the
previous result of 0.827 per-unit.

SIMULATING DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
FAULTS
Distribution Transformer refers to the single-phase, center-tapped transformer that is commonly used
in North America to supply electricity to a house. DistriView lets you simulate faults on the low-voltage
side of a distribution transformer without actually creating a distribution transformer on the one-line
diagram.
1. Select the high-side node.
Click the right mouse button on the bus 1201BusB as shown below.
When the floating menu appears, click on Simulate Distribution
Transformer Fault.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the
distribution transformer and the fault type.
2. Leave all the options and parameters unchanged.

The values shown is for a 50 kVA distribution transformer that is connected
between phase a and neutral on the high side and supplies 120 volts between
the line and the center-tapped neutral on the low side.
Press OK to begin simulation.
The program will show you the result of this simulation on the TTY
Window. In this example, the fault current is almost 11,000 amperes.
PERFOMING A VOLTAGE DROP STUDY
The following instructions show you how to obtain a voltage drop solution.
1. Press the button on the Main Windows toolbar.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the various options and
solution parameters.
2. Select "NW Sub 69 kV" in the drop-down list box.

3. Leave all the other options and parameters unchanged. Press OK to
start the solution process.
After a brief pause, you will see the voltage drop solution on the screen.

The quantities being shown include the bus voltages, the kW and
kVAR flows, generator outputs, and power consumed by loads and
capacitor banks. The arrows on the branches indicate the direction of
the real and reactive power flow.
The total feeder losses are shown in the status bar at the very bottom
of the Main Window.
DistriView automatically highlights buses with abnormal voltages: over-
voltage buses are overlaid with red halos, and under-voltage buses with
green halos.
The program also highlights overloaded branches by displaying their
kW and kVAR flows in red.
3. Change the operating condition as follows.
Click the right mouse button on the three-way switch connected
to node 1201BusB 12kV.
When the floating menu appears, select the Toggle command.
4. Perform the voltage drop study again.
Press the button on the Main Windows

toolbar.
When the Voltage-Drop-Simulation dialog box appears, click on
OK.
DistriView will display the voltage drop solution on the one-line diagram.
Note in this case we have combined the feeders by closing the switch,
and two different substation buses are feeding the combined feeder.

DISPLAYING THE VOLTAGE PROFILE FOR A FEEDER
The Voltage Profile command in the Main Window shows an x-y plot of the voltage magnitude along
a feeder. The following instructions show you how to display the voltage profile for the distribution
node 1251AB and the substation bus.
1. Click the right mouse button on the node 1251AB, as indicated by
the arrow cursor below.
The distribution node symbol will turn dotted red. A floating menu
will appear when you release the button.
2. Select the Voltage Profile command in the floating menu.
The profile window will appear.
The plot shows graphically how the voltage magnitude varies
between selected node 1251AB and the nearest substation bus, NW
Sub 69kV. Note the three phases are plotted separately in different
colors.
The graph shows the line-to-neutral voltages by default. You can direct
the computer to show the line-to-line voltages by executing the Misc |
Preferences command on the menu bar of this Profile Window.
Drag the caption with the words Phase A, Phase B and Phase C with
the mouse and move it to the lower right corner.
3. Click on the System Menu at the upper left corner. Select Close to
close the Profile Window.
DISPLAYING LOSSES AND PHASE QUANTITIES

In addition to displaying the flow of real and reactive power, DistriView can show you on the one-line
diagram the phase voltages and currents, the sequence voltage and currents, and the kW and kVAR
losses.
1. View other solution quantities by pressing the toolbar buttons. Try it!
Click on the button P to see the kW and KVAR flows.

Click on the button L to see the kW and KVAR losses.
Click on the button 0 to see the neutral currents (3Io) and voltages
(Vo).
Click on the button + to see the positive-sequence voltages and
currents.
Click on the button - to see the negative-sequence voltages and
currents.
Click on the button a, b or c to see the phase voltages and
currents.

2. Click on the button on the toolbar to change various display options.
This dialog box will appear. You can specify the over- and under-
voltage thresholds, how the bus voltages are displayed, etc.
3. Click on OK to close the dialog box.
CREATING A VOLTAGE DROP REPORTS IN TEXT

You can get a report of the voltage-drop study in text. You can view it on the screen or send it to the
printer. You can also save text reports to a file for later viewing or editing.
1. Select the Report | Solution command to get a text output of the
voltage drop solution.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the information you want to
include in the report.
2. Click on the "Style 1" radio button if it is not already selected.
Press the "To TTY" button to create a report that you can see on the
TTY Window.
Another dialog box will ask you whether you want to limit the coverage
to an area or to within certain number of tiers from a selected node.
Click on "OK" to select all the buses in the feeder.

A text report will appear in the TTY Window.
4. Select the Menu | Close Window command to close the TTY Window.
PERFOMING A RELIABILITY STUDY

The following instructions show you how to calculate reliability of a distribution feeder.
1. Click on View | Equipment Reliability Parameters
The program will display failure rate (FF), percent momentary faults
(MF) and mean restoration time (MRT) of lines, cables and other feeder
equipment on the single line diagram.

2. Click on Reliability | Feeder Reliability Report
Make selections as shown in picture above. Click on OK.

The reliability report will be displayed in the TTY window.
Note that the average interruption frequency on this feeder is
0.00016 times/kVA/year.
3. Add protective device to the feeder to improve reliability.
Right click on the line between 1201BusB and 1249B as shown in the
picture below.
Select Protective device | New recloser in the floating menu.
A recloser properties dialog box will appear.

Enter all recloser parameters as shown above. Click on OK to close
the dialog box.
The new recloser will be displayed on the single line diagram.
2. Click on Reliability | Feeder Reliability Report

A new reliability report will appear.
Note the improved feeder average interruption frequency of 0.00006
times/kVA/yr because of the additional protective device on the feeder.
PERFOMING A HARMONIC STUDY
The following instructions show you how to analyze the impact of harmonic-producing equipment on the
distribution feeder.
1. Model harmonic spectrum from induction motor at BUS10.
Double click on the induction motor at BUS10. The induction motor
properties dialog will appear.
Click on Add Harmonic Current Source.

The Harmonic Current Source Info dialog box will appear.

Enter source name.
Click on Recall. A File Open dialog will appear asking you to enter CSV
file with harmonic spectrum. Select file 6pulse.csv that came with
DistriView. The screen should look like above picture.
Click on OK to close the dialog box. Click OK again to save
harmonic source data to the induction motor.
The induction motor symbol on the one-line diagram will now be
displayed with an H next to it to indicate that the motor has a harmonic
source attached.
2. Select Harmonic | Solve Harmonic Load Flow.

Select NE_Sub. 69kV feeder and click on OK to start harmonic load
flow solution.
When the solution is complete, total harmonic distortion result will be
displayed on the 1-line
We can see from the result that the harmonic from the induction motor
at Bus 10 causes distortion in the current and voltage at the local bus.
However voltage and current at the rest of the feeder are not
significantly affected.
Right click on the line between Bus 10 and 1201Bus B. Select
Harmonic Probe from the popup menu.
The harmonic probe window will appear showing spectrum of harmonic
current in the selected line.

74 Contents DistriView Version 10
EXIT DistriView
This ends the quick tutorial for DistriView. The remaining instructions will take you back to the Windows
desktop.
1. Select the File | Exit command.
A dialog box will appear asking you whether you want to save the
changes.
Click on the "No" button.

DistriView will close and you will be back on the Windows desktop.
TO EXPLORE FURTHER
This tutorial covered only a small subset of the commands in DistriView. You can find a detailed
description of all the commands in the Section 3. If you have the Working Model, you can browse through
Section 3 with the on-line help (Help | DistriView Help Contents command in the Main Window).
DistriView comes with a relay library that contains the time-current characteristics of overcurrent
relays, fuses and reclosers. There are over 3000 devices in this library, and the list is growing. To see
an extensive list of curves available, select the Help | List of Overcurrent Devices command icon in
DistriViews Main Window.
You can find a tutorial for the Overcurrent Relay Editor and the Distance Relay Editor in Section 2 of
their respective User's Manuals. (Not included in the Working Model.)

SECTION 3 COMMAND REFERENCE
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section documents the commands in the Main Window, the Curves Window, the DS Relays Window,
the TTY Window and the Profile Window.
Main Window Commands

The Main Window displays the one-line diagram of the network. The commands in the Main Window are
described in Section 3.2.
Curves Window Commands

The Curves Window displays the characteristics of overcurrent relays, fuses and reclosers. The
commands available in this window are described in Section 3.3.
DS Relays Window Commands

The DS Relays Window displays the characteristics of distance relays. . The commands available in this
window are described in Section 3.4.
TTY Window Commands

The TTY Window displays the program outputs in the traditional text form. The commands in the TTY
Window are described in Section 3.5.
Profile Window Commands

The Profile Window displays voltage or current profile along the a section of the feeder. The commands
in the TTY Window are described in Section 3.6.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 3 COMMAND REFERENCE

3.2 MAIN WINDOW COMMANDS
The Main Window is initially gray when the program begins execution. DistriView shows the one-line
diagram of the power system in the Main Window after a binary data file has been opened or created. The
name of the binary data file is shown in the caption area. There is a status bar at the bottom of the window.
A potion of the status bar shows the system base MVA and frequency. (The frequency comes from the
Conductor Library that is being reference.) The rightmost potion of the status bar displays the fault
description when a short-circuit solution is being shown. The status bar displays the total loses when a
voltage drop solution is being shown.
SPLIT SCREEN OPERATION
You can split the main window into two panes by dragging the thick vertical line on the left side of the
window. The two panes have independent zoom and scroll controls. The zoom commands you issue
apply to the active pane, which is indicated by a thin yellow bar at the bottom. The two panes may
display different quantities: you may have the system impedance on one pane and the short-circuit
solution on the other, for example. You can edit the one-line in either pane. The other pane is updated
automatically.
ZOOM SLIDER
A zoom slider on the toolbar controls the zoom setting. The zoom commands you issue will affect only
the active pane, which is indicated by a thin yellow bar at the very bottom. You can make a pane active
by clicking the mouse on it.
MAIN TOOLBAR
There is a toolbar immediately below the menus.
The 27 icons on the toolbar are shortcuts to the following frequently used commands:
File | New
File | Open Binary Data File
File | Save
Tools | Data Browser
View | Go to | Upstream Node
View | Go to | Downstream Node
View | Go to | Sibling Branch
View | Go to | Nearest Substation
V_Drop | Solve Voltage Drop
V_Drop | View Voltage Drop Solution on 1-Line
View | Real and Reactive Power
View | Solution | Losses
V_Drop | Solution Browser
View | Solution | Neutral Quantities
View | Solution | Positive Sequence Quantities
View | Solution | Negative Sequence Quantities
View | Solution | Phase A Quantities
View | Solution | Phase B Quantities
View | Solution | Phase C Quantities
View | Solution | Relay Operating Time
S_Ckt | Solve Short Circuit
S_Ckt | View Short Circuit or Locked Rotor Solution on 1-Line
View | Show Previous Fault
View | Show Next Fault
View | Print or Save Solution Report
View | Relay Curves
V_Drop | Voltage Profile
View | TTY Window
View | Device Palette
File | Print One-Line Diagram
Help | About ASPEN DistriView
DEVICE PALETTE
The Device Palette and the drag-drop model building technique make the task of constructing DistriView
one-line diagram models intuitive and effortless. User can add a new object to the diagram by simply
selecting it the Palette with the mouse and dropping it on the one-line diagram.
You can show or hide the Palette by clicking on the Device Palette button on the toolbar.
Modal operation:
Once you selected an object type in the Device Palette, the program goes into the Add Object mode.
You can add new objects of the selected type and perform a limited set of related commands. To return to
the normal modeless state, click on the Pointer object in the Device Palette or press the Escape <Esc> key.
General drag-and-drop techniques:
To add a node or an annotation: Drop the object on an empty spot in the one-line diagram.
To add a single-terminal object such as a generator, shunt, spot load, grounding bank or harmonic current
source: Drop the object onto an existing node. Alternatively you can drop the object on an empty spot.
DistriView will create a new node with the object attached.
To add a new branch such as a line, transformer, voltage regulator or switch, press the mouse button to
anchor the first end of the branch. Drag the mouse to trace the branch, and release the mouse button when
you reach the desired end position. If you click the mouse in the vicinity of a node at the beginning or end
of the mouse drag, the program will attach the new branch to those buses. Otherwise, DistriView will
create new buses at the branch ends.
To create a 3-winding transformer, follow the same direction for two-terminal branches to place the first
two buses. The program will create the tertiary bus automatically at a position between the first two
terminals. The tertiary node is initially not connected to any existing bus, but you can easily merge it with
any existing node of the same nominal kV.

The method for creating a 3-way switch is similar to that for a 3-winding transformer.
To paste an object from the clipboard, click first on the Paste button on the palette, then use the
technique described above to place the pasted object on the 1-line.
Advanced drag-and-drop techniques:
To add a tap node in the middle of a line: Drop the bus object on an existing line.
To add a switch in series with a branch: Drop the switch object on one end of an existing branch.
Main Window
FILE MENU
NEW COMMAND
The New command lets you create a new binary data file. A binary file contains the network and
protective-device data, as well as graphical information needed for display.
TO CREATE A NEW BINARY DATA FILE:
1. Select the File | New command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the system base MVA.
2. Change the system base MVA if needed.

Click on the "OK" button to close the dialog box.
The screen will turn to a white background with nothing on it. You can
enter buses and branches using commands under the Network | New
menu. Alternatively, you can drag and drop new devices onto the one-
line diagram using the Device Palette.
The new file is named "untitled" until you save it.

Main Window
FILE MENU
OPEN BINARY DATA FILE COMMAND
The Open Binary Data File command opens an existing binary data file for editing and
simulation. TO OPEN AN EXISTING BINARY DATA FILE:
1. Select the File | Open Binary Data File command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the binary data file
to open.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the name
of the binary data file.
Press OK.
After a very brief pause, the Main Window will display the one-line
diagram of the selected binary data file. The file name is shown in the
title bar of the Main Window.
The program locks the binary file you open with an "exclusive write"
privilege until you close the file or exit the program. When another user
attempts to open the same file, DistriView will warn him or her that the
file is locked and can be opened for "read only".
Note: A read-only file can be saved only under another file name with
the File | Save As command.
Main Window
FILE MENU
OPEN ONELINER FILE COMMAND
The Open OneLiner File command opens a binary data file (with extension .OLR) that was created with
ASPEN OneLiner. With few exceptions, this command will read in the network, relay and graphical data
from OneLiner.
TO OPEN A ONELINER BINARY DATA FILE:
1. Select the File | Open OneLiner File command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the binary data
file (.OLR) that was created by ASPEN OneLiner.
of the OneLiner file.
After a short time, the one-line diagram will appear on the Main
Window. DistriView gives the name untitled to the new network until
you save it to a DistriView binary data file.
The following objects in a OneLiner file are not converted: phase shifters,
MOV-protected series capacitors, and zero-sequence mutual coupling.
Also, any line with a length of zero is given a default length of 1.
DistriView will alert you to these omissions and fix-ups with a message
box.
DistriView works best when there is a substation bus for each feeder.
There are no substation bus objects in OneLiner. We suggest you
convert one or more generators in the network to substation buses using
the Network | Convert | Node to Substation Bus command.

Main Window
FILE MENU
OPEN TEXT DATA FILE COMMAND
The Open Text Data File Command reads in a text data file that contains the data of a distribution
network. In most cases, the text data file is the result of a data conversion from a foreign data format. A
DistriView text data file has the file extension of .dtv.
The text data format is described in SECTION 4 NETWORK DATA
FORMAT. TO OPEN A TEXT DATA FILE:
1. Select the File | Open Text Data File command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the text data file to
open.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to select the text data
file. Click on the "OK" button.
If DistriView finds any data errors, it posts the error and warning
messages in the TTY Window. The TTY Window will open
automatically.
If one or more nodes have non-zero state-plane coordinates, the
program will ask you whether you want to place those nodes
automatically based on their coordinates.
If you answer Yes, the dialog box of the Snap-to-State-Plain-

Coordinates command will appear. Please refer to the documentation of
the Diagram | SNAP TO STATE PLANE COORDINATES
COMMAND
for details.
In many cases, some or all of the nodes are not visible on the screen.
You can make them visible on the one-line diagram with the Diagram |
PLACE BUSES COMMAND.
Main Window
FILE MENU
CLOSE COMMAND
The Close command closes the current binary data file.
TO CLOSE A BINARY DATA FILE:
1. Select the File | Close command.
If the current binary data file has been modified, a dialog box will appear
asking you whether the changes should be saved.
Click on "Yes" if you wish to save the updated data to disk under the
current file name; otherwise, click on "No".
The original binary data file, if any, is saved under the .BAK extension.
The Main Window will show the ASPEN icon with a gray background.
Main Window
FILE MENU
SAVE
COMMAND
The Save command saves the current case to the disk under the current binary data file name. The old
binary data file is saved under the .BAK extension. It is wise to periodically save a file on which you are
editing to guard against information loss in the event of a program or system failure.
TO SAVE A BINARY DATA FILE:
1. Select the File | Save command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if (1) if the
file has not been modified or (2) the file was opened for "read only".
If the file was created with the File | New in the same session, the
program will ask you for the name of the binary data file.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to enter the binary
data file name.
Press OK.

Main Window
FILE MENU
SAVE AS COMMAND
The Save As command saves the current case to disk under a different binary data file name. The current
binary data file is not altered.
TO SAVE THE BINARY DATA FILE UNDER A NEW NAME:
1. Select the File | Save As command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the name of the
binary data file.
2. Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the name of
the binary data file.
The new file name will appear in the title bar of the Main Window.
Note: If this operation overwrites an existing data file, the original file
is saved automatically under the .BAK extension.
Main Window
FILE MENU
EXPORT NETWORK COMMAND
The Export Network command creates a new text data file that corresponds to the current state of the
network. The exported file is a text file. File format information can be found in Section 4 of this manual.
Note: The graphical information of the one-line diagram is not included in the exported file.
TO EXPORT NETWORK DATA TO A NEW TEXT DATA FILE:
1. Select the File | Export Network command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the name of the new text
data file.
of the text data file.
Press OK.
A message box will appear informing you that the network data has been
exported.
Main Window
FILE MENU
FILE COMMENTS COMMAND
File comments are notes that describe the binary data file. The file comments are stored within the
binary data file and can be called up at any time with this command. The file comments are printed on
the title page of solution reports.
TO EDIT FILE COMMENTS:
1. Select the File | File Comments command.
A dialog box will appear showing the file comments. A blinking text
cursor indicates where new text will appear.
If you wish to review the file comments only, click on "Cancel"

when you are done.
2. Edit the comments or add new comments.
The file comment can have up to 6000 characters.
Press OK.
The new file comments will be saved to memory.

Main Window
FILE MENU
STATISTICS COMMAND
The Statistics command gives you the total number of buses, lines, transformers, shunts and other
network elements in the file. It will also give you the total number of protective equipment, including
relays, fuses, reclosers, and circuit breakers.
TO VIEW SYSTEM
STATISTICS:
1. Select the File | Statistics command.
A dialog box will appear listing the count of network and protective
equipment in two separate list boxes. The system base MVA and
the system frequency are shown at the top of the dialog box.
2. Press Done to close the dialog box.
Main Window
FILE MENU
CHANGE BASE MVA COMMAND
The Change Base MVA command lets you change the base MVA of the network. DistriView will make
all necessary changes to reflect the new MVA base. This change will not affect the solutions.
TO CHANGE THE SYSTEM BASE MVA:
1. Select the File | Statistics command.
A dialog box will appear with the current MVA base.
2. Enter the new MVA base in the edit box. Press OK.
A dialog box will appear to ask for your confirmation. Answer Yes to
proceed.
This command affects the data of two types of equipment: the Thevenin
impedances of substation buses, and the impedances of lines and cables
with manually entered impedances. Lines and cables with construction-
or line table entry-based impedances are not affected. DistriView will
auto reprocess all the equipment in the network to reflect the new MVA
base.
Note: This command cannot be undone. In addition, this command will
clear the undo stack, making it impossible for you to undo any of the
previous commands.

Main Window
FILE MENU
MERGE FILE COMMAND
The Merge File command in the Main Window allows you to augment an existing data file with contents
of another binary data file.
If a bus is found in both files, the program automatically adds a ~ character at the beginning of one of
the bus names. A list of these duplicate buses is shown in the TTY window. After the files are merged,
you can then manually combine these bus pairs (with the Merge Bus command) as needed to stitch
together the two files.
Note: This command in Version 7 allowed you to added data from a text data file with DVT extension. This
feature is no longer supported in Version 8. To add data from a DVT file, we suggest that you first open
the DVT file and saved it as a DTV file. You will then be able to use this command.
TO MERGE NETWORK DATA FROM ANOTHER DATA FILE:
1. With the scrollbar controls, move the viewport to an empty space
where you want to place the center of the added network.
This center location need not be exact, because you will be able to move the
added network later in step 4.
2. Select the File | Merge File command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the data file that
you wish to add.
the data file. Press OK.
Once DistriView accepts the file name, the dialog box will disappear and
the one-line diagram of a ghosted image of the added network will
appear on the screen.
4. Place the added network.
With the mouse, drag the ghosted image to the desired location in the
viewport. Clicking the mouse outside the ghosted image will permanently
place it on the screen.
Main Window
FILE MENU
READ CHANGE FILE COMMAND
The Read Change File command allows you to modify the network of a binary data file using commands
in a change file. A DistriView change file is a text file with a .DVC extension. The format of the change
file is described in Section 6. There are two common applications for this change-file feature:
1. Updating the substation-bus impedances using a change-file generated by ASPEN OneLiner:
OneLiner (a short-circuit and relay coordination program for transmission systems) is capable
of generating a DistriView change file to efficiently update the Thevenin impedances at all the
substation buses to reflect the latest state of the transmission network. OneLiner users should
consult the documentation for the File | DistriView Interface command in the OneLiner Users
Manual for more information.
2. Executing the load-allocation command in a batch mode: This feature allows you to quickly
update your section loads based on the latest billing data. Please see Section 5.6 of this manual
for more information.
You can also use a text editor to create a change file to update network parameters in a batch manner.
TO READ A CHANGE FILE:
1. Select the File | Read Change File command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the change file.
the change file. Change files have the .DVC extension.
Press OK.
A series of message boxes will now appear asking you to confirm the
deletion, the addition, or modification of network elements, one change at a
time.
3. Confirm or skip the changes.
In each of the confirmation message boxes, click
on: Yes: to confirm the change.
No: to ignore the change but continue to read the
remaining change commands.
Rest OK: to confirm the current change as well as all remaining
changes. Cancel Rest: to ignore the current change as well as all remaining
changes.
After all the change commands have been processed, a TTY Window
will appear listing all of the changes that were made.
Select the Menu | Close Window command to close the TTY Window.
The program will automatically place new branches that span existing buses.
You can change their appearance with the mouse at any time. The program
will show the remaining branches when you place the new buses (if there are
any).
4. Optional: Use the Save command to save the updated system
including the graphical information to the disk.

Main Window
FILE MENU
PRINT SETUP COMMAND
The Print Setup command allows you to change the current printer and to set it up. The settings made in
command will be used in all subsequent printouts from DistriView.
1. Select File | Print Setup command.
A dialog box similar to this will appear.
Please follow the procedure in your Windows Users Manual to

configure your printer.
Main Window
FILE MENU
PRINT ONE-LINE COMMAND
The Print One-Line command prints the one-line diagram using the current printer. You can change the
current printer with the File | Print Setup command.
This print command can output more than what you see on the computer screen. This is made possible by a
scaling factor that you can enter. By entering a very small scaling factor, you can print a feeder of any size
onto a sheet of paper.
TO PRINT THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the File | Print One-Line command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the scaling factor.
2. Change the scaling factor to enlarge or reduce the image.

The scaling factor allows you to adjust the size of the image on the
printed page. When the scaling factor is 1.0, DistriView will map the
portion of the one-line diagram visible on the screen to the printed page.
When the scaling factor is less than 1.0, the program reduces the size of
the graphical elements to allow a larger portion of the one-line diagram
to be printed onto the printed page.
You should experiment with different values of the scaling factor to find
the one that works best for your network and the paper size.
3. Click on the Preview button to see how the one-line diagram
will appear on the printed page.
A pop-up window will appear to show you the portion of the one-line
diagram that will be printed. See picture below.
This window has the same aspect ratio as the printed page. The preview
correctly displays the symbols of the network elements as well as the
text on the Preview screen.
Within the preview window, the arrow pointer associated with mouse
will change to a small hand.
You can change the contents of the printed page by dragging the
mouse.
When you are done previewing, close the Preview Window by
double clicking on the control menu box at the upper left corner.

4. Click on the "Change" button to select the font.
A standard font dialog box will appear asking you to specify the font.
The fonts shown in the list box are those available on your printer.
Common fonts are Courier, Arial and Times Roman. DistriView uses
Arial to paint on the screen. You may wish to select another font if
Arial is not available on your printer or you prefer the appearance of
another font.
Font size controls the height of the type in units of points where one
point is defined to be 1/72 of an inch. The font size is NOT affected by
the scaling factor. Text printed using a 10-point font will be 10/72 inch
high no matter what the value of the scaling factor happens to be. For
this reason, you should specify a small font size to go with a small
scaling factor. As mentioned above, the text in the Preview command is
not drawn to scale.
5. Use the controls in the standard font selection dialog box to select
the font and font size you want. Click on the "OK" button to close
the font dialog box.
6. Mark the check box labeled Print black and white, if you want to
print the one-line diagram in black and white even though the
printer has color capability.
7. Press OK to close the dialog box and commence printing.
You may continue working on DistriView after the Printing-In-Progress
dialog box disappears.
Main Window
FILE MENU
EXPORT ONE-LINE COMMAND
The Export One-Line command saves the one-line graphics to a Window Metafile or an Enhanced
Window Metafile. These metafiles store the graphics in a vector form (and not in a bitmap form),
making it possible for the graphics to be scaled without degrading the picture quality. You can import the
graphics into many commonly used Windows programs, such as MS Word. Please note that this Export
One-Line command always creates a graphics file for the entire network.
TO SAVE THE ONE-LINE GRAPHCIS TO A METAFILE:
1. Select the File | Export One-Line command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the name of the file.
Select the metafile format in the Save as type dropdown combo box.
The extension of the file will be automatically set depending on your
choice of the file format.
Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the name of
the file.
A message box will appear informing you that the one-line graphics have
been exported. Press OK.
Note: You can also save pictures of relay curves as Window Metafile or
Enhanced Window Metafile. Please see documentation for the Relay |
View Relay Curves | Misc | Save Graph As command.

Main Window
FILE MENU
EXIT
COMMAND
The Exit command closes the current binary data file and shut down DistriView.
TO EXIT DistriView:
If the current binary data file has not been changed, the Main Window of
DistriView will simply disappear.
If the current binary data file has been modified, a dialog box will appear
asking you whether the changes should be saved.
2. Press Yes to save the updated data to disk under the current file name.
The original binary data file, if any, is saved under the .BAK extension.
DistriView will shut down and its window will disappear.
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
PROPERTIES COMMAND
The Properties command under the Network menu lets you review or edit the parameters of a network
element. To execute this command you must first select the network element.
TO REVIEW OR EDIT THE PARAMETERS OF A NETWORK ELEMENT:
1. Select the network element.
Click the left mouse button once on the element you want to review or
edit.
The element will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the Network | Properties command.
The properties dialog box for the element will appear.
Make necessary modifications.
Press OK to save changes. Otherwise, press Cancel.
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | SUBSTATION BUS COMMAND
The New | Substation Bus command lets you add a new substation bus to the network. The substation bus
simulates the electrical interface between the distribution feeder and the transmission network. Each feeder
can have one or more substation buses. In a voltage-drop study, the substation bus maintains a constant
voltage magnitude you specify. In a short-circuit study, the substation bus behaves like a synchronous
machine, i.e., a constant balanced voltage source behind an impedance.
Prior to version 9, all the substation buses are assumed to have a voltage angle of zero degree. In version
9, the reference angle of the substation buses is calculated at run time. This change makes it possible to
connect a feeder to two or more substation buses that are plus or minus 30 or 60 degrees apart (because of
transformer phase shifts in the transmission system).
TO ADD A NEW SUBSTATION BUS FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Substation Bus button on the Device Palette. The
cursor will become a cross with a substation symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on an empty spot in the one-line where you want to place the new
substation bus.
A dialog box will appear asking for the substation parameters.
TO ADD A NEW SUBSTATION BUS USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the bus location.
Click the left mouse button once at the desired position of the new bus.
2b. Select the Network | New | Substation Bus command.
SUBSTATION BUS INPUT DATA:

3. Input the substation bus parameters.
Name: A 12 -character name for the substation
bus. Nom. kV: Nominal line-to-line bus voltage in
kV. Area: A 6-character area name.
Bus No.: The bus number, if not zero, must have a unique value in
the range of 1 to 99999, inclusive. You will get a
warning if the bus number you chose is already in use.
X and Y: The state-plane coordinates of the bus. The program can
automatically readjust the position of all the nodes according to
this coordinate. Please refer to the Diagram | SNAP TO
STATE PLANE COORDINATES COMMAND for more
information.
Style: Substation bus can be shown on the one-line as a
horizontal or vertical bar.
Voltage magnitude: Voltage magnitude, in per-unit. For a voltage-drop
study, this is voltage magnitude the substation bus will
maintain at its terminal. For a short-circuit or locked-rotor
study, this is the magnitude of the voltage source behind
the positive-sequence Thevenin impedance.
4. Input the Thevenin impedance for the substation bus.
You can input the Thevenin impedances for the substation bus manually
or have DistriView calculate them for you.
TO INPUT MANUALLY:
Enter in the Thevenin impedances:
Z+: Positive-sequence Thevenin impedance in per unit (based
on system MVA and the nominal voltage of the
substation bus).
Z-: Negative-sequence Thevenin impedance in per unit.
Zo: Zero-sequence Thevenin impedance in per unit.
Skip to step #5.
TO HAVE DistriView CALCULATE THEM FOR YOU:
Press Compute.
A dialog box will appear convert the short circuit duty to Thevenin
impedances.
Input the following parameters:
3LG Short Circuit Duty: The three-phase short circuit duty of
substation bus in one of the 3 units to be selected below.
MVAsc: 3-Phase short circuit duty in MVA.
KVAsc: 3-Phase short circuit duty in kVA.
Isc: 3-Phase short circuit current in amperes.
1LG Short Circuit Duty (Optional): The single-phase-to-ground short
circuit duty of substation bus in one of the three units to be
selected below. If this value is not available, leave the
input box blank.
MVAsc: Single-phase-to-ground short circuit duty in MVA.
KVAsc: Single-phase-to-ground short circuit duty in kVA.
Isc: Single-line-to-ground short circuit current in
amperes.
Input the X/R ratio in '3LG X/R Ratio' and ' 3LG X/R Ratio' edit
boxes for 3-phase and single-line-to ground faults, respectively.
Press OK to close the 'System Impedance Conversion' dialog box.
DistriView will calculate the positive-sequence Thevenin impedance and
put it in the edit box. The negative-sequence impedance is assumed to
be the same as the positive-sequence value.
The program computes the zero-sequence impedance only if you
have entered a 1LG Short Circuit Duty. Otherwise, the zero-
sequence impedance is not affected by this command. You must
enter it manually.
5. Enter a memo with up to 512 characters.
6. Press OK to close the 'Substation Bus Data' dialog box.
The new substation bus will be displayed on the one-line diagram.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | DISTRIBUTION NODE COMMAND
The New | Distribution Node command lets you add a new distribution node to the network. A distribution
node provides a point of connection in the distributions feeder. You can attaches one or more branches to it,
as well as a spot load, an induction generator or motor, a synchronous generator or motor, a shunt and a
grounding bank.
TO ADD A NEW DISTRIBUTION NODE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Distribution Node button on the Device Palette. The
cursor will become a cross with a node symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on an empty spot in the one-line where you want to place the new
node.
A dialog box will appear asking for the parameters of the new
distribution node.
TO ADD A NEW DISTRIBUTION NODE USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the node location.
Click the left mouse button once at the desired position of the new
distribution node.
2b. Select the Network | New | Distribution Node command.
A dialog box will appear asking for the parameters of the new
distribution node.
DISTRIBUTION NODE INPUT DATA:
Input the node parameters.

Name: A 12-character name for the node.
Nom. kV: Nominal line-to-line bus voltage in kV. For a node that
has only one phase energized, enter 1.732 times the
nominal line-to-neutral voltage in kV.

Area: A 6-character area name. Some users use this field to
indicate the area of protection for different relays,
fuses and reclosers.
Bus. No. The bus (node) number, if not zero, must have a unique
value in the range of 1 to 99999, inclusive. You will get
a warning if the bus number you chose is already in use.
X and Y: The state-plane coordinates of the bus. The program can
automatically readjust the position of all the nodes
according to these coordinates. Please refer to the
Diagram
| SNAP TO STATE PLANE COORDINATES
COMMAND for more information.
Symbol Style: The node symbol can be a horizontal bar, a vertical bar,
or a dot.
Nominal kV Style: The nominal kV is part of a nodes identifier. You
can specify whether it should be displayed as a line-to-
line voltage or line-to-ground voltage. (The latter may be
desirable for a node that is connected to a single-phase
line.) On the one-line diagram, a line-to-ground voltage is
displayed with the ending kVln.
Show ID on one-line diagram: Mark this check box if you wish to see
the nodes identifier and voltage solution displayed on the
one-line diagram.
Node Level: The node level is used by the voltage-sag-analysis, fault-
all-buses and other commands to limit the nodes to be
included in the output report. We suggest you use a low
level number for tap nodes that you want to omit in these
reports, and higher level number for the other nodes that
you want to include in certain specialized reports.
Note: A substation bus has no node level, and is included
in all reports, regardless of the minimum node level you
specified.
Memo: Comments with up to 512 characters.
3. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the symbol for the new node will
appear on screen.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | SPOT LOAD COMMAND
The New | Spot Load command lets you add a spot load to either a substation bus or a distribution node.
Non-motor loads can be modeled in two ways in DistriView: as spot loads, and as section loads on lines
or cables. Generally speaking, you should use spot loads to represent large, concentrated load at a single
location, and use section loads to represent distributed consumer loads. In voltage-drop studies, each spot
load is modeled as a mixture of constant-power, constant-current, and constant-impedance components.
The kVA consumption on the three phases of a spot load can be different. DistriView also allows you to
model a spectrum of harmonic current that it injects into the network.
TO ADD A NEW SPOT LOAD FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Load button on the Device Palette. The cursor will
become a cross with a load symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on an existing node to place the new load on that node.
Alternatively, click on an empty spot in the one-line to create a new
node and a new spot load at the same time.
A dialog box will appear asking for the parameters of the new load.
TO ADD A NEW SPOT LOAD USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Click the left mouse button on the bus or node to which you want to add a
new spot load.
2b. Select the Network | New | Spot Load command.
Note: A substation bus or node can have at most one spot load. This menu
item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the bus or node already has a
spot load.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the new spot load.
SPOT LOAD INPUT DATA:

3. Enter the load name.
The load name can have up to 12 characters.
4. Enter the load zone number. Enter an integer between 0 and 999,
inclusive, as the zone number. The zone number for spot loads and
distributed loads gives you a way to view, edit and scale all the loads in
a zone within the Data Browser.
5. Select the appropriate connection. Click on:
L-N: For loads connected line-to-neutral.
L-L: For loads connected line-to-line.
6. Select the appropriate phases.
Click on the phase or phases to which the spot load is connected.
Two edit boxes will appear for each phase selected to let you enter the
power factor and kVA consumption.
7. Specify the composition of the spot load.
Enter the percentage of constant power load in 'constant power' and
the percentage of constant current load in 'Constant current'.
DistriView will subtract these two values from 100% to determine the
percent of constant-impedance component.
8. Input the load parameters for each phase selected.
KVA: kVA consumption.
PF: The loads power factor. Enter a value between 0 and 1 if the
load is reactive (i.e., consuming VARs). Enter a value
between 0 and 1 if the load is capacitive (i.e., injecting
VARs into the network).
Press the Fill button to copy the kVA and PF value from the top two
edit boxes to the other four edit boxes below.
9. Specify the loads harmonic current spectrum.
Click on the Add/Edit button to open the Harmonic Current Source
Info Dialog for viewing and editing.
See APPENDIX F: HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCES for details
on modeling.
Click on the Delete button to remove the harmonic spectrum from
this load.
11. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and a new spot load will be shown
attached to the bus or node.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR/GENERATOR COMMAND
The New | Synchronous Motor/Generator command lets you add a new synchronous motor or generator
to a node. A synchronous machine must be 3-phase. This model can also be used to model synchronous
condensers. In voltage-drop studies, a synchronous machine is under one of two operating modes. It can
maintain a constant voltage magnitude at the machine terminal subject to limits on its reactive-power
output, or it can generate or consume a fixed amount of real and reactive power. In short-circuit, locked-
rotor and voltage-drop studies, a synchronous machine is represented as a balanced voltage source behind
its impedances.
TO ADD A NEW SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Synchronous Machine button on the Device Palette.
The cursor will become a cross with a machine symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on an existing node to place the new machine on that node.
node and a new machine at the same time.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the machine.
TO ADD A NEW SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select a distribution node.
Click the left mouse button once on the distribution node to which
you want to add a synchronous motor or generator.
2b. Select the Network | New | Synchronous Motor/Generator command.
Note: A distribution node can have at most one synchronous motor or
generator. This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the node
already has a synchronous machine.
SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE INPUT DATA:
Constant Power

Constants Voltage
3. Enter the machine name.
The name can have up to 12 characters.
4. Input the machines 3-phase kVA rating in 'Rating'.
If you know the machine rating only in horsepower, you can convert it
to kVA as follows: Machines with 0.8 power factor, 1hp=1kVA;
Machines with 1.0 power factor, 1hp=0.8kVA.
5. Input the machine impedances in the positive, negative and
zero sequence.
Please note that there are 3 positive-sequence impedances:
subtransient, transient and synchronous. You can use the S_Ckt | Short
Circuit and Lock-Rotor Options command to tell DistriView which of
these three impedances you want to use for short-circuit and locked-
rotor studies. You can either input the impedances directly or use
typical values provided by DistriView.
TO USE TYPICAL VALUES PROVIDED BY DistriView:
Click on "Use typical values".
A dialog box will appear displaying the typical per-unit impedance and
X/R ratio for a synchronous motor/generator with the kVA rating
entered.
Make necessary modifications and press OK.

The dialog box will disappear and the machine impedances calculated
by the program will be placed in the appropriate edit boxes.

Skip to step 6.
TO ENTER THE IMPEDANCES DIRECTLY:
Enter the impedances in the following edit boxes: (All of the
impedances are in per-unit in machines rated KVA base.)
Subtransient: Positive-sequence subtransient impedance.
Transient: Positive-sequence transient impedance.
Synchronous: Positive-sequence synchronous
impedance. Z-: Negative-sequence impedance.
Zo: Zero-sequence impedance.
6. Enter the grounding impedance in ohms. Enter the actual impedance.
Do not multiply by 3.
7. Enter the real power output of the machine in 'kW'.
Enter a positive value for generators, a negative value for motors, and
zero for synchronous condensers.
8. Select the control mode by marking one of the two radio buttons.
The control mode affects how the machine is modeled in a voltage-drop
study. It has no effect on short-circuit or locked-rotor studies.
Fixed V: The machine will generate or consumed a fixed amount of
kilowatts, and it will maintain a fixed voltage magnitude
at its terminal by either absorbing or generating kVARs.
A synchronous condenser must be operated with fixed
voltage.
Fixed Power:The machine will consume or generate a fixed amount of
kW and kVARs.
9a. If the control mode is Fixed V, enter the voltage regulation parameters.
V (p.u.): Per unit voltage the machine will maintain at the
machine terminal.
min kVAR: Minimum amount of reactive power in kVAR the
machine is able to generate. This value is usually
negative (meaning that the machine can absorb certain
amount of reactive power).
max kVAR: Maximum amount of reactive power in kVAR the machine
is able to inject into the network.
9b. If the control mode is Fixed Power, enter the kVARs. The value is positive
if the machine injects the reactive power into the network (i.e., capacitive). It
is negative if the machine absorbs the reactive power (i.e., reactive).
11. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and a new synchronous machine symbol
will be shown attached to the distribution node.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 3-PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR/GENERATOR COMMAND
The New | 3-Phase Induction Motor/Generator command lets you add a new 3-phase induction motor or
generator to a substation bus or distribution node.
In voltage-drop studies, an induction machine is modeled as a constant kW load, with a different
power factor at different voltage magnitudes.
In short-circuit and locked-rotor studies, you can elect to include or exclude induction motor
contributions if the prefault voltage is computed from a linear network model without loads or shunts. If
included, an induction machine is modeled as a one per-unit voltage source behind the machine
impedances. In short- circuit and locked-rotor studies where the prefault voltage is from a voltage-drop
solution, the induction machine is always included.
You can also enter the spectrum of harmonic current that the motor produces when in operation. DistriView
will let you study its effect on the rest of the network.
TO ADD A NEW 3-PHASE INDUCTION MACHINE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New 3-Phase Induction Motor button on the Device
Palette. The cursor will become a cross with a machine symbol attached to it.
TO ADD A NEW 3-PHASE INDUCTION MACHINE USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select either a substation bus or distribution node.
Click the left mouse button once on the substation bus or distribution
node, to which you want to add an induction motor or generator.
2b. Select the Network | New | 3-Phase Induction Motor/Generator
command.
Note: A bus or node can have at most one induction motor or generator.
This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the bus or node
already has an induction machine.

3-PHASE INDUCTION MACHINE INPUT DATA:
3. Enter the name of the induction machine.

4. Input the machines 3-phase kVA rating in 'Rated kVA'.
The induction machines impedances are based on this kVA rating. If the
machine rating is in horsepower you must first convert it to kVA.
Press the Convert from HP button to have the program make this
conversion for you. The dialog box for this function looks like this:
Enter the horsepower rating and press OK.

The dialog box will disappear and the kVA rating will appear in the
Rated kVA edit box of the induction machine dialog box.
5. Input the machine impedances.
You can either input the impedances directly or use typical values
provided by DistriView.

In the drop-down list box, select either a NEMA code letter or
the entry Not available.
If you select a NEMA code letter, a typical impedance for motors of that
designation will appear in the edit box below. If you select Not
available, a typical impedance of this kVA rating will appear.
A typical X/R ratio for a motor/generator of this kVA is provided in the
X/R edit box.
Make necessary modifications and press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the machine impedances calculated by
the program will be placed in the appropriate edit boxes.
Skip to next step.
Enter the impedances in the following edit boxes: (All the
impedances are in per-unit on the machines rated kVA base.)
Z+: Positive-sequence impedance.
Z-: Negative-sequence impedance.
Zo: Zero-sequence impedance.
6. Enter the grounding impedance in ohms. Use the actual impedance.
7. Select the starting method.
The starting method affects only the results of lock-rotor studies. It has
no effects on voltage-drop studies or short-circuit studies.
Click on the 'Starting Method' drop down list box and select one of
the following:
Direct: The induction machine is connected without any type of
starting-current suppressants.
Wye-delta switch: The induction machine is started with 58% of its
nominal voltage. The voltage is restored to 100% after
the rotor attains normal speed.
Series Impedance: The induction machine is started with an impedance
connected in series. Enter the impedance in per-unit on
the machine base in edit boxes to the right.
Shunt capacitance: The induction machine is started with a capacitor
connected in parallel. Enter the capacitance in KVAR in
the edit boxes to the right.
Transformer: The induction machine is connected to an auto-
transformer. The motor is started with the tap set at a
reduced voltage. And enter the transformer
impedance in per-unit on machine base and tap setting
in percent in the edit boxes to the right.

8. Enter the real power output of the motor/generator in kW.
Positive values represent generators; negative values represent motors.
9. Specify the power factor at different voltage levels.
Specify the power factor at different voltage levels. The power factor
always assumed to be lagging, i.e., the machine always absorbs reactive
power from the network. This information is used in voltage-drop
studies.
10. Specify the induction machines harmonic current spectrum.
Click on the Add/Edit button to open the Harmonic Current Source
Info Dialog for viewing and editing.
See APPENDIX F: HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCES for
modeling and other information on harmonic sources.
this induction machine.
12. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and a new 3-phase induction machine will
be shown attached to the node or bus.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 1-PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR/GENERATOR COMMAND
The New | 1-Phase Induction Motor/Generator command lets you add either a new single-phase
induction motor or generator to a substation bus or distribution node. The induction machine can be
connected line- to-neutral or line-to-line.
In voltage-drop studies, an induction machine is modeled as a constant kW load, with a different power
factor at different voltage magnitudes.
In short-circuit and locked-rotor studies, single-phase induction machines are ignored when the prefault
voltage is calculated from a linear network model without loads or shunts. Single-phase induction
machines are always included when the prefault voltage is from a voltage-drop solution.
TO ADD A NEW SINGLE -PHASE INDUCTION MACHINE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New 1-Phase Induction Motor button on the Device
Palette. The cursor will become a cross with a machine symbol attached to it.
TO ADD A NEW SINGLE -PHASE INDUCTION MACHINE USING MENU
COMMAND:
node, to which you want to add an induction motor or generator.
2b. Select the Network | New | 1-Phase Induction Motor/Generator
command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the induction
motor or generator.
Note: A bus or node can have at most one induction motor or
generator. This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the bus
or node already has an induction machine.

SINGLE -PHASE INDUCTION MACHINE INPUT DATA:
3. Enter the motor/generator name.

4. Select the phase or phases to which the motor/generator is connected.
5. Input the motor/generator kVA in 'Rated kVA'.
The induction machines impedances are based on this kVA rating. If the
machine rating is in horsepower you must first convert it to kVA.
Press the Convert from HP button to have the program make this
conversion for you. The dialog box for this function looks like this:
Enter the horsepower rating and press OK.

The dialog box will disappear and the kVA rating will appear in the
Rated kVA edit box of the induction machine dialog box.
6. Input the motor/generator impedances.
You can either input the impedances directly or use typical values
provided by DistriView.

In the drop-down list box, select either a NEMA code letter or
the entry Not available.
If you select a NEMA code letter, a typical impedance and X/R ratio for
motors of that designation will appear in the edit boxes below.
If you select Not available, a typical impedance and X/R ratio for a
motor/generator of this kVA rating will appear in the edit boxes below.
Click on "OK" to accept these values or make necessary
modifications and click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the machine impedances calculated
by the program will be placed in the appropriate edit boxes.
Skip to step #7.
Enter the impedances in the edit boxes:
Z+: Impedance in per-unit on machines kVA base.
7. Enter the grounding impedance in ohms. Use the actual impedance.
8. Select the starting method.
The starting method affects only the results of lock-rotor studies. It has
no effects on voltage-drop studies or short-circuit studies.
Click on the 'Starting Method' drop down list box and select:
Direct: The induction machine is connected without any type of
starting current suppressants.
Wye-delta switch: (Available only if the machine is connected L-L)
The induction machine is started with 58% of its nominal
voltage. The voltage is restored to 100% after the rotor
attains normal speed.
Series Impedance: The induction machine is started with an impedance
connected in series. Enter the impedance in per-unit
on machine base in the edit boxes to the right.
Shunt capacitance: The induction machine is started with a capacitor
connected in parallel. Enter the capacitance in KVAR in
the edit boxes to the right.
Transformer: The induction machine is connected to an auto-
transformer. The motor is started with the tap set at a
reduced voltage. And enter the transformer
impedance in per-unit on machine base and tap setting
in percent in the edit boxes to the right.
9. Enter the real power output of the motor/generator in kW.
Positive values represent generators. Negative values represent motors.

10. Specify the power factor at different voltage levels.
Specify the power factor at different voltage levels. This information is
used only in voltage-drop studies.
12. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and a new single-phase induction machine
will be shown attached to the node or bus.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | CAPACITOR/REACTOR/HARMONIC FILTER COMMAND
The New | Capacitor/Reactor/Harmonic Filter command lets you add a new capacitor, reactor or a
harmonic filter to a substation bus or distribution node. Both reactors and capacitors can be fixed or
switched automatically to control voltage, current, or reactive current. A harmonic filter is a series
combination of a capacitor and a reactor designed to remove harmonics of a certain frequency.
TO ADD A NEW SHUNT OR HARMONIC FILTER FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Capacitor/Reactor/Filter button on the Device
Palette. The cursor will become a cross with a shunt symbol attached to
it.
2a. Click on an existing node to place the new shunt or filter on that node.
Alternatively, click on an empty spot in the one-line to create a new node
and a new shunt or filter at the same time.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the device parameters.
TO ADD A NEW SHUNT OR HARMONIC FILTER USING MENU COMMAND:
Note: A bus or node can have at most one capacitor, reactor or
harmonic filter. This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the
bus or node already has a shunt or filter.
node, to which you want to add a shunt or reactor.
2b. Select the Network | New | Capacitor/Reactor command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the device parameters.
CAPACITOR/REACTOR/HARMONIC FILTER INPUT DATA:
3. Enter the device identifiers.

Name: A 12 character name for the shunt or filter.
ID: A one character unit identifier.

4. Select device type and connection.
For a capacitor or reactor, click on one of three radio buttons: Line
to ground neutral, Line to ungrounded neutral, and Line to line,
depending on the way it is constructed.
For a harmonic filter, click on the radio button Harmonic filter,
and enter the tuning frequency (as multiple of fundamental) in the
edit box labeled Tuning harmonic. A harmonic filter is always
connected line to grounded neutral.
5. Select the appropriate phases.
Click on the phase or phases to which the shunt is connected.
An edit box will appear for each phase selected allowing you to enter
the kVAR injection.
Note: All 3 phase selection check boxes are checked automatically when
the harmonic filter option is selected.
6. Enter in the kVAR rating in 'kVAR.
For capacitors and reactors, this is reactive-power injected into the
network at the rated kV. kVAR is positive for capacitors and negative for
reactors.
A harmonic filter is made up of a capacitor in series with a reactor.
The kVAR you specify here is for the capacitor only. DistriView will
automatically size the reactor such that the series combination of the
reactor and the capacitor will have the desired tuning frequency.
The kVAR for a harmonic filter must be positive.
7. Enter the kV rating of shunt in 'kV rating.
The default value is the line to neutral bus voltage in kV. If the shunt is
connected line-to-line, the kV rating should be a value close to the
line- to-line voltage in kV.
8. Click on "Switching Param.>>" if the shunt is switched automatically
to control voltage or current.
Note: This button is dimmed when the harmonic filter option is selected.
A dialog box will appear allowing you to enter the switching
parameters. Two pictures are shown below. The top is for a capacitor.
The bottom is for a reactor.

9. Specify the controlling parameter. Click on one of the
following: Not regulated: The shunt is fixed.
Controlling voltage: The shunt is switched on and off depending on the
voltage magnitude. Specifically, DistriView computes the
controlled quantity as the average of the per-unit voltage
magnitude of the active phases.
Controlling current: The shunt is switched on and off depending on
the magnitude of the branch currents flowing upstream
from the shunt bus. Specifically, DistriView computes the
controlled quantity as follows. First, the program
computes the vector sum of all the currents on branches
that are connected to nodes upstream. It then averages the
magnitude (in amperes) of the phase current on the
energized phases.
Controlling reactive current: The shunt is switched on and off depending
on the magnitude of the imaginary part of the branch currents.
Specifically, DistriView computes the controlled quantity as
follows. First, the program computes the vector sum of all the
currents on branches that are connected to nodes upstream. It
then averages the magnitude of the imaginary part of the
phase currents (in amperes) on the energized phases.
10. Specify the control thresholds.
The edit fields will change according to the option you selected in Step 9.
For a capacitor:
For Voltage Controlled Switching: Enter a voltage in per unit in 'Off
when greater than' and 'On when less than'.
For Current Controlled Switching: Enter a current in amperes in
'Off when less than' and 'On when greater than'.
For a reactor:
For Voltage Controlled Switching: Enter a voltage in per unit in On
when greater than' and Off when less than'.
For Current Controlled Switching: Enter a current in amperes in On
when less than' and 'Off when greater than'.

11. Specify whether the shunt is normally on or normally off.
Because the controller has a built-in deadband, it is important for the
program to know whether the capacitor should be turned on or off at the
beginning of a voltage-drop study.
12. Press OK to close the Shunt Switching Parameters' dialog box.
14. Press OK to close the Shunt/Harmonic Filter Data dialog box.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | GROUNDING TRANSFORMER COMMAND
The New | Grounding Transformer command lets you add a new grounding transformer (also called
grounding bank) to a substation bus or distribution node. Grounding banks are usually installed on
portions of a feeder that are otherwise ungrounded to provide a path for the zero-sequence current.
Grounding banks are simulated in voltage-drop, short-circuit and locked-rotor studies. But they usually
have little effect on voltage-drop studies because grounding banks have infinite impedance for positive-
and negative-sequence currents.
TO ADD A NEW GROUNDING BANK FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Grounding transformer button on the Device
Palette. The cursor will become a cross with a grounding bank
symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on an existing node to place the new grounding bank on that node.
node and a new grounding bank at the same time.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the grounding-bank parameters.
TO ADD A NEW GROUNDING BANK USING MENU COMMAND:
node, to which you want to add a grounding transformer.
2b. Select the Network | New | Grounding Transformer command.
Note: A bus or node can have at most one grounding transformer. This
menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the bus or node already has
a grounding transformer.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the grounding-bank parameters.
GROUNDING TRANSFORMER INPUT DATA:
3. Enter the name of the grounding transformer.


4. Enter the 3-phase short-time kVA rating of the grounding transformer.
The default value is the system kVA base.
5. Enter the zero-sequence impedance in per-unit, based on the
grounding banks short-time kVA rating.
7. Press OK to close the dialog box.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 3-PHASE LINE/CABLE COMMAND
The New | 3-Phase Line/Cable command lets you add a new 3-phase line or cable between two nodes of
the same nominal kV. A line may have a section load, which represents distributed consumer loads over
the length of the line. DistriView also allows you to model the harmonic current that the section load
injects into the network.
TO ADD A NEW 3-PHASE LINE OR CABLE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New 3-Phase Line/Cable on the Device Palette
Click on the New 3-Phase Line/Cable button on the Device
Palette. The cursor will become a cross with a line symbol attached to
it.
2b. Drag-and-Drop the new line
Click the left mouse button on the one-line where you want to place
the first end of the new line. With the mouse button held down,
move the cursor toward the spot where you want to place the other
end of the line. A new line symbol will appear with its far end moving
with the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing node or bus will attach the line to the node.
Clicking on the end segment of an existing branch will place the new line in
series with that branch.
Release the mouse button where you want the line to terminate. A
dialog box will appear asking you for the line data.
Note: When you move the lines far end over an existing node having the
same nominal kV, the node will be highlighted in red. You can release the
mouse button to attach the line to that node.
TO ADD A NEW 3-PHASE LINE OR CABLE USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the two terminal buses or nodes.
Click the left mouse button once on one of the terminal buses or
nodes. Then with the <Shift> key held down, click the left button
once on the other terminal bus or node.
Both bus or node symbol will turn dotted red when selected. The first
bus or node you select will be the Bus1 of the line model and the
second will be Bus2.
2b. Select the Network | New | 3-Phase Line/Cable command.
Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the nominal
kV of the two terminal buses or nodes is not the same.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the line data.

3-PHASE LINE/CABLE INPUT DATA:
3. Input the line identifiers.

Name: A 12-character name for the line.
Ckt ID: A one-character circuit identifier that is commonly used
to differentiate between parallel lines.
4. Input the physical length of the line in 'Length='.
You must enter a length greater than zero. The length is for informational
purposes when the line parameters are entered manually. The length is
used to calculate the line parameters if you elect to have the program
calculate the line parameters for you. This is explained in Step 12b.
5. Click on the drop down list box and select the appropriate unit of length.
The available choices are "mi", "ft", "kt" (1000 ft), "m" or "km".
2
6. Input the I T rating a multiplier within I^2T Rating group box.
2
This rating is in the unit of ampere second. Press the button labeled
to the right if you want the program to help you calculate this value
based on the conductor type and cross-sectional area. The multiplier is
used to adjust the rating to take into effects of reclosing. The multiplier
is equal to 1 by default.
7. Specify the phase connection in the 'Section load' group box. Click
on: L-N: if the section load is connected line-to-neutral.
L-L: if the section load is connected line-to-line.
8. Review and edit the section load and to specify harmonic current
sources on the line.
The total section load in KVA is shown in a read-only edit box in the
Section Load group box. Press the button ' to the right to view and edit
the section load that was allocated or entered previously. The section-load
dialog box is

shown below. There are four columns of edit boxes for the four different load
groups. The load group names are shown near the top of the edit box. You can
change these names in the Network | Edit Load Groups command.
Enter the section loads kVA and power factor.

Enter in 'Zone' the Zone number of the section load. The zone
number must be between zero and 999 inclusive. The zone number
allows you to scale the loads and generate a report in the Data Browser.
You can also scale the loads temporarily with the load-zone multiplier.
Please see documentation for Network | Edit Load Zones command for
details.
Specify the section loads harmonic current spectrum. Click on
the Add/Edit button to open the Harmonic Current Source Info
Dialog for viewing and editing.
See APPENDIX F: HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCES for details
on modeling harmonic current source in DistriView.
this section load.
Press OK to close the 'Selection Load Info' dialog box.
9. Review and edit the number of consumers.
The total number of consumers along the length of the line is shown in a
read-only edit box in the Section Load group box. The number of
consumers is used for load allocation and in the calculation of reliability
indices. Skip the next step if you do not wish to edit the number of
consumers on the line.
10. Press the 'Edit Consumer & Load Alloc. Param' Button to view and
modify the number of consumers and other load allocation
parameters.
The term load allocation refers to the process of allocating the total
feeder load among the distributed loads on lines and cables in the feeder.
(Please see documentation for the Network | Section Load | Allocate
command for more information.) You need to enter the allocation
parameters if the allocation is not based on the line-length method. You
must also enter the number of consumers if you want DistriView to
compute reliability indices.

A dialog box will appear asking you for the load-allocation parameters.
The four load groups are listed at the top of the dialog box. (Refer to the
Network | Edit Load Groups command for more information on load
groups.) The allocation methods used for the load groups are shown
below the load group names.
Enter the required parameters, which are different depending on
the load groups allocation method:
REA method: Enter (1) in KWH the kilowatt-hour consumed
per month per consumer and (2) in Consumer the
number of consumers.
KWH method: Enter in KWH the kilowatt-hour consumed per
month only.
KVA method: Enter in KVA the total rating in KVA for all the
transformers that are tapped off of this line.
Note: The total number of consumers is needed for calculation of
reliability indices.
Click on OK to close the Edit Allocation Parameter dialog box.
The parameters you entered in the Allocation Parameter dialog box
have no effect on the actual section load until you execute the Network |
Section Load | Allocation command.
11. Input the current ratings in the four edit boxes.
These values are used to 'flag' overloaded distribution lines after
simulating a voltage drop study. Please refer to the V_Drop | View
Voltage Drop Solution on 1-Line command for more information. The
names given to the four current ratings can be edited using the Diagram
| Options command.

12. Press the Copy from Library command to copy the conductor
ratings from the Conductor Library to the line-rating fields above.
Note: This button is dimmed for manually entered lines.
For a line or cable that is construction based, this command will copy
the current rating of the phase wire or cable to the first rating edit
box. For a line or cable that is line-table-entry based, this command
will copy the four current ratings of the table entry to the four rating
edit boxes.
13a. Input the electrical parameters manually.
On the top General page of the line dialog box, click on "Manual"
in the 'Impedances' group box. Then, click on the "Parameters"
tab at the top of the dialog box.
The 'Parameters' page will appear.
Select the line type. Click on Line for an overhead line and cable
for a cable. This is for informational purposes only. It has no effect on the
simulation results.
Mark 'Has neutral wire' if the line has a neutral conductor. This is for
informational purposes only. It has no effect on the simulation results.
Input the following parameters. All the per-unit parameters are based
on the system base MVA.
R, X: Positive-sequence impedance in per unit.
B: Positive-sequence shunt susceptance in per unit.
R0, X0: Zero-sequence impedance in per unit.
B0: Zero-sequence shunt susceptance in per unit.
13b. Have DistriView calculate the electrical parameters based on a pre-
defined construction.
On the top General page of the line dialog box, click on
"Construction" in the 'Impedances' group box. Then, click on the
"Parameters" tab at the top of the dialog box.

Select a Construction name from the drop-down list box.
Note that the constructions for overhead lines begin with the LINE: and
those for cables begin with the word CABLE:.
Note: The construction types (as well as the wire and cable selections
below) came from the conductor library being referenced by DistriView.
You can find the name of this library by executing the Help | About
DistriView command and you can change the library name by running
the Tools | Run Configuration Program command. Please click on Help
| Conductor Library Contents for more information.
A construction for an overhead line can be thought of as a tower or a
pole. The parameters of a construction include the wire position and the
default conductors, i.e., the wire types that are most commonly used for
the construction.
A construction for a cable circuit contains the position of the conductors
and the default cable types.
Enter a value in the Height offset edit box to make all the conductors
either higher or lower than the positions specified in the Conductor
Library. Note: Press Info to see the conductor coordinates without
offset.
Specify the phase and neutral conductors. For each conductor select
one of the entries in the dropdown combo box. For the neutral
conductor, select the last item NO_Neutral (the last entry in the
list) if the line has no neutral conductor.
The spatial positions of the conductors are labeled 1, 2, and 3 in the
Conductor Library. You can assign phases a, b, or c to those
spatial positions. For example, you may want to assign phase 'a'
conductor to position 1, and phase 'b' to position 3, and phase 'c' to
position 2.
Assign conductor position to phases by click on the drop down list
box and select the desired phase to conductor connection.
Select Transposed in this list if you want the line to be artificially
balanced among the active phases. The other selections will result in an
untransposed line or cable, which is not balanced.
Click on Show impedance to review the line impedance result. The
program will calculate and display lines impedance on the TTY window.

13c. Have DistriView calculate the electrical parameters based on a pre-
defined line-table entry.
On the top General page of the line dialog box, click on "Line
Table" in the 'Impedances' group box. Then, click on the
"Parameters" tab at the top of the dialog box.
Select an entry from the Line Table Item drop-down list box.
Note: The line-table entries came from the conductor library being
referenced by DistriView.
The edit boxes in the Impedance group box show you the electrical
parameters in ohms and micromhos per unit length. DistriView
computes the line impedance by multiplying these figures by the line
length.
The collection of line table entries can be thought of as a dictionary of
line and cable parameters that have been calculated or measured.
DistriView comes with an extensive collection of line-table entries for
different kinds of commonly used cables.
14. Enter line/cable reliability parameters.
Click on the "Reliability" tab at the top of the dialog box.
The Reliability page will appear.

To manually input reliability parameters, enter the following:
Fault frequency: Average number of fault per year.
Transient fault percentage: Transient fault is defined as faults that can
be cleared by reclosing action.
Mean restoration time: Line restoration time in hours per incident.
To assign typical reliability parameters from library of hazard
classes and repair readiness classes click on the browse button next
to the class name edit box. See APPENDIX E: RELIABILITY
CLASS LIBRARY for more information.
15. Press OK to close the '3-Phase Line/Cable Section Data' dialog box.
The selected bus symbols will remain highlighted and a new line
symbol will be shown connecting the two terminal buses.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
The New | 2-Phase Line/Cable command lets you add a new 2-phase line (also called a V-phase line)
or cable between two substation buses or distribution nodes of the same nominal kV.
TO ADD A NEW 2-PHASE LINE/CABLE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
it.
the first end of the new line. With the mouse button held down,
move the cursor toward the spot where you want to place the other
end of the line. A new line symbol will appear with its far end moving
with the cursor.
series with this branch.
mouse button to attach the line to this node.
TO ADD A NEW 2-PHASE LINE/CABLE USING MENU COMMAND:
nodes. Then with the <Shift> key held down click the left button
Both bus or node symbol will turn dotted red when selected. The
first bus or node you select will be the From-Bus of the line model
and the second will be the To-Bus.
kV of the two terminal buses or nodes are not the same.

2-PHASE LINE/CABLE INPUT DATA:
3. Enter parameters.
For 2-phase lines, you must specify which phases are present. Click on
the "Phases" drop down list box and select the appropriate phases.
The other parameters of a 2-phase line are the same as those for the 3-phase
line. Please refer to the documentation for 3-phase lines for details.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
The New | 1-Phase Line/Cable command lets you add a new single phase line or cable between two
substation buses or distribution nodes of the same nominal kV.
TO ADD A NEW 1-PHASE LINE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
it.
Click the left mouse button on the one-line where you want to
place the first end of the new line. While holding the mouse button
down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to place
the other end of the line. A new line symbol will appear with its far
end moving with the cursor.
series with this branch.
same nominal kV, the node will be highlighted in red. You can release
the mouse button to attach the line to this node.
TO ADD A NEW 1-PHASE LINE/CABLE USING MENU COMMAND:
nodes. Then with the <Shift> key held down click the left button
Both bus or node symbols will turn dotted red when selected. The first
bus or node you select will be the From-Bus of the line model and the
second will be the To-Bus.
kV of the two terminal buses or nodes are not the same.

1- PHASE LINE/CABLE INPUT DATA:
3. Enter parameters.
For single-phase lines, you must specify which phase is being used. Click
on the "Phases" drop down list box and select the appropriate phase.
The other parameters of a single-phase line are the same as those for the 3-phase
line, except:
a) When inputting the line impedance manually, make sure that your
calculation logic has taken the return path into account, and
b) There are no zero- or negative-sequence parameters.
Please refer to the documentation for 3-phase lines for details on
other parameters.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER-BALANCED COMMAND
The New | 2-Winding Transformer-Balanced command lets you add a new 2-winding transformer between
two buses. Use this balanced model for large 3-phase transformer banks, or 3-phase transformers made
up of identical single-phase units. (See NEW | 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER-GENERAL COMMAND
for other transformer types.) A variety of winding configurations, including auto-transformers, are
supported. A balanced transformer may also have a load-tap changer, which controls voltage by moving
the tap.
TO ADD A NEW BALANCED 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Balanced 2-Winding Transformer on the Device Palette
Click on the New Balanced 2-Winding Transformer button
on the Device Palette. The cursor will become a cross with a
transformer symbol attached to it.
2b. Drag-and-Drop the new transformer
the first terminal of the new transformer. With the mouse button
held down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to
place the other terminal. A new transformer symbol will appear with
its second terminal moving with the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing node or bus will attach the transformer to
the node. Clicking on the end segment of an existing branch will place the
new transformer in series with this branch.
Release the mouse button where you want to place the second
terminal. A dialog box will appear asking you for the transformer data.
Note: When you move the transformers second terminal over an
existing node, the node will be highlighted in red. You can release the
mouse button to attach the transformer to this node.
TO ADD A NEW BALANCED 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the two terminal buses.
Click the left mouse button once on one of the terminal buses and
then with the <Shift> key held down, click the left button once on
the other terminal bus.
Both bus symbols will turn dotted red when selected.
2b. Select the Network | New | 2-Winding Transformer-Balanced command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the transformer data.

BALANCED 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER INPUT DATA:
The winding configuration is shown graphically at the upper left corner.

The terminal buses of the transformer are listed immediately below. The
left and right terminal buses correspond to the left and right windings in
the picture. In this example, the wye winding is connected to the node
1201BusA, and the delta winding is connected to the node NW Sub.
Click on the "Swap sides" button to swap the two terminal buses as
needed to match the terminal buses with the winding
configurations.
When you press the Swap sides button, the program swaps the tap kV
along with the terminal bus names. The neutral impedances are not
swapped. You may need to change them if they are not zero.
3. Input the transformer parameters.
Name: A 12-character name for the transformer.
3-Ph kVA: Three-phase kVA rating of the transformer. The
transformer impedances are based on the first kVA rating.
The other two kVA ratings are for overload checking
only.
ID: One character circuit identifier. This is used to
differentiate between parallel transformers.
Z+: Positive-sequence impedance in per unit, based
on transformer 3-phase kVA rating and tap
voltages.
Zo: Zero-sequence impedance in per unit, based on
transformer 3-phase kVA rating and tap voltages. Z+ and
Zo should be identical for transformers made up of single-
phase banks. For wye-delta transformers, Zo is the zero-
sequence
impedance to ground, seen at the wye-side of the
transformer.
Grounding Impedances: Grounding impedances in ohms. Do not
multiply by 3.
Tap kV: The tap voltages are set initially to the nominal kV (line-
to- line) of the terminal buses. The tap voltages affect the
turns ratio of the transformer and the short circuit
impedances.

Note: The tap kVs for a balanced transformer are always measured line
to line, regardless of the winding configurations.

4. Select a winding configuration.
1. Wye-Wye, with individually grounded neutrals.
2. Wye-Wye, with connected neutrals.
3. Wye-Delta, delta lags.
4. Wye-Delta, delta leads.
5. Delta-Delta.
6. Auto-Wye.
7. Auto-Delta.
8. Zigzag-Wye, wye leads.
9. Zigzag-Wye, wye lags.
10. Zigzag-Delta, no phase shift.
Select a winding configuration by scrolling through the selections in
the graphical drop-down list box and chose one by clicking the left
mouse button once on the picture.
5. Click on LTC button to change parameters of the load tap changer.
An LTC dialog box will appear.
6. Select the location of the movable tap.

Click on none if the transformer does not have moveable taps and skip to
step 12.
Otherwise, select one of the two transformer terminals.
7. Select the controlled bus, which can be either the Bus 1 or Bus 2.
The program will move the tap to regulate the magnitude of the voltage
at this bus. The controlled bus cannot be a substation bus or a node that
has a synchronous machine under constant-voltage control.
8. Specify the target voltage in per-unit.
9. Specify the input to the LTC controller.
There are four choices: Average of the phase voltages, voltage of phase
a, voltage of phase b, and voltage of phase c.
The first is the default.

10. Specify the tap limits of the transformer.
Center: Center tap position in kV. This value should be close to
the nominal kV of the movable-tap terminal.
Max: Maximum tap in per unit based on the center kV.
Min: Minimum tap in per unit based on the center kV.
Step size: Step size in per unit based on the center kV. Enter zero if
continuous.
11. Enter the compensation impedance in ohms in 'Zcomp'.
The compensating impedance tricks the tap changer into regulating the
voltage at a bus further downstream, instead of the voltage at one of its
terminals. This is done by regulating the quantity (V-Zcomp * I) where V is
the local voltage, Zcomp is the line impedance between the regulator and the
controlled bus downstream, and I is the current flowing through the tap
changer.
12. Press OK to close the LTC properties dialog box.
13. Enter transformer reliability parameters.
Click on the "Reliability" button.
The Reliability dialog box will appear.

Failure frequency: Average number of faults per year.
Mean repair time: Repair time in hours per incident.
15. Press OK to close the transformer properties dialog box.
A new 2-winding transformer symbol will be shown connecting the two
terminal buses.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER-GENERAL COMMAND
The New | 2-Winding Transformer-General command lets you add a new 2-winding transformer between
two buses. Use this model, instead of the balanced transformer model, for:
Transformers that are made up of single-phase banks of different rating and/or impedances,
Transformers with open-wye and open-delta configurations, and
Two-phase and single-phase transformers.
TO ADD A NEW GENERAL 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New General 2-Winding Transformer on the Device Palette
Click on the New General 2-Winding Transformer button on

the Device Palette. The cursor will become a cross with a transformer
symbol attached to it.
place the other terminal. A new transformer symbol will appear with
its second terminal moving with the cursor.
TO ADD A NEW GENERAL 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the two terminal buses.
Click the left mouse button once on one of the terminal buses and
then with the <Shift> key held down, click the left button once on
the other terminal bus.
2b. Select the Network | New | 2-Winding Transformer-General command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the transformer data.

GENERAL 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER INPUT DATA:
The winding configuration is shown graphically at the upper left

corner. The three winding banks are labeled 1, 2 and 3. The
terminal buses of the transformer are listed immediately below. The
left and right terminal buses correspond to the left and right windings
in the configuration box.
Press the "Swap sides" button to swap the two terminal buses as
needed to match the winding configuration.
When you press the Swap sides button, DistriView will swap the tap
kVs along with the terminal bus names. The program will not swap the
neutral impedances. You may need to change them if they are not zero.
ID: One character circuit identifier. This is used most
commonly to differentiate between parallel
transformers.
Grounding Impedances: Grounding impedances in ohms. Do not
multiply by 3.
1. Wye-Wye, with individually grounded neutrals.
2. Wye-Wye, with connected grounded neutrals.
3. Wye-Delta, delta lags.
4. Wye-Delta, delta leads.
5. Delta-Delta.
the graphical drop-down list box and chose one by clicking the

You need not use all three banks that are shown in the drawing. By
selectively turning on and off the different banks (see instructions in
item 5 below), you can create any one of a large number of possible
configurations, including broken-wye, broken-delta, and single-phase
transformers.
5. Enter the following parameters for each bank.
kVA: The kVA rating of the winding bank. The transformer
impedance is based on the first kVA rating. Enter 0.0
or unmark the In use check box if this winding is not
present. The other two kVA ratings are for overload
checking purposes only.
In Use: Unmark this checkbox if this bank does not exist.
Tap kV: The tap voltages are set initially to nominal winding
voltages. Unlike balanced transformers, the tap kVs for a
general transformer are the actual winding voltages in
kV.
Z: The winding impedance in per unit, based on
transformer kVA rating (the first kVA value) and the tap
kV.

8. Press OK.
The selected bus symbols will remain highlighted. A new 2-winding
general transformer symbol will be shown.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER COMMAND
The New | 3-Winding Transformer command lets you add a new 3-winding
transformer. TO ADD A NEW 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER FROM THE DEVICE
PALETTE:
1a. Select New 3-Winding Transformer on the Device Palette
Click on the New 3-Winding Transformer button on the Device
Palette. The cursor will become a cross with a transformer symbol
attached to it.
place the second terminal. A new 3-winding transformer symbol will
appear with its second terminal moving with the cursor. The third
terminal will be shown connected to a new node.
Note: After completing data input for the new transformer, you can
connect its terminal to any existing node having the same kV using the
Merge Bus command.
TO ADD A NEW 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the three terminal buses.
Click the left mouse button once on the first terminal bus. Then,
with the <Shift> key held down, click the left mouse button once on
the second bus and once on the third bus.
Note: The third bus you click on should always be the tertiary bus. The
order in which you click on the first two buses is important only if you are
making a wye-delta connection. In that case, the bus that is connected to
the wye winding must be selected first.
The three bus symbols will turn dotted red when selected.
2b. Select the Network | New | 3-Winding Transformer command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the new 3-
winding transformer.

3-WINDING TRANSFORMER INPUT DATA:
The names of the three terminal buses and its nominal tap kV are listed below
the graphical drop-down list box. See Section 4.16 for the definitions of the
transformer parameters.

3-Ph kVA: The 3-phase kVA rating of the transformer. For 3-
winding transformers this is the rating of the highest rated
winding. The transformer impedances are based on this
kVA rating. The other two kVA ratings are for overload
checking purposes only.
Ckt ID: A single-character circuit identifier that is most
commonly used to distinguish between parallel
transformers.
Tap kVs: The tap voltages are set initially to the nominal kV (line-
to- line) of the three terminal buses. The tap voltages affect
the turn ratio of the transformer and the short circuit
impedance.
the graphical drop-down list box and chose one by clicking the left
Following configurations are supported:
1. Wye-Wye-Wye.
2. Auto-Wye-Wye.
3. Wye-Wye-Delta, with delta lags.

4. Wye-Wye-Delta, with delta leads.
5. Auto Wye-Delta, with delta lags.
6. Auto Wye-Delta, with delta leads.
7. Wye-Delta-Delta, with delta lags.
8. Wye-Delta-Delta, with delta leads.
9. Delta-Delta-Delta.
5. Input the transformers positive-sequence impedances.
Zps, Zpt, Zst: Positive-sequence short-circuit impedance in per unit,
based on the transformer rated kVA and the tap voltages.
6. Estimate the transformers zero-sequence impedances based on
the positive-sequence values.
Press the Estimate from + sequence parameters button. The program will
give you a set of zero-sequence impedances that are equivalent to the
positive- sequence values you entered. This is the preferred method of
entering the
zero-sequence impedance if there no zero-sequence test information available.
Note: the zero-sequence values may not be the same as their positive-
sequence counterpart. As an example, the short-circuit impedance Zps is not
equal in value to its zero-sequence counterpart, Zps0. The reason is that in
testing for Zps, there is only one short circuit to ground (namely, the
secondary terminal), but in testing for Zps0, there are two short circuit to
ground (namely, the secondary terminal and the tertiary delta winding.)
7. Input the transformers zero-sequence impedances.
Skip this step if you have estimated the zero-sequence parameters in the
last step.
For wye-wye-delta transformers: You have the option of entering either the
short circuit impedances or the T-model impedances. Click on one of the
radio buttons: Short circuit impedance, or Classical T model
impedances.
If you elected to enter short impedances, the values you need to enter are:
Zps0, Zpt0, Zst0: Zero-sequence short-circuit impedance in per unit,
based on the transformer rated kVA and the tap voltages.
If you elected to enter the T-model impedances, the values are:
Zpm0, Zsm0, Zmg0: p refers to Bus1, s refers to Bus2, m refers

to the fictitious middle bus, and g refers to ground.
These impedances are all in per unit, based on the
transformer rated kVA and the tap voltages. Zpm0 is often
negative.
For wye-delta-delta transformers, only a single zero-sequence
impedance, Zps0, is required as input. The value of Zpt0 is set equal to
Zps0, and Zst0 is assumed to be infinite.
For delta-delta-delta transformers, no zero-sequence impedance is
required. They are all assumed to be infinite.

8. Input the grounding impedances in ohms.
Depending on the winding configuration, you may enter up to three
neutral grounding impedances. The connection of these impedances is
shown clearly on the winding diagram.
Zg1, Zg2, Zgn: Grounding impedance in ohms.
9. Click on LTC button to change parameters of the load tap changer.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the LTC parameters.
10. Select the location of movable taps. Click on:

Click on none if the transformer does not have moveable taps and skip to
step 16.
Otherwise, select one of the three transformer terminals.
11. Select the controlled bus, which can be either Bus 1, Bus 2 or Bus 3.
The program will move the tap to regulate the magnitude of the voltage
at this bus. The controlled bus cannot be a substation bus or a node that
has a synchronous machine under constant-voltage control.
12. Specify the target voltage in per-unit.
13. Specify the input to the LTC controller.
There are four choices: Average of the phase voltages, voltage of phase
a, voltage of phase b, and voltage of phase c.
The first is the default.
14. Specify the tap limits of the transformer.
Center: Center tap position in kV. This value should be close to
the nominal kV of the movable-tap terminal.
Max: Maximum tap in per unit based on the center kV.
Min: Minimum tap in per unit based on the center kV.
Step size: Step size in per unit based on the center kV. Enter zero if
continuous.

15. Enter the compensation impedance in ohms in 'Zcomp'.
The compensating impedance tricks the tap changer into regulating the
voltage at a bus further downstream, instead of the voltage at one of its
terminals. This is done by regulating the quantity (V-Zcomp * I) where V is
the local voltage, Zcomp is the line impedance between the regulator and the
controlled bus downstream, and I is the current flowing through the tap
changer.
16. Press OK to close the LTC properties dialog box.

19. Press OK.
A new 3-winding transformer symbol will be shown.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | VOLTAGE REGULATOR COMMAND
The New | Voltage Regulator command lets you add a new voltage regulator or booster between two
nodes of the same nominal kV. Each regulator/booster can have up to three banks connected in a wye or
delta configuration. The rating and impedance of the banks need not be the same. Fifteen different
winding configurations are possible; including grounded and ungrounded wye, closed delta, open delta,
and single- phase regulators that are connected line-to-neutral or line-to-line.
During a voltage-drop simulation, DistriView adjusts the boost/buck position of a voltage regulator to
control voltage. The program automatically adjusts the impedance and current rating depending on the
boost/buck position. Please see APPENDIX D: VOLTAGE REGULATOR MODELING for
more information on regulator modeling.
A booster is a regulator with all the taps locked. DistriView simulates the booster much the same way as a
regular 2-winding transformer. The impedances and current ratings of a booster are taken directly from user
input. They are not automatically adjusted as a function of the boost/buck setting.
TO ADD A NEW VOLTAGE REGULATOR OR BOOSTER FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Voltage Regulator on the Device Palette
Click on the New Voltage Regulator button on the Device Palette.
The cursor will become a cross with a transformer symbol attached to it.
2b. Drag-and-Drop the new voltage regulator/booster
the first terminal of the regulator or booster. With the mouse button
place the other terminal. A new voltage regulator symbol will appear
with its second terminal moving with the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing node or bus will attach the voltage regulator
to the node. Clicking on the end segment of an existing branch will place the
new regulator in series with this branch.
terminal. A dialog box will appear asking you for the voltage regulator
data.
Note: When you move the second terminal over an existing node having
the same kV, the node will be highlighted in red. You can release the
mouse button to attach the voltage regulator to this node.
For a booster, we recommend that you make the first terminal of
the booster the source-side node, and the other termianl the load-
side node.
TO ADD A NEW VOLTAGE REGULATOR OR BOOSTER USING MENU COMMAND:
The bus or node symbols will turn dotted red when selected.
For a booster, we recommend that you click first on the source-side
node, then on the load-side node.

2b. Select the Network | New | Voltage Regulator command.
Note: The Voltage Regulator menu item is dimmed and cannot be
activated if the nominal kVs of the two terminal buses are not the same.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the voltage regulator data.
VOLTAGE REGULATOR INPUT DATA:
The dialog box for a voltage regulator is shown below. The dialog box for a booster is
documented separately.
1. Make sure the check box labeled Locked near the top is not marked.
2. Enter the name of the voltage regulator in 'Name'.
3. Select one of the fifteen winding configurations in the graphical
drop- down list box.
4. For each bank, enter the following information.
Nameplate kVA rating: The nameplate rating of a regulator is equal to
the rated current times the maximum change in voltage
between the two terminals. (Do not confuse this with the
pass-through rating, which is equal to the rated current
times the nominal tap voltage.)
Current rating in amperes: DistriView uses this value to check for
overloading. For a regulator, the value you enter should be
the current rating at the maximum boost/buck position.
The program will automatically adjust this value as
function of the boost/buck position. See APPENDIX D:
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR MODELING.

% Position: Leave this value at 0 for a regulator. Enter a positive value
for a booster. Note: Following a voltage-drop study, the
%- position of a regulator tells you its boost/buck position
in the solution. A positive value means boost. A negative
value means buck.
% Boost and % Buck: The amount of possible voltage rise and
reduction for a regulator. Both numbers must be 0 or
positive. Typical values are 10% boost and 10% buck.
%/Step: Enter 0 for a continuous controller. Otherwise, enter the
percentage change in voltage per discrete step. Typical
value is 0.625% (i.e., 10% boost in 16 steps, and 10%
buck
in 16 steps).
Voltage target: The desired voltage magnitude in per-unit for a regulator.
Impedance (Z) in per-unit, based on the nameplate kVA and the
nominal voltage. For a regulator, the value you enter
here should be the impedance at the maximum boost/buck
position. Typical values range from 0.0003 per-unit to
0.0005 per-unit. DistriView will automatically adjust the
impedance of the regulator for other boost/buck positions.
See APPENDIX D: VOLTAGE REGULATOR
MODELING.
5. Specify which terminal of the regulator is to be regulated.
You can specify which of the two terminal nodes is the side that is being
monitored and regulated. The default -- and the recommended -- option
is to Let the program decide. Under this option, the program bases its
decision on the direction of the kW flow: The terminal to be regulated is
the downstream side. When the power flow is 5 watts or less, the
program regulates the side that is farthest from the substation.
Alternatively you can explicitly select the terminal to be regulated by
the regulator. We recommend that you select the downstream side.
6. Enter the compensation impedance in ohms in 'Compensation (Ohm)'.
The compensating impedance tricks the voltage regulator into regulating
the voltage at a bus further downstream, instead of the voltage at one of its
terminals. For a 3-phase regulator this is done by regulating the quantity (V-
ZcompI) where V is the local voltage (according to your selection in step 7),
Zcomp is the line impedance per conductor between the regulator and the
controlled bus downstream, and I is the phase current flowing through the
voltage regulator. In this dialog box you must enter Zcomp is in physical ohms.
Leave the values at zero if the line-drop compensator is not in use.
The line-drop compensation for some regulators is specified in volts, instead
of ohms. The relationship between the two quantities is given by this
formula:
Vcomp = Zcomp CTp / Npt
where Vcomp is the line-drop compensation in secondary volts, CTp is the
primary rating of the current transformer, and Npt is the potential transformer
ratio. For example, for a regulator with CT ratio of 200/5 and PT ratio of
7960/120, CTp is 200 amps and Npt is equal to 66.3 (the ratio of 7960/120).
For an open-delta regulator made up of two single-phase units connected
line- to-line, the voltage measured by each single-phase unit is the line-to-line
voltage, and the current is the phase current measured at the open end. To

make this work correctly in practice, one has to apply a plus and minus 30-
degree adjustment to Zcomp for the lag and lead units of the regulator. Please
note that this angle adjustment is not necessary when you enter Zcomp in the
regulator dialog box; the program logic will account for angle shift
automatically.
The program logic applies similar angle adjustment to a single-phase
regulator that is connected line-to-line. Again, do not apply any angle
adjustments to Zcomp.
7. Enter regulator reliability parameters.

9. Press OK to close the 'Voltage Regulator' dialog box.
A new voltage regulator symbol will be shown.

BOOSTER INPUT DATA:
1. Make sure the check box labeled Locked near the top is marked.
2. Enter the name of the voltage regulator in 'Name'.
3. Select one of the fifteen winding configurations in the graphical
drop- down list box.
4. For each bank, enter the following information.
Nameplate kVA rating: The nameplate rating of a regulator is equal to
the rated current times the maximum change in voltage
between the two terminals. (Do not confuse this with the
pass-through rating, which is equal to the rated current
times the nominal tap voltage.)
Current rating in amperes: DistriView uses this value to check for
overloading. For a booster, the program will use the value
you enter here without any adjustment.
% Position: Enter a positive value for a booster. This will cause Bus2
of the booster to have a higher voltage than Bus1.
Impedance (Z) in per-unit, based on the nameplate kVA and the
nominal voltage. For a booster, the program will use the
value you enter without any adjustment.
5. Enter regulator reliability parameters.


7. Press OK to close the 'Voltage Regulator' dialog box.
A new booster symbol will be shown.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | SWITCH COMMAND
The New | Switch command lets you add a new switch between two substation buses or distribution
nodes of the same nominal kV.
TO ADD A NEW SWITCH FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New Switch on the Device Palette
Click on the New Switch button on the Device Palette. The cursor
will become a cross with a transformer symbol attached to it.
2b. Drag-and-Drop the new switch
the first terminal of the switch. While holding the mouse button
down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to place
the other terminal. A new switch symbol will appear with its second
terminal moving with the cursor.
Note: Clicking on an existing node or bus will attach the switch to the
node. Clicking on the end segment of an existing branch will place the new
switch in series with this branch.
terminal. A dialog box will appear asking you for the switch data.
Note: When you move the second terminal over an existing node having
the same kV, the node will be highlighted in red. You can release the
mouse button to attach the switch to this node.
TO ADD A NEW SWITCH USING MENU COMMAND:
2b. Select the Network | New | Switch command.
Note: The Switch menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the
nominal kVs of the two terminal buses or nodes are not the same.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the switch data.

SWITCH INPUT DATA:
3. Enter the switch name in 'Name'.

Up to 12 characters may be used for the switch
name.
4. Enter the switch current rating in amperes.
The program uses this rating to check for overloads in voltage drop
studies.
5. Specify switch position.
Press 'Open All' to open the switch.
Press Close All' to close the switch.
Alternatively, click on the checkboxes labeled Phase a, Phase b
and Phase c to toggle the switch position for the three phases
individually. A check mark means the switch for that phase is in the closed
position.
6. Enter a memo with 512 characters.
7. Press OK to close the 'Switch Info' dialog box.
A new switch symbol will be
shown.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | 3-WAY SWITCH COMMAND
The New | 3-Way Switch command lets you add a new 3-way switch between three substation buses or
distribution nodes of the same nominal kV. Within a 3-way switch object there are three internal switches
that connect the three bus terminals to a central point. You can toggle these three internal switches in
DistriView, as is possible in the physical device. The switching configuration of the 3-way switch is
shown graphical on the one-line diagram.
TO ADD A NEW 3-WAY SWITCH FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Select New 3-Way Switch on the Device Palette
Click on the New 3-Way Switch button on the Device Palette. The
cursor will become a cross with a 3-way switch symbol attached to it.
2b. Drag-and-Drop the new 3-way switch
the first terminal of the new switch. With the mouse button held
down, move the cursor toward the spot where you want to place the
second terminal. A new 3-way switch symbol will appear with its
second terminal moving with the cursor. The third terminal will be
shown connected to a new node.
Note: Clicking on an existing node or bus will attach the switch to the
node. Clicking on the end segment of an existing branch will place the new
switch in series with this branch.
terminal. A dialog box will appear asking you for the switch data.
Note: When you move the second terminal over an existing node of the
mouse button to attach the switch to this node.
Note: After completing data input for the new switch, you can connect its
terminal to any existing node having the same kV using the Merge Bus
command.
TO ADD A NEW 3-WAY SWITCH USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the three terminal buses.
The three terminal buses must have the same nominal kV.
Click the left mouse button once on the first terminal bus. Then,
with the <Shift> key held down, click the left mouse button once on
the second bus and once on the third bus.
Note: The order in which you highlight the three terminals is
unimportant for a 3-way switch.
The three bus symbols will turn dotted red when selected.
2b. Select the Network | New | 3-Way Switch command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the parameters of the new 3-way
switch.

3-WAY SWITCH INPUT DATA:
3. Enter the switch name in 'Name'.

Up to 12 characters may be used for the switch name.
4. Enter the switch current rating in amperes.
The program uses this rating to check for overloads in voltage drop
studies.
5. Specify switch position. Click on either 'Open' or 'Close'.
These are the positions of the three internal switches, which connect the
three terminal nodes to a fictitious center point within the switch object.
You can see these internal switches in the graphic symbol of the 3-way
switch.
7. Press OK to close the 'Switch Info' dialog box.
A new 3-way switch symbol will be shown.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
NEW | ANNOTATION COMMAND
The New | Annotation command lets you add an annotation anywhere on the one-line diagram. You can
use the annotations to label different portions of the feeder or to highlight certain features and
modifications that warrant special attention. You can also use the annotations as temporary labels for
printing and delete them immediately afterwards. The user interface for annotations is the same as that for
the network elements: You can move an annotation with the mouse; you can highlight it by clicking on it
with the left mouse button, and you can change it by double-clicking. The annotations are saved within
the .DTV file; therefore, they stay on the one-line diagram once you created them. To execute this
command you must first select the location where you want the annotation to appear.
You can attach one or more annotations to any object on the one-line diagram. When you move the
object, the program will automatically move the attached annotations. Please see documentation for the
Diagram | ATTACH/DETACH ANNOTATION TO/FROM OBJECT COMMAND for more information.
TO ADD A NEW ANNOTAION FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Annotation button on the Device Palette. The
cursor will become a cross with an annotation symbol attached to it.
2a. Click the left mouse button on the one-line where you want to place the
annotation.
A dialog box will appear to let you enter the new annotation.
TO ADD A NEW ANNOTATION USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the annotation location.
Click the left mouse button once on the desired location of the new
annotation.
2b. Select the Network | New | Annotation command.
ANNOTATION DATA:

3. Type in the annotation in the Header box.
The header can have up to 50 characters. This part of the annotation will
appear on the one-line diagram.
4. Choose the text color from the drop-down color menu.
The header text will be drawn with this color on the one-line diagram.
5. Enter additional text in the memo field.
The memo box allows you to type in additional comments of up to 510
characters, but it will not be shown on the one-line diagram. This feature
allows you to keep additional notes while keeping the one-line diagram
relatively clutter-free. You know there is a hidden memo associated with an
annotation when you see the ellipsis () drawn after the annotation header.
6. Press OK to close the annotation dialog box.
The annotation will appear at the location you selected with the mouse.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE COMMAND
The Delete command under the Network menu lets you delete a piece of network equipment or an
annotation. A separate Delete command under the Relay menu is used to delete circuit breakers and
protective devices.
TO DELETE A NETWORK OBJECT:
1. Click the left mouse button once on the piece of equipment or
annotation that you want deleted.
The equipment symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the Network | Delete command.
IF YOU ARE DELETING A SUBSTATION BUS OR NODE:
When you delete a node or substation bus, DistriView automatically
deletes all equipment attached to it. This includes the synchronous and
induction machines, load, shunt and grounding bank, as well as all the
connected branches. The protective devices on the connected branches
will be deleted, too. The deleted equipment will disappear from the one-
line diagram.
IF YOUR ARE DELETING A LOAD, GENERATOR, SHUNT,
GROUND BANK, LINE, SWITCH, TRANSFORMER, REGULATOR
OR ANNOTATION:
The selected equipment will disappear from the one-line diagram. If you
are deleting a branch, the program will also delete the protective devices
that are on it.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE ALL IN REGION COMMAND
The Delete All In Region command lets you delete all the objects that are within a rectangular region you
trace with the mouse.
TO DELETE NETWORK OBJECTS WITHIN A REGION:
1. Change the zoom setting if needed.
Change the zoom setting with the zoom slider control (on the toolbar)
until the screen displays the entire region you want to delete.
2. Trace a rectangular region on the one-line diagram.
Press the left mouse button at one corner of the region and drag the
mouse to the region opposite corner.
The selected region will have a border drawn with the dotted red pen.
3. Select the Network | Delete All in Region command.
Note: This command is dimmed if there are no nodes or substation buses
inside the region.
DistriView will delete all the nodes and substation buses that are inside
the region you define. The program will also delete equipment that is
attached to the deleted nodes and buses, even if the symbols of the
equipment are not entirely inside the region. The annotations within the
region will be deleted, also.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
DELETE ALL OUTSIDE REGION COMMAND
The Delete All Outside Region command lets you delete all the objects that are outside of a rectangular
region you trace with the mouse.
TO DELETE NETWORK OBJECTS OUTSIDE OF A REGION:
Change the zoom setting with the zoom slider control (on the toolbar)
until the screen displays the entire region you want to exclude from
deletion.
Press the left mouse button at one corner of the region and drag the
mouse to the region opposite corner.
3. Select the Network | Delete All Outside Region command.
Note: This command is dimmed if there are no nodes or substation buses
outside the region.
DistriView will delete all the nodes and substation buses that are outside
the region you define. The program will also delete equipment that is
attached to the deleted nodes and buses, even if the symbols of the
equipment are not entirely outside of the region. The annotations
outside the region will be deleted, also.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
RESTORE | BUS COMMAND
The Restore | Bus command lets you restore a bus that was deleted earlier in the session. Equipment that
was deleted in previous sessions cannot be restored.
Note: If you just deleted the bus, you can alternatively restore it with the Tools | Undo command.
TO RESTORE A BUS THAT WAS DELETED:
1. Select the Network | Restore | Bus command.
A dialog box will appear. The list box in the dialog box will display in
alphabetical order all the buses that can be restored.
2. Select bus to be restored by clicking once on its name.

If there are no buses to restore the OK button will be dimmed.
3. Check the appropriate boxes to restore the loads, generators and
shunt, and/or the branches connected to the bus.
4. Press OK.
The dialogue box will disappear and the bus with its associated
equipment selected will be restored and displayed on the one line
diagram in dotted red.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
RESTORE | GEN., LOAD, SHUNT COMMAND
The Restore Gen., Load, Shunt command lets you restore a generator, load, shunt or ground bank that was
deleted earlier in the session. Equipment that was deleted in previous sessions cannot be restored.
Note: If you just deleted the object, you can alternatively restore it with the Tools | Undo command.
TO RESTORE A GENERATOR, LOAD, SHUNT OR GROUNDING BANK THAT WAS DELETED:
1. Select the Network | Restore | Gen., Load, or Shunt command.
A dialog box will appear. The list box in the dialog box will display in
all the generators, loads, shunts and ground banks that were deleted.
2. Select an object to restore by clicking once on it. Press Restore.

The restored generator, load or shunt will be drawn on the one-line
diagram. The symbol will be highlighted.
If the node to which the object is attached is not active, you get the
following error message when you issue the restore command.
You must exit this dialog box and execute the Network | Restore | Bus
command to restore the bus.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
RESTORE | BRANCH COMMAND
The Restore | Branch command lets you restore a branch that was deleted earlier in the session.
Equipment that was deleted in previous sessions cannot be restored.
Note: If you just deleted the branch, you can alternatively restore it with the Tools | Undo command.
TO RESTORE A BRANCH:
1. Select the Network | Restore | Branch command.
A dialog box will appear. The list box in the dialog box will display in alphabetical
order all the branches that can be restored.
2. Select a branch to restore by clicking once on its name. Click

on Restore.
The restored branch will be drawn on the one-line diagram. The symbol
will be highlighted.
If one or more terminal buses to which the branch is connected are
not active, you get the following error message when you issue the
restore command.
You must exit this dialog box and execute the Network | Restore | Bus
command to restore the bus or buses, as needed.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CONVERT | LINE TO SWITCH COMMAND
The Convert | Line to Switch command converts a 3-phase line with very small impedance to a switch.
The line must have a resistance of 0.0 and a reactance of 0.001 per-unit or less. Also, the line cannot have
any section loads or protective equipment.
TO CONVERT A LINE TO A SWITCH:
1. Select a line.
Click the left mouse button once on the line you want to convert to a
switch.
The line will become highlighted.
2. Select the Network | Convert Line To Switch command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the line
resistance is not equal to zero, or one of the following is true: (1) the
line reactance is not less than or equal to 0.001 per unit, or (2) there is
a relay groups on the line, or (3) there is some section load connected.
The line symbol will change to a switch symbol and the switch will
acquire the line's name.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CONVERT | 2-PHASE LINE TO 3-PHASE COMMAND
The Convert | 2-Phase Line to 3-Phase command is designed to convert one or more 2-phase line or
cable to 3-phase. Before executing this command you must select and highlight a 2-phase line or cable
in the one-line diagram.
TO CONVERT ONE OR MORE 2-PHASE LINE TO 3-PHASE:
1. Select a 2-phase line or cable.
Click the left mouse button once on the 2-phase line or cable that you
want to convert to 3-phase.
The branch will become highlighted.
2. Select the Network | Convert | 2-Phase Line to 3-Phase command.
3. Select option to change a single 2-phase line or a number of connected

2- phase lines.
Mark the top radio button to change just the selected branch.
Mark the bottom radio button to change the selected branch, as well
as all the connected 2-phase branches with the same phases.
The line impedances are updated automatically if you are using the
Construction method of data entry. The sequence impedances are
unchanged if you are using the Manual or Line Table method.
Press OK.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CONVERT | GENERATOR NODE TO SUBSTATION COMMAND
The Convert | Generator Node To Substation command converts a distribution node with a synchronous
machine to a substation bus.
DistriView voltage-drop algorithm requires a feeder to have at least one substation bus. This command is
used most often to convert a backup generator to a substation bus after the feeder has been disconnected
from the transmission network. It should be noted that once a synchronous generator is converted to a
substation bus, its kW setting is no longer in effect. The reason is that the substation bus must generate
the necessary real power to supply the feeder load plus loses, whatever that may be.
Another application of this command is to convert a generator bus to a substation bus after an ASPEN
OneLiner or Power Flow file has been read in under the File | Read OneLiner File command.
TO CONVERT A DISTRIBUTION NODE TO A SUBSTATION BUS:
1. Select a distribution node that has a synchronous generator or motor.
Click the left mouse button once on the generator node.
2. Select the Network | Convert | Generator Node To Substation command.
Note: The menu item will be dimmed and cannot be activated if there is
no synchronous machine attached to the node.
The synchronous-machine and the node symbol will disappear, and be
replaced by a substation-bus symbol. The substation bus will acquire the
distribution node's name and nominal kV. The Thevenin impedances
and voltage set point of the substation are set equal to those of the
synchronous machine.
3. Optional: Double-click on the substation bus to check the data.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CONVERT | SUBSTATION TO GENERATOR NODE COMMAND
The Convert | Substation to Generator Node command converts a substation bus to a node with a
synchronous machine. This command is the reverse of the Convert | Generator Node to Substation
command.
TO CONVERT A SUBSTATION BUS TO A GENRATOR NODE:
1. Select a substation bus.
Click the left mouse button once on the substation bus.
2. Select the Network | Convert | Substation to Generator Node command.
Note: The menu item will be dimmed and cannot be activated if the
substation bus is not highlighted.
The substation symbol will turn into a node with a synchronous machine
attached. The node will acquire the substation buss name and nominal
kV. The Thevenin impedances of the substation will become the
impedance of the synchronous machine.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
IN/OUT OF SERVICE COMMAND
The In/Out of Service command lets you take a piece of in-service equipment out of service, or put an out-
of-service equipment in service. Unlike deleted equipment, out-of-service equipment remains part of the
one-line diagram and can be put back in service at any time, even after the current session has ended. To
execute this command you must first select a piece of equipment.
Note: If you just took a piece of equipment in or out of service, you can alternatively restore it to its
original state with the Tools | Undo command.
TO TAKE A PIECE OF EQUIPMENT OUT OF SERVICE:
1. Select an in-service branch, generator, load, shunt, ground bank, fuse,
recloser or sectionalizer.
Click the left button once on the symbol of the piece of equipment
you want to take out of service.
The symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the Network | Take Out Of Service command.
Note: The menu item will be dimmed and cannot be activated if a bus is
selected.
The selected equipment will be taken out of service and the symbol will
be drawn with a dotted black line.
TO PUT IN SERVICE A PIECE OF EQUIPMENT:

1. Select an out-of-service branch, generator, load, shunt, ground
bank, fuse, recloser or sectionalizer that is out of service.
Click the left button once on the symbol of the piece of equipment
you want to put back in service.
2. Select the Network | Put In Service command.
Note: The 'Put in Service' menu item will not be available if the selected
equipment is already in service.
The selected equipment will be put back in service. The symbol will be
drawn in its normal style and color.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
TOGGLE SWITCH COMMAND
The Toggle Switch command changes the switch position from open to close, or vice versa. This
command works on both regular and 3-way switches.
TO TOGGLE A REGULAR SWITCH:
1. Select the switch.
Click the left mouse button once on the switch you want to toggle.
The switch symbol will become highlighted.
2. Select the Network | Toggle Switch command.
If any of the three phases is closed, the toggle command will cause
all three phases of switch to open.
If all three phases are open, the toggle command will cause all three
phases to close.
TO TOGGLE A 3-WAY SWITCH:

1. Click the left mouse button once on, or near, one of the three internal
switches of the 3-way switch object.
The entire switch symbol will become highlighted.
2. Select the Network | Toggle Switch command.
The program will change the position of the internal switch that is
nearest your mouse click of step 1.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
COPY COMMAND
The Copy command lets you copy into the Windows clipboard a network element, a protective device, or
a collection of network elements and protective devices in a selected region . You can later use the
Network | Paste command to create an identical object, or objects, at another part of the same file or in
another DistriView file.
TO COPY A DISTANCE OR AN OVERCURRENT RELAY IN A BREAKER/RELAY GROUP:
1. Double-click on a breaker/relay group to open it.
2. Select a relay by click on its name in the list box.
3. Press the Copy button in the dialog box.
TO COPY A NETWORK ELEMENT OR A BREAKER/RELAY GROUP, FUSE, RECLOSER,
SECTIONALIZER TO THE CLIPBOARD:
1. Select the object to be copied.
Click the left mouse button once on the protective device you want
copied.
The component symbol will turn dotted red when
selected.
2. Select the Network | Copy command.
The data for the selected object will be copied to the
clipboard.
Note: This command does not work on substation buses, nodes, or
annotations.
Note: This command does not copy any automatic-control set points.
For instance, when you copy a synchronous generator, the program will
reset the voltage set point to the default value.
TO COPY EQUIPMENT AND RELAYS IN A REGION TO THE CLIPBOARD:
1. Specify the region.
Drag with the right mouse button down to delineate a rectangular
region on the one-line diagram.
The region will be enclosed by a rectangle drawn with the dotted red
pen.
2. Select the Network | Copy Equipment in Region command.
The data for the selected region will be copied to the
clipboard.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
PASTE COMMAND
The Paste command lets you paste from the Windows clipboard a network element, a protective device,
or a collection of network elements and protective devices in a region. This command, in conjunction
with the Copy command, is designed to help you duplicate system components.
TO PASTE A DISTANCE OR OVERCURRENT RELAY INTO A BREAKER/RELAY GROUP:
1. Double-click on the destination breaker/relay group to open it.
2. Press the Paste button in the dialog box.
A dialog box of the pasted relay will appear. Please note that the relay
ID must be unique among relays in the same relay group.
Change the relay ID and other data as needed and click on the "OK"
button.
3. Press the Done button in breaker/relay group dialog box to close it.
TO PASTE A FUSE, RECLOSER OR SECTIONALIZER:
1. Click on the branch to which you want to paste the protective equipment.
You should click the mouse near the end of the branch to which you
want to paste the equipment.
2. Select the Network | Paste command.
The device symbol will appear on the one-line diagram.
3. Option: Open the dialog box of the pasted equipment and make sure
that it has the correct parameters.
TO PASTE A BREAKER/RELAY GROUP:
1. Click on the branch to which you want to paste the breaker/relay group.
You should click the mouse near the end of the branch to which you
want to paste the equipment.
The breaker/relay group symbol will appear on the one-line diagram.
The pasted breaker/relay group should contain the same overcurrent and
distance relays as the group that you copied previously.
3. Option: Open the dialog box of the breaker/relay group, as well as
those of the relays, to make sure that they have the correct parameters.
TO PASTE A NETWORK ELEMENT USING THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1. Click on the Paste button on the device palette. The cursor will
become a cross with a symbol of the copied element attached to it.
2. Use drag-drop technique to place the element to the desired location
on the one-line diagram.

TO PASTE A NETWORK ELEMENT ALTERNATIVE METHOD:
1. Select the destination node or branch by clicking on it with the left
mouse button.
Select a node or substation bus if you are pasting a synchronous or
induction machine, a spot load, a shunt, or a grounding bank.
Select two nodes (by clicking on the nodes with the <Shift> key held
down) if you are pasting a switch, a line, a 2-winding transformer, or a
voltage regulator.
Select three nodes (by clicking on the nodes with the <Shift> key
held down) if you are pasting a 3-winding transformer or a 3-way
switch.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if there is no
system component data in the clipboard or if there is an incompatibility
between the object in the clipboard and the objects you selected in step 1.
A symbol for the pasted equipment will appear at the location selected
above in Step 1.
3. Option: Open the dialog box of the pasted equipment and make sure
that it has the correct parameters.
This is especially important for LTC transformers, regulators, switched
capacitors and synchronous machines because DistriView will not copy the
automatic-control set points from one object to another.
TO PASTE EQUIPMENT AND RELAYS IN A REGION USING MENU COMMAND:
1. Click the mouse button at an empty spot on the one-line diagram.
This spot will become the center of the pasted equipment.
2. Select the Network | Paste Equipment command.
The pasted equipment will appear on the screen in a ghosted form.
You can move the equipment with the mouse. Clicking the mouse
outside of the ghosted area will finalize the pasting process.
Note: When necessary, the program will alter the name of pasted nodes
to avoid having multiple nodes with the same name and nominal kV.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
PASTE GENERATOR TO FEEDER COMMAND
The Paste Generator to Feeder command is designed to help you create a number of identical
synchronous machines on portion of a feeder, using data in the paste buffer. If the synchronous machines
already exist, this command can also be used to update the parameters of the machines with a single
command.
Before executing this command, you must copy the machine parameters to the paste buffer. See step 1
and 2 below.
TO COPY MACHINE PARAMETERS TO PASTE BUFFER AND DEFINE A PORTION OF
FEEDER:
1. Select a synchronous machine with the mouse.
The machine symbol will turn dotted red.
2. Select the Diagram | Copy command.
This command copies the machine parameters to the paste buffer.
3 Highlight a node, a line, a transformer or a regulator to define
the starting point of a segment of the feeder.
The symbol of the selected network equipment will turn dotted red.
TO CREATE GENERATORS ONTO PORTION OF A FEEDER:
4a. Select the Network | Paste Generator to Feeder command.
Mark the Create new synchronous machines radio button.

Mark the check box labeled At nodes of this nominal kV only and
enter the nominal kV in the edit box at the right if you wish to create
new machines at a certain voltage level only.
The program will not adding sychronous machines to buses that already
have one.
Press OK.
TO OVERWRITE GENERATOR PARAMETERS ON A PORTION OF A
FEEDER:
4b. Select the Network | Paste Generator to Feeder command.

Mark the Overwrite data of existing synchronous machines radio
button.
Mark the check box labeled At nodes of this nominal kV only and
enter the nominal kV in the edit box at the right if you wish to
overwrite the data of existing machines at a certain voltage level
only.
Press OK.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
CHANGE NOMINAL kV COMMAND
The Change Nominal kV command lets you change the nominal kV of one or more nodes that are
connected through lines, cables, voltage regulators and switches. Depending on the options you specify,
the program will also modify the impedances and tap voltages of the network elements that are connected
to the affected nodes.
TO CHANGE THE NOMINAL kV OF A NODE OR SUBSTATION BUS:
1. Select a bus by clicking the left mouse button once on its symbol.
The bus symbol will turn dotted red when selected. Your selection will
define a set of buses that are connected via distribution lines, voltage
regulators and switches. The nominal kV of these buses will be changed
by this command.
2. Select the Network | Change Nominal kV command.
A dialog box will appear to let you specify the new nominal kV and
whether or not to modify the network impedances and transformer taps.
The number of affected buses is shown at the top.
3. Press the "Bus List" Button to see a list of buses that will be
affected by this command.
4. Input the new nominal kV in the edit box.
5. Specify update options on PU Impedances (excluding those
of transformer).
This option will affect all the network elements (generators, shunts,
loads, distribution lines and switches) that are connected to one or more
of the affected buses. None of these options will automatically change
the MW and MVAR of the loads.
Do not change: Press this button if you want the program to
leave the per-unit impedances of lines,
generators and shunts unchanged.
Update automatically for the new nominal kV : Press this button if
you want the program to recalculate the per-
unit impedances for the new nominal
kV. The program will scale the per-unit
impedances of lines, generators and shunts
by the ratio (kVold/kVnew)**2.

Update manually one by one: Click this button if you want to change
the parameters for each piece of
equipment by hand. A series of Info dialog
boxes will appear to let you modify the
parameters.
6. Specify update options on Transformer taps.
This option will affect all the 2- winding transformers that are connected
to one or more of the affected buses. None of these options will
automatically change the per-unit impedance of the transformers.
Do not change: Click this button if you want the program to
NOT change the transformer tap voltages.
Update automatically for the new nominal kV: Click this button if
you want the program to automatically
reset the transformer tap voltages to the
new nominal kV, keeping the same per unit
value.
Update manually one by one: Click this button if you want to change
the tap voltages and the per-unit
impedances for each transformer by hand.
A series of Info dialog boxes will appear to
let you modify the transformer parameters.
7. Press OK.
The program will change the nominal kV of the affected buses.
Depending on the options you specified, the program will automatically
update the per-unit impedances and transformer tap voltages, or will
display a series of Info dialog boxes to let you update them manually.
Note: The default option is to have the program 1) adjust the per-unit
impedances of generators, shunts and distribution lines automatically
for the new nominal kV, and 2) not change the transformer taps, the
per-unit impedances of transformers, the MW and MVAR of loads. With
these options, the fault impedances will remain the same before and
after the nominal kV changes.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
SPLIT BUS COMMAND
The Split Bus command lets you split a substation bus or distribution node into two. To execute this
command, the bus symbol must be either a horizontal or vertical bar.
TO SPLIT A BUS IN TWO:
1. Change the bus symbol from a dot to a bar, if needed.
2. Edit the one-line diagram such the attached spot loads, shunts,
and branches are grouped at opposite ends of the bus symbol.
Use the mouse to rearrange the attached loads, shunts, grounding banks,
generators and branches such that all the equipment that is to remain
with the existing bus is on one side of the bus symbol, and equipment to
be moved to the new bus is on the opposite side.
3. Select the bus.
Click the left mouse button once on the bus symbol. Make sure you
click the mouse at a point between the two groups of attached
equipment.
The bus symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
4. Select the Network | Split Bus command.
The split will be made where you click on the bus. The program will
give a default name, such as BUS 1 to the new bus.
Use the mouse to drag one bus away from the other.
5. Change the parameters for the new bus if needed.
Double click on the new bus to edit its parameters.
The nominal kV of the new bus is fixed at the original value.
Note: When a substation bus is split, the two new substation buses will
have the same Thevenin impedances.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
MERGE BUSES COMMAND
The Merge Buses command lets you merge two substation buses or nodes into one. The buses being
merged must have the same nominal kV. Also, the merging operation cannot result in a branch looping to
and from the same node. This command is the Split | Bus command in reverse.
TO MERGE BUSES WITH THE MOUSE:
1a. Hold down the <Ctrl> key.
2a. Drag the first node with the mouse until its symbol overlaps that of
the second node. Release the mouse when the second node turns
dotted red.
The two nodes will become one. The combined node will have the name
and other attributes of the second node.
Note: If the second node has a different nominal kV it will not turn
dotted red and the merge will not happen when you release the mouse
button.
TO MERGE BUSES USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the two buses.
Click the left mouse button once on the bus on the left and then,
with the <Shift> key held down, click the left button once on the
right bus.
2b. Select the Network | Merge Buses command.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if the two nodes
being merged have different nominal kVs,
The first node will be merged into the second node. The combined node
will have the name and other attributes of the second node.
Note: When you merge two substation buses, the new bus will have the
Thevenin impedance of the second bus. Also, if there are induction or
synchronous machines on both buses, the machines on the first bus will
be lost. You will get a warning message when this happens. The same
is true for spot loads, shunts and grounding banks.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
INSERT/REMOVE TAP NODE COMMAND
The Insert Tap Node command lets you insert a tap node into a line or cable. The Remove Tap Node
command removes a tap node and combines the two adjacent line sections into one.
TO INSERT A TAP NODE FROM THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1a. Click on the New Distribution Node button on the Device Palette. The
cursor will become a cross with a node symbol attached to it.
2a. Click on the line on which you want to insert a tap node.
A dialog box will appear asking where you want to create a tap. Go to
step 3.
TO INSERT A TAP NODE USING MENU COMMAND:
1b. Select the line or cable to which you want to insert a tap node.
Click the left mouse button once on the line. The line symbol will turn
dotted red when selected.
2b. Select the Network | Insert Tap Node command.
A dialog box will appear asking where you want to insert the tap.
3. Enter the position of the tap node as a percentage of the length
of the line or cable. Then press OK.
The percentage is limited to 0.01% to 99.9%.
4. Press OK.
DistriView will give the new tap node a default name. The dialog box for
the new tap node will appear.
5. Edit the parameters for the new node if needed.
Press OK to close the node dialog box.
A tap node will appear at an intermediate point on the selected line.
TO REMOVE A TAP NODE:
1. Select the tap node to be removed.
Click the left mouse button once on the tap node you want to remove.
The node symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the Network | Remove Tap Node command.
DistriView will remove tap node and merge the two adjacent lines or
cables into one, provided all of the following are true:
(1) There are two, and only, two lines connected to this node, and

(2) The two lines must both have manually-entered impedances or
have identical line-table-entry or construction types, and
(3) The section loads on the lines are both connected line-to-neutral
or both line-to-line,
(4) The removal of the tap node will not result in a line that loops back
on the same node,
(5) The selected tap node is not a substation bus, and
(6) The tap node has no shunts, generators, spot loads or ground
banks attached, and
(7) If both lines are construction-based, their height offset and
their wire/cable names must be the same.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
REMOVE TAP NODES RUN BATCH COMMAND
The Remove Tap Nodes Run Batch command removes tap nodes that are listed in a text file. When a
tap node is removed, the adjacent line sections are merged into one. The remove-node logic is identical to
that of the remove-tap-node feature of the Network | INSERT/REMOVE TAP NODE COMMAND.
TO REMOVE TAP NODES IN BATCH
MODE:
1. Recommended: Make a backup of the binary data file.
There is no undo for this Remove Tap Nodes Run Batch command.
2. Prepare a text file that lists the nodes that you wish to remove.
Each node is identified by its name and nominal kV, separated by a
comma. The name must be enclosed by double quotes. An example
batch file is shown below:
BUS2114, 12
BUS1142, 12
You can create this text file manually, or with the Tools | GENERATE
LIST OF NODES COMMAND.
3. Select the Network | Remove Tap Nodes Run Batch command.
A File-Open dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the batch
command file.
of the batch command file you created. Press Open.
For each of the nodes listed in the file, DistriView will remove it and
merge the two adjacent lines or cables into one, provided all of the
following are true:
(1) There are two, and only, two lines connected to this node, and
(2) The two lines must both have manually-entered impedances or
have identical line-table-entry or construction types, and
(3) The section loads on the lines are both connected line-to-neutral
or both line-to-line,
(4) The removal of the tap node will not result in a line that loops back
on the same node,
(5) The tap node is not a substation bus, and
(6) The tap node has no shunts, generators, spot loads or ground
banks attached, and
(7) If both lines are construction-based, their height offset and
their wire/cable names must be the same.
DistriView will output any error and warning messages to the TTY
Window.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
SECTION LOAD | ALLOCATE COMMAND
The Section Load | Allocate command updates the section loads in a portion of a distribution feeder, using
one of several standard allocation methods. The portion of the feeder to be updated is the equipment
downstream from the equipment you selected prior to issuing this command. The input to this command is
the total kW to be distributed to each of the three phases. The allocation command will overwrite the
existing section loads on the affected lines.
Note: You can allocate loads in a batch mode using the Change File feature. See Section 5.6 for details.
TO ALLOCATE LOAD TO EQUIPMENT DOWNSTREAM FROM A BUS OR A
BRANCH:
1. Select a network object.
Click the left mouse button once on a substation bus or distribution
node.
The bus symbol will turn dotted red when selected. The distributed loads
will be allocation downstream of the selected bus or node.
Alternatively, click the left mouse button once on a line or a two-
winding transformer.
The branch symbol will turn dotted red when selected. The distributed
loads will be allocation downstream of the selected branch. If the
selected branch is a line, the load will be allocated to this line as well.
2. Select the Network | Section Load | Allocate command.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if there are no lines
downstream from the selected equipment or that there is a mixture of line-
to- neutral and line-to-line section loads in your feeder.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the load allocation parameters.

The total spot loads downstream is shown near the top. The spot loads are
unaffected by this load-allocation command. They are shown here to help
you compute the total section load, with this formula:
Total section load to be allocate = measured load minus the total spot load.
The following describes two different methods for entering the allocation
parameters.
TO ENTER THE ALLOCATION PARAMETERS MANUALLY:
3a. Mark the check boxes for the load groups that you want to allocate, and
unmark the check boxes for the load groups that you are not allocating.
4a. For each load group that you are allocating, enter the total kilowatts to be
allocated in the appropriate edit boxes.
The kW-allocation edit boxes are arranged in 3 columns by 4 rows. The 4
rows are for the four load groups. The 3 columns are labeled Phase A,
Phase B and Phase C if your section loads are all connected line-to-
neutral. The columns are labeled Phase BC, Phase CA and Phase AB
if the section loads are all connected line-to-line. If you mark the check box
Load is balanced, then any value you enter on the first column will be
copied to the other two columns.
5a. Specify the kW loss estimate in percent.
The allocated load will be reduced by this amount, so that the load plus loses
will equal to the kW values you entered.
6a. Select the allocation method: "Allocation parameters" or "Line Length".
If you select allocation parameters, then each load group will be processed
separately, based on the load groups allocation method and default power
factor (which you can review and change via the Network | Edit Load
Groups command.)
If the allocation is based on line length, then the allocation parameters of the
load groups will have no effect on the outcome.
7a. Optionally click on "Existing load summary report" to view the total
amount of spot load and section load as well as load allocation
parameter downstream from the selected equipment. The program will
show you this information in a tabular form in the TTY Window. The
values shown are the section loads before any load allocation.
8a. Optionally click on "Browse affected branches" to see which lines will be
affected by this command. The lines are listed in a modified Data Browser.
Please see Tools | Data Browser for details on commands that are available on
the Data Browser window.
9a. Click on "Allocate" to allocate the load.
The TTY Window will appear to show you the affected lines and the
amount of load allocated.
DistriView maintains a journal of load allocations. After performing a
load allocation, a new entry is added to the journal. The journal is stored
in the binary file.
Note: See the documentation for Network | Section Load | Allocation
History for information on managing and utilizing the Load Allocation
Journal.

TO REPLICATE AN ALLOCATION THAT WAS PERFORMED EARLIER:
3b. Click on the History button at the lower left corner.
Note: This button is enabled only if there are journal entries for load
allocations that were performed with the same selected object as that of
Step 1.
The following dialog box will appear to show you a list of previous load
allocations that were performed with the same selected object as that of
Step 1.
4b. Click on one of the entries in the list to select it.

5b. Press the Apply button.
This History dialog box will disappear. The program will copy the
parameters from that journal entry to the Load Allocation dialog box.
Note: See the documentation for Network | Section Load | Allocation
History for information on managing and utilizing the Load Allocation
Journal.
6b. In the Load-Allocation dialog box, modify the load allocation
parameters as need and press the Allocate button to allocate the load.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
SECTION LOAD | ALLOCATION HISTORY COMMAND
The Section Load | Allocation History command lets you view and manage the journal of load allocations.
You can repeat any one of the previous load allocations by pressing a button in the dialog box.
TO VIEW THE LOAD ALLOCATION JOURNAL:
1. Select the Network | Section Load | Allocation History command.
A dialog box will appear to show you the load-allocation journal for all
locations. This text in the Location column tells you which network
element was selected when the load was allocated.
The list is sorted by the time of allocation, with the last operation listed last.
The information listed should be self-explanatory.
2. Remove one or more unwanted entries.
Highlight an entry and press Remove to delete it. Alternatively, press
Remove All to empty the journal.
3. Repeat a prior load allocation.
Highlight an entry and press the Apply button.
This dialog box will disappear. DistriView will bring up the load-allocation
dialog box and fill it with the load-allocation parameters used earlier. Please
see documentation for the Network | Section Load | Allocate command for
more information.
4. If you do not want to repeat a prior load allocation, press Close to
close this Load Allocation History dialog box.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
SECTION LOAD | EDIT LOAD GROUPS COMMAND
There are four load groups in every DistriView binary data file. A section load on a line or a cable is
made up of loads from one or more of these load groups. The Section Load | Edit Load Groups command
lets you view and edit their parameters. The different load groups represent different types of distributed
loads, such as residential, commercial, industrial and irrigation loads.
TO VIEW OR EDIT LOAD GROUP PARAMETERS:
1. Select the Network | Edit Load Group command.
A dialog box will appear. The list box lists the four load groups by name.
2. View or edit a load group.

Click on the name of a load group, then press Edit.
A dialog box with the load group parameters will appear.
3. Input the load group name, which can have up to 12 characters.

4. Specify the load group composition.
Enter the percentage of constant power in Constant Power.
Enter the percentage of constant current in Constant Current.
The remaining percentage is assumed to be constant-impedance.
5 Specify the allocation method: REA, KWH or KVA.
See the Network | SECTION LOAD | ALLOCATE COMMAND for an
explanation of load allocation methods.
6. Specify the load group power factor.
The power factor you specify here will be used in load allocation.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
EDIT NODE AREA COMMAND
Area is an attribute of nodes. Usually, a network has multiple areas, and each area has one or more
nodes. The Edit Node Area command lets you view and edit the parameters of the areas, which includes
a name and a color.
TO VIEW OR EDIT NODE AREA PARAMETERS:
1. Select the Network | Edit Node Area command.
A dialog box will appear listing all the node areas in alphabetical order.
Note: This list may include areas that are no longer in use. They will
disappear after you save the file and open it again.
2. Select an area in the list with the mouse and press Edit.
Make change to the area name and the color as needed.

The color assigned to the areas is important only when you want the
program to paint the one-line diagram components based on their area
affiliation, instead of their nominal kV. The logic for area-based
coloring goes as follows. For nodes, the symbol is drawn with the color
assigned to the nodes area. It is more complicated for a branch, such as
a line, where the two end terminals (Bus1 and Bus2) may belong to two
different areas. By default, the branch is drawn with the color of Bus1
unless there is a protective device on the Bus1-end. In that case, the
color of Bus2 is used.

Note: You can merge two areas by entering the name of another existing
area. All the nodes in the current area will be moved to that area.
You can optionally enter comments on the area, with up to 64
characters.
Press OK to close the dialog box.
3. Press Done when you are done editing the area information.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
EDIT LOAD ZONE COMMAND
Each section load and spot load belongs to a load zone. A feeder can have many load zones, each with
one or more section loads and spot loads. The Edit Load Zone command lets you view and edit the
parameters of the load zones. Among the parameters of a load zone is the load zone multiplier. You can
scale all the loads within a zone by simply setting this multiplier to a value other than 1. (Note: The
alternative is to leave the zone multiplier at 1, and scale the base values of the loads with the Scale
feature in the Data Browser.)
We suggest that you put loads with similar growth rates into the same zone, so that you can scale them
easily with the zone multiplier.
TO VIEW OR EDIT LOAD ZONE PARAMETERS:
1. Select the Network | Edit Load Zone command.
A dialog box will appear. The list box lists all the load zones.
2. View and edit the load-zone parameters.

Click on an entry and press Edit.
You will see this dialog box for a load zone.
Number: Each load zone can have a number between 0 and 999,
inclusive. Do you change this zone number unless you want to move all
the loads in this zone to another zone.
Name: The name of the load zone, with up to 15 characters.
Multiplier: The default is 1. You can scale all the loads in this zone by
entering a floating-point number other than 1.
Comments: Any comments with up to 64 characters.
Press OK to close the load-zone info dialog box.

3. When done, press Done in the Load Zones dialog box.
If any of the load-zone multipliers is not equal to 1, the program will
post a warning message at the status pane of the Main Window, like
this:

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
RELOAD LINE RATING FROM LIBRARY COMMAND
The Reload Line Rating from Library command resets the lines current ratings with ratings in the
Conductor Library. This command will overwrite the current ratings of lines and cables whose
parameters are defined by the construction and line table entry methods. Lines and cables with
manually entered data are not affected.
This command is designed to update en masse the current ratings of many lines and cables. If you wish
to update the current rating of individual lines, please consult the documentation for Network | New 3-
Phase Line/Cable command and look for explanation of the Copy from Library button.
TO RELOAD LINES CURRENT RATINGS FROM THE CONDUCTOR LIBRARY:
1. Have a look at the current ratings in the Conductor Library.
We strongly recommend that you first inventory the wires and table
entries you are using in your DistriView data files and look in the
Conductor Library to see if there are any meaningful current ratings that
are worth copying over. If not, you should edit the Conductor Library
with the Conductor Library Editor before executing this command.
Note: The Network | Reload Line Rating from Library command will
not copy over any current ratings that are equal to zero.
2. Select the Network | Reload Line Rating from Library command.
Note: This command is dimmed if you do not have any lines in you file
that are construction or table-entry based.
The top portion of the dialog box is for lines and cables that are based
on constructions. The bottom checkbox is for lines and cables that are
based on line table entries.
3. Line and cables based on constructions.
For a construction-based line, the current rating comes from the current
rating of the phase wires. Each of these wires has a current rating.
DistriView will look for the minimum current rating among the phase
wires and copies that minimum rating to the line object. For a
construction-based cable, the rating comes similarly from the individual
phase cable conductors.
You may specify with the first four check boxes, which of the four
ratings in the line object you wish to overwrite.

For each line rating, you may enter a multiplier.
For instance, you may want to enter a 1.2 in the top edit box so that
the program will copy 1.2 times the minimum wire rating to the first
line rating.
4. Line and cables based on line table entries.
Each line-table entry in the Conductor Library has four current ratings.
Mark the last check box if you DistriView to copy those four current
ratings to the line objects.
5. Press OK.

Main Window
NETWORK MENU
RECALC LINE IMPEDANCES COMMAND
The Recalc Line Impedances command forces the program to recalculate the impedances of all the lines
and cables in the system. This command is for debugging purposes only. There is no need to recalculate
the line impedances because the program calculates all the impedances when it reads in the Conductor
Library, and it updates the line impedances immediately after a line has been edited.
TO RECALCULATE LINE IMPEDANCES:
1. Select Network | Recalc Line Impedances command.
A dialog box will appear informing you that the calculation has been
completed.
Main Window
NETWORK MENU
SWAP PHASE COMMAND
The Swap Phase command moves the equipment on a single-phase feeder from one phase to another.
You must select a single-phase branch prior to issuing this command. You have the option of swapping
the phase of just the selected branch, or all the equipment on that single-phase feeder.
TO SWAP PHASE:
1. Select a single-phase branch.
The branch can be a line, a general transformer, or a voltage regulator
with a single bank.
2. Select Network | Swap Phase command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the phase to move
equipment to and extent of the swap operation.
3. Click on radio button showing the phase where you want to

move equipment to.
The equipment will be moved to the phase you selected.
4. Specify the extent of the swap-phase operation.
Click on Do it to the selected branch only to swap phase only on the
selected feeder segment.
Click on Do it to this single-phase feeder to swap phase of the entire
single-phase feeder.
5. Press OK to move the equipment to the new phase.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
The Options command under the Diagram menu lets you specify the various options that affect the
appearance of the Main Window. The program will store your preferences in the Windows registry.
TO SPECIFY OPTIONS FOR THE MAIN WINDOW:
1. Select the Diagram | Options command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the main window options.
2. Select the units of time. Click on:

"Seconds" to use seconds as the units of time.
"Cycles 60 Hz" to use cycles as the units of time, assuming 60 Hertz.
"Cycles 50 Hz" to use cycles as the units of time, assuming 50 Hertz.
This selection will affect the textual output of the relay operating times
3. Select the transformer symbol. Click on:
American for the American transformer
symbol.
European for the European (IEC) transformer symbol.
4. Specify the line rating names:
Each line or cable has four different current ratings. You can give a
12- character name to each of these ratings. These names will appear
on the info dialog box for lines.
5. Specify line and cable symbols:
Click on the "overhead" drop down list box and select the line style
for overhead lines symbol on the one-line diagram. Similarly, for
underground cables, click on the "underground" drop down list
box and select a style.

6. Specify whether you want phase-number indicators.
When this checkbox is marked, the program will add a single short slash
to single-phase branch symbols, and two slashes to two-phase branch
symbols on the one-line diagram.
7. Specify whether you want DistriView to color one-line
components according to their nominal kV or by their area name.
If your choice is nominal kV, the color assignment is controlled by the
Diagram | Color kV command. If your choice is area name, the color
assignment is controlled by the Network | Edit Node Areas command.
8. Snap to grid option.
When checked, the coordinates of any object on the one-line diagram are
required to be on one of the invisible grid points separated by spacing
that you specify in edit boxes labeled X spacing and Y spacing.
9. Over/Under-Voltage Color Visualization.
With this option tuned on, the program will paint red or green halos
around nodes whose voltage magnitude is too high or too low. (You can
change the acceptable voltage range in the Voltage Drop | View Voltage
Drop Solution on 1-Line dialog box.) The halos are drawn whenever a
locked-rotor or voltage-drop solution is being shown.
10. Use small switch symbols.
When checked, the program will use smaller symbols for 2- and 3-way
switches. The smaller symbols may help to cut down on cluster in some cases.
11. Hide bus numbers.
Mark the check box "Hide bus numbers" to not show the bus
numbers on the screen. Otherwise, the bus number, if not zero, is
shown as part of the bus identifier on the one-line diagram.
12. Hide nominal kV of buses.
Mark the check box "Hide bus kV" to not show the nominal kV of
buses on the screen. Otherwise, the nominal kV is shown as part of the
bus identifier on the one-line diagram.
13. Show results with horizontal text only.
Version 8 is capable of showing the text horizontally and vertically.
When this option is turned on, all the text will be drawn horizontally as
it was done in prior version of the program.
14. Select whether to show branch text on both ends.
Mark the check box "Show branch text on both ends" to display the
current and power flow of lines on both ends. The current and power
flow on two ends of a line may not be the same because of loses and
section loads. You may want to disable this feature to reduce clutter.
15. Copy default data from last object.
When you create a new object with this option tuned on, the program
will fill the dialog box of the new object initially with data of the last
object. This option is a big time saver when you create many objects
successively with same or similar data.

16. Hide branch text for short lines.
Enter a value after "Hide branch text if length is <" to omit drawing
the branch current and power flow when the length of the graphical
symbol (in pixels) is less than this threshold. This feature helps to
reduce clutter when nodes are bunched together within a small area on
the screen.
17. Select the screen font size.
Click on the 'Screen Font Size' drop down list box and select the
desired font size between 8 and 28 points.
DistriView will use the selected font size for drawing text on the one-line
diagram.
18. Specify the preferred unit of length.
Click on the 'Preferred Unit of Length' drop-down list box and select
the desired unit of length.
Units of length available are: "ft", "kt" (1000 ft), "mi", "m" and "km".
Your preferred unit will be used as the default for new lines and cables.
19. Select sorting preference.
Click on the Bus Name if you want network and solution reports to
be sorted by bus name and kV. Click on Bus Number if you want the
reports to be sorted by bus number.
20. Press OK to save the options.
The dialog box will disappear and the new options will take effect
immediately. DistriView stores your preferences in the Windows
Registry, and will use them automatically in future sessions on your PC.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
kV COLOR CODE COMMAND
The kV Color Code command lets you customize the appearance of the one-line diagram by using colors
to distinguish different voltage ranges. You can also use this command to hide equipment in certain
voltage ranges by giving them the color "invisible". (Note: Coloring equipment "Invisible" has no effect
on the system. These changes affect only the visual appearance of the one-line diagram and DO NOT
remove, delete or take out of service any equipment.)
TO ASSIGN COLORS TO DIFFERENT kV RANGES:
1. Select the Diagram | KV Color Code command.
A window will appear to show you the current color assignments.
The dialog box has a horizontal ruler with markings between 100 volts
and 1000 kV in a logarithmic scale. Six triangular knobs are attached to
the bottom of the ruler marking the kV ranges. One of the knobs will
be colored and the square with its color will be highlighted in the lower
portion of the dialog box.
2. Select the kV range.
Click the left mouse button on the triangular knob at the minimum
value of the kV range and drag it to the new desired voltage.
All the knobs can be dragged except for the leftmost one. Each knob
controls the maximum voltage of the kV range to its left and the
minimum voltage of the kV range to its right. As the knob is dragged,
its position is shown at the upper left corner.
3. Select the color of the kV range.
Click the left mouse button once on the triangular knob at the
minimum value of the kV range. The knob will become highlighted.
Click the left mouse button once on the new color square.
The knobs and the ruler will be drawn to show the new selection.
4. Select the Menu | OK command.
The dialog box will disappear and the one-line diagram will be redrawn
with the new color scheme.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
PLACE BUSES COMMAND
The one-line diagram may not show all the buses in the system. The invisible buses are there because (1)
the network data came from a text data file and the user has not placed all the buses, or (2) the user hide
them using the Diagram | Hide Bus, Diagram | Hide All But Selected Trunk, or Diagram | Hide All But
The Selected Feeder command. The Place Buses command lets you place a hidden bus on the one-line
diagram and make it visible. The program will automatically display any branches connecting this bus to
neighboring buses that are already visible on the one-line.
TO PLACE AN INVISIBLE NODE OR SUBSTATION BUS ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Click once on an empty spot on the one-line diagram where you want
the hidden node to appear.
2. Select the Diagram | Place Buses command.
A dialog box will appear. Displayed in the left list box are all the buses
in the system in alphabetical order. The visible buses are shown with
the letter A following the bus name. One of these buses is selected.
The list box on the right shows its neighboring buses. Again the letter
A denotes visible buses.
3. Select a node to be placed on the one-line diagram.

Enter one or more characters of the bus name in 'Search For'. The
node with the best match will automatically appear in the window
highlighted.
4. Select the neighboring node to be placed on the one-line diagram.
Mark the "Place All" check box if you want to place not only the
selected bus but also all its neighboring buses. You may
alternatively select them individually.
5. Mark the "Use Old Location" check box to place node at its
previous locations.
Note: This option is dimmed and unavailable if there is no previous
location information for node you selected.
If this check box is not marked, the program will place the node you
selected on the left pane at the location you indicated in step 1.
6. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear. The selected bus and its neighboring
buses will be drawn on the screen. If the selected bus is out of the
viewable portion of the screen, DistriView will scroll the one-line

diagram to bring the selected bus to the center of the Main Window.
The neighboring buses will automatically be placed around the bus.
All of the branches that connect the bus to its neighboring buses will
automatically be added along with any attached equipment, such as
a generator, a load, a shunt or a ground bank.
A node is drawn with a hollow symbol if it has one or more
invisible neighbors.
After the last node is placed on the screen a message box will
appear informing you that the one-line diagram is complete.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
HIDE BUS COMMAND
The Hide Bus command lets you hide a bus and all attached components. This command does not affect
the results of voltage drop studies or short circuit simulations.
TO HIDE A NODE OR SUBSTATION BUS:
1. Select a node or substation bus.
Click the left mouse button once on the node or substation bus that
you want to hide.
The bus symbol will turn dotted red.
2. Select the Diagram | Hide Bus command.
The bus and all attached components will disappear from the one-line
diagram. Neighboring nodes of the hidden bus will be drawn with a
hollow bus symbol to indicate that they have one or more hidden
neighbors.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
BUS SYMBOL COMMANDS
The Bus Symbol commands let you change the appearance of the selected distribution node or
substation bus symbol. You can use this command to choose one of three drawing styles, to make the
symbol longer or shorter, and to hide or show the bus ID on the diagram.
TO SELECT SYMBOL STYLE FOR A SINGLE NODE OR SUBSTATION
BUS:
A distribution node can be shown on the diagram as a vertical bar, a horizontal bar or a dot. Substation bus
can only be shown as a Bar.
1. Select the node or bus.
2. Select one of the following menu items:
Diagram | Bus Symbol | Dot for a dot.
Diagram | Bus Symbol | Vertical bar for a vertical bar.
Diagram | Bus Symbol | Horizontal bar for a horizontal bar.
TO SELECT A CERTAIN BUS STYLE FOR ALL DISTRIBUTION NODES IN THE
NETWORK:
1. Click once on an empty spot on the one-line diagram.
2. Select Diagram | Bus Symbol | Dot, Diagram | Bus Symbol | Vertical bar or
Diagram | Bus Symbol | Horizontal bar menu item
A confirmation message box will appear.
Press OK to apply the style to all the distribution nodes in the network.
TO CHANGE THE SYMBOL FROM A HORIZONTAL BAR TO VERTICAL OR VICE
VERSA:
2. Select Diagram | Bus Symbol | Rotate
TO MAKE THE BUS SYMBOL
LONGER:
1. Select the bus.
Click the left mouse button once on the bus symbol you want to
lengthen.
2. Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Longer command.
The selected bus symbol will be extended in both directions.

Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the bus
symbol is a dot or it is already at the maximum length of 14.5 times the
default length, or that the node is being drawn as a dot.

The bus symbol will remain highlighted. This allows you execute this
command and its companion command, Diagram | Bus Symbol | Shorter
command, to adjust the bus length without having to re-select the bus
each time.
TO MAKE BUS SYMBOL SHORTER:
1. Edit the one-line diagram to vacate the right (or bottom) portion of
the bus symbol.
DistriView shortens the bus symbol by discarding a section from the
right-hand end of the horizontal line segment (or bottom end of vertical
segment). You must first move attached equipment away from this
section.
2. Select the bus.
Click the left mouse button once on the bus symbol you want to
shorten.
3. Select the Diagram | Bus Symbol | Shorter command.
Note: The Bus Symbol Shorter menu item is dimmed and cannot be
activated if the bus symbol is a dot or it is already at the minimum length
which is equal to 50% of the default length, or if the node is being drawn
as a dot.
If the following message box appears when you select the Bus Symbol
Shorter command, return to Step 1.
The bus symbol will remain highlighted.

TO SHOW OR HIDE THE ID OF A SINGLE NODE:
2. Select Diagram | Bus Symbol | Show/Hide ID
Note: When the bus ID is hidden the program will not display any voltage
simulation result at the bus.
When the Hide ID option is effect for a node, the program will
not show its name, number or nominal kV on the one-line diagram.
The program will also omit showing the solution voltages for the
node.
TO SHOW OR HIDE THE ID FOR ALL THE BUSES IN THE NETWORK:
1. Click once on an empty spot on the one-line diagram.
2. Select Diagram | Bus Symbol | Show/Hide ID
A Confirmation dialog box will appear

Click on Yes to show ID of all buses. Click on No to hide all IDs.
Click on Cancel to abort the command.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
HIDE ALL BUT SELECTED TRUNK COMMAND
The trunk is the most direct path between a selected node and the nearest substation bus. The Hide All
But Selected Trunk command keeps the one-line diagram of the trunk on the screen while hiding all the
others from view. To use this command, you must first select a node.
TO HIDE ALL BUT THE SELECTED TRUNK:
1. Click on a node.
Click the left mouse button once on a node.
The bus symbol will turn dotted red.
2. Select Diagram | Hide All Bus But Selected Trunk.
The selected trunk will remain on the screen. All other equipment will be
hidden from view.
Later, you can make the hidden buses visible again with the Diagram |
Make All Hidden Buses Visible command.
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
HIDE ALL BUT THE SELECTED FEEDER COMMAND
The Hide All But The Selected Feeder command keeps the one-line diagram of the selected feeder on the
screen while hiding all the others from view.
TO HIDE ALL BUT THE SELECTED FEEDER:
1. Click on a node or branch on the feeder that you want to retain.
This is the selected feeder.
2. Select Diagram | Hide All Bus But the Selected Feeder.
The equipment on all the other feeders will disappear from the one-line
diagram.
Later, you can make those feeders visible again with the Diagram |
Make All Hidden Buses Visible command.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
MAKE ALL HIDDEN BUSES VISIBLE COMMAND
The Make All Hidden Buses Visible command allows you to put back on the one-line diagram all
the equipment that was hidden from view previously with the following commands: Diagram | Hide
Bus, Diagram | Hide All But Selected Trunk, and Diagram | Hide All But The Selected Feeder.
TO MAKE ALL HIDDEN BUSES
VIAIBLE:
1. Select Diagram | Show All Hidden Buses.
The screen will refresh. The nodes and branches that were previous
hidden will appear.
Note: This command is dimmed and not available if there are no hidden
buses in the system.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
SNAP TO STATE PLANE COORDINATES COMMAND
The Snap to State Plane Coordinates command re-positions all the substation buses and distribution
nodes according to their state-plane coordinates. In additional to re-positioning the visible nodes, this
command will make visible all the hidden nodes that have state-plane coordinates.
Many users create their text data files by exporting information from their GIS database. If the nodes state-
plane coordinates are within the text data files, the user can use this command to place all the buses
automatically according to their geographic location.
TO ALIGN ALL NODES TO THEIR COORESPONDING GPS COORDINATE:
1. Select the Diagram | Snap to State Plane Coordinates command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the screen parameters that
it needs to map the state-plane coordinates to the graphical coordinates.
The program will initialize the edit boxes based on the coordinates
available. These values work well in most cases. You can edit them if
you wish.
2. Enter in 'X' and 'Y' the state-plane coordinate for the position
being displayed at the center of your screen.
3. In 'Screen Width in State Plane Coordinates', enter the width of
the computer screen in state-plane coordinates.
4. Click on the 'Place All Invisible Buses ' check box to have the
program place all hidden buses that have been assigned state plane
coordinates.
5. Click on the Show buses as dots' check box to have the buses appear
as dots (instead of horizontal or vertical bars).
6. Click on the Hide bus ID' check box to not show the bus
identifiers, which consists of the bus name and nominal kV.
7. Click on "OK".
The 'Snap to State Plane Coordinates' dialog box will disappear. All of
the substation buses and distribution nodes will be re-positioned
according to their state-plane coordinates. Buses and nodes with
coordinate of (0,0) will not be moved.
The program will move the viewport such that the substation bus will
appear at the center of the screen.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
ACQUIRE GRAPHICS FROM ANOTHER FILE COMMAND
The Acquire Graphics from Another File command in the Main Window is designed to transfer one-line
diagram graphics from one DVT file to another. After importing data from a text data file, you can use
this command to acquire the graphical coordinates of buses and branches, as well as annotations, from
another DVT file. The network in the two files need not be exactly the same. The program will acquire the
graphics for all the equipment that the two files have in common. The buses that are not found in the
external DVT file will not be affected.
TO ACQUIRE GRAPHICS FROM ANOTHER FILE:
1. Select Diagram | Acquire Graphics from Another File.
A standard window file selection dialog box will appear.
2. Use the dialog box control to select the DVT file with graphics you
want to transfer (the template file) and press Open.
The nodes from the two files will be correlated by name and nominal kV.
Any annotation from the template file will be copied.
The program will re-draw the one-line diagram using the layout from the
external file. Buses that could not be correlated with the template file will
remain unchanged.
Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
INSERT LINE KINK COMMAND
The Insert Line Kink command lets you introduce more segments into a line symbol. This command
changes only the visual appearance of the one-line diagram and has no effect on the network model.
The figure below shows the effect of inserting a kink on the graphic symbols.
Before inserting After inserting
TO INTRODUCE MORE SEGMENTS INTO A LINE SYMBOL:

1. Select the line.
Click the left mouse button once on the branch symbol. The kink
will be inserted near where you clicked.
The line symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the Diagram | Insert Line Kink command.
3. Edit the branch symbol
Edit the line symbol by dragging different portions of the line until the
result is esthetically pleasing.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
RESET TEXT POSITION COMMAND
The Reset Text Position command moves the text blocks associated with a network component to
their default positions. This command works on all network equipment, including generators, loads,
shunts, ground banks, lines, transformers, switches and voltage regulators.
1. Make sure there is some text showing on the one-line diagram.
Execute View | Phases on 1-Line command if the screen is not
showing any text.
TO RESET TEXT POSITION OF A SINGLE NETWORK
COMPONENT:
2a. Select a network component by clicking on it with the mouse.
3a. Select Diagram | Reset Text Position command.
The text blocks associated with the selected will be moved to their
default positions.
TO RESET TEXT POSITION OF ALL THE NETWORK
COMPONENTS:
2b. Click the mouse on an empty spot in the one-line diagram.
This ensures that nothing is selected.
3b. Select Diagram | Reset Text Position command.
You will see this warning.
Click on Yes to reset the text position of all the network

components in the system.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
ATTACH/DETACH ANNOTATION TO/FROM OBJECT COMMAND
The Attach/Detach Annotation commands let you attach an annotation to, or detach it from, an object on
the one-line diagram. Any number of annotations can be attached to single network object. Once
attached, the annotations will move with the attached object.
TO ATTACH AN ANNOTATION TO AN OBJECT:
1. Select the annotation by clicking on it with the left mouse button.
A dotted red box will be drawn enclosing the annotation.
2. Select object to which the annotation to be attached by clicking shift
left mouse button.
The object will turn dotted red.
3. Select Diagram | Attach Note to Object command.
An asterisk * will appear at the beginning of the annotation signifying that it
is attached to an object.
TO DETACH A NOTE:
1. To detach an annotation from an object, first select the annotation
by clicking on it with the left mouse button. Then select the Diagram
| Detach Annotation from Object command.
Once all the annotations are detached from the object, and the asterisk *
marking will disappear.
Note: If an annotation is already attached to one object and you wish to
attach it to another object, there is no need to detach it. You can simply
attach the annotation to the new object with the To Attach an Annotation to
an Object instructions above.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
COPY 1-LINE REGION TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Copy 1-line Region to Clipboard command lets you copy a rectangular region of the one-line
diagram to the Windows clipboard. The copied picture can be pasted to the relay windows in DistriView,
or to other programs that accept graphics such as MS Word and PhotoShop. Before issuing this command,
you must trace a region on the one-line diagram with the mouse.
If you want to export the entire one-line graphics to another Windows program in the form of a file, please
see documentation for the File | Export One-Line command.
TO COPY THE GRAPHICS WITHIN A ONE-LINE REGION TO THE WINDOWS CLIPBOARD:
Change the zoom setting with the zoom slider control on the toolbar
until you can see the entire region you want to copy on the screen.
Click the left mouse button at one corner of the region and drag the
mouse to delineate a rectangular region.
3. Select Diagram | Copy 1-line Region to Clipboard command.
The graphics within the region will be copied to Windows clipboard.

Main Window
DIAGRAM MENU
SCALE/SHIFT ONE-LINE COMMAND
DistriView utilizes a two-dimensional world coordinate system. The graphical coordinates of objects in
the one-line diagram are all in world coordinates. Each point in this system has an x and y coordinate
between 32000 and 32000.
The Scale/Shift One-Line command lets you scale or shift the entire one-line diagram by manipulating the
graphical coordinates. A common usage is to blow up the entire diagram to give more room between
adjacent symbols.
TO SCALE OR SHIFT THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the Diagram | Scale/Shifter One-Line command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the scaling/shifting parameters
'a', 'b', and 'c'.
The coordinates Xmin, Ymin, Xmax and Ymax at the top of the dialog
show the extent of the one-line diagram. The unit is pixels.
2. Input the scaling/shift factors.
The program will use the following formulas to calculate the new
coordinates ( x', y' ) on the one-line diagram based on the parameters a,
b and c you enter:
x' = a * x + b
y' = a * y + c
a: Scaling Parameter: will expand (a >1) or shrink (a < 1) the one-line
diagram.
b: Horizontal Shift Parameter: will shift the one-line diagram right or left.
c: Vertical Shift Parameter: will shift the one-line diagram up or down.
You should make sure that the scaling and shift parameters will
not result in graphics going beyond the limits of the world
coordinate system, which are 32000 to 32000.
3. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the Main Window will display the
modified one-line diagram.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
ZOOM COMMANDS
DistriView has a continuous zoom feature. You can change the zoom setting easily with the slider bar in
the Main Windows toolbar.
The Zoom | Size 1:1.00x through Zoom | Size 5:0.05x commands were retained for users who are
accustomed to the fixed zoom settings in DistriView version 6 or earlier.
TO VIEW THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM AT DISCRETE ZOOM SETTINGS:
1. Select one of the commands under View | Zoom.
The screen will be redrawn the one-line diagram for the setting you
selected. The program displays text for short-circuit, locked-rotor and
voltage-drop solutions under all zoom settings. (The text may be too
small to be legible under some zoom settings, however.)
Note: The shortcuts to these commands are the keys 1, 2, 3, 4
and 5 at the top of the keyboard.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
FIND BUS BY NAME COMMAND
The Find Bus by Name command helps you quickly locate a substation bus or distribution node by its name
and nominal kV.
TO FIND A BUS BY NAME:
1. Select the View | Find Bus By Name command.
A dialog box will appear displaying an alphabetical listing of all the
nodes and substation buses in the file. Each entry consists of the bus
name, the nominal kV and the bus number (the bus number is not
shown if it is equal to 0).
2. Select the node or substation bus.

In the edit box, type in one or more characters of the bus name.
The bus name will appear in the list box highlighted.
If needed, use the scroll bar to locate the bus name. Click once on the
bus name to highlight it.
3. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the selected bus will appear
highlighted in the center of the screen. The program will draw a green
arrow pointing to the bus. You can remove the green arrow by clicking
on an empty spot on the one-line diagram.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
FIND BUS BY NUMBER COMMAND
The Find Bus by Number command helps you quickly locate a substation bus or distribution node by its
bus number.
TO FIND A BUS BY BUS NUMBER:
1. Select the View | Find Bus By Number command.
A dialog box will appear displaying a list of all the nodes and substation
buses in the network ordered by their bus number. (Nodes with number
0 are sorted alphabetically by name and nominal kV.) Each entry
consists of the bus number, the bus name and the nominal kV.
2. Select the node or substation bus.

In the edit box, type in one or more digits of the bus number. The
bus whose number matches the value you entered will appear in the list
box highlighted.
If needed, use the scroll bar to locate the bus name. Click once on the
bus name to highlight it.
3. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the selected bus will appear
highlighted in the center of the screen. The program will draw a green
arrow pointing to the bus. You can remove the green arrow by clicking
on an empty spot on the one-line diagram.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
FIND ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Find Annotation command helps you quickly locate an annotation on the one-line diagram.
TO FIND AN ANNOTAION:
1. Select the View | Find Annotation command.
A dialog box will appear listing all the annotations in the current file, in
alphabetical order.
Enter the starting text in the Search for edit box to quickly locate the
annotation of interest.
2. Select the desired annotation by clicking on it with the left mouse button.
3. Click on the "OK" button.
The selected annotation will appear on the one line diagram enclosed in
a dotted red box. You can double click with the left mouse button to
open the dialogue box that will allow you to modify the annotation and
attached memo.
Note: If there are no annotations in the current file the "Find Annotation"
menu item will be dimmed.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
HIGHLIGHT ATTACHED OBJECT COMMAND
The Highlight Attached Object command helps you locate the object to which an annotation is attached.
TO HIGHLIGHT THE OBJECT TO WHICH AN ANNOTATION IS ATTACHED:
1. Select an annotation that is attached to an object.
Annotation that is attached to an object has an asterisk * displayed at
the beginning of the text.
2. Select the View | Highlight Attached Object command.
DistriView will automatically center the one-line diagram on the
attached object.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
GO TO COMMANDS
The five Go To commands under the View menu helps you navigate along a distribution
feeder. TO GO TO THE END BUS OF A BRANCH:
1. Select a distribution line, a 2-winding transformer, a 3-winding
transformer, or a breaker/relay group by clicking on it with the
mouse.
The symbol of the selected object will turn dotted red.
2. Select the View | Go To | End Bus command.
If you selected a breaker/relay group, DistriView will automatically
scroll the one-line diagram to bring the other end bus to the center of the
screen.
If you selected a line, transformer or voltage regulator, DistriView will
automatically center the one-line diagram on the end bus that is farthest
from the center of the screen.
Note: You can execute this command repeatedly to toggle between the
ends of a line, transformer or voltage regulator.
TO GO TO AN UPSTREAM NODE:
1. Select a node or a branch by clicking on it with the mouse.
2. Select the View | Go To | Upstream Node command.
DistriView will automatically center the one-line diagram on the nearest
node on the substation side.
TO GO TO A NODE FURTHER DOWNSTREAM:
2. Select the View | Go To | Downstream Node command.
node away from the substation.
TO GO TO NEAREST SUBSTATION BUS:
2. Select the View | Go To | Nearest Substation command.
substation bus on the same feeder.
TO GO TO A SIBLING BRANCH:
1. Select a branch by clicking on it with the mouse.
The symbol of the selected branch will turn dotted red.

2. Select the View | Go To | Sibling Branch command.
branch that is connected to the same upstream node as the branch you
selected in step 1.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
PLAIN 1-LINE COMMAND
The Plain 1-Line command lets you view the one-line diagram without any additional textual information
such as voltages, currents, and branch impedances.
TO SHOW A PLAIN ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Plain 1-line command.
If voltages, currents or branch impedances are being displayed the screen
will be redrawn to show a plain one-line diagram.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
IMPEDANCES ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Impedances on 1-Line command displays the branch impedances, generator impedances, and load
and shunt parameters on the one-line diagram.
TO SHOW IMPEDANCES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Impedances on 1-line command.
The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the branch impedances,
generator impedances, and load and shunt parameters. For lines and 2-
winding transformers, the positive-sequence impedances will be
displayed at one end of the branch symbol and the zero-sequence
impedances at the other end. For 3-winding transformers, 3 pairs of
positive and zero sequence reactance values will be displayed on 3 legs
of the transformer.
For lines whose impedance is computed based on constructions in the
Conductor Library, the sequence impedances shown are
approximations unless the conductors are continuously transposed.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
BRANCH NAMES ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Branch Names on 1-Line command displays the branch names on the one-line diagram. The branch
name is an optional datum that you entered in the Data Properties dialog box for lines, transformers,
voltage regulators and switches.
TO SHOW BRANCH NAMES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Branch Names on 1-Line command.
The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the branch names.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
PHASES ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Phases on 1-Line command displays in text the phases present on all the branches on the one-line
diagram. It shows abc for a 3-phase line; ab, ac or bc for a 2-phase line; and a, b, or c for a
single-phase line. Transformers, regulators and switches are always shown as 3-phase with the label
abc. It should be noted that the labels reflect only the phases specified in the data dialog boxes. The
phases shown may, or may not, be energized.
TO SHOW PHASES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Phases on 1-Line command.
The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the phase information.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SECTION LOAD ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Section Load on 1-Line command displays the total section load on each line on the one-line
diagram. Nothing is shown if the total section load on a line is zero.
TO SHOW SECTION LOAD ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Section Load on 1-Line command.
The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the total section load in
kVA for each line.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
LINE LENGTH AND TYPE ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Length and Type on 1-Line command displays for each line the name of the construction or line-
table entry on one end, and the line length on the other end. If the line impedances are manually entered,
only the line length is shown.
TO SHOW LINE LENGTH AND TYPE ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Line Length and Type on 1-Line command.
The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the length and the name of
the construction or line-table entry and nodes distance from substation.
Note: when the selection of Preferred unit of length in Diagram |

Options dialog box is mi, kt or ft distance from substation will be shown
in miles. Otherwise the distance will be shown in kilometers.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
EQUIPMENT RELIABILITY PARAMETERS COMMAND
The Equipment Reliability Parameters command displays on the one-line diagram the reliability parameters
for line, transformer, and voltage regulator.
TO SHOW THE RELIABILITY PARAMETERS ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Line Length and Type on 1-Line command.
The one-line diagram will be redrawn showing the reliability
parameters of lines, transformers, and voltage regulators. The
abbreviation FF stands for fault frequency in times per year, MF
stands for transient fault percentage, and MRT stands for mean
restore time in hours per incident.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | POSITIVE-SEQUENCE QUANTITIES COMMAND
The Solution | Positive-Sequence Quantities command shows you the positive-sequence voltages and
currents for a voltage-drop, short-circuit or locked-rotor solution.
TO SHOW POSITIVE SEQUENCE QUANTITIES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Solution | Positive-Sequence Quantities on 1-
Line command.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be selected unless you have just
performed a short-circuit, voltage-drop or locked-rotor simulation.
The screen will refresh to show you the positive-sequence currents (in
amperes) for all the branches. In addition, the positive-sequence voltages
are shown below the bus names. The bus voltage is either in per-unit (if
ends with pu) or in a scaled per-unit value (if end with V), or in kV.
FOR A VOLTAGE-DROP STUDY:

The numerical quantities for overloaded branches are drawn in red, and the
over- and under-voltage buses and nodes are highlighted with red and
green halos, respectively.
You can change how the bus voltage is displayed and the voltage range limits by
executing the V_Drop | VIEW VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION ON 1-LINE
COMMAND. Over/under-voltage color highlighting on the one-line diagram can
be turn on or off by executing the Diagram | OPTIONS COMMAND.
FOR A SHORT-CIRCUIT OR LOCKED-ROTOR STUDY:
You can change how the bus voltages are displayed by executing the S_Ckt |
VIEW SHORT CIRCUIT OR LOCKED ROTOR SOLUTION ON 1-LINE
COMMAND.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | NEGATIVE-SEQUENCE QUANTITIES COMMAND
The Solution | Negative-Sequence Quantities command shows you the negative-sequence voltages and
currents for a voltage-drop, short-circuit or locked-rotor solution.
TO SHOW NEGATIVE SEQUENCE QUANTITIES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Solution | Negative-Sequence Quantities on 1-
Line command.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be selected unless you have
just performed a short-circuit, voltage-drop or locked-rotor simulation.
The screen will refresh to show you the negative-sequence currents (in
amperes) on all the branches. In addition, the negative-sequence
voltages are shown below the bus names. The bus voltage is either in
per-unit (if ends with pu), in a scaled per-unit value (if end with V) or
in kV.

You can change how the bus voltage is displayed and the voltage range limits
by executing the V_Drop | VIEW VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION ON 1-LINE
COMMAND. Over/under-voltage color highlighting on the one-line diagram
can be turn on or off by executing the Diagram | OPTIONS COMMAND.
You can change how the bus voltages are displayed by executing the
S_Ckt | VIEW SHORT CIRCUIT OR LOCKED ROTOR SOLUTION
ON 1-LINE COMMAND.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | NEUTRAL QUANTITIES COMMAND
The Solution | Neutral Quantities command shows you the zero-sequence voltages and neutral currents
for a voltage-drop, short-circuit or locked-rotor solution.
TO SHOW NEUTRAL QUANTITIES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Solution | Neutral Quantities on 1-Line command.
The screen will refresh to show you the zero-sequence currents (3Io in
amperes) on all the branches. In addition, the zero-sequence voltages
(Vo) are shown below the bus names. The bus voltage is either in per-
unit (if ends with pu), in a scaled per-unit value (if end with V), or in
kV.

over- and under-voltage buses and nodes are highlighted with red and green
halos, respectively.
ON 1-LINE COMMAND.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | PHASE A/B/C QUANTITIES COMMAND
The Solution | Phase A Quantities, Solution | Phase B Quantities, and Solution | Phase C Quantities
commands shows you the voltage and current on phase a, b or c for a voltage-drop, short-circuit or
locked-rotor solution.
TO SHOW SOLUTION FOR PHASE A, 'B' or 'C' ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Solution | Phase A, View | Solution | Phase B
Quantities, View | Solution | Phase C on 1-Line command.
The screen will refresh to show you the phase A, phase B, or
phase C voltages and currents on the one-line diagram. The
currents are always in amperes. The voltage (below the bus name) is
either in per-
unit, in a scaled per-unit value, or in kV line-to-neutral. The letters N.E.
is shown if the phase is not energized.
The picture below shows the phase-a voltage and current for a short
circuit study.


ON 1-LINE COMMAND.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | RELAY OPERATING TIME COMMAND
The Solution | Relay Operating Time command shows you the operating times of all relays, fuses, recloser and
CCOC devices for a short-circuit or locked-rotor study.
TO SHOW OPERATING TIME OF RELAYS, FUSES AND RECLOSERS ON THE ONE-LINE:
1. Select the View | Solution | Relay Operating Time command.
just performed a short-circuit or locked-rotor simulation.
The screen will refresh to show you the operating times in seconds for
all protective devices. 9999 means that the device did not operate.
For a breaker/relay group that has more than one relay, the operating
time shown is from the relay with the fastest operating time. The time is
preceded by:
OG: If it is an overcurrent ground
relay. OP: If it is an overcurrent phase
relay.
ZGx: If it is a distance ground relay. x is the zone number.
ZPx: If it is a distance phase relay. x is the zone number.
For a recloser, the time shown is the operating time of the phase or
ground unit, whichever is faster. The time is preceded by:
RG: If it the ground unit.
RP: If it is the phase unit.
For a fuse, The time is preceded by the letters FUm and FUt",
depending on whether the time is from the minimum melt curve or from
the total-clear curve.
For a compounded curve overcurrent device, the operating time is
preceded by the letters CCm or CCt, depending on whether the time
is from the minimum-time curve or from the maximum-time curve.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | REAL AND REACTIVE POWER COMMAND
The Solution | Real and Reactive Power command shows you the real power (P) and reactive power (Q)
flow for a voltage-drop solution. Text drawn in red indicates that the branch is overloaded.
TO SHOW POWER FLOW ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Solution | Real and Reactive Power command.
just performed a voltage-drop simulation.
The screen will refresh to show you the real and reactive power flow.
The power is shown in kW and kVAR. The suffix M is used when the
units are MW and MVAR for real and reactive power respectively. The
arrows show the direction of flow. Flows at both ends of a branch are
shown.
The numerical quantities for overloaded branches are drawn in red, and
the over- and under-voltage buses and nodes are highlighted with red
and green halos, respectively.
The total kW and kVAR loses for the feeder is shown at the lower right
corner of the window.
Note: You can change how the positive-sequence bus voltage is displayed
and the voltage range limits by executing the V_Drop | View Voltage-
Drop Solution on 1-Line command. Over-/under- voltage color
highlighting can be turn on/off by executing the Diagram | Option
command.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | LOSSES COMMAND
The Solution | Losses command shows you the real power (PL) and reactive power (QL) losses for a
voltage-drop solution.
Loss is defined as what goes into one end of a branch but does not come out the other end. (For lines
with section loads, the effects of the section loads are excluded from this calculation.) Real-power losses
are caused by power dissipation due to the series resistance (R) of the branches. Reactive-power losses are
caused by both the series reactance (X) and the capacitive shunts (B).
TO SHOW POWER LOSSES ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Solution | Losses command.
The screen will refresh to show you the positive-sequence voltage for
nodes, and the real and reactive power losses for the branches. The
losses are in kW and kVAR unless there is a suffix M, in which case the
units are MW and MVAR. The inductive losses are positive and
capacitive losses are negative. Losses are shown at both ends of a
branch.
The numerical quantities for overloaded branches are drawn in red, and
the over- and under-voltage buses and nodes are highlighted with red
and green halos, respectively.
The total kW and kVAR loses for the feeder is shown at the lower right
corner of the window.
Note: You can change how the positive-sequence bus voltage is displayed
and the voltage range limits by executing the V_Drop | View Voltage-
Drop Solution on 1-Line command. Over-/under- voltage color
highlighting can be turn on/off by executing the Diagram | Option
command.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | PHASORS COMMAND
The Solution | Phasors command allows you to display and print the voltage and current phasors of any
generator, load, shunt, line, switch or transformer. Before using this function, you must have performed
either a short-circuit, locked-rotor, or voltage-drop simulation. This command is especially useful for
viewing the circulating current in the delta winding of a wye-wye-delta 3-winding transformer.
TO DISPLAY VOLTAGE AND CURRENT PHASORS:
1. Make sure the solution of a short-circuit, lock-rotor or voltage-drop
study is being shown on the one-line diagram.
2. Select a network element.
Click the left mouse button once on the element of interest. It will
turn dotted red when selected.
Note: Make sure the program is showing the solution quantities for this
element.
3. Select the Solution | View | Phasors command.
A dialog box will appear displaying the voltage and current phasors.
Note: If the network element you selected is a node, you will see only
voltage phasors and no current phasors. Also, the apparent-impedance
portion of the phasor probe is not shown for voltage-drop studies.

4. Select the voltage to be displayed.
Click on one of the following radio buttons.
L-G: Line-to-ground voltages, Va, Vb, Vc.
L-L: Line-to-line voltages, Vab (Va-Vb), Vbc (Vb-Vc), Vca (Vc-Va).
Sequence: Sequence voltages, V+, V-, Vo.
The voltage phasors are shown on the left half of the dialog box. A
phasor is omitted if the associated phase or phases are not energized.
The voltages are shown either in per-unit or in per-united times a
multiplier (usually 120V) depending on your preference. See the
Diagram | Options command for details.
5. Select the current to be displayed.
Note: This command will be disabled if the element selected is a bus.
Click on one of the following radio
buttons. Phase: Phase currents, Ia, Ib,
Ic.
Sequence: Sequence currents, I+, I-, 3Io.
The current phasor will be redrawn and current values updated reflecting
the current selected.
Click on the "Neutral" radio button if you want to see the neutral
current of an autotransformer.
Note: This radio button is available only if the selected network element
is an autotransformer.
Click on the "Tertiary" radio button if you want to see circulating
current in the delta winding of a 3-winding transformer.
Note: This radio button is available only if (1) the selected network
element is a 3-winding transformer, and (2) you are viewing the phasors
on the tertiary terminal (press the "Show Opposite Bus" button to change
terminal).
6. Select the apparent impedance to fault to be displayed.
Note: The apparent impedances are not shown for voltage-drop results.
Click on one of the following radio buttons:
Phase to phase: Show apparent impedances based on phase-to-phase
voltages and currents.
Phase to ground: Show apparent impedances based on phase-to-neutral
voltages and currents.
Enter the zero sequence impedance compensation factor K in the
edit box and click on Refresh to display phase to ground apparent
impedance calculated using this new value.
The parameter K is defined as (Zo-Z1)/(3Z1), where Zo and Z1 are the
zero- and positive-sequence impedances of the line or cable. This value
affects only the phase-to-ground apparent impedances.

7. Select the phasor reference.
Click on the 'Reference' drop down list box and select a voltage or
current phasor, which will be drawn at zero degree.
The rest of the voltage and current phasors will be redrawn with the same
relative position with respect to the reference phasor you selected.
8. Click on the "Show Opposite Bus" button to display voltage and
current phasors on another terminal of a branch.
Note: This button is visible only if the network element is a line,
transformer or voltage regulator.
For a branch, the phasor probe shows you the voltages and currents at
one terminal at a time. The name of the terminal bus being display is
shown at the top of the dialog box, after the words "Solution at".
9. Click on the "Send to TTY" button to print the fault solution
and description to TTY window.
10. Click on the "Send to printer" button to print the phasor diagram,
the fault solution and description.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | APPARENT IMPEDANCE AB, BC AND CA COMMANDS
The Solution | Apparent Impedance AB, BC or CA commands display the apparent impedance seen at
various locations away from a fault. You must perform a short circuit or locked-rotor simulation prior to
executing this command.
Note: This feature was implemented to assist users in the setting of phase distance relays before distance
relay models were available in DistriView. We urge you to consider the alternative approach of creating
a distance relay object on the one-line and then view its characteristics on the DS Relays Window.
DistriView will show you apparent impedance (in secondary ohms) of any fault both graphically and in
text.
TO VIEW APPARENT IMPEDANCES ON THE ONELINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Solution | Apparent Impedance AB, BC or
CA command.
just performed a short-circuit or locked-rotor simulation.
The program will calculate the apparent impedances seen from each end
of a line, transformer or voltage regulator and display them on the one-
line diagram. The impedance calculated is the voltage difference
divided by the current difference. For example, for the Apparent
Impedance AB command, the apparent impedance will be (Va Vb) /
(Ia Ib). All quantities are in primary ohms.
The value shown on the one-line diagram is a complex number in polar form.
Two letters denoting the phases separate the magnitude and angle. The
magnitude will be listed in ohms. A one-line diagram with the apparent
impedances displayed is shown below.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SOLUTION | ALL-BUS FAULT RESULTS ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Solution | All-Bus Fault Results on 1-Line command displays the fault currents for all the buses in a
feeder simultaneously.
When you simulate an all-bus fault using the S_Ckt | Fault All Buses command, DistriView will
automatically display the fault currents on the one-line. You need this Solution | All-Bus Fault Results
on 1-Line command only if you have simulated a fault following the all-bus fault solution and wishes to
see the all-bus fault results again..
TO VIEW AN ALL-BUS FAULT SOLUTION:
1. Select the View | Solution | All-Bus Fault Results on 1-Line command.
just performed an all-bus fault with the S_Ckt | Fault All Buses
command.
The screen will refresh to show you the fault currents to the right of
every bus that does not have the Hid Bus ID property set. The quantities
shown for each bus include:
3LG: The 3-phase-to-ground fault current in
amperes.
2LG: The maximum 2-phase-to-ground fault current in amperes.
1LG: The maximum single-phase-to-ground current in amperes.
L-L: The maximum line-to-line current in amperes.
One or more of the above quantities are omitted at a bus if some of the
phases are not energized at that location.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
VOLTAGE PROFILE COMMAND
The Voltage Profile command shows an x-y plot of the voltage magnitude along a feeder. You must
perform a voltage-drop, short-circuit or locked-rotor simulation prior to executing this command.
TO DISPLAY A VOLTAGE PROFILE:
1. Select the distribution node of interest.
The distribution node symbol will turn dotted red when selected. The
voltage profile between the substation bus and the selected node will be
plotted.
2. Select View | Voltage Profile command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be selected if no voltage drop,
short-circuit or locked-rotor simulation has been performed or if you have
modified the network since the last solution.
The profile window will appear. This example is for a voltage-drop solution.
The bus names along the feeder are shown on the profile window, unless the
buses Show ID on 1-line diagram flag is turned off. The phases are denoted in
separate colors: Red for phase 'A' (or AB), green for phase 'B' (or BC) and blue
for phase 'C' (or CA).
You can move the caption with the mouse.
The choice of line-to-neutral and line-to-line voltage and other preferences can be
changed with the Misc | PREFERENCES COMMAND of the Profile Window.
3. Double click on the System Menu at the upper left corner to close
the Profile Window.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
POWER PROFILE COMMAND
The Power Profile command shows an x-y plot of the real- and reactive-power flow along a feeder. You
must perform a voltage-drop simulation prior to executing this command.
TO DISPLAY A POWER PROFILE:
power profile between the substation bus and the selected node will be
plotted.
2. Select View | Power Profile command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be selected if no voltage drop
simulation has been performed or if you have modified the network since the
last solution.
The power-profile window will appear.
The bus names along the feeder are shown on the profile window, unless the buses
Show ID on 1-line diagram flag is turned off. There are two curves, one for the
real power (kW) and one for reactive power (kVAR).
DistriView computes the power at a node by summing the power flowing into the
node through branches connected to upstream neighbors.
For a feeder for which the substation bus is sole power provider, the real power at
each node is always positive.
Reactive power at a node can be of either sign, depending on whether the kVARs are
flowing into the node from upstream neighbors (positive), or the other way around.
the Profile Window.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
NEUTRAL CURRENT PROFILE COMMAND
The Neutral Current Profile command shows an x-y plot of the neutral current flow along a feeder.
You must perform a voltage-drop simulation prior to executing this command.
TO DISPLAY A NEUTRAL-CURRENT PROFILE:
neutral-current profile between the substation bus and the selected node
will be plotted.
2. Select View | Neutral Current Profile command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be selected if no voltage drop
simulation has been performed or if you have modified the network since the
last solution.
The neutral-current profile window will appear.
The bus names along the feeder are shown on the profile window, unless the
buses Show ID on 1-line diagram flag is turned off. There is only one curve
for the neutral current (3Io).
DistriView computes the neutral current at a node by summing the neutral current
(3Io) flowing into the node through branches connected to upstream neighbors. The
magnitude of the neutral current is plotted.
the Profile Window.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
ALL-BUS-FAULT CURRENT PROFILE COMMAND
The All-Bus-Fault Current Profile command shows an x-y plot of the fault current magnitude along a
feeder. You must perform a Fault All Buses simulation prior to executing this command. The profile
generated by this command will show you the rise and fall of the bus fault currents between the
substation bus and the selected distribution node.
TO DISPLAY THE ALL-BUS-FAULT CURRENT PROFILE WINDOW:
The distribution node symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the View | Voltage Profile command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be selected if the S_Ckt |
Fault All Buses commands has not been executed or if you have modified
the network since the last solution.
The profile window will appear.
The bus names along the feeder are shown on the profile window, unless the buses
Show ID on 1-line diagram flag is turned off. Fault current in amperes is plotted
using different colors denoting fault types: Red for 3-phase fault, green for phase
single-line-to-ground fault, and blue for line-to-line fault.
the Profile Window.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
SHOW NEXT/PREVIOUS FAULT RESULT COMMANDS
You can perform more than one short circuit simulations with the S_Ckt | SOLVE SHORT CIRCUIT
COMMAND. For instance, you can apply a single-line-ground fault and a 3-phase fault to a bus. In
addition, you can direct the program to accumulate fault solutions by not marking the Clear previous
results check box in the S_Ckt | Solve Short Circuit dialog box. When there are multiple short circuit
results available for viewing, the Show Next Fault Result and the Show Previous Fault Result commands
let you browse the results of the fault simulations.
TO VIEW THE NEXT/PREVIOUS FAULT RESULTS:
1. Select the View | Show Next Fault Result command to show the next
fault result or the View | Show Previous Fault Result command to show
the previous fault result.
The one-line diagram will refresh and show the next or previous fault
simulation.
Note: Shortcuts to these commands are available on the toolbar in the
form of VCR-like buttons.
Note: This Show Next Fault Result menu item will be dimmed and cannot be
activated if the screen is showing the last fault result. Similarly, the Show
Previous Fault Result menu item will be dimmed and cannot be activated if the
screen is showing the first fault result.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
TTY WINDOW COMMAND
The TTY Window command lets you open the TTY Window and view its contents.
TO VIEW THE TTY WINDOW:
1. Select the View | TTY Window command.
The TTY Window will appear on top of the Main Window.
2. Use the scroll bars on the TTY Window to bring different sections of
the window into view.
The horizontal and vertical scroll bars let you browse through the contents
of the window.
3. Use the drop down TTY menu to perform various tasks on the
TTY output or selected text.
More detailed descriptions of the commands related to these TTY tasks are
given in section 3.5.
4. Use the menu Edit to perform various editing functions in the
TTY window.
More detailed descriptions of the commands related to these edit

functions are given in section 3.5.
5. Close the TTY Window by selecting the TTY | Close Window command.
The TTY Window will disappear.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
TOOLBAR COMMAND
The Toolbar command lets you show or hide the toolbar. You can use the toolbar for quick access to
commonly used commands.
TO SHOW OR HIDE THE TOOLBAR:
1. Select the View | Toolbar command.
The toolbar will either be displayed or hidden.
Note: The toolbar is movable. You can drag it by clicking on the gripper
bar (the double line at one end of the toolbar.) You can also dock
(attach) it at any one of the four edges of the Main Window.
Please see beginning of Section 3.2 MAIN WINDOW COMMANDS
for explanation of the toolbar symbols.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
DEVICE PALETTE COMMAND
The Device Palette command lets you show or hide the Device Palette. You can use the Device palette to
build the one-line diagram model using drag and drop.
TO SHOW OR HIDE THE DEVICE PALETTE:
1. Select the View | Device Palette command.
Note: A shortcut to this command is available on the toolbar.
You can show or hide the Device Palette by executing this command
repeatedly. When displayed, the Device Palette looks like this:
Please see the second page of Section 3.2 MAIN WINDOW

COMMANDS for more information on the use of the Device Palette.

Main Window
VIEW MENU
REFRESH SCREEN COMMAND
The Refresh Screen command erases and then repaints the Main Window. This command is designed to
refresh the screen in the unlikely event when something is not displayed correctly.
TO ERASE AND REPAINT THE MAIN WINDOW:
1. Select the View | Refresh Screen command.
The screen will be erased and repainted.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
PROPERTIES COMMAND
The Properties Command under the Relay Menu lets you review or edit the parameters of a circuit breaker, relay,
fuse, recloser, sectionalizer or CCOC device.
TO REVIEW OR EDIT THE PARAMETERS OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES:
1. Select a breaker/relay, fuse, recloser or sectionalizer symbol.
Click the left mouse button once on the device symbol.
The device symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the Relay | Properties command.
If you selected a fuse, recloser, sectionalizer or CCOC device, the dialog
box for the device will appear immediately.
Please see the command descriptions under the RELAY MENU for more
information on the device type you selected.
Proceed to step 3.
If you selected a breaker/relay group, the dialog box will show the
breaker parameters and a list of all the relays within the group.
Click on the name of the relay to highlight it.
To View or Edit relay parameter, press Edit. A dialog box will
appear listing the parameters of the relay you selected. Please see the
command descriptions under the RELAY MENU for more information
on the breaker and relay type you selected.
Click on Delete to remove the relay.
Click on In/Out of service to toggle the relay in- and out-of-service
status.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
The Options command under the Relay Menu lets you specify certain options pertaining to overcurrent
relays.
TO SPECIFY RELAYOPTIONS:
1. Select the Relay | Options command.
2. Mark the "Ignore Instantaneous units" check box to ignore

the instantaneous unit on all relays.
This option takes effect when plotting the time-current points on the
relay curves and calculating the relay operating times.
The program will plot a vertical line for the instantaneous unit in the
Curves Window, even though it is not used for time-delay calculations.
3. Mark the "Extrapolate curves to 1.0 times pickup" check box to

always use the pickup setting as the starting point of the relay curve.
Most relay manufacturer draw their relay curves with the minimum current at
1.25 or 1.50 times pickup, even though the relays may operate with current
smaller than this value. When this option is selected, the program will
extrapolate all relay curves to 1.0 times pickup and will show a finite
operating time for relay currents larger than the pickup.

4. Press the "Reset Stored Library Names" button to remove library
file- name references from relay curves in the current binary file.
Run this reset command when the program complains about not being able
to find a relay curve when you know that curve exists in a RLY file in the
Library Directory. This problem happens when the binary data file is copied
between computers with different configurations. For example, the curve
SEL-VI is stored in ASPEN.RLY in one users PC, but it is in SEL.RLY in
another users PC. The reset will cause the program to abandon existing
curve-location information and search for the curves anew in the Library
Directory.
The options you specify in this command are saved to the binary file when
you exit.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
NEW BREAKER/RELAY GROUP COMMAND
The New Breaker/Relay Group command lets you add a new breaker/relay group to a line, transformer or
voltage regulator. Initially the group contains a circuit breaker but no relays. You may add any number of
overcurrent relays and distance relays to the group.
TO ADD A NEW BREAKER/RELAY GROUP TO A BRANCH:
1. Select a line, transformer or voltage regulator by clicking on it with
the mouse.
You should click near the branch end where you want to add the
breaker/relay group.
The branch symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the Relay | New Breaker/Relay Group command.
Note: The Breaker/Relay group menu item is dimmed and cannot be
activated if the selected branch already has breaker/relay groups at all
its terminal buses.
DistriView will place the breaker/relay group on the end of the branch
that is closest to your mouse click.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the breaker and relay data.

3. Input the breaker parameters.
ID: A 12 character identifier for the breaker.
Cycles: Enter the breaker clearing time in cycles.
Manufacturer: The breaker manufacturer name with up to 12
characters.
Style: A 16 character name for the breaker style.
Max kV: Maximum kV rating of breaker. Default value is
the terminal bus voltage.
Rated kA @ max kv: Rated current rating in kA at maximum kV.
DistriView checks this value against the maximum
symmetric current in the Check | INTERRUPTING
DEVICE RATING COMMAND
No. of operations: Select the number of operations. 2 operations
means 1 reclose after the initial operation. When the
operations count is 2 or higher, enter the reclosing
interval in the edit boxes to the right.
Disable instantaneous on reclose: This check box is visible only when
the operations count is 2 or higher. Mark this checkbox if
want the program to ignore the relays instantaneous unit
(if any) after the initial operation. This feature is
commonly used to save the fuses for transient faults.
Memo: Any text with up to 512 characters.
4. Press the Add OC Gnd, Add OC Pha, Add DS Gnd and Add DS
Pha buttons to add overcurrent and distance relays to the
breaker/relay group. More instructions are available below under the
heading of To Add An Overcurrent Ground Relay, To Add An
Overcurrent Phase Relay, etc.
5. The buttons below the list box are explained in the following:
Press the Edit to open the info dialog box for the selected
relay.
Press the In/Out-of-service button to toggle status of the selected
relay. Press the Delete button to delete the selected relay.
Press the Show curve button to display the selected relay in the Relay
window.
Press the Copy to copy the data of the selected relay in the Windows
clipboard. Note: You can copy and paste relay across different
relay/breaker groups.
Press Paste to insert a new relay from data in the Windows clipboard.
6. When you finish editing, adding and deleting relays and breakers in
the current breaker/relay group, click on "Done" to close the dialog
box.
A new breaker/relay group symbol will be shown attached to the branch.

TO ADD AN OVERCURRENT GROUND RELAY:
1. Click on 'Add OC Gnd'.
A dialog box for the new overcurrent ground relay will appear.
2. Enter the basic data.

ID: A 20-character name for the relay. The ID has to be
unique among relays in the same breaker/relay
group.
CT ratio: The CT ratio is defined to be the primary/secondary turns
ratio of the current transformer. You can either a number
value or a ratio in the form of xxx/yyy or xxx:yyy. For
example, for a 600A-to-5A CT, enter one of the
following 120, 600/5 or 600:5.
Time dial: The time dial can have any value between the minimum
and maximum time-dial levers of the selected
overcurrent relay. The time dial value should be set to
1.0 if the relay has only curve.
3. Select the relay type.
Click on the button marked next to the 'Curve' edit box. The
Curve Selector will appear.

The tree-list on the left of this dialog box showing all relay curves from
overcurrent curve library files located in the Library Directory. The
memo box on the right displays detailed information on the highlighted
entry in the tree-list.
TO SELECT A RELAY CURVE:
Highlight curve name in the tree-list.
Note: you can use the Find command described below to locate the
curve you want.
Click on Select this curve. The Curve Selector will disappear. The
name of the selected curve will be copied to the Curve edit box.
TO SPECIFY AN INSTANTANEOUS/DEFINITE TIME RELAY
ELEMENT:
Click on No curve required. The Curve Selector will disappear. The
name N/A will be copied to the curve-name edit box.
TO LOOK UP A RELAY CURVE:
Click on Find. A dialog will appear.
Enter key word(s) you want to search in the edit box.

Specify search options: look for keyword in curve name, annotation
and/or library name.
Select check box Match whole string only to ignore partially matched
words.
Click on Find. The dialog will disappear. If an entry with matching
keywords is found, it will be highlighted.
Click on Find next to go the next match if theres any.

Click on Show devices with multiples curves only to eliminate from
the list curves with single time dial. Recloser curves usually have only
single time dial.
4. Select the tap unit.
Click on the 'Tap unit' drop down list box and select a tap unit.
The tap units are listed in alphabetical order. The list includes all tap
units found in the relay library files. If you wish to enter a pickup value
directly without referencing a tap unit, simply select N/A and proceed
to step 6. You may also create the tap unit you want with the ASPEN
Overcurrent Relay Editor. See the ASPEN Overcurrent Relay Editor for
details.
5. Enter the pickup value.
For a Continuous Tap Unit, enter the pickup value (in amperes) in
the Pickup (A)' edit box.
For a Discrete Tap Unit, either type in the pickup value (in
amperes) or select one from the 'Pickup (A)' drop down list box.
Note: If the tap value is out of the range of the tap unit you will receive
a warning, but you may elect to keep the value regardless.
6. Enter the instantaneous and definite-time settings.
Pri. A: Leave this value at 0.0 if the relay does not have an
instantaneous unit. Otherwise the setting should have
the value 3Io (in amperes) at the primary side of the
current transformer. Once the instantaneous unit is
tripped, DistriView will assume that the time delay is
zero unless you enter a positive value under Delay.
Delay: The time delay of the definite time element in seconds.
This should be left at 0.0 if the relay does not have such
element.
Always flat: This option is meaningful only if you have entered a
positive Delay. When this option is marked, the definite
time segment is flat for currents above the Pri. A setting.
Otherwise, DistriView will compute the time delay as the
smaller of the two values: the definite time value, and the
time delay of the curve.
Always flat off. Always flat on.
Sensitive to dc offset. This feature is not yet available.

7. Select the directional control.
Click on the 'Directional' check box within the 'Time Element' group
box if the time delay element of the relay is directional.
Click on the 'Directional' check box within the 'Instantaneous
Element' group box if the instantaneous unit is directional.

Char. angle: The characteristic angle, in degrees, is measured between
the polarizing quantity and the vector of maximum
torque. The polarizing quantity of an overcurrent phase
relay is assumed to be one of the following:
Phase a: Vb - Vc
Phase b: Vc - Va
Phase c: Va - Vb
where Va, Vb and Vc are the phase voltages at the branch
terminal. The vector of maximum torque defines a half
plane, which is shown shaded in the figure below. The
relay is assumed to pick up whenever the phase current
lies within the shaded region. The characteristic angle is
initialized to 30 degrees.
Note: This edit box is visible only if either the time
element or the instantaneous unit is directional.
8. Enter the time adder (in seconds) in 'time adder' and the time
multiplier in 'Time multiplier'.
The time delay is given by T=aT+b, where T is the time given by the
unshifted curve, and a is the time multiplier and b is the time adder.
9. Select the polarizing quantities.
Click on the 'Polarized by' drop down list box and select one of the
following:
Vo, Io: Zero-sequence polarized relay. Vo and Io are the zero-sequence
voltage and current, respectively.
V2, I2: Negative-sequence polarized relay. V2 and I2 are the negative-
sequence voltage and current, respectively.
10. Select the location of the current sensor.
Click on the 'CT location' drop down list box and select the desired
location of the current sensor.
Note: Ignore this step for lines because their relays are always assumed
to sense the terminal current.
The CT Location list box contains a list of the possible current sensor
locations for transformers. The relay can sense either the terminal
current, or the current flowing in the primary or secondary neutral. In
the case of an autotransformer, the program will correctly sense the
common neutral current (select either of the Auto Neutral items). For a
3-winding transformer, you can also place the current sensor within the
delta tertiary.

11. Select the operating quantities.
Click on the 'Operates on' drop down list box and select one of the
following currents: 3Io, 3I2, Io or I2
Io and I2 are the zero- and negative-sequence current, respectively.
The operating time of the relay will depend on the magnitude of the
selected current.
12. Enter the reset time (in seconds) in 'Reset time'.
This is the time required for the disk to rotate back to the original position,
after a full travel at the maximum time dial. The program does not use this
information at this time.
14. Press OK to close the 'Overcurrent Ground Relay' dialog box.
The relay type and name will be listed in the 'Relays' edit box.
TO ADD AN OVERCURRENT PHASE RELAY:
1. Click on "Add OC Pha".
A dialog box for the new overcurrent phase relay will appear.

ID: A 20-character name for the relay. The ID has to be
unique among relays in the same breaker/relay
group.

CT ratio: The CT ratio is defined to be the primary/secondary turns
ratio of the current transformer. You can either a number
value or a ratio in the form of xxx/yyy or xxx:yyy. For
example, for a 600A-to-5A CT, enter one of the
following 120, 600/5 or 600:5.
Time dial: The time dial can have any value between the minimum
and maximum time-dial levers of the selected
overcurrent relay. The time dial value should be set to
1.0 if the relay has only one curve.
3. Select the relay type.
Click on the button marked next to the 'Curve' edit box. The
Curve Selector will appear.
The method of selecting a curve is the same as that for overcurrent
ground relays.
4. Select the tap unit.
Click on the 'Tap unit' drop down list box and select a tap unit.
The tap units are listed in alphabetical order. The list includes all tap
units found in the relay library files. If you wish to enter a pickup value
directly without referencing a tap unit, simply select N/A and proceed
to the next step.
Note: You can create the tap unit you want with the ASPEN Overcurrent
Relay Editor. See the ASPEN Overcurrent Relay Editor for details.
5. Enter the pickup value.
For a Continuous Tap Unit, enter the pickup value (in amperes) in
the Pickup (A)' edit box.
For a Discrete Tap Unit, either type in the pickup value (in amperes)
or select one from the 'Pickup (A)' drop down list box.
Note: If the tap value is out of the range of the tap unit you will receive
a warning, but you may elect to keep the value regardless.
6. Enter the instantaneous and definite-time settings.
Pri. A: Leave this value at 0.0 if the relay does not have an
instantaneous unit. Otherwise the setting should be the
value of the phase current (in amperes) at the primary
side of the current transformer. Once the instantaneous
unit is tripped, DistriView will assume that the time delay
is zero unless you enter a positive value under Delay.
Delay: The time delay of the definite time element in seconds.
This should be left at 0.0 if the relay does not have such
element.
Always flat: This option is meaningful only if you have entered a
positive Delay. When this option is marked, the definite
time segment is flat for currents above the Pri. A setting.
Otherwise, DistriView will compute the time delay as the
smaller of the two values: the definite time value, and the
time delay of the curve.

Always flat off. Always flat on.
Sensitive to dc offset. This feature is not yet available.

7. Select the directional control.
Click on the 'Directional' check box within the 'Time Element'
group box if the time delay element of the relay is directional.
Click on the 'Directional' check box within the 'Instantaneous
Element' group box if the instantaneous unit is directional.
Char. angle: The characteristic angle, in degrees, is measured between
the polarizing quantity and the vector of maximum
torque. The polarizing quantity of an overcurrent phase
relay is assumed to be one of the following:
Phase a: Vb - Vc
Phase b: Vc - Va
Phase c: Va - Vb
where Va, Vb and Vc are the phase voltages at the branch
terminal. The vector of maximum torque defines a half
plane, which is shown shaded in the figure below. The
relay is assumed to pick up whenever the phase current
lies within the shaded region. The characteristic angle is
initialized to 30 degrees.
Note: This edit box is visible only if either the time
element or the instantaneous unit is directional.
8. Enter voltage supervision parameters.

Select one of the following types in the dropdown list box:
None: If the phase relay is not voltage restrained or controlled.
Restrained L-L Type 1: The phase relay is voltage restrained. Phase a current is
supervised by Vab. Phase b current is supervised by Vbc. Phase c current is
supervised by Vca.
Restrained L-L Type 2: Sam as L-L Type 1, except the lowest voltage supervises all
of the phase currents.
Restrained L-L Type 3: The phase relay is voltage restrained. Phase a current is
supervised by Vac. Phase b current is supervised by Vba. Phase c current is
supervised by Vcb.

Restrained L-L Type 4: Same as L-L Type 3, except the lowest voltage supervises
all of the phase currents.
Restrained Compensated Type 1: The phase relay is voltage restrained. Phase
a current is supervised by (Vab-Vca)/1.732. Phase b current is supervised by
(Vbc- Vab)/1.732. Phase c current is supervised by (Vca-Vbc)/1.732.
Restrained Compensated Type 2: Same as Compensated Type 1, except the lowest
voltage supervises all of the phase currents.
Restrained L-N Type 1: If the phase relay is voltage restrained. The voltage units
measure the line-to-neutral voltage of phases a, b and c, and each phase current is
supervised by the corresponding voltage measurement.
Restrained L-N Type 2: Sam as L-N Type 1, except the lowest voltage measurement
supervises all of the phase currents.
Controlled L-L Type 1 through 4. The phase relay is voltage controlled. The
supervising voltages are the same as those of voltage restrained relays, L-L Type 1
through 6.
Controlled Compensated Type 1 and 2. The phase relay is voltage controlled.
The supervising voltages are the same as those of voltage restrained relays,
Compensated Type 1 and 2.
Controlled L-N Type 1 and 2: The phase relay is voltage controlled. The
supervising voltages are the same as those of voltage restrained relays, L-
N Type 1 and 2.
If you selected an entry other than None, an edit box labeled Percent
will appear. Enter the threshold of voltage-restrained or controlled in
percentage.
For a voltage-restrained relay, the pickup setting you entered is assumed to
be the pickup at 1 per-unit voltage. When the voltage decreases, the pickup
decreases similarly until the pickup reaches the threshold value. The graph
below is for a voltage-restrained relay with threshold voltage set at 25%.
Typical threshold voltage ranges from 12% to 30%.
For a voltage-controlled relay, the relay is enabled when the voltage drops
below the threshold value. Typical threshold value ranges from 80 to 90
percent.
8. Enter the time adder (in seconds) in 'time adder' and the time
multiplier in 'Time multiplier'.
The time delay is given by T=aT+b, where T is the time given by the
unshifted curve, and a is the time multiplier and b is the time adder.

9. Enter the reset time (in seconds) in 'Reset time'.
This is the time required for the disk to rotate back to the original position,
after a full travel at the maximum time dial. This value is used by DistriView
for recloser/relay coordination checking.
10. Enter memo with up to 512 characters.
11. Press OK to close the 'Overcurrent Phase Relay' dialog box.
The relay type and name will be listed in the 'Relays' edit box.

TO ADD A DISTANCE PHASE RELAY:
1. Click on "Add DS Pha".
A dialog box with a list of available distance relay types will be
displayed. The relay types with names that end with are
manufacturer-specific distance relay models.
Select a distance relay type. Press OK.

A dialog box for the new distance phase relay will appear.

ID: A 20-character name for the relay. The ID only has to be
unique among distance relays in the same relay group.
You can enter 12 additional characters in the unlabeled
edit box below this one for additional identification
information.
PT at: The default is the bus where the current relay group is
located. You can alternatively select a neighboring bus
that is on the opposite terminal of a transformer. The
program will automatically adjust the phase shift voltage
signal according to the winding configuration of the
transformer.

PT ratio: This parameter is within the parameters grid. The PT ratio
is the primary/secondary turns ratio of the voltage
transformer You can either a number value or a ratio in
the form of xxx/yyy or xxx:yyy.
CT ratio: This parameter is within the parameters grid. The CT
ratio is the primary/secondary turns ratio of the current
transformer. You can either a number value or a ratio in
the form of xxx/yyy or xxx:yyy. For example, for a 600A-
to-5A CT, enter one of the following 120, 600/5 or 600:5.
Min I: This parameter is within the parameters grid. This is the
fault detector threshold in secondary amperes. One of the
phase currents must exceed this value in order for the
relay to trip. We suggest you enter a non-zero value here
to avoid spurious tripping.
3. Select Zone 2 supervision.
Click on the button next to 'Zone 2 supervision' edit box to
bring up the Curve Selector. Select an overcurrent relay type if Zone
2 of this relay supervises an overcurrent relay. Otherwise, leave the
setting at '_Fixed' for a fixed zone-2 time delay.
A detailed description of the Curve Selector can be found in the
documentation for To Add An Overcurrent Phase Relay.
When you select an overcurrent relay type other than '_Fixed', two
additional edit boxes labeled 'Time dial' and Pickup (A) will appear.
These are the time dial and pickup of the overcurrent relay being
supervised by zone 2. The overcurrent relay is assumed to be non-
directional.
Enter the time dial value and the pickup setting.
Note: The program will ignore the zone-2 time-delay datum in the data
grid. The time delay of zone 2 will be based on the characteristics of the
relay curve you select here.
4. Click on "Change Type if you wish to change the distance relay-
type model being used for this relay.
Select a distance relay type and press OK.
The 'Relay Type' dialog box will disappear. The program will try to
preserve as many as the existing parameters as possible. In most cases,
you will need to enter new values. The type name above the data grid
will change accordingly.
5. Input the relay parameters in the data grid.
The data grid is initially filled with the default values of all the
parameters. The meanings of the various relay parameters are explained
in the Distance Relay Editor Users Manual.
6. Display line impedances.
Click on the 'Line Impedance' button.
A message box will appear displaying the line impedance in secondary
ohms. You can invoke this command any time after the CT and PT
ratios have been entered. You can specify the percentages the program
will use with the Relay | Options command.

Note: This button is dimmed and cannot be activated if the relay is not
on a line or cable.

8. Press OK to close the 'Distance Phase' dialog
box. TO ADD A DISTANCE GROUND RELAY:
1. Click on "Add DS Gnd".
A dialog box with a list of available distance relay types will be
displayed. The relay types with names that end with are
manufacturer-specific distance relay models.
Select a distance relay type. Press OK.

A dialog box will appear for the parameters of the new relay.

The instructions for adding a ground distance relay are the same as
those for adding a phase distance relay with following exceptions:
1. The fault-detector threshold -- i.e., the parameter Min I (secA)
within the data grid -- for a ground relay is the minimum ground
current, 3Io (in secondary amps) that is required to activate the
ground relay. We suggest you enter a nonzero value here to avoid
spurious tripping.
2. There are four additional parameters within the data grid for entering
the magnitude and angle of K1 and K2. The parameter K is
defined as (Zo-Z1)/(3Z1), where Zo and Z1 are the zero- and
positive- sequence impedances of the line or cable. The parameter
K1 is used for zone 1 only. The parameter K2 is used for the other
zones.
3. The Line Impedance button will give you the value of K1 for the
line. TO IMPORT PROTECTIVE DEVICE DATA TO THE RELAY GROUP:
1. Press the Import button. The Import Relay Data wizard will appear to
guide you through the process of creating a device with imported relay data.

2. Select a data-source type.
Relay data can be imported from the following data sources:
SEL-5010 Database: Setting data in an SEL-5010 MDB database file.
SEL-5010 Export Data: Setting data in an MDB file exported from
the SEL-5010 program.
SEL-5030 AcSELerator Database: Setting data in an SEL-5030
RDB database file.
SEL-5030 AcSELerator Export Data: Setting data in text files exported
from SEL-5030 AcSELerator. There are usually multiple text files, one
for each setting group. These files must reside in a single directory.
ASPEN Relay Database Export Data: Setting data in ASPEN Relay
Databases text data format (.TXT file). See appendix in ASPEN
Relay Database User Manual for the setting-file format specification.
ASPEN DistriView Relay Data: Setting data in DistriViews relay text data
format (.RYT file). See SECTION 6 PROTECTIVE DEVICE
FORMAT for the format specification. The location information in the
.RAT file is ignored.
ASPEN Relay Database: Setting data in ASPEN Relay Database.
GE UR and 469 Relay Setting data.
Click on one of the data types in the list box and press Next.
3. Select a Setting Scheme to Import
When the import from a data source that contains multiple setting schemes,
such as the SEL-5010 database, the Wizard will display a screen that lists
all the available setting schemes. The picture below shows such a list. You
can make use of the dropdown list box in the upper right corner in this
screen to show either all the schemes or just the schemes of certain SEL
relay type.

Click on a setting scheme in the list box and press Next.
4. Select Relay Elements to Import.
Mark one or more elements in the list box.

Press Next to commence data import.
Note: When the data source contains settings for multiple groups, additional
dialog box will appear to let you select the setting group you want to import.
Relay dialog boxes that correspond to the selected relay elements will
appear one after another. Please refer to the documentation for the NEW
BREAKER/RELAY GROUP COMMAND for more information on these
dialog boxes.

5. Verify imported relay settings in relay dialog box. Enter additional
parameters as prompted. Press OK to close the dialog box.
The newly imported devices will appear in the list of devices in the
relay group.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
NEW FUSE COMMAND
The New Fuse command lets you add a new fuse to a line, transformer or voltage regulator.
TO ADD A NEW FUSE TO A BRANCH:
the mouse.
You must click near the branch end where you want to add the fuse. The
branch symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the Relay | New Fuse command.
DistriView will place the fuse on the end of the branch that is closest
to your mouse click. A dialog box will appear asking you for the
parameters of the new fuse.
3. Input the fuse identifier in 'ID'.

The fuse identifier can have up to 20 characters.
4. Select the fuse type.
Click on the button to bring up the Curve Selector.

The tree-list on the left of this dialog box shows all fuse curves from
overcurrent curve library files located in the Library Directory. The
TO SELECT A RELAY CURVE:
curve you want.
TO LOOK UP A FUSE CURVE:

words.
5. Input a current divider value.
The current divider acts as a CT ratio for relays. This value should be
1.0 for nearly all fuses. It should be 2 or higher to model identical fuses
that put in parallel. For example, if you created a 600-amp fuse by
paralleling two identical 300-amp fuses, then the current divider should
be 2, and the fuse curve should be that of a 300-amp fuse.
6. Input a minimum melt time multiplier.
This time multiplier affects the minimum-melt curve of the fuse only. It
is common practice to lower the minimum-melt curve to model the
heating of the fuse due to reclosing. This multiplier must be between 0.0
and 1.0.
7. Input the rated interrupt ampere rating.
DistriView checks this value against the maximum asymmetric short-
circuit current in the Check | Device Interrupt Rating command.

9. Select the fuse operating time.
Click on either the "Total clear" or "Minimum melt" radio
button.
A fuse has two operating curves: "total clear", which is the upper curve,
and "minimum melt", which is the lower. The one you select is used
for computing and displaying the fuse operating time.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
NEW COMPOUNDED CURVE OC DEVICE COMMAND
This command lets you add a new compounded curve overcurrent (CCOC) device to a line, transformer
or voltage regulator. CCOC device can have up to four overcurrent protection functions: long-time, short-
time, high-current and ground. Each protection function can be supervised by time-overcurrent minimum
response and total-clear curve or have a definite response time as shown in the following figure.
Long-time
pickup
Long-time curve delay

Calibrated at 5 times
pickups
Long-time
trip curve
Short-time
trip curve
Ground
pickup High-current
pickup High-current
Short-time trip curve
pickup
Cutoff-
Ground current
trip curve
CCOC device can be used to model a wide range of overcurrent protective devices in distribution
systems, such as low voltage power breakers and electronic fuses.

TO ADD A NEW CCOC DEVICE TO A BRANCH:
the mouse.
You must click near the branch end where you want to add the device.
2. Select the Relay | New Compounded Curve OC device command.
DistriView will place the device on the end of the branch that is closest
parameters of the new device.
3. Input the device identifier in 'ID'.

The device identifier can have up to 20 characters
4. Select the device type.
Click on the button to bring up the Curve Selector.

The tree-list on the left of this dialog box shows all fuse and CCOC
curves from overcurrent curve library files in the Library Directory.
The memo box on the right displays detailed information on the
highlighted entry in the tree-list.
TO SELECT A CURVE:
curve you want.
TO LOOK UP A CURVE:

words.
5. Input device current rating.
Continuous current ratings are entered in amperes. This is used as base
value for overcurrent function pickup setting when applicable.
6. Input cut-off current.
The cut-off current of the curve is equal to the rated interrupting
capability of the overcurrent device in amperes.
7. Select or enter overcurrent protection function pickup and delay:
The pickup is entered in multiple of device rating in amperes
when applicable.
The delay is entered in seconds. It is assumed that delay time is
calibrated at 5 times curve pickup when applicable.
DistriView uses the highest among three phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic) to
calculate the trip time of long-time, short-time and high current trip
functions. The trip time of the ground protection function is calculated
using the neutral current 3Io.

Note: Enter zero in the pickup edit box if the corresponding protection
function is not available on the device.
9. Select the operating time.
Click on either the "Min" or "Max" radio button.
When an overcurrent protection function has two operating curves: the
one you select will be used for computing and displaying the device
operating time in DistriView.
This selection has no effect when the device has a single curve.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
NEW RECLOSER COMMAND
The New Recloser command lets you add a new recloser to a line, a cable or a transformer. Each recloser
object has a phase unit and a ground unit. You can disable one of these units by setting both the fast and
slow curve type to N/A.
TO ADD A RECLOSER TO A BRANCH:
You must click near the branch end where you want to add the
recloser.
2. Select the Relay | New Recloser command.
DistriView will place the recloser on the end of the branch that is closest
parameters of the new recloser.
3. Input the recloser identifier in 'ID'.

The recloser identifier can have up to 18 characters. There are no
uniqueness requirements for recloser IDs.
Note: In some reports, you may see the characters _G and _P
appended to the recloser ID. These are the names of the ground
and phase unit, respectively.

4. Enter the total number of operations required to lock out the recloser
in 'Total operations to lockout'.
This number must be 1, 2, 3 or 4. The same number applies to both
phase and ground units.
5. Enter the number of fast operations in No. of fast operations.
This number must be between 0 and n-1, where n is the total number of
operations to lockout. In practical terms, this means if the recloser has
just one curve, that curve has to be the slow curve (and not the fast
curve). The number of fast operations applies to both phase and ground
units.
6. Specify the reclosing intervals in seconds in the 'Reclosing interval
(s)' edit boxes.
The reclosing interval is the elapse time between successive recloser
opening and reclosing. You must enter (n-1) positive values, where n is
the total number of operations to lockout.
7. Specify the momentary rating in amperes.
DistriView checks this value against the maximum symmetric short-
circuit current in the Check | INTERRUPTING DEVICE RATING
COMMAND.
8. Specify the interrupt time in seconds.
The curves for the older reclosers are for the clearing time. For these
curves, you should set the interrupt time to 0.0. The curves for the newer
electronic reclosers are for the response time. For these curves, you must
enter the interrupt time, which is typically around 0.04 seconds.
DistriView will add the interrupt time to the response time to arrive at the
clearing time.
9. Specify the phase unit parameters.
Select the recloser curve for which the operating time will be
displayed on the one-line and in the Curves Window. Click on
'Slow' or 'Fast'.
SELECT THE SLOW CURVE
Click on the button to the right of the slow-curve edit box to bring
up the Curve Selector.
Press the No curve required button if the slow curve is not enabled. The
tree-list on the left of this dialog box shows all the recloser curves from
overcurrent-curve library files located in the Library Directory. The

Note: The checkbox labeled Show single-curve devices only is
marked by default because most recloser types have only one, and only
one, curve. Remove the check mark if the recloser type you are seeking
has multiple curves.
TO SELECT A RECLOSER CURVE:
curve you want.
TO LOOK UP A RECLOSER CURVE:
Press Find. A dialog will appear.

words.
Press Find. The dialog will disappear. If an entry with matching
SELECT THE FAST CURVE
Select the Fast curve with a similar procedure. Select N/A if the
fast curve is not enabled.
Note: If you select N/A for both fast and slow curves, the program will
deactivate the phase unit.
SPECIFY THE PICKUP CURRENT
Enter the pickup current in amperes if the recloser curve is drawn
as operating time versus times minimum current. Leave the
pickup current at 1A if the recloser curve is drawn as operating time
versus amperes. The vast majority of recloser curves are drawn as
operating time versus amperes.
SPECIFY THE TIME MULTIPLIER AND ADDER
Enter the Time Multiplier (dimensionless) and the Time Adder in
seconds.

SPECIFY THE MINIMUM RESPONSE TIME
Enter the Minimum Response time in seconds. The default value is
zero. SPECIFY THE HIGH CURRENT TRIP SETTING
Enter the High Current Trip setting in amperes and delay in seconds.
The default values are 0.0A (which means the high-current trip is not in
use), and 0.0s.
When the high-current-trip setting is not zero and it is exceeded by the
recloser current, the program gives the operating time as the high-current-
trip delay, adjusted by the time multiplier (but not the time adder) of the
operating curve.
When the high-current-trip is not operating, the program gives the
operating time as the higher of two quantities: ( a*t+b ) and ( a*c+b ),
where t is the operating time according to the operating curve, a is the
time multiplier, b is the time adder, and c is the minimum response
time of the operating curve.
ENTERING A MEMO FOR THE PHASE UNIT
Optional: Enter a memo with up to 512 characters.
10. Specify the ground unit parameters.
Enter the parameters for the ground unit in the same manner as for
the phase unit.
11. Press OK to close the 'Recloser Info' dialog box.
The new recloser symbol will be shown highlighted in dotted red.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
NEW SECTIONALIZER COMMAND
The New Sectionalizer command lets you add a new sectionalizer to a line, cable or transformer.
TO ADD A NEW SECTIONALIZER TO A BRANCH:
You must click near the branch end where you want to add the
sectionalizer.
2. Select the Relay | New Sectionalizer command.
DistriView will place the sectionalizer on the end of the branch that is
closest to your mouse click. A dialog box will appear asking you for
the parameters of the new sectionalizer.
3. Input the sectionalizer identifier in 'ID'.

The identifier can have up to 20 characters. There are no uniqueness
requirements for sectionalizer IDs.
4. Enter the number of operations required to lock out the sectionalizer
in 'Shots to Lockout.
5. Enter the actuating current (in amperes) in 'Actuating Amps.'
6. Enter in 'Memory Time' the duration (in seconds) in which the
operating count is stored.
The memory time must be non-zero if the shots to lockout of item 4 is 2 or
higher.
7. Enter the peak current rating in amperes.
DistriView checks this rating against the maximum symmetrical short-
circuit current in the Check | INTERRUPTING DEVICE RATING
COMMAND.

8. Click on 'Has voltage restraint' if the sectionalizer is inhibited
from counting when a healthy voltage is present on its terminals.
10. Press OK to close the Sectionalizer Data dialog box.
The new sectionalizer symbol will be shown highlighted in dotted red.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
VIEW RELAY CURVES COMMAND
The View Relay Curves command lets you view the time-versus-current characteristics of an
overcurrent relay, fuse or recloser or the impedance characteristics of a distance relay. To execute this
command you must first select a protective device.
TO VIEW CURVE OF A RELAY, FUSE OR RECLOSER:
1. Select a breaker/relay group, fuse, or recloser.
Click the left mouse button once on the device symbol on the one-line.
2. Select the Relay | View Relay Curves command.
BREAKER/RELAY GROUP
If you selected a breaker/relay group in step 1, a dialog box will appear
asking you to select a relay to display.
Select a relay in the list box and click on the "OK" button.
If you select an overcurrent relay, the Curves Window will appear
showing the selected relay curve. See note below.
If you select a distance relay, the DS Relays Window will appear
showing the impedance characteristics of the relay you selected.
RECLOSER
If you selected a recloser symbol, a dialog box will appear to ask you
whether you want to see the curves for the ground unit or the phase unit.
Select a recloser unit in the list box and click on the "OK" button.
The Curves Window will appear showing the recloser curve. See note
below.

FUSE
If you selected a fuse symbol, the Curves Window will appear with the
fuse curve shown. See note below.
Note: If the Curves Window is already showing one or more curves
when you execute the View | Relay Curves command, DistriView will ask
you whether you want to (1) retain the existing curves and add the new
curve to the plot, or (2) remove all existing curves and start a new plot
with the new curve. Press Yes in the dialog box below for the first
option, and No for the second option.
3. Working with relay curves.

You can work on the Main Window and one of the two relay windows
(Curves Window or DS Relays Window) at the same time. If you have
a large monitor, you can arrange the windows side by side and execute
commands in both windows. When you display a fault in one of the
windows, the same fault is displayed in the other window. If your
monitor is not large enough to see both windows at the same time, you
can minimize the relay window while you view the one-line diagram.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
OPEN CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND
A curve collection is defined as a set of time-versus-current characteristics of overcurrent relays,
fuses and reclosers, as well as damage curves, inrush curves and annotations that are shown on the
Curves Window at the same time. DistriView lets you store one or more curve collections in binary
files called Previous Curves Collection (PCC) files. The Open Curve Collection command lets you
recall a curve collection from a PCC file and display its contents on the Curves Window.
The curve-collection feature is designed as a timesaving device for users who need to view and edit
specific collections of curves time and time again. We have several recommendations that may help you
manage your curve collections:
1. Give your PCC file the same, or similar, name as your binary data file. For example, if your data file
is abc.dtv, then you may want to name your PCC file abc.pcc.
2. Use different PCC files for different substations or feeders. For example, if there are two feeders
in abc.dtv, then you may want to save the collections to two different PCC files abc_SFO.pcc and
abc_LAX.pcc for the two feeders.
3. Give descriptive names to the different curve collections within a PCC file so that you can tell
them apart later on.
TO VIEW A CURVE COLLECTION:
1. Select the Relay | Open Curve Collection command.
If a PCC file has not been opened, a dialog box will appear asking you
the name of the PCC file that you wish to open.
of the PCC file. Click on "OK".
The file dialog box will disappear, and the curve collection information
dialog box will appear.
This dialog box shows the name of the PCC file and lists all the curve
collections that it contains. Each entry in the list box shows the name of
the collection, followed by the ID of the protective devices and the
number of damage curves that it contains.
2. Select the curve collection you want to display and click on "Show".
The Curve Window will appear showing all of curves contained in the
collection. You can perform various operations on this window, such as
adding, removing and editing the curves. You can also display faults that
you simulated on the curves.
When you are done editing the curves, you can overwrite the existing
curve collection or save the updated curves as a new curve collection.
Please see the Misc | Save This Curve Collection command in the
Curves Window for details.

TO OPEN ANOTHER PCC FILE OR SAVE AN OPENED PCC FILE:
The curve collection information dialog box will appear.
Click on:
"Open" and enter the appropriate information in the standard file
dialog box to open a new PCC file. If the present PCC file has been
changed, another dialog box will appear asking you whether the change
should be saved.
"Save" to save the curve collections to the PCC file you open
previously.
"Save as" and enter the appropriate information in the standard
file dialog box to save the curve collections to a PCC file of a
different name.
Click on "Done" to close the dialog box.
TO RENAME OR REMOVE A CURVE COLLECTION:
The curve collection information dialog box will appear.
Select a curve collection and click on:
"Remove" to remove the curve collection.
"Rename" and enter the appropriate information as prompted to
rename a curve collection.
Press "Done" to close the dialog box.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
DELETE COMMAND
The Delete command under the Relay Menu lets you delete a breaker/relay group, a fuse, a recloser or
sectionalizer.
Note: Use the Relay | Properties command on a breaker/relay group if you wish to delete individual
relays within the group.
TO DELETE A BREAKER/RELAY GROUP, FUSE, RECLOSER OR SECTIONALIZER:
1. Click the left mouse button once on a breaker/relay group or a
fuse, recloser or sectionalizer.
2. Select the Relay | Delete command.
If you selected a fuse, recloser or sectionalizer, the device will be deleted
after you have confirmed the deletion in a message box.
If you selected a breaker/relay group, DistriView will delete the breaker
as well as all the relays after you confirmed the deletion.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
IMPORT RELAY COMMAND
The Import Relay command is designed to facilitate the transfer of a large amount of protective device
data from a text file into a DistriView binary data file. Protective devices include overcurrent ground and
phase relays, fuses, breakers, reclosers, sectionalizers, and CCOC devices. The text file must be in the
ASPEN protective device format described in SECTION 6 PROTECTIVE DEVICE FORMAT. This
command is most commonly used to transfer protective device data from a relay database into DistriView.
TO IMPORT PROTECTIVE DEVICE DATA FROM A TEXT FILE:
1. Select the Relay | Import Relay command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the text file to
import. The default extension is .RYT.
2. Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the
protective device data file that you wish to import.
Press OK.
Once DistriView accepts the file name the dialog box will disappear. If
any data errors are found when importing a protective device, the
program ignores only that protective device. Data errors and error
messages, if any, will be displayed in the TTY Window (use the View |
TTY Window to open it).
Part of the data for each protective device tells the program where it
resides in the network. DistriView places protective devices with valid
location data automatically. Those that have invalid or missing location
information are put into a "holding tank" in the binary data file. You can
later place these relays using the Relay | Place Imported Relay
command.
3. Optional: Use the Save command to save the new relay information
to disk.

Main Window
RELAY MENU
EXPORT RELAY COMMAND
The Export Relay command lets you export the present settings for all of the protective devices to a text
file. Protective devices include overcurrent ground and phase relays, distance ground and phase relays,
fuses, breakers, reclosers, sectionalizers and CCOC devices. This file will be in the ASPEN Protective
Device format. See SECTION 6 PROTECTIVE DEVICE FORMAT for more information. The data
file generated by this command is formatted for computer usage and not for human readability. Please
use the Report button in the Data Browser to generate a more readable tabular report.
TO EXPORT PROTECTIVE DEVICE DATA TO A TEXT FILE:
1. Select the Relay | Export Relay command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to name the protective device
data file.
of the protective data file.
You should name all your protective device text files with the .RYT
extension.

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
SOLVE SHORT CIRCUIT COMMAND
The Solve Short Circuit command lets you specify and simulate faults. To activate this command you
must first select either (1) a node if you wish to simulate a bus fault, (2) a breaker relay group, fuse,
recloser or a branch if you wish to simulate a close-in fault, an intermediate fault, or a line-end fault.
DistriView automatically displays the solution on the one-line after the faults are simulated.
TO SPECIFY A BUS FAULTS:
1a. Select a node or a protective device.
Click the left mouse button once on a substation bus or on a
distribution node that you want to fault.
2a. Select the S_Ckt | Solve Short Circuit command.
The pre-fault-voltage-profile option is shown near the top of the dialog
box. You can change it with the S_Ckt | SHORT CIRCUIT & LOCKED
ROTOR OPTIONS COMMAND.
TO SPECIFY A CLOSE-IN, INTERMEDIATE OR LINE-END FAULT:

1b. Click the left mouse button once on the symbol of a breaker/relay group,
a fuse, a recloser, or a branch.
A close-in fault is applied to the branch immediately in front of the
selected protective device.
A line-end fault is applied to the far end of the branch (from the selected
protective device), after the branch has been disconnected from the
remote bus.
An intermediate fault is applied to an intermediate point on the line or
cable.
Line-end and intermediate faults are available for lines and cables only.
They cannot be applied to transformers or voltage regulators.

2b. Select the S_Ckt | Solve Short Circuit command.
Click on one of the three radio buttons to select a close-in fault, a line-end
fault or an intermediate fault.
Line-end and intermediate faults are enabled only for lines and cables.
For an intermediate fault, enter a percentage in the %= edit box.
The percentage is measured from the first node listed in the branch
name following on branch:. The numeric value is limited to 0.01 to
99.99.
SPECIFY FAULT CONNECTION, FAULT IMPEDANCE, AND OTHEROPTIONS:

3. Select one or more phase connections by marking the check boxes
below: 3L Ungrounded: The 3 phases are shorted together, but not
grounded.
3LG: Three phase to ground fault.
2LG: Two phase to ground fault. Then select appropriate phases.
1LG: Single phase to ground fault. Then select appropriate
phase. L-L: Line to line fault. Then select appropriate phases.
Examples of the last four phase connections are illustrated in the
following figure. Z is the fault impedance that you can specify.
4. Specify the fault impedance, if any.

Enter the fault impedance in 'Fault Z (ohm)'. See figure above for the
position of the fault impedance. The fault impedance is ignored for 3L-
Ungrounded faults.

5. Click on "Clear previous results" to discard all previous
fault simulations.
DistriView appends the results of new simulations to the previous results
when this option is turned off. This results in a collection of simulation
results that the user can call up for reporting and for viewing on one-line
diagram or relay characteristics. For instance, you can display any of
the faults on the on-line diagram by pressing the VCR-like buttons in the
Main Windowss toolbar.
Usually, a user turns on this Clear previous results option when he
finishes the study at one location and wants to start at another location
with a clean slate.
6. Mark the "Include induction machines" checkbox to
include induction machine contributions in the fault
simulation.
If the prefault voltages come from a solved voltage-drop study: This
check box is marked and disable, which means all single- and 3-phase
induction machines will be included in the short circuit calculation.
If the prefault voltages come from a linear network solution: Marking this
box will cause 3-phase induction machines to be included in the short
circuit study. Single-phase inductions machines will be ignored.
7. Mark the "Reset LTCs and regulators" checkbox to reset all voltage
regulators to their neutral position and all transformer LTCs to their
center kV positions before simulating the short circuit.
This check box is unmarked and disable if the prefault voltages come
from a solved voltage-drop study.
8. Press Simulate.
If the prefault-voltage option is set to from a solved voltage-drop study,
DistriView will automatically perform a voltage drop simulation if it has
not been done earlier.
DistriView will then begin the fault calculations. A dialog box will
appear to inform you of the program's progress. At the end of the
simulation, the last fault solution will be shown on the one-line diagram.
You can see the fault description in the status bar at the bottom of the
Main Window. There is also a summary of the fault solution in the TTY
Window.
Note: Use the VCR-like buttons on the toolbar to view other faults. Press
the various buttons on the toolbar to view different phase and sequence
quantities for the fault being displayed. You can also view the voltage
and current phasors on any piece of equipment by executing the View |
Phasors command.

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
SIMULATE LOCKED ROTOR COMMAND
The Simulate Locked Rotor command lets you simulate the locked-rotor condition on a single- or 3-phase
induction generator or motor. The locked-rotor condition is the first instance when an induction machine is
energized, before the rotor starts to rotate. The program automatically takes into account the starting
strategies for mitigating the effects of motor/generator starting.
TO SIMULATE LOCKED-ROTOR CONDITION:
1. Select a single- or 3-phase induction machine.
Click the left mouse button once on the induction machine for which
you wish to perform a locked-rotor study.
The induction-machine symbol will turn dotted red when selected.
2. Select the S_CKT Simulate Locked Rotor command.
A dialog box will appear. The pre-fault-voltage-profile option is
shown near the top of the dialog box. You can change it with the
S_Ckt | Short Circuit & Locked Rotor Options command.
3. Mark the "Include induction machines" checkbox to include

contributions from other induction machines in the fault
simulation.
This check box is marked and disable if the prefault voltages come from a
solved voltage-drop study.
regulators to their neutral position and all transformer LTCs to
their center kV positions before simulating the short circuit.
5. Press Simulate.
DistriView will then simulate the locked-rotor condition and display the
results on the one-line diagram. A locked-rotor solution looks exactly
like a short-circuit solution: The total locked-rotor current is shown in
red, next to the X mark. The bus voltages are shown below the bus
names in either per unit (if ends with pu) or in a scaled per-unit
quantity (if ends with (V).
Note: Use the buttons on the toolbar to change the quantities
displayed. The starting strategy is specified as part of the induction
machine data. Double-click on the induction machine to change the
starting method.

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
VIEW SHORT CIRCUIT OR LOCKED ROTOR SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The View Short Circuit or Locked Rotor Solution on 1-Line command lets you select a short-circuit or
locked-rotor solution to be displayed on the one-line diagram. You must have performed one of these
studies prior to executing this command: S_Ckt | Solve Short Circuit for a short-circuit study, or S_Ckt |
Simulate Locked Rotor for a lock-rotor study.
TO SHOW SHORT-CIRCUIT OR LOCKED-ROTOR SOLUTION ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the View | Short Circuit or Locked Rotor Solution on 1-
Line command.
You will see this dialog box. (The title bar will read Display Locked
Rotor Solution on One-Line if the solutions are for locked-rotor
studies.)
2. Select a short-circuit or locked-rotor case by clicking once on

its description in the list box.
If the case description takes more than one line, you can select the case
by click on any of the lines.
3. Select quantities to be displayed.
Click on one of the following radio buttons to display the sequence
or phase voltages and currents.
0 seq: Zero-sequence voltages and 3 times the zero-
sequence currents.
+ seq: Positive-sequence voltages and currents.
- seq: Negative-sequence voltages and currents.
Pha a: Phase-'a' voltages and currents.
Pha b: Phase-'b' voltages and currents.
Pha c: Phase-'c' voltages and currents.
Click on the "Relay Operating Time" radio button to display the
operating times of protective devices on the one-line. Select the relay
types to be considered by clicking on one or both of the following
check boxes. Note: You choice here will affect only the display for
breaker/relay groups and recloser objects.

Ground: To take the operating time of ground relays and the
ground unit of reclosers into account when computing the
fastest operating time for the break/relay groups and
recloser objects, respectively.
Phase: To take the operating time of phase relays and the phase
unit of reclosers into account when computing the fastest
operating time for the break/relay groups and recloser
objects, respectively.
For breaker/relay groups, the program will display the fastest operating
time of phase and/or ground relays within the group.
For reclosers, the program will display the operating time of the
ground or phase unit -- or the faster of the two.
For fuses, the program will show the minimum-melt or total-clear time,
depending on your time selection in the fuses info dialog box (i.e.,
minimum-melt time or total-clear time).
4. Select the output display units.
You can skip this section if you are displaying relay operating time.
Click on the "p.u." radio button to display the voltages in per unit.
Click on the "p.u. X" radio button and enter a value in the edit box
to display the voltages as the per-unit value multiplied by the
constant you entered.
Click on the kV radio button to display the voltages in kV.
5. Press Display.
The dialog box will disappear and the one-line diagram will be redrawn
to show the output quantities requested. A red X and the total fault
current will appear at the fault location.
In addition, the program generates a summary of the fault on the TTY
Window, which looks like this.
For more information on how solution quantities are displayed on the

one-line diagram, please refer to documentation on the View | Solution
commands.

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
SIMULATE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER FAULT COMMAND
The Simulate Distribution Transformer Fault command lets you simulate a fault on the low-voltage side
of a distribution transformer. The term distribution transformer here refers to the single-phase, center-
tapped transformer that is commonly used in North America to supply electrical power to a house.
The distribution transformer is assumed to be connected to the distribution node you selected with the
mouse. If you want to simulate a distribution transformer fault in the middle of a feeder, you need to
create a tap node at the middle of the feeder.
TO SIMULATE A DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER FAULT:
1. Select the node where the distribution transformer is located.
Click the left mouse button once on the node of interest.
2. Select the S_CKT | Distribution Transformer Fault command.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Select one of the High Side Connection options.

The connection options available are phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase.
4. Select the fault type.
The distribution transformer is center tapped on the secondary side. Thus
the two fault types possible are line-to-line or line-to-neutral.
5. Specify the parameters of the distribution transformer.
The transformer parameters to be specified are its rating in kVA, the
impedance in % on its own rating, and the line to neutral voltage.
6. Check 'Include induction machines' check box to include the effect
of induction motors on the feeder.
This check box is marked and disable if the prefault voltage come from
a solved voltage-drop study.
7. Click 'OK' to simulate the specified fault.
The high side fault currents will be shown on the one-line diagram.
Detailed simulation report with low side fault current will be displayed
in the TTY window.

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 3 COMMAND REFERENCE 295
Main Window
S_CKT MENU
FAULT ALL BUSES COMMAND
The Fault All Buses command simulates and displays the fault current for all the nodes in a feeder. The
fault currents are also shown in a tabular form, along with the X/R ratios.
After executing this command, you can view a plot of the variation of the fault currents along the feeder by
executing the View | All-Bus-Fault Current Profile command.
TO FAULT ALL THE NODES IN A FEEDER:
1. Select the S_Ckt | Fault All Buses command.
A dialog box will appear. The text near the top of the dialog box tells
which of the prefault-voltage options is in effect. You can change the
options in the S_Ckt | Short-Circuit and Locked-Rotor Options
command.
The list box shows all the substation buses in the file.
2. Click on an entry in the list box to select a substation bus.

Your selection determines which feeder will be processed. If the feeder of
interest has more than one substation buses, you can select any one of
them.
simulation.
This check box is unmarked and disable if the prefault voltage come

5. Limit the buses to be faulted by node level.
Node Level is a node parameter. You can use this feature to limit which
faulted nodes are included in the report.
6. Select one of the three output styles for text report.
Sort by node name, kV: The tabular output is sorted in ascending order
of the node name and nominal kV.
Sort by node number: The tabular output is sorted in ascending order
of the node number. For nodes with number 0, the program sorts them
by node name and kV.
Tree walk: The tabular output follows a depth-first traversal of the
feeder. Each path starts from the trunk of the feeder and stops at the
tip of a tree branch. The logic then back tracks to the trunk and goes
down another tree branch that has not been traversed. The tree walk
ends when all the nodes in the feeder have been encountered.
7. Select the output device. Click on:
To File: If you want to write the solution to a text file. A
standard file dialog box will appear to let you specify
output file name.
To TTY: If you want to write the solution to the TTY Window.
To Printer: If you want to print the solution report. A standard font
dialog box will appear to ask you to select a font.
The cursor will be changed to an hourglass while the report and the
summaries are being sent to the output device.
8. Mark the Save results to Windows Clipboard if you want the
program to save the table of fault currents and X/R ratios to
the Windows Clipboard.
You can later paste and manipulate the information in a spreadsheet or
word processing program.
9. Enter the number of lines per page in 'Lines per page'.
Printers vary in the number of lines of text they can conveniently fit on a
page. This value is set initially to 60.
10. Press Simulate
DistriView will begin the short circuit calculations. A total of ten faults
are computed for each bus (one 3-phase fault, three 2LG faults, three
1LG faults, and three L-L faults). A dialog box will appear to inform you
of the program's progress. At the end of the simulation the fault current
will be displayed next to each bus on the one-line diagram.

Specifically, the quantities shown on the one-line diagram are the short-
circuit currents (in amperes) for 3-phase-to-ground (3LG), 2-line-to-
ground (2LG), single-line-to-ground (1LG) and line-to-line (L-L) faults.
For 2LG, 1LG and L-L faults, the current displayed is the highest among
the three possible phase connections. Some fault currents are omitted if
one or more phases are not energized.
A report is shown in the TTY Window. See pictures below.
REF: Reference number. This is used in the tree-walk format only. The
program assigns a unique integer to each node as the node is
encountered in the depth-first traversal of the feeder. The reference
number is designed to help you visualize the paths taken by the tree
walk.
FAULT CURRENTS: Under this heading are the 3-phase, 2-line-to-
ground, single-line-to-ground and line-to-line fault currents in amperes.
MAXIMUM CURRENT Asymm: Maximum asymmetric fault
current. Following each fault simulation on this node, the program
computes the asymmetric fault current for each of the faults. The value
shown is the highest asymmetric fault current at this node. See
APPENDIX G: ASYMMETRIC FAULT CURRENT for more
information on how the asymmetric fault current is computed.
MAXIMUM CURRENT Pha: Maximum phase current from all the
faults on this node.
MAXIMUM CURRENT Gnd: Maximum ground current from all the
faults on this node.
THEVENIN IMPEDANCE: The positive- and zero-sequence Thevenin
impedances.

Output sorted by node name and nominal kV
Output of a tree walk

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
ARC-FLASH HAZARD CALCULATOR COMMAND
The Arc-Flash Hazard Calculator Command in the Main Window let you perform arc-flash hazard
calculation using methodology recommended in the IEEE 1584 standard. DistriView automatically
simulates a 3-phase fault at selected bus to determine arcing current and fault clearing time. The program
utilizes IEEE 1584 curve fitting equations in calculation of arcing current and incident energy when bus
nominal kV is 15 or less. IEEE 1584 recommended Lee method equations are used in all other cases. Arc-
flash hazard is reported for 100% and 85% of total 3-phase fault current. The report includes the minimum
PPE category required in NFPA 70E and arc-flash hazard boundary for different category of personal
protective equipment (PPE).
TO RUN THE ARC-FLASH CALCULATOR:
1. Select the S_Ckt | Arc-Flash Hazard Calculator command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the calculation parameters.
2. Select the study extent: Highlighted node on the 1-line or Select list of
nodes If the second option is selected the program will display the Node
Selector dialog (see GENERATE LIST OF NODES COMMAND) to let
you build the list before commencing the calculation.
3. Select an equipment category:
Click on the dropdown list to select one of the following IEEE 1584
equipment category at the site under study:
Switch gear
Cable
Open air
MCC and panel boards (available only for buses of 1 kV or
lower)
Click on the dropdown list to select whether the equipment has no
enclosure or it is inside an enclosed space.
Enter conductor gap in millimeters. This is the gap over which arcing
takes place.
Enter working distance. This is distance from the possible arc point to
the person.
Click on Use typical values button if you want to use commonly used
values for conductor gap, working distance and enclosure type for
the selected equipment category and kV.
4. Click on the dropdown list labeled Fault clearing to specify the method
for determining fault clearing time for 3-phase fault at this site.

Choose Manual if you want to enter the fault clearing time manually.
Choose Stepped-event simulation if you want the program to
determine the clearing time from stepped-event simulation with the
initiating event being a 3LG fault at the node.
Choose Fastest device in the list below or select a specific device in the
list if you want to use the operating time of nearby protective devices
in the vicinity. Following logic is utilized in clearing time calculation:
Only phase relays, reclosers and fuses operation is considered.
If the device is a fuse, the total clear time curve is used. If the
device is a recloser that has two tripping curves, the fast curve is
used.
If the tripping device is not a fuse, total arc clearing time
calculated as the sum of device tripping time and
breaker interrupting time.
5. (Only if Manual is selected in step 4) Enter fault clearing time in seconds.
6. Select check box Ignore 2-seconds fault clearing time rule if you do not
want to apply the IEEE 1584 rule that sets 2-second upper limit of fault
clearing in calculating arc incident energy.
7. Select in the dropdown list the options of Output to TTY window or
Output to Excel CSV file.
7. Click on OK to start calculation.
Arc-flash hazard report will be printed in the TTY window or in CSV
file as you selected:

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN COMMAND
The Voltage-Sag Analysis | Run command in the Main Window helps you study the voltage variations at
a voltage-sensitive customer's node (the monitored bus hereafter) caused by short circuits in the vicinity.
The program automatically simulates bus faults in the vicinity of the monitored bus and tabulates the
voltage at the monitored bus. Buses are flagged in the report when faults there cause the monitored
voltage to drop below the threshold value.
This feature has an automatic stopping criterion that ends the simulations when the monitored voltage is
above the threshold for all the faults at a certain distance away.
You must select the monitored bus before running this command.
The output of this command is a CSV-formatted file that can be opened with any spreadsheet program.
TO PERFORM A VOLTAGE SAG ANALYSIS:
1. Right mouse click on the monitored bus to select it.
The selected bus will turn red.
2. Select the Faults | Voltage Sag Analysis | Run command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for voltage sag analysis parameters.
Note: This command will be dimmed and cannot be selected if no

monitored bus was selected on the one-line diagram.
3. Enter voltage sag analysis parameters.
Mark one or more phase connections: 3LG, 2LG, 1LG or L-L for 3-
phase, 2-line-to-ground, single-line-to-ground and line-to-line faults.
Enter fault impedance in ohm.
Limit the output to faults on nodes of certain level. Level is a node
parameter. You can use this feature to limit which faulted nodes are
reported in the CSV file. This option does not change the number of
faults that will be applied. It only affects the output.
Enter voltage threshold in per unit. The program will flag faults that
cause one or more phase voltages at the monitored bus to go below this
threshold value. The voltage threshold also serves as a stopping
criterion.

The program begins by faulting the monitored bus, and then it will fault
all the buses that are one bus away from the monitored bus, and then two
buses away, and so on. We refer to these fault buses as tier-1 buses, tier-
2 buses, etc. The program will continue simulating faults until it finishes
faulting buses at a certain number of tiers away and found that the
voltage magnitude at the monitor bus stays above the voltage threshold
when faults are applied to all the buses within that tier.
Click on check box Output only cases with voltage below threshold to
include in the output only cases in which the voltage magnitude at
the monitored bus is below the voltage threshold.
Click on check box Get fault duration from stepped-event analysis
to compute the duration between the on-set of the fault and the
time of the last event.
Note: DistriView v9.5 and earlier versions required you to enter the
study extent in number of tiers from the fault. This datum is no longer
required. The program will consider all protective devices in the feeder.
4. Press OK to start the analysis.
A Save File dialog box will appear asking you for file
name.
of the output file, which must be a CSV-formatted file.
When the analysis is complete, DistriView will display the voltage-sag
results on the one-line diagram. Specifically, the monitored-bus voltage
in per unit will be shown below each of the faulted bus name. The
program will also paint a colored halo around each faulted bus to help
you visualize its effect on the monitored bus. The more severe the
voltage sag at the monitored bus caused by a fault, the darker halo will
be painted around the faulted bus. See sample output below where
1201BusA is the monitored bus.

5. View contents of output file.
The program will ask you if you wish to view the output file. If you
answer yes, you will see a spreadsheet that looks like this.
The voltage-sag report fields are:

Tier: 0 if the monitored bus is being faulted. 1 if the faulted
bus is one tier away from the monitored bus. 2 if the
faulted bus is two buses away, and so on.
Flt.: Fault connection: 3LG, 2LG, 1LG, and L-L for 3-phase, 2-line-
to-ground, single-line-to-ground, and line-to-line fault,
respectively.
Bus No., Bus Name, kV: This is the faulted bus for bus faults.
Va(pu), Va(deg): Phase-a voltage at the monitored bus.
Vb(pu), Vb(deg): Phase-b voltage at the monitored bus.
Vc(pu), Vc(deg): Phase-c voltage at the monitored bus.
<Threshold: YES if the magnitude of one or more of the phase
voltages at the monitored bus are below the threshold
value.
The following columns in the report will appear only if you selected the
option to get fault duration from stepped-event analysis:
Events: Total number of events.
Clearing (s): Time lapse between the on-set of the fault and the time-
stamp of the last event.
Final Amps: The fault current at the faulted bus at the last event.

DurtnX (s): The last four columns, labled Durtn1, Durtn2, etc., are
the durations of depressed voltage at the monitored bus.
Durtn1 is the same as the total clearing time if the fault is
cleared by a single phase or ground relay. Additional
durations are shown for faults cleared by reclosers. Each
duration, after the first one, begins when the recloser
recloses on the fault and ends when the recloser trips.
Note: A clearing time of 9999 means no protective device operated. A
finite clearing time together with a nonzero final fault current means the
fault was not cleared. A value of 0 for the Final Amps together with 2
or more Events indicate that the fault was cleared by protective devices.
Only in this case should the Clearing (s) be interpreted as the total
fault duration.

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | SHOW FAULTS SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The Voltage-Sag Analysis | Show 3LG/2LG/1LG/LL Faults Solution On 1-Line command in the Main
Window lets you display graphically the voltage sag at a monitored bus that is caused by fault at other
buses in the vicinity. You must execute the Voltage Sag Analysis | Run command before you can display
the results.
TO DISPLAY 3LG FAULT VOLTAGE SAG RESULT:
1. Select the Faults | Voltage-Sag Analysis | Show 3LG Faults Solution On
1- Line Command.
1. Select the Faults | Voltage-Sag Analysis | Show 2LG Faults Solution
On 1-Line Command.
1. Select the Faults | Voltage-Sag Analysis | Show 1LG Faults Solution
On 1-Line Command.
TO DISPLAY LL FAULT VOLTAGE SAG RESULT:
1. Select the Faults | Voltage-Sag Analysis | Show LL Faults Solution On
1- Line Command.
DistriView will display the voltage-sag results on the one-line diagram.
Specifically, the monitored-bus voltage in per unit will be shown below
each faulted bus name. The program will also paint a colored halo
around each faulted bus to help you visualize its effect on the monitored
bus. The more severe the voltage sag at the monitored bus caused by a
fault, the darker will be the halo around the faulted bus.

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN BATCH COMMAND
The Voltage-Sag Analysis | Run Batch command is designed to help you study in batch mode the voltage
variations at voltage-sensitive customers locations caused by short circuits in the vicinity. The input to
this command is a batch voltage-sag file.
There are two kinds of batch command files: normal and advanced.
The normal batch command file contains a list of monitored buses. DistriView will perform a voltage-sag
analysis for each of the monitored buses in turn.
The advanced batch command file contains a list of monitored buses. For each monitored bus, you can
specify the location where the faults will be applied. Both bus faults and intermediate faults are possible.
In both normal and advanced batch voltage-sag calculations, the output is written to a CSV formatted file.
No output is visible on the one-line.
TO RUN VOLTAGE SAG ANALISYS IN NORMAL BATCH MODE:
1. Prepare a batch command file.
The command file is a text file with .txt extension. You can create this
file with any text editor. This file must begin with the header
[DISTRIVIEW VOLTAGE SAG BATCH FILE] followed by a number of
options that apply to all the cases in the file, such as the voltage
threshold and the minimum node level.
The second section begins with the header [CASES],followed by a list
of monitored buses and fault specifications. The data include for each
case include the following, on a single line:
Name of the monitored bus, enclosed by double quotes.
Nominal kV of the monitored bus.
Four 1s and 0s to indicate which of these fault types will be
applied: 3-phase, 2-line-to-ground, single-line to ground, and line-to-
line faults.
The real and reactive part of the fault impedance in ohms.
You can create the list of nodes with the Tools | GENERATE LIST OF
NODES COMMAND in DistriView, and copy/paste it to the batch
command file.A sample normal voltage-sag batch file is shown below.
[DISTRIVIEW VOLTAGE SAG BATCH FILE]
* Method can be normal or advanced.
method = normal
* stepped_event is 0 if no stepped event analysis is
* required. Otherwise,
* enter any positive integer after the equal sign
stepped_event = 5
* Voltage threshold. Default is 0.8.
threshold = 0.5
* Set output_all to 'yes' to output all cases.
* Enter 'no' to output only cases. Default is 'yes'.
output_all = yes
* Limit output to faults on nodes of this level or higher.
* Default is 1.
min_node_level = 1
[CASES]
* Each case caused the voltage-sag to run for a monitored bus.
* Each line has the monitored bus name and kV, 3LG, 2LG, 1LG, L-L,
* and R, X (ground Z)
"1249B", 12, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0.0, 0.0

* No need to repeat the fault type or ground Z if the are the same.
* "1255B", 12
* Starting with BUS6, the fault type and ground Z change.
"BUS6", 12, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1.0, 0.0
"NE_Sub.", 69
* A blank line or end-of-file ends the list of monitored buses.
The nodes in a batch voltage-sag file can be in different feeders. But for
computational efficiency, it is best to group nodes within the same file by
feeder.
2. Select the S_Ckt | Voltage-Sag Analysis | Run Batch Command.
A File-Open dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the batch
command file.
3. Specify the output file.
A Save File dialog box will appear asking you for report file name.
of the output file, which must be a CSV-formatted file.
The analysis will begin. The method of simulation for each monitored bus is
identical to that of the VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN COMMAND.
At the completion of the voltage-sag calculations, the program will show
you the result using your spreadsheet program. An explanation of the output
can be found in the documentation for the S_Ckt | VOLTAGE-SAG
ANALYSIS
| RUN COMMAND.
TO RUN VOLTAGE SAG ANALISYS IN ADVANCED BATCH
MODE:
1. Prepare a batch command file.
The command file is a text file with .txt extension. The first section of the
command file is identical to that for the normal method, except:
The method must be set to advanced.
The flags output_all and min_node_level are ignored.
The second section begins with the header [CASES]. Each case has
multiple lines, with a blank line separating adjacent cases. The first line
of each case contains the name and kV of the monitored bus, the fault
types, and the fault impedance.
The lines that follow specify where the faults will be applied.
FOR A BUS FAULT:
Enter the following on a single line, using a comma as the separator:
The letter B.
Bus name, enclosed by double quote.
Bus nominal kV.
FOR AN INTERMEDIATE FAULT
Enter the following on a single line, using a comma as the separator:
The letter I.
Name of the lines first bus terminal, enclosed by double quotes.
Nominal kV of first bus terminal.
Name of second bus terminal, enclosed by double quotes.
Circuit ID of the line, enclosed by double quotes.

Percentage, measured from first bus. The percentage must
be between 0.01 and 99.99 percent, inclusive.
An example of an advanced batch voltage-sag file is shown below.
[DISTRIVIEW VOLTAGE SAG BATCH FILE]
method = advanced
stepped_event = 5
threshold = 0.5
[CASES]
* Each case begins with the specification of the monitored
* bus, fault type, and ground Z, just like the normal method.
"1249B", 12, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0.0, 0.0
* The faults to be applied are specified following the first line.
* The letter 'B' means the fault is a bus fault.
B, "1255B", 12
B, "BUS6", 12
B, "NE_Sub.", 69
* The letter 'I' means the fault is an intermediate fault. This one
* is an intermediate fault on the line BUS 6 12kV- Bus 1255B 12kV,
* circuit ID "1", at 40% of the distance from the first bus (BUS6).
I, "BUS6", 12, "1255B", "1", 40.0
* A blank line or end-of-file ends a case.
* Below is another case with bus 1255B 12kV being the monitored bus.
"1255B", 12, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0.5, 0.0
B, "1249B", 12
B, "BUS6", 12
B, "NE_Sub.", 69
2. Select the S_Ckt | Voltage-Sag Analysis | Run Batch Command.

3. Specify the output file.
A Save File dialog box will appear asking you for report file name.
the output file, with a .csv extension.
The analysis will begin. The method of simulation for each monitored bus is
different from that of the VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN
COMMAND. The advanced method applies the fault only at the buses and
lines you specified. The post-fault voltage at the monitored bus is reported
for each of these faults.
At the completion of the voltage-sag calculations, the program will show you
the results using your spreadsheet program.
DistriView will output any error and warning messages to the TTY Window.

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
STEPPED EVENT ANALYSIS
The Stepped Event Analysis command in the Main Window lets you perform a stepped-event analysis
with a single initiating event. The initiating event must be a bus fault or a close-in fault . The program will
simulate subsequent tripping and reclosing events until the fault is cleared or when no further tripping or
reclosing events are forthcoming.
Once the program completes the stepped-event simulation, you can play back the events one by one on the one-
line diagram.
TO PERFORM A STEPPED-EVENT SIMULATION:
1. Highlight either a bus or a breaker/relay group on the one-line
by clicking on its symbol with the right mouse button.
For a bus fault, highlight a bus.
For a close-in fault, highlight a relay group.
2. Select the Faults | Stepped Event Analysis command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the initiating fault.
IF YOU HIGHLIGHTED A BUS
The fault-specification dialog box for the bus fault will look like this.
Click on one of the eleven radio buttons to specify the fault type and
phase connection.
Enter the fault impedance in ohms.
Note: DistriView v9.5 and earlier versions required you to enter the
study extent in number of tiers from the fault. This datum is no longer
required. The program will consider all protective devices on the feeder.
Mark the check boxes within the Protective Devices Considered
group to select the protective devices you want simulated.
Specifically:
Mark OC Grd to simulate ground overcurrent relays and ground
unit of reclosers.
Mark OC Pha to simulate phase overcurrent relays, fuses and
phase unit of reclosers.

Mark DS Gnd to simulate ground distance relays.
Mark DS Pha to simulate phase distance relays.
Press OK to commence stepped-event simulation.
IF YOU HIGHLIGHTED A BRANCH OR A PROTECTIVE DEVICE
ON A BRANCH
The fault-specification dialog box will look like this if you highlighted a
protective device on a line or cable. Depending on the percentage you
enter, you can specify either a close-in fault or an intermediate fault as the
initiating event.
The fault-specification dialog box will look like this if you highlighted a
protective device on a transformer of a voltage regulator. In this case,
the initiating event will be a close-in fault.
3. Viewing the results of a stepped-event simulation.

At the conclusion of a stepped-event simulation, the program will
display the initiating fault solution on the one-line.

In addition, a modeless dialog box will appear to show you a list of all the
events. In the dialog box, the arrow points to the event that is being
displayed. The total number of events is shown at the top of the dialog box.
By default, the program shows you the operating time of all the
protective devices within the study area. The operating time of an
overcurrent relay in a stepped-event simulation takes into account the
following:
1) The accumulation of the disk rotation when currents are detected.
2) Resetting of the disk when currents are interrupted.
3) The breaker interrupting time (you can specify that in the relay-
group dialog box).
The program logic also models the tripping and reclosing operations of
reclosers.
Press the buttons 0, +, -, A, B, and C on the toolbar if you wish to
see the sequence or phase quantities on the one-line diagram.
Press the VCR-like buttons on the toolbar to see subsequent events.
Note: You can move only step forward on the time line. To see a previous
event, you must first go back to the first event and then step forward.
4. Ending a stepped-event analysis.
The program will exit the stepped-event mode when you simulate a fault,
modify the network, or perform another analysis, such as voltage-sag or
relay coordination checking.
You can terminate the stepped-event mode manually by executing
the View | Plain 1-Line command.
The modeless dialog box will disappear when the stepped-event mode
ends.
Note: If you close this modeless dialog box by accident, you can open it
again with the Faults | Show Fault Solution on 1-Line command.

Main Window
S_CKT MENU
SHORT CIRCUIT & LOCKED ROTOR OPTIONS COMMAND
The Short Circuit & Locked Rotor Options command lets you specify the prefault voltage profile,
synchronous-machine impedance and other parameters that affect the numerical result of short-circuit and
locked-rotor simulations.
TO SPECIFY OPTIONS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT AND LOCKED ROTOR SIMULATIONS:
1. Select the S Ckt | Short Circuit & Locked Rotor Options command.
A dialog box will appear showing you the current selection.
2. Select the prefault voltage profile.

Click on From a linear network solution without loads or shunts
to choose the method that models substation buses and rotating
machines as balanced voltage sources behind the objects admittance
matrices and solves for the prefault voltage from a linear matrix
equation. The loads, shunts and single-phase induction machines are
ignored in this method. (You can direct the program to include or
exclude, 3-phase induction machines when you perform the actual
simulation.) DistriView has been using this method to compute the
prefault voltage since the very beginning.
Click on From a full nonlinear voltage-drop solution to choose a
more accurate method that is available since version 7. This method
first performs a full nonlinear voltage-drop study that take into account
all the network objects, including loads, shunts and 3-phase and single-
phase induction machines. The voltage solution from the voltage-drop
study is used as the prefault voltage for short-circuit and lock-rotor
studies.
3. Select the synchronous machine impedance.
Click on one of the three radio buttons in the Synchronous Machine
Impedance group box.
Each synchronous machine in DistriView has three positive-sequence
impedances: subtransient, transient and synchronous. You can select
which of these to use for short-circuit and locked-rotor studies.
Generally speaking, the subtransient impedance is the smallest of the
three and will give the highest fault currents.

4. Select the asymmetric current multiplier.
The asymmetric current multiplier is the ratio between the highest
instantaneous value of the current immediately after the onset of the
fault and the steady state value of the current after the initial transients
have disappeared. The multiplier is a function of the X/R ratio of the
fault. See APPENDIX G: ASYMMETRIC FAULT CURRENT for
more
information.
Click on Theoretical peak RMS to direct the program to use the
multiplier that is theoretically derived. [Reference: Cooper Power
System, Electrical Distribution-System Protection, Third Edition, pg.
38- 42, 1990.]
Click on Less conservative multiplier to direct the program to
use an alternative multiplier that is somewhat lower than the
theoretical value. This option was added at the request of a US utitlity.
The original source of the less conservative multiplier is unknown.
The curves corresponding to these two options are shown in the graph
below. The top curve is for the theoretical peak RMS, the bottom curve
is for the less conservative multiplier.

Main Window
V_DROP MENU
SOLVE VOLTAGE DROP COMMAND
The Solve Voltage Drop command lets you perform a voltage-drop study (also called a load flow study)
on a feeder. The program automatically displays the solution on the one-line diagram.
TO PERFORM A VOLTAGE DROP STUDY ON A FEEDER:
1. Optional: Check the solution parameters by selecting the V_Drop
| Voltage Drop Solution Parameters command.
2. Select the V_Drop | Solve Voltage Drop command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a feeder and specify
whether the transformer LTCs, voltage regulators and switchable shunts
are adjusted during the voltage-drop solution.
3. Click on an entry in the list box to select a substation bus.

The substation bus you select determines which feeder will be
processed. If the feeder of interest is connected to more than one
substation, you can select any one of the connected substations.
The voltage angle of the selected substation bus will be assigned the
value of zero degrees. If there are other substation buses connected to
the selected substation, the program will adjust their voltage angles
automatically.
4. Mark the Start from previous solution checkbox to direct the
program to start the voltage-drop simulation using the bus voltage
of the previous solution as a starting point.
This option is dimmed if there is no previous solution for the highlighted
substation bus.
5. Mark the Reset LTCs and voltage regulators checkbox to direct
the program to reset all the transformer load tap changers (LTCs) to
the center position and all the voltage regulator taps to the neutral
zero boost/buck position prior to the voltage-drop simulation.
This option is turned on by default. We recommend that you turn
this option off when starting the voltage-drop simulation from a
previous solution.

6. Mark the Adjust voltage regulators checkbox to direct the
program to adjust transformer load tap changers and voltage
regulators.
If this checkbox is marked, the program will adjust LTCs on 2- and 3-
winding transformers, and the boost/buck setting of voltage regulators to
bring the voltage of the regulated buses to within the target range.
The program adjusts the voltage regulators in order of the regulators
distance from the substation bus. More specifically, at the fourth
iteration, the program adjusts the regulator that is closest to the
substation. In the next iteration, after the voltages have been updated, the
program adjusts the next regulator downstream, and so on until all the
regulators are adjusted. This logic is designed to mimics how voltage
regulators work in practice.
7. Mark the Adjust switchable capacitor and reactors checkbox
to direct the program to adjust the switchable shunts.
The switchable shunts are initialized to their normally-on or -off
position. If this checkbox is marked, the program will turn on and off the
switchable shunts to regulate the local voltage magnitude or current.
8. Press OK to begin simulation.
DistriView will begin the voltage-drop calculations. A dialog box will
appear to inform you of the program's progress. At the end of the
simulation the voltage-drop solution will be displayed on the one-line.
The total kW and kVAR losses are shown in the bottom of the window.
The program displays the real and reactive power flow on branches by
default. You can change the display quantity to losses, or to currents (in
phase and sequence domain) using the V_Drop | VIEW VOLTAGE
DROP SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND. Shortcuts for showing
the sequence and phase quantities are available on the toolbar.
Also, a summary of the voltage-drop simulation is available in the TTY
Window. An example is shown below.

The table in the TTY Window shows you the progress of the solution
iteration by iteration. For each iteration, it tells you which bus has the
biggest change in voltage. It also tells you which quantities were
adjusted. (Rgltr is for voltage regulators. SWCap is for switchable
capacitors and reactors, LTC is for transformer load tap changes. The
last three columns are for synchronous machines that maintain a
constant terminal voltage.)

Main Window
V_DROP MENU
VIEW VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION ON 1-LINE COMMAND
The View Voltage-Drop Solution on 1-Line command lets you select the output quantities for a voltage-
drop solution. It also lets you vary the over- and under-voltage thresholds, and various parameters that
affect the reporting of overloaded branches.
TO SHOW A VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the V_Drop | View Voltage-Drop Solution on 1-Line command.
You will see this dialog box.
2. Select the display quantities. Click on:

Real and reactive power: To display the positive-sequence voltage for
the nodes and the real and reactive power flow on the
branches. The real power flow is in kW and the reactive
power in kVAR, with the suffix P and Q. If the flow is
over 1000 kW or kVAR, the unit is changed to MW or
MVAR, with the suffix MP and MQ.
Losses: To display the positive-sequence voltage for the nodes, and
the real and reactive losses for the branches. The losses
are in kW and kVAR.
Phase 'a' voltage and current: To display the voltage and current for
phase 'a'.
Phase 'b' voltage and current: Same as above except for phase 'b'.
Phase 'c' voltage and current: Same as above except for phase 'c'.
0-Seq voltage and neutral current (3Io): To display the zero-sequence
voltage (Vo) for the nodes and neutral current for the
branches.
+ Seq voltage and current: To display the positive-sequence voltage
and current.

- Seq voltage and current: To display the negative-sequence voltage
and current.
All the branch currents are in amperes. The nodal voltages are in per-unit,
multiple of per-unit, or kV, depending on your choices in step 4 below.
3. Click on 'Voltage and current angles' to have the phase angles
displayed following the magnitudes of currents and voltages.
4. Select how the bus voltage will be displayed. Click
on: Per unit: To display the voltage in per unit.
pu * : And enter a value in the edit box. To display the
voltages as the per-unit value multiplied by a constant.
This option is commonly used to display the voltage as
the equivalent household voltage in volts.
kV: To display the voltages in kV.
5. Enter the acceptable voltage range.
Min pu: Minimum voltage magnitude in per unit.
Max pu: Maximum voltage magnitude in per unit.
The program will display voltages in different colors, depending on
their magnitude:
Red if the voltage is too high.
Black if the voltage is acceptable.
Green if the voltage is too low.
By default the program will also paint a red or green halo over buses
whose voltage is too high or too low. You can turn off the color
visualization with the Diagram | Option command.
6. Select how overloaded branches will be identified for the purposes
of reporting and highlighting overloaded branches.
Enter a percentage between 0 and 100 in 'Highlighted if >' to define
the overload threshold.
A branch is considered overloaded if the magnitude of the flow is over
this percentage of their ratings.
Click on the 'Line Rating' drop down list box and select one of the
four current ratings for distribution lines.
These ratings refer to the four ratings that are associated with each
distribution line. These ratings can be changed within the lines info
dialog boxes.
Click on the Transformer Rating' drop down list box and select one
of the three kVA ratings for 2- and 3-winding transformers.
These ratings refer to the three kVA/phase ratings that are associated
with each 2- and 3-winding transformer. These ratings can be changed
within the transformers info dialog boxes.
7. Press OK.
The dialog box will close and the program will display the solution on the
one-line diagram.
For more information on how solution quantities are displayed on the
one-line diagram, see various commands under View | Solution.

Main Window
V_DROP MENU
SOLUTION BROWSER COMMAND
The Solution Browser command activates the Voltage-Drop Solution Browser, a tool that allows you to
view the voltage-drop solution in a tabular form. Each page of the browser lists one type of object, which
can be nodes/substation buses, lines/cables, shunts, spot loads, voltage regulators/boosters, transformers,
transformer load tap changers (LTCs), etc.
The Solution Browser is organized much the same way as the Data Browser. Both browsers have the same
buttons, and reporting and sorting capabilities. There are, however, some important differences between
the two browsers:
The Data Browser lists the object parameters, such as names, impedances and control limits. The
Solution Browser lists the solution quantities, such as voltages, currents, kVA flow, and the status
of automatic controls. The Solution Browser also issues warning flags for over- and under-
voltages, branch overloads, and other constraint violations.
The Data Browser lists active and out-of-service objects in the entire network. The Solution
Browser lists only active objects that are in the feeder.
The sorting capabilities of the Solution Browser make it a very powerful tool for analyzing the solution of
a large network. For instances, by clicking on the header of the Va column in the Node/Substation Bus
page, you will see the nodes sorted by the magnitude of the solution voltage of phase a, from low to
high.
TO VIEW VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION IN A TABULAR FORM:
1. Select the V_Drop | View Voltage-Drop Solution on 1-Line command.
The Solution Browser will appear on the screen. The Nodes/Substation
Bus page of the Solution Browser is shown below.
Note: The command is gray and cannot be activated if no voltage drop
solution is available.
The Solution Browser dialog box works much the same way as the Data
Browser. Please refer to documentation for the Tools | DATA
BROWSER COMMAND for more information.

Main Window
V_DROP MENU
LOSES PROBE COMMAND
After simulating a voltage drop, the Loses Probe command helps you compute the losses within a portion
of the feeder. To use this command, you must first solve a voltage drop and indicate the portion of
interest by highlighting a node, a line, a transformer, or regulator. The output of this command is the sum
of kW loses of network components at, and downstream from, the highlighted network element.
TO TALLY LOSES IN A PORTION OF A FEEDER:
1. Solve a voltage drop.
The solution quantities, such as bus voltages and branch flows, should
be visible on the one-line diagram. The total loses from the entire feeder
is shown at the status bar at the bottom of the screen and in the TTY
window.
2. Highlight a node, a line, a transformer or a regulator to define
the starting point of a segment of the feeder.
The Loses Probe will calculate the total kW loses within the portion of
the feeder that is at, and downstream from, the selected equipment.
The result is shown in a message box.

Main Window
V_DROP MENU
SIMULATE N-1 CONTINGENCIES COMMAND
An N-1 contingency case is defined as the base case with a single line, cable, 2-winding transformer or
voltage regulator taken out of service. This Simulate N-1 Contingencies command automatically
simulates the voltage-drop for all possible N-1 contingency cases in a feeder. In each of these solutions,
the program looks for branch overloads and voltage violations. The results are summarized in a CSV file.
Before executing this command, you must first run a voltage-drop on the feeder of interest.
TO SIMULATE N-1 CONTINGIEIS:
1. Solve the voltage-drop for a feeder with no outages using the V_Drop
| Solve Voltage Drop command.
You should see the nodal voltages and branch flow quantities on the
one- line diagram.
2. Select the V_Drop | Simulate N-1 Contingencies command.
This dialog box will appear.
Enter a positive value in the edit box labeled Outage equipment with
nominal kV >= to limit the outaged equipment to those with nominal
kV equal to, or higher than, this value. A transformer is outaged if the
nominal kV of one of its terminals satisfies this criterion.
Mark the check box labled Outage 3-phase lines and balanced
transformer only if that is what you want.
Enter the minimum and maximum voltage in per-unit for voltage
violation checking.
Enter the line and transformer ratings and threshold for branch
overload checking.
Press OK.
The output will look something like this. The first 10 lines document the
options you have chosen and the name of the output CSV file.
Each case begins and ends with a long line of dashes. The first
case shown is the base case, i.e., the case with no outages. The N-1
cases follow, one after the other.

For each of the cases, there is a list of voltage violations and branch
overloads. For lines and cables, the percent duty is the highest phase
current in amps divided by the current limit. For transformers, the
percent duty is the highest phase kVA divided by the kVA rating. A
duty of over 100% means the branch is overloaded.

Main Window
V_DROP MENU
CAPACITOR PLACEMENT COMMAND
The Capacitor Placement command helps you determine where and how much capacitance to add to your
feeders to minimize losses. You can specify the size of capacitor bank to be used, as well as the buses at
which capacitor banks can be installed. You must perform a voltage-drop simulation prior to executing this
command.
TO PLACE CAPACITOR BANKS:
1. Select the V_Drop | Capacitor Placement command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be selected if no voltage
drop has been solved or if you have modified the network since the last
solution.
A dialog box will appear allowing you to (1) specify which buses to
consider for placement and (2) the incremental per phase KVAR rating
of the capacitor bank you would like to add.
2. Enter the incremental per phase KVAR rating of the capacitor bank you
would like to have placed in 'Single phase capacitor unit size (kVAR)'.
The program will place capacitor banks in increments of the value entered
here. For example, if the program determines that 760 KVAR should be
placed on a bus and you have entered a value of 50 KVAR, the program will
place 250 KVAR on each phase for a total of 750 KVAR. The additional 10
KVAR is omitted because of discretization.
3. Select candidate by clicking on the bus name in the 'Feasible Buses' list box
or select all of them by checking the 'All' check box.
The selected buses will become highlighted.
4. Press OK.
The 'Capacitor Placement Analysis' dialog box will disappear. The program will
now determine the size of capacitor banks and the buses where they will be
placed. The capacitor symbol will be added to each bus. A summary of the
results will be written to the TTY Window. An example is shown below.
Note: The compensation is done on a per phase basis. The placed capacitor
banks may be unbalanced (i.e., different KVAR on each phase).

Main Window
V_DROP MENU
VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION PARAMETERS COMMAND
The Voltage Drop Solution Parameters command lets you specify the various parameters relating to
voltage-drop computation.
TO SPECIFY VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION PARAMETERS:
1. Select the V_Drop | Voltage Drop Solution Parameters command.
The following dialog box will appear.
2. Enter the maximum number of iterations.

The voltage-drop algorithm is iterative. The default is 200 iterations.
3. Enter the converge tolerance.
The solution is considered converged if the maximum change in bus
voltage (on a per-unit basis) between two successive iterations is less
than the tolerance specified here. The default is 0.001 per-unit.
4. Enter the synchronous machine real- and reactive-power threshold.
For synchronous machines, the angle and magnitude of the internal
voltage source is adjusted to produce the designed kW and kVAR
output. This adjustment stops when the difference is less than this
threshold.
5. Enter the voltage-setpoint adjustment deadband.
For devices that control voltage, e.g., transformer load-tap changes and
voltage regulators, the solution logic will tolerate a small amount of
voltage violation, which you can specify here. The default is 0.001 per-
unit. A finite deadband is necessary to prevent the solution from
oscillating around the voltage threshold.
6. Press OK.

Main Window
RELIABILITY MENU
FEEDER RELIABILITY REPORT COMMAND
The Feeder Reliability Report command computes the following feeder average reliability indices:
The system average interruption frequency index (SAIFI) ,
The system average interruption duration index (SAIDI) and
The system momentary average interruption frequency index (MAIFI)
At least one branch in the feeder must have a non-zero failure rate and mean repair time in order for this
command to run. To get meaningful results, however, you should enter the failure rate and mean repair
time for all the lines and transformers in the feeder.
The program calculates the interruption frequency and duration for all connected spot loads and section
loads as a result of line and transformer outages. The calculation takes into account topology of the
feeder and the presence of protective devices (breakers, fuses, reclosers, sectionalizers and CCOC
devices) that are designed to isolate faulty equipment. The following rules are applied:
- The nearest protective device that de-energizes the faulted piece of equipment is assumed
to operate to clear the fault.
- Protective device on a line disconnects only the nearest line end. The same is true with cables.
- Protective device on transformer and regulator disconnects both ends of the equipment.
- Transient faults on lines are cleared by reclosers and reclosing
breakers. TO GENERATE A FEEDER RELIABILITY REPORT:
1. Select the Reliability | Reliability Report command.
2. Select a substation bus in the list box.

The bus you select determines which feeder will be processed. If the
feeder of interest is connected to more than one substation, you can
select any one of the connected substations.

3. Select the basis for average reliability indices calculation.
DistriView can compute the average reliability indices on number-of-
customers base and on connected-kVA base. The program determines
the number of customers as follow: 1) Each spot load and induction
motor is counted as one customer. 2) Each section load is counted as
having a number of customers equal to the sum of consumers fields in
the load- allocation parameters screen.
4. Select check box Compute momentary interruption indices to
instruct the program to take into account reclosing actions in
computing reliability indices.
When this option is selected, DistriView will include in the report
frequency of momentary interruptions caused by reclosing action of
reclosers and reclosing breakers. Reclosing clears transient faults on
lines and prevents them from causing permanent interruption of
connected loads and customers.
5. Select check box Save report to disk to save the reliability report to
a comma-delimited text file.
A comma-delimited text file can be imported readily into a spreadsheet
program.
6. Press OK to calculate the reliability indices.
DistriView will display the report in the TTY Window. The results are
also saved to a comma-delimited text file if you have selected the option
in the previous step.
In addition to the feeder average reliability indices, the report includes
interruption frequency and duration for all connected sport loads and
section loads.
The feeder reliability report contains three sections:
A- CUSTOMER OUTAGE SUMMARY
This section lists the following reliability related quantities for each spot
load, motor and section load:
1) AFFECTED_KVA or AFFECTED CUST.: total amount of
load kVA or number of customer;
2) FREQUENCY: outage frequency in times/year;
3) DURATION: outage duration in hours/year;
4) MTRY.FREQUENCY: momentary outage frequency in times/year
B- FEEDER RELIABILITY INDICES
Three average reliability indices are reported for the feeder:
AVERAGE INTERRUPTION FREQUENCY =
TOTAL OUTAGE FREQUENCY / TOAL LOAD KVA
or
TOTAL OUTAGE FREQUENCY / TOAL NUMBER OF CUSTOMERS
AVERAGE INTERRUPTION DURATION =
TOTAL OUTAGE HOURS / TOAL LOAD KVA
or
TOTAL OUTAGE HOURS / TOAL NUMBER OF CUSTOMERS

AVERAGE MOMENTARY INTERRUPTION FREQUENCY =
TOTAL MOMENTARY OUTAGE FREQUENCY / TOAL LOAD KVA
or
TOTAL MOMENTARY OUTAGE FREQUENCY / TOAL NUMBER OF
CUSTOMERS
C- EQUIPMENT RELIABILITY DATA
This section lists reliability parameter of lines, cables and other
equipment on the feeder.

Main Window
HARMONIC MENU
FREQUENCY SCAN COMMAND
The Frequency Scan command allows you to analyze the networks response to harmonic current
excitation over a range of frequencies. The result of a frequency scan reveals harmonic resonances in a
feeder. Engineers use this information to devise ways to prevent adverse effects of harmonics on system
operations.
In a frequency-scan study, the program simulates the injection of current into a selected node and calculates
the nodal voltages throughout the network. This simulation is repeated over a range of frequencies.
The voltage at any node can be plotted as a function of frequency. The peaks of the graph reveal potential
resonance conditions. The program can also store the frequency-scan results in a comma delimited text
report file for additional analysis.
TO RUN A FREQUENCY SCAN:
1. Select the Harmonic| Frequency Scan command.
2. Select the current-injection node in the dropdown list.

If you highlighted a node before running the Frequency Scan command,
the node will be automatically selected in the dropdown list.
3. Enter the starting and ending frequency and the scan step.
The frequencies and scan step must be entered in multiple of the
fundamental frequency.
4. Mark the check box Store feeder scan result to file check box to save
the results of the frequency scan in a comma delimited text file.
5. Optional: Select a node from the Display probe at list box to display
a graph of frequency scan results in the harmonic probe.
6. Press OK to start the frequency scan
If you selected to save the results to disk file, a File Save dialog box
will appear. Use the standard control in the dialog box to specify
name and location of report file.
If you selected a node in step 5, the Harmonic Probe will appear to show
you the harmonic voltage at the selected node (see picture below).

Whether or not you selected a node in step 5, you can always select a
node on the one-line diagram and then execute the Harmonic | View
Harmonic Solution | Harmonic Probe command to view the
frequency scan solution at that node.

Main Window
HARMONIC MENU
SOLVE HARMONIC LOAD FLOW COMMAND
The Solve Harmonic Load Flow command allows you to evaluate the distortion in voltage and current
waveform caused by the presence of nonlinear harmonic-producing loads in the system. This analysis is
an important part of the recommended practices and requirements stipulated by IEEE standards C519-
1992.
The Solve Harmonic Load Flow command performs a number of load flow solutions:
1. The program performs a traditional voltage-drop solution of the network at the fundamental
frequency. The fundamental-frequency solution provides the base quantity for all harmonic currents
needed in subsequent solutions at higher frequencies.
2. At each harmonic frequency present in the system, the harmonic voltages at all the nodes are
calculated from a linear network equation that accounts for all the harmonic sources at that frequency.
3. The program calculates two harmonic distortion indicators: The Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
and the Telephone Interference factor (I.T product) for all nodes and branches in the network using
following equations:
Where: C Voltage or current magnitude harmonic number

h
h Ih Harmonic current magnitude number h
H Upper limit of harmonics present in the system
Th Telephone interference weighting factor (TIF). The 1960 curves are currently in use.
At the conclusion of this command the THD and I.T indicators are available for display on the one-line
diagram. The user can also elect to store all solution result in a comma-delimited text file for further
studies. Also, the user can view the nodal voltage as a function of frequency using the Harmonics Probe.
TO SOLVE A HARMONIC LOAD FLOW:
1. Optional, but recommended: Perform a regular voltage-drop study
and check the solution for correctness.
A harmonic load flow solution must begin with a voltage-drop solution
at fundamental frequency because harmonics are defined as multiple of
load or generation at the fundamental frequency. For this reason, we
recommend that you solve a voltage-drop solution with the V_Drop |
Solve Voltage Drop command and check the solution for correctness
before running the Harmonics Load Flow command.
2. Select the Harmonic | Solve Harmonic Load Flow command.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be executed if there are no
harmonic sources in your network.

3. Select a feeder by highlighting a substation bus in the top list box.
The harmonics load flow will be perform for the selected feeder. If the
feeder of interest has more than one substation bus, you can highlight any
one of the substation buses.
4. In the bottom list box, highlight all harmonics sources that you
want included in the study.
5. Specify load flow solution presentation options:
Mark the checkbox Save solution report to file to store result in a
comma delimited text file.
Enter upper limit for THD and I.T indicator. On the one-line
diagram, the program will display in red any THD and I.T values that
exceed these limits.
6. Press OK to start the harmonic load flow solution.
If you selected to save solution report to file, the standard file-save dialog
will appear. Use the control in the dialog to specify the file name.
When the solution is complete, current and voltage THD values will
appear on the one-line diagram. The voltage THD values are shown
under each node name. The current THD values are shown at the ends of
each branch.
You can view the I.T values on the one-line diagram by executing the
Harmonics | View Harmonic Solution | I.T command.
You can also view a graph of the solution voltage as a function of frequency
by executing the Harmonics | View Harmonic Solution | Harmonic Probe
command.

Main Window
HARMONIC MENU
VIEW HARMONIC SOLUTION | THD COMMAND
The View Harmonic Solution | THD command allows you to display voltage and current total harmonic
distortion (THD) on the one-line diagram. You must solve a harmonic load flow with the Harmonic |
Solve Harmonic Load Flow before executing this command.
TO DISPLAY TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the Harmonic | View Harmonic Solution | THD command.
The nodal voltage THD is displayed underneath each bus name. The
current THD are display near the ends of each branch.
Note: This menu item is dimmed if no harmonic load-flow solution is
available.
Main Window
HARMONIC MENU
VIEW HARMONIC SOLUTION | I.T COMMAND
The View Harmonic Solution | I.T command allows you to display harmonic telephone interference factor
(I.T) on the one-line diagram. You must solve a harmonic load flow with the Harmonic | Solve Harmonic
Load Flow before executing this command.
TO DISPLAY TELEPHONE INTERFERENCE FACTOR ON THE ONE-LINE DIAGRAM:
1. Select the Harmonic | View Harmonic Solution | I.T command.
The current I.T values are display near the ends of each branch. The
nodal voltage THD (total harmonic distortion) is displayed underneath
each bus name.
Note: This menu item is dimmed if no harmonic load-flow solution is
available.

Main Window
HARMONIC MENU
VIEW HARMONIC SOLUTION | HARMONIC PROBE COMMAND
The View Harmonic Solution | Harmonic Probe command allows you to graph the result of frequency
scan and harmonic load flow. You will need to select a node on the one-line diagram before you execute
this command. You can display result from multiple nodes on the same graph.
TO DISPLAY HARMONIC PROBE:
1. Highlight a node on the one-line diagram with the right mouse button.
2. Select the Harmonic | View Harmonic Solution | Harmonic
Probe command.
Note: This menu command is dimmed if no frequency scan or
harmonic load flow solutions are available or no node is selected on
the one-line diagram.
The output of this command is different depending on the harmonic
solution that is currently available.
FREQUENCY SCAN RESULTS
The frequency-scan results for the selected node are displayed as a XY
line graph. The location of the fictitious harmonic current source is
indicated in the title. The ID of the node you selected in step 1 is shown
on the right, under Legend.
The vertical axis of the graph is labeled Zij, or the effective transfer
impedance between the fictitious current source and the selected node,
in per-unit. One can interpret this as the voltage observed at the selected
node as a result of the 1 per-unit fictitious harmonic current source.
The sharp peaks in the plot indicate network resonances.

HARMONIC LOAD FLOW RESULTS
The harmonic load-flow results for the selected node are displayed as a
bar graph. The ID of the node you selected in step 1 is shown on the
right, under Legend.
The vertical axis this graph is labeled Vh/Vc, where Vh is the magnitude
of the solution harmonic voltage, and Vc is the magnitude of the
fundamental voltage.
3. To add result from another node to the graph, highlight the node on
the one-line diagram and select the Harmonic | View Harmonic Solution |
Harmonic Probe command. A confirmation dialog box will appear
Click on Yes to add new node result to the graph.

4. To copy the graph to Windows clipboard, select Graph | Copy to clipboard.
5. To print graph, select Graph | Print.

Main Window
CHECK MENU
SWITCHED CAPACITOR VOLTAGE RISE COMMAND
The Switched Capacitor Voltage Rise command generates a report showing the magnitude of the sudden
change in voltage when a capacitor is switched on or off. To use this command, there must have at least
one switched capacitor in the feeder.
DistriView computes the voltage flicker under two conditions: (1) Minimum-voltage condition with the
taps of all LTCs and voltage regulators locked at the minimum-voltage position, and (2) Maximum-
voltage condition with the taps locked at the other extreme.
For each switched capacitor, DistriView finds the magnitude of the voltage flicker by performing
voltage- drop simulations of the entire feeder with that switched capacitor turned on and off. (The other
switched capacitors in the feeder are locked at their Normal positions.) This method is more accurate
than the traditional hand method using linear sensitivities.
The report will give, for each switched capacitor in the feeder, the magnitude of the voltage flicker under
minimum-voltage and maximum-voltage conditions.
TO GENERATE A SWITCHED CAPCITOR VOLTAGE RISE REPORT:
1. Select the Check | Switched Capacitor Voltage Rise command.
2. Select a feeder.
In the list box, select a feeder by highlighting one of the substation
buses. If the feeder of interest is connected to more than one substation,
you can select any one of the connected substations.
3. Edit the two voltage-drop convergence parameters near the top if needed.
4. Select the unit for the voltage change.
5. Enter a warning threshold and a comment.
6. Press OK.
The TTY Window will appear with a report that looks like
this.

The reason that the voltage changes are negative in this example is
because both capacitors are normally on. When they are turned
off, naturally the voltage decreases.
The two asterisks at the end of the line means that the absolute value of
the voltage change has exceeded the threshold you specified.

Main Window
CHECK MENU
RELAY TRIPPING UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS COMMAND
The Relay Tripping Under Normal Conditions command checks if any protective devices overcurrent
and distance relays, fuses, or reclosers will trip under a normal voltage-drop solution. This command
also performs additional checks with amplified phase currents to simulate cold-load pickups, and artificial
neutral currents to simulate phase-open conditions.
TO CHECK IF PROTECTIVE DEVICES TRIP UNDER NORMAL CONDITIONS:
1. Select the Check | Relay Tripping Under Normal Conditions command.
2. Specify whether or not to use existing voltage-solution as baseline.

Click on the ratio button The existing voltage-drop solution to use
the existing voltage study as the baseline. Otherwise, click on the
radio button A new voltage study.
Note: The top radio button is grayed if there is no voltage-drop solution
available.
3. Specify current multipliers for additional checking of
hypothetical conditions.
Note: You can turn off these checks by entering a multiplier of zero.
Enter a multiplier for fuses. The default is 2.3. Most fuses melt when
the current exceeds 2.3 times their current rating. A fuse that melts at
this amplified current probably means it is too small for the job.
Enter a multiplier for phase reclosers: The default is 2. The program
will check to see if the phase reclosers will trip if the phase current is
raised to a multiple of the normal value. This is done to guard against
false trips under cold-load pickups.
Enter a multiplier for ground reclosers: The default is 0.5. The
program will check to see if the ground reclosers will trips if the neutral
current is set equal to a multiple of the normal phase current. This is done
to guard against unnecessary trips under certain phase-open conditions.
4. Enter comments with up to 95 characters.
Your comments will appear in the report.

5. Press OK.
The following Voltage-Drop Simulation dialog box will appear if you
selected A new voltage study in step 2.
If you see this dialog box, select a feeder in the list box, enter other
parameters and press OK.
Please see documentation for the V_Drop | Simulate Voltage Drop
command for more information on this dialog box.
The TTY Window will appear with the checking report.
The report is organized in two parts. The first part is for the baseline
condition. The most important column to watch is the next to last column
labeled SEC (for operation time in seconds). The value 9999 means
the device did not trip which is the desired result.
The second part of the report is for the amplified currents. Again you
should make sure that all the values under the column SEC are read
9999 for no tripping.

Main Window
CHECK MENU
PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION COMMAND
The Protective Device Coordination command checks the coordination between a selected device (relay,
fuse or recloser) and one or more devices that are immediately downstream.
To use this feature you must first select a breaker/relay group, fuse or recloser symbol with the mouse.
When you execute the command, the program will ask you to select one or more devices downstream.
DistriView checks the coordination between the selected device and each of the selected load-side
devices. For each device pair -- i.e., the selected device and one of the load-side devices -- and for each
fault type you requested, the program first establishes a range of fault currents, as follows. The maximum
current is found by a close-in fault in front of the load-side device. The minimum current is found by a
remote-bus fault downstream from the load-side device, with the fault impedance you specify. The
checking is done over 12 points between this range of fault currents. The checking method varies
depending on the device types:
Breaker/Relay group and a breaker/relay group: DistriView checks the coordination between
the fastest relay within the two groups. The coordinating time interval is the difference in
operating times.
Breaker/Relay group and a load-side fuse: DistriView checks the coordinating margin between
the fastest relay within the group and the total-clear time of the fuse. If the relay has an
instantaneous unit and controls a reclosing breaker, the program performs an additional check to
see if the relay will save the fuse for a temporary fault.
Breaker/Relay group and a load-side recloser: DistriView checks the coordination between the
fastest relay within the group and the fastest recloser unit. If the relay has a nonzero reset time,
DistriView performs a time simulation of the disk travel to make sure that the recloser will
lock out before the relay trips. If the relay resets instantaneously, the program simply checks the
coordinating margin between the relay curve and the reclosers slow curve.
Fuse and a fuse: DistriView checks the coordinating margin between the minimum-melt curve
of the upstream fuse and total-clear curve of the load-side fuse.
Fuse and a load-side breaker/relay group: For a relay that controls a reclosing breaker, DistriView
computes the sum of the relay timing that are separated by less than 10 seconds and make sure
that it is faster than the minimum-melt time of the fuse. Without a reclosing breaker, DistriView
simply
checks the coordinating margin between the minimum-melt curve of the fuse and the curve of the
fastest relay within the breaker/relay group.
Fuse and a load-side recloser: DistriView will make sure that the minimum melt curve of the
fuse is slower than the recloser's modified slow curve using a 'K' factor*.
Recloser and a load-side fuse: DistriView makes sure that the fuse curves lie between the
slow curve of the recloser and the modified fast curve of the recloser using a 'K' factor*.
Recloser and a load-side recloser: DistriView checks the coordination between the fastest
recloser unit at the two locations. DistriView performs a time simulation of the opening and
closing of the two reclosers to make sure that the load-side recloser locks out before the source-
side recloser. (The logic takes into account simultaneous tripping of the reclosers when the
difference in curve
timing is within 2 cycles.) The coordinating time interval reported is the source-side reclosers
remaining time to lockout if the fault current were to persist.
* Source of K factors: Cooper Power Systems, Electrical Distribution-System Distribution, 1990.

TO CHECK PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION:
1. Optional: Execute the Check | Policy command to review the
coordination margins for various combinations of source-side and
load- side devices.
2. Select an upstream device (relay, recloser or fuse) by clicking on it
with the mouse.
The device symbol will turn dotted red.
3. Select the Check | Protective Device Coordination command.
A dialog box will appear. The device you selected is shown above the
list box. The devices in the list box are relays, fuses and reclosers
immediately downstream from the selected device.
4. Select the load-side devices to be checked by clicking on them in the

list box.
Click on Select All if you wish to select everything in the list box.
You must select at least one of the devices listed.
5. Select fault options.
Select fault types: Mark one or more of the four check boxes.
Reset LTCs and regulators: Mark this checkbox to reset all voltage
center kV positions.
This check box is unmarked and disable if the prefault voltage come
Include induction machines: Mark this checkbox to include
contributions from induction machines.

Fault all phase combinations: Mark this check box if you want the
program to consider all possible phase combinations when checking
device coordination for a fault connection.
All possible phase combinations of a single-line-to-ground fault include
a fault on phase a, a fault on phase b and a fault on phase c. If this
option is not turned on, the program will simulate only one of these
three faults.
Fault Z: Enter the fault impedance for calculating the minimum fault
current.
6. Brief Report options.
The normal report shows the currents and device operating time for
each fault type and each current simulated. The report can be very
lengthy.
Mark the Brief Report checkbox if you want a shorter report that tells
you whether the devices are coordinated without the details.
7. Press OK.
If the prefault-voltage option is set to from a solved voltage-drop
study, DistriView will automatically perform a voltage drop simulation
if needed.
DistriView will then simulate the faults and compute the coordinating
margins. The results are shown in the TTY Window which will open
automatically. For each coordinating pair, you will see a table like this:

Brief report:

Main Window
CHECK MENU
FEEDER PROTECTION COMMAND
The Feeder Protection command checks the coordination of all primary/backup pairs in a feeder. The
2
command also checks the I T ratings of lines and cables.
This command requires the feeder to be strictly radial without any parallel branches or loops. Generators
and motors are allowed. (For a pair or protective devices, the term source-side device always refers to
the device that is nearer the substation bus, and the term load-side device the device farther away from
the substation.)
The protective devices checked by this command include relays, reclosers, fuses and CCOC devices. (For
the purpose of this command, CCOC devices are treated as relays.) Sectionalizers are not being
checked at this time.
The checking logic begins by identifying primary/backup (source-side/load-side) pair of protective
devices. For each device, it also identifies the nodes that are within its zone of protection. We will
illustrate these concepts using the small feeder pictured below. The three fuses in this feeder, Fuse1,
Fuse2 and Fuse3, form two source-side/load-side pairs: Fuse1/Fuse2 and Fuse1/Fuse3. The nodes within
Fuse1s protection zone include BUS1, BUS2, BUS4 and BUS6. BUS3 is the only node within Fuse2s
protection zone, and BUS5 is the only node in Fuse3s protection zone.
The coordination of a source-side/load-side pair is checked using the solution of a series of faults:
The program first simulates two close-in faults (3-phase and single-line-to-ground) in front of the load-side
device. This is followed by 3-phase and single-line-to-ground faults on each of the nodes in the load-side
devices protection zone.
To guard against the possibility of lower-than-expected fault currents due to fault impedances, two
additional artificial faults with a fraction (usually 60%) of the lowest phase and ground current are
checked.
For each fault, the coordination of the load-side device and the source-side device is evaluated using the
same checking method as that in the Check | Protective Device Coordination command.
The program will tell you whether the source-side device and the load-side device are coordinated
following this series of coordination checks. If there is any miscoordination, the program will report a
bad range of load-side device fault currents for which the coordination is unsatisfactory.
2
The checking of the lines I T rating comes as a byproduct of the feeder protective device coordination
checking. Whenever the program simulates a fault downstream of the load-side device, it computes the
2
quantity I T for the line immediately upstream of the faulted node using the operating time of the load-side
2 2
device T and the line current, I. The value of the I T as a percentage of the lines I T rating is reported.
Any violations are flagged in the report.
The checking report will also show for each node the maximum fault clearing time. This time computed
as the higher of two values: (1) The operating time of the nearest protective device when a 3-phase fault
is applied to the node, and (2) the operating time of the same device when a single-line-to-ground fault is
applied.

TO CHECK PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION IN A FEEDER:
1. Optional: Execute the Check | Policy for Coordination Checking
command to review the coordination margins for various combinations
of source- and load-side devices.
2. Select the Check | Feeder Protection command.
3. Select a feeder by highlighting a substation bus in the list.

Only the protective devices on this feeder will be checked. If the feeder
of interest is connected to more than one substation, you can select any
one of the connected substations.
simulation.
center kV positions before simulating the faults.
6. Enter the minimum-current percentage within the
"Check Coordination Down to" group box.
The coordination of a source-side/load-side pair is checked using the
solution of a series of faults within the load-side devices zone of
protection. To guard against the possibility of lower-than-expected fault
currents due to fault impedances, two additional artificial faults with a
fraction of the lowest phase and ground current are checked. The
fraction is set to 60% by default. You can change this percentage here.

7. Enter the maximum fault clearing time.
The checking report shows for each node the maximum fault
clearing time. The result is flagged if the maximum clearing time
exceeds this threshold.
8. Select the output device. Click on:
To File: If you want to write the solution to a file. A standard file
dialog box will appear to let you specify output file
name.
To Printer: If you want to print the solution. A standard font
dialog box will appear to ask you to select a font.
summaries are being sent to the output device.
Printers vary in the number of lines of text they can conveniently fit on
a page. This value is set initially to 60.
10. Press OK to begin device coordination checking.
The program will generate two reports in the TTY Window.
The first report (see picture below) follows the tree-walk format of the
S_Ckt | Fault All Buses command. The various columns of the report
are explained in the following.
REF: Reference number. Each node in the feeder is assigned a unique

reference number. The substation bus you selected Step 2 is given the
reference number of zero. Reference numbers are assigned to the
other nodes in the order they are encountered in a depth-first traversal
of the feeder.
BUS: The number, name and nominal kV. Together they identify a node
in the feeder.
PROTECT_DEVICE: If not blank, this is the name of a protective
device (breaker/relay group, a fuse or a recloser) on a branch
immediately downstream from the node. The other end of the branch is
connected to the next node in this table.

Int Cap: The interrupting capability of the device in amperes. N/A
means the capability is zero.
Max Current - Asymm: Maximum asymmetric current among all the
faults simulated on BUS. See APPENDIX G: ASYMMETRIC
FAULT CURRENT for more information on how the asymmetric
fault current is computed.
Max Current - Pha: The maximum phase current among all the faults
simulated on BUS.
Max Current - Gnd: The maximum ground current (3Io) among all the
faults simulated on BUS.
Thevenin Z: Positive- and zero-sequence Thevenin impedance.
Src Ref No.: This reference number points to the nearest protective
device for the node. For example, the source reference number for BUS4
is 0. When you look up reference 0 (the first row in the table), you will
FUSE1 as the protective device.
Max Trip Time: The maximum fault clearing time. This time computed
as the higher of two values: (1) The operating time of the nearest
protective device when a 3-phase fault is applied to the node, and (2) the
operating time of the same device when a single-line-to-ground fault is
applied. The value 9999 means the device did not trip for at least one of
the two faults.
I2T Pct: This value is for the line immediately upstream of the node.
2
The I T is computed separated for the 3-phase fault and for the single-
line-to- ground fault. The higher of the two values is reported as a
2 2
percentage of the lines I T rating.. N/A means the lines I T rating is
zero or that the branch immediately upstream of the node is a switch or
transformer.
Note: For a breaker, the value T is computed as the fastest relay
operating time plus the breaker clearing time.
Flags: Warning flags. See the end of the report for an explanation of the
different warning flags.
End of device protection zone: On the line immediately following a
node with a protective device, the program will say something like Ref.
No. 4 is end of device protection zone. This reference number points to
a node in the protection zone that is farthest from the substation.
The second report is dedicated entirely to protective device coordination.
See picture below. The various columns of the report are explained in the
following.

INFORMATION UNDER SOURCE SIDE DEVICE
PROTECTIVE DEVICE: Under the SOURCE SIDE DEVICE
heading, there is always a single device listed. In the example report,
FUSE0 is shown.
No. of Phases: Number of energized phases at the source-
side device.
Maximum Currents - Asymm, Pha and Gnd: These are the
maximum asymmetric, phase and ground currents among all the
faults simulated at the source-side device node. Usually these are
the maximum current the source-side device will see.
Ref No: This reference number refers to the first report where
the source-side device was listed.
Device parameters: On a separate line, after the pointer symbol +--
-, some parameters of the source-side device are shown.
Min Phase amps for faults in own protection zone: This is
minimum phase current seen at the source-side device when a
3LG or 1LG fault is applied to a node within the source devices
protection zone. The minimum current has been scaled by the
minimum-current percentage you set in step 6.
In remote zones: This is minimum phase current seen at the source-
side device when a 3LG or 1LG fault is applied to a node within the
protection zone of all the load-side devices. The minimum current
has been scaled by the minimum-current percentage you set in step
6.
Min ground amps for faults in own protection zone: This is
minimum phase current seen at the source-side device when a 1LG
fault is applied to a node within the source devices protection
zone. The minimum current has been scaled by the minimum-
current
percentage you set in step 6.
In remote zones: This is minimum phase current seen at the
source- side device when a 1LG fault is applied to a node within the
protection zone of all the load-side devices listed in the LOAD
SIDE DEVICE(S) section. The minimum current has been scaled
by the minimum-current percentage you set in step 6.

INFORMATION UNDER LOAD SIDE DEVICE(S)
PROTECTIVE DEVICE: Under the LOAD SIDE DEVICE(S)
heading are devices backed up by the source-side device. In this
example, FUSE3 and FUSE2 are listed.
No. of Phases: Number of energized phases at the load-side device.
Maximum Currents - Asymm, Pha and Gnd:: These are fault
currents at the node to which the load-side device is connected.
Usually they are the maximum current the load-side device will
see.
Ref No: This reference number refers to the first report where
the load-side device was listed.
Device parameters: On a separate line, after the pointer symbol +--
-, some parameters of the load-side device are shown.
Pha amps checked: When 3LG and 1LG faults are applied to the
nodes in the load-side devices protection zone, this is the range of
phase current seen by the load-side. The minimum current has
been scaled by the minimum-current percentage you set in step 6.
Bad range: You will not see this item if the devices are coordinated
properly. The range of currents shown here are the phase current
(measured at the load-side device) for which the load-side device
and the source-side device are not properly coordinated.
Problem flag: Reasons why the devices are not coordinated. See
the end of the report for an explanation of the different warning
flags.
Gnd amps checked: When 1LG faults are applied to the nodes in
the load-side devices protection zone, this is the range of ground
current seen by the load-side device. The minimum current has been
scaled by the minimum-current percentage you set in step 6.
Bad range: You will not see this item if the devices are coordinated
properly. The range of currents shown here are the ground current
(measured at the load-side device) for which the load-side device
and the source-side device are not properly coordinated.
Problem flag: Reasons why the devices are not coordinated. See
the end of the report for an explanation of the different warning
flags.

Main Window
CHECK MENU
POLICY FOR COORDINATION CHECKING COMMAND
The Policy for Coordination Checking command lets you specify the desired coordination margins for
various combinations of source-side and load-side devices. DistriView utilizes these margins in the Check |
Protective Device Coordination command and in the Check | Feeder Coordination command.
TO SPECIFY DESIRED COORDINATION MARGINS:
1. Select the Check | Policy command.
Enter the coordinating margins, which are in seconds or percent, as

indicated.
The meaning of these margins should be self-explanatory.
Note: For this command, the term relay refers to both overcurrent
relays and CCOC devices.
Press OK.
The parameters you entered as saved in the Windows Registry (and not
in the binary data file). DistriView will automatically use them in future
sessions on your PC.

Main Window
CHECK MENU
INTERRUPTING DEVICE RATING COMMAND
The Check | Interrupt Device Rating command checks the current rating of circuit breakers, fuses,
reclosers, sectionalizers and CCOC devices against short circuit currents. The program automatically
simulates faults in front and behind each device to determine the highest short-circuit current that the
device must withstand and/or interrupt.
Circuit breaker: The rated kA @ max kV of the breaker is checked against the computed
short circuit current without any adjustments for ac or dc decrements. The program makes no
adjustment to the rated kA for the difference between the maximum kV and the nominal kV.
Recloser: The rated momentary amps of the recloser is checked against the computed
short circuit current without any adjustments.
Sectionalizer: The peak amps rating of the sectionalizer is checked against the computed
Fuse: The rated interrupting amps of the fuse is checked against the asymmetric short
circuit current, which is computed as the product of the symmetric short circuit current and an
asymmetric current multiplier that varies as the X/R ratio of the fault.
CCOC Device: The cut-off current of the CCOC device is checked against the computed
The checking report is displayed in the TTY window. The program will highlight device with
percentage duty higher than the threshold you set (usually 90%).
TO CHECK INTERRUPTING DEVICE RATING:
1. Select the Check | Interrupting Device Rating command.

2. Select a feeder by highlighting a substation bus in the list box.
Only the interrupting devices on this feeder will be checked. If the
feeder of interest is connected to more than one substation, you can
select any one of the connected substations.
3. Mark check boxes labeled Circuit Breakers, Reclosers, Fuses,
Sectionalizers and CCOC devices to select the type of interrupting device
you want to check.
simulation.
center-kV positions before simulating the short circuit.
6. Specify percent duty threshold for flagging underrated devices.
Mark Report flagged cases only to omit in the checking report
breakers, reclosers, fuses, sectionalizers and CCOC devices that
have percent duty less than the specified value.
Mark Save result to Windows clipboard to place a copy of checking
report to the Windows clipboard. You will be able to paste the result to
any Windows spreadsheet or word processing program.
7. Press OK to start checking.
The dialog box will disappear. The program will display the TTY
window with checking report when all interrupting device on
specified feeder are checked.
Following items are included in each the checking report entry:

BUS1, BUS2: End buses of interrupting-device branch. The device is
attached to the BUS1 end.
DEVICE: Device name.
TYPE: Device type: Breaker, fuse, recloser, sectionalizer or CCOC
device.

X/R: Ratio of the imaginary part of the total fault impedance and the
real part of the fault impedance.
MULT: Asymmetric current multiplier. The multiplier is 1.0 for
breakers, reclosers, sectionalizers and CCOC device. For fuses, the
multiplier is computed as a function of the X/R ratio.
MAX AMPS: Magnitude and fault connection of the worst-case short
circuit current, after adjusted by the asymmetric current multiplier.
RATING: Device ampere rating being checked.
% Duty: Ratio of worst-case short circuit current and the device
ampere rating in percent.
OK: NO means the percent duty is higher than the threshold.

Main Window
CHECK MENU
I2T LIMIT OF LINES AND CABLES COMMAND
2
The Check | I2T Limit of Lines and Cables command checks the I T value for all the lines and cables in a
2
feeder against their I T limit. The parameter I is the fault current, and T is the fault duration.
2
Unlike the Check | Feeder Protection command, which checks the I T limit only at the load end of the
line, this command checks the limit using intermediate faults at 0.1%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 99.9% of the
line length. (On very short lines and cables, this command checks the limit at 0.1% and 99.9% only.) In
addition, this command works for radial as well as looped feeders.
At each intermediate point on a line or cable, four different faults are simulated: 3-phase, 2-phase-to-
ground, single-line-to-ground and line-to-line. The fault duration T is the operating time of the fastest
protective element. Effects of reclosing from line reclosing and operations of reclosers are taken into
2
account by the I T-rating multiplier parameter entered by the user (in the Lines info dialog box.)
The program writes the checking results to a CSV-formatted file, which can be viewed in any spreadsheet
program.
TO CHECK I2T LIMIT OF LINES AND CABLES:
1. Select the Check | I2T Limit of Lines and Cable command.
2. Select a substation box in the top list box to indicate the feeder of interest.
3. Specify the fault options.
Mark the "Include induction machines" checkbox to include
induction machine contributions in the fault simulation.
If the prefault voltages come from a solved voltage-drop study: This
check box is marked and disable, which means all single- and 3-phase
induction machines will be included in the short circuit calculation.
If the prefault voltages come from a linear network solution: Marking this
box will cause 3-phase induction machines to be included in the short
circuit study. Single-phase inductions machines will be ignored.

Mark the "Reset LTCs and regulators" checkbox to reset all voltage
Enter a line length in feet (meter if metric) above which the line will
be faulted at the two ends (0.1% and 99.9% of the line length) and
at three intermediate points (25%, 50% and 75%).
Lines shorter than this length will be faulted at the two ends only.
4. Specify the warning threshold.
2
For each fault location, the program calculates the maximum I T value
2
using the fault current and the relay operating time. The I T limit of the
2 2
line is computed as the product of the I T rating multiplied by the I T
multiplier entered by the user. The computer issues a warning when the
2 2
maximum I T value, as a percentage of the I T limit, exceeds the warning
threshold.
5. Press OK.
The program will show you the report on a spreadsheet program, which
looks something like this.

Main Window
REPORT MENU
SOLUTION REPORT COMMAND
The Solution Report command generates a text report of a voltage-drop, short-circuit or locked-rotor study that is
being displayed in the Main Window. You may direct the program to write the output to a file, to the TTY window,
or to the printer.
Note: See SECTION 7 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION REPORT for more details on short-circuit reports.
See SECTION 8 VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION REPORT for more details on voltage-drop reports.
TO GENERATE A SOLUTION REPORT FOR A SHORT-CIRCUIT OR LOCKED-ROTOR STUDY:
1. Perform one or more short-circuit or locked-rotor simulations and
make sure the solution of one of the cases is being displayed on the Main
Window.
2. Select the Report | Solution Report command.
This dialog box will appear. The number of short-circuit and locked-rotor
solutions available is shown next to the top radio button.
3. Use the radio buttons to specify whether you want the report to include
all the short circuit/locked-rotor cases that are in storage or just the
case that is being displayed.
4. Enter the number of tiers in 'No. of tiers'.
The No. of tiers parameter determines the extent over which the
network solution will be outputted. If the number of tiers is -1, the
program shows only the fault summary and no bus-oriented output. If
the number of tier is 0, the program shows the fault summary the current
contributions at the faulted bus. For a tier value of n, where n is positive,
DistriView will compute the solution for buses and branches within n
buses back from the fault. There is no upper limit on the tier parameter,
but a large tier limit will cause a lot of output to be written for each fault.
Printers vary in the number of lines of text they can conveniently fit on a
page. This value is set initially to 60.
6. Edit the first page heading.
This text will appear on the top of the first page.

7. Click on:
name.
To Printer: If you want to print the solution. A standard font dialog
box will appear to ask you to select a font.
summaries are being sent to the output.
TO GENERATE A SOLUTION REPORT FOR A VOLTAGE-DROP

STUDY:
1. Perform a voltage-drop study and make sure the solution is
being displayed on the Main Window.
2. Optional: Highlight on a node or substation bus in the feeder if you
plan to use the Tier Limit option in step 8 below.
3. Select the Report | Solution Report command.
You will see this dialog box.
4. Specify the Bus-By-Bus Report format. Select one of the following

from the drop-down list box:
Omit: To omit the bus-by-bus report.
Style 1, 2 or 3: To output the report in various styles.
The bus-by-bus report gives you a detailed description of the solution
quantities, one node at a time. The output for each node includes the (1)
power injections from induction and synchronous machines, (2) power
consumed by loads and shunts, (3) and power flowing to neighboring
nodes through lines, transformers, regulators and switches.

5. Make the check boxes within the Summaries group box to output
the various summaries available.
You may change the acceptable voltage limits and the criterion of line
overload for the summaries by executing the on 1-Line command prior
to executing this command.
6. Edit the first page heading.
This text will appear on the top of the first page.
7. Click on:
name.
To Printer: If you want to print the solution. A standard font dialog
box will appear to ask you to select a font.
Another dialog box will appear asking for the output coverage of the
voltage-drop report. Note: This dialog box will not appear if 'Omit'
was selected in Step 4.
8. Select the amount of coverage.

Click on:
Entire Network: To output the solution for all the buses in the system.
Area: To output the solution for all buses in an area. Then
click on the drop down list box and select the area.
Tier: To output the solution for all the buses within a
certain number of tiers of the selected bus. Then
enter the desired number of tiers in the edit box.
The tier parameter determines the extent of the network
that will be included in the solution report. For a tier
value of n, where n is a non-negative integer, DistriView
will generate the solution for buses and branches within n
tiers of the selected bus. There is no upper limit on the
tier parameter.
Note: The Tier radio button is dimmed if you did not highlight a node
or substation bus in step 2.
9. Enter additional selection criteria.
Bus numbers from ... to: Minimum and maximum bus numbers.
Bus kVs from to: Minimum and maximum nominal bus voltages.
Names from to: Starting and ending bus names.

10. Click on "Show bus list" to view a list of the selected buses.
A dialog box will appear displaying a list of all the buses that satisfy the
selection criteria that you have specified. The total number of selected
buses is shown at the top of the dialog box.
11. Press Done to close the 'Show Bus List' dialog box.
12. Press OK to close the 'Selected Buses' dialog box.

Main Window
TOOLS MENU
UNDO COMMAND
Virtually everything you do in DistriView is undo-able. You can undo commands that you execute from a menu, as
well as graphical editing operations you performed with the mouse. At any time during a DistriView session, you
can use the Tools | Undo Report command to undo up to the last eight operations.
The text in the Undo menu item changes dynamically depending on the next operation that can be undone. For
example, the menu reads Undo delete bus if the next undo command will reverse a delete-bus command. When
the undo stack is empty, the menu will read Nothing to undo.
TO UNDO AN OPERATION PERFORMED EARLIER:
1. Select the Tools | Undo command.
DistriView will reverse the change and update the
screen.
Note: The commands that cannot be undone are the File | Change
Base MVA command and the Change Type command in the distance
relay info dialog box.

Main Window
TOOLS MENU
DATA BROWSER COMMAND
The Data Browser command opens the Data Browser, an interface that lists the network and protective-
device data in a tabular form. In the Browser you can review and edit all the objects, including those that
are not visible on the one-line diagram. The browser has separate pages for different types of objects.
For ease of viewing, you can filter the objects by their connectivity, their area or zone affiliation, and by
their nominal kV. The Scale button is activated only when spot load, section load or induction
motor/generator data are being display.
TO OPEN THE DATA BROWSER:
1. Select the Tools | Data Browser command.
The Data Browser will appear on the screen. The Nodes and
Substations page is shown the first time you open the Data Browser.
Subsequently in the same session, the Data Browser will open the same
page as you left it. You can resize the Browser Window with the
mouse.
2. Select the type of network elements or protective devices to be listed.

Click on the drop-down combo box at the upper left corner and select one
of the following:
Node and Substation
Spot Load
Section Load
Synchronous Motor/Generator
Induction Motor/Generator
Capacitor/Reactor
Grounding Transformer
Line
2-Winding Transformer - General
2-Winding Transformer - Balanced
3-Winding Transformer
Voltage Regulator
Switch
3-Way Switch

Fuse
Recloser
Overcurrent Relay Ground
Overcurrent Relay Phase
Distance Relay Ground
Distance Relay Phase
Breaker
Sectionalizer
3. Filter the objects by area, zone or nominal kV.
Click on the second drop-down list box and select an area or zone.
(Zones are available only for loads.) Select **ALL for everything.
Click on the 'Nominal kV' drop-down list box and select one. Select
**ALL for all nominal kVs.
DistriView will update the window to display the objects requested. The
parameters listed in the grid are a subset of the data that can be found in
the objects Info dialog boxes. The column Visible for network
equipment tells you whether the object is can be seen on the one-line
diagram. The total number of objects being listed is shown to the right of
the Nominal kV list box.
4. Filter objects by connectivity.
Click on any object (other than an annotation) in a feeder then open
the Data Browser. When the Browser opens, the words
**SELECTED FEEDER will appear in the second drop-down list
box.
With this filter turned on, the program will show you only the object in
the selected feeder.
Note: If nothing is selected currently, DistriView will turn on this option
based on the last object you selected.
5. Change the sort order in a column.
Click on the title bar of any column to have the grid sorted by
the items in that column.
Successive clicking on the same column toggles the sort order
between ascending and descending.
6. To find an object with certain attribute.
Press the "Find" button at the upper right corner.
A dialogue box will appear.
Click on the "Look in:" drop down list box and choose the column
name to search.

Enter the text you are seeking in the "For text" edit box and click
either the "Find Forward" or "Find Backward" button. Click
on the "Done" button when you are done searching.
If the text is found, the element will be highlighted in the browser.
TO EDIT AN OBJECT:
1. Edit an object.
Click once on the row for the object of interest and click on
"Edit". Alternatively, double-click on the row. The properties
dialog box for the selected object will appear.
TO TAKE AN OBJECT IN OR OUT OF SERVICE:
1. Take a network element or relay in or out of service.
Select an element and click on "In/Out Serv.". DistriView will toggle
the active state of the selected element between in-service and out-of-
service.
TO DELETE AN OBJECT:
1. Delete a network element or a relay.
Select an element and click on "Delete". DistriView will delete the
selected element following your confirmation. The deleted element will
disappear from the list.
TO SCALE LOADS:
1. Scale spot loads, section loads and induction machines loads.
Note: This option is not available for other objects.
Use filters, as needed, to display just the loads or induction machines
that you wish to scale. A dialog box will appear asking you for the
scaling parameters.
Select Scale all if you want to scale the kVA load for all the objects
listed in the Browser table. The Total kVA value at the top of the
dialog box is the total KVA load (on all three phases).
Select Scale selected if you want to scale the kVA load of the
currently selected load or induction machine in the Browser table.
The Total kVA value at the top of the dialog box is the total 3-phase
KVA of the selected load.
Within the Scaling method group box, select Use scaling factor
if you wish to enter the load multiplier directly. Enter the scaling
factor and click on "OK". The kVA load will be multiplied by this
factor.

Within the Scaling method group box, select Scale total kVA to
if you wish to enter the target kVA value and let the program
compute the necessary scaling factor. Enter the total kVA value and
click on "OK". The total 3-phase kVA load will be scaled to equal this
value.
TO CREATE A REPORT:
1. Click on the "Report" button to create a text report of the
current contents of the browser.
A standard Save As dialog box will appear.
Use the controls in the standard file Save As dialog box to name the
report file. Press Save.
The report will be written to a comma-delimited text file with .CSV
extension. You can open the CSV file with any spreadsheet program,
such as Excel.
TO LOCATE AN ELEMENT ON THE ONE-LINE:
1. Locate the selected element on the one-line diagram.
Click on the "Locate on 1-line" button.
The browser will disappear and the one-line diagram will be redrawn
with the selected element at the center of the screen.
TO CUSOMIZE THE DATA BROWSER
You can customize the Data Browser to suit your needs. For each page, you can specify the parameters
you want displayed and their column order. In addition, you can specify the original sort order for the
page. Your preferences are stored in the Windows Registry. The program will follow them in all
subsequent sessions.
1. Click on the Type drop-down list box to open the page of interest.
2. Click on the Option button at the upper right corner of the
dialog box. A dialog box will appear. (This one is for the Lines page.)
3. Specify which items are to be displayed and in which columns.

In the Column Order listbox, mark the items that you want to see
displayed in the grid. Remove the checkmark for those items you want to
omit.
Highlight any one of the checked items in the list box, press the Move
Up or Move Down button to change the column order.

4. Change the sort order.
Use the controls within the Sort group box on the right to specify how
the data will be sorted.

Main Window
TOOLS MENU
GENERATE LIST OF NODES COMMAND
The Generate List of Nodes command is designed to help you create a text file that contains a list of nodes.
Such list is useful for the S_Ckt | VOLTAGE-SAG ANALYSIS | RUN BATCH COMMAND.
TO GENERATE A LIST OF NODES:
1. Select the Tools | Generate List of Nodes command.
The Node Selector dialog box will appear.
The list box on the left shows all the buses in the network that have not been
selected. The buses are sorted by name or by number depending on the
option you selected in the Diagram | Options dialog box. The label beneath
this list box will read Search for name or Search for number depending
on the sort order.
You can change the sort order by clicking on the two radio buttons in the
Sort by group box.
The list box on the right shows the buses you selected. This list box is empty
initially.
Note: You can use this command to edit an existing list, as follows: Press the
Recall button at the upper right corner and use the control in the standard
open-file dialog box open an existing node-list file. The contents of the file will
appear on the right list box. The program will automatically remove those
nodes from the left list box.
Here are the instructions on how to use this dialog box to select buses.
2. Select buses to be included in the node list.
SELECT BUSES MANUALLY
Highlight one or more buses in the left list box and click on the button to
select them. The program will transfer the selected buses to the right list box.
Highlight one or more buses in the right list box and click on
button to de-select them. The program will transfer the selected buses
to the left list box.

SELECT A GROUP OF BUSES
Click on the button labeled to the right of the button.
The Add To Selected List dialog box will appear. You can specify the
criteria for selecting buses to be transferred from the left list box to the right
list box. We will refer to these as the source list box and destination list
box, respectively.
Click on:
All the nodes in the left list box: This option will select all the buses
in the source list box.
Buses in area(s): Type the area name with up to 4 characters into the
edit box. This option will select buses in the source list
box that belong to the areas you specify.
Nodes connected to selected bus: This option is available only if you
have highlighted a node prior to executing the Generate
List of Nodes command. This option will select all the
nodes that are in the same feeder as the selected node.
Enter additional selection criteria:
Bus number range: The program will filter out
nodes whose numbers are outside of this range.
Nominal kV range: The program will filter out nodes
whose nominal kVs (line-to-line) are outside of this range.
Levels: The program will filter out nodes whose level is
not selected.
Press OK.
The program will transfer the selected buses to the destination list box.
DE-SELECT A GROUP OF NODES
To de-select a group of buses based on certain criteria, click on
the button labeled to the right of the button.
The Remove From Selected List dialog will appear. You can specify
the criteria for selecting buses to be transferred from the right list box
to the left list box.

The instructions are the same as those for selecting buses. The only
difference is that the source list box is the right list box and the
destination list box is the left list box.
2. Select Done in the Node Selector dialog box when you have collected
the nodes you wanted in the right list box.
The program will ask you to name the text file that will contain the list of
nodes you selected.
Use the controls in the standard dialog box to name the bus-list file.

Main Window
TOOLS MENU
CHANGE MISC. PARAMETERS ON FEEDER COMMAND
The Change Misc. Parameters on Feeder command in the Main Window lets you change the following
parameters on a feeder: The area name of nodes, the group number of spot loads, the group number of
section loads, and the I2T multiplier of lines and cables. To use this command, you must first select a
node, a line, a 2-winding transformer, or a voltage regulator. At your option, the parameter changes will
take place either (1) over the entire feeder, or (2) on a portion of the feeder that is at, and downstream
from, the selected equipment.
TO CHANGE MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS ON A FEEDER:
1. Left click on any node in the feeder if you wish to change the parameters
in the entire feeder. Otherwise, left click on a node, a line, a transformer,
or a voltage regulator to define the starting point of a portion of the
feeder.
The equipment symbol will turn dotted red.
1. Select the Tools | Change Misc. Parameters on Feeder command.
The Change Misc. Parameters on Feeder dialog box will appear.
2. For each parameter that you wish to change, enter the new
parameter values in the edit box on the right.
A check mark will appear in the check box on the left.
3. Select the change extent by clicking on the two radio buttons.
Your options are to change the parameter (1) on all the equipment in the
feeder, or (2) on equipment on just the portion of the feeder that is at,
and downstream from, the equipment you selected in step 1.
4. Press OK.
The program will inform you the number of items that it has changed.

Main Window
TOOLS MENU
CONFIGURATION DASHBOARD COMMAND
The Configuration Dashboard command helps you change the feeder configuration quickly from one to
another by opening and closing switches, and putting different network equipment and protective relays in
and out of service. The configuration information is stored in the binary data file.
You can use the Configuration Dashboard to create the configurations. Once created, you can use the
Dashboard to apply or undo one or more configurations. Other commands in the dashboard let you view,
edit and delete the configurations.
The word dashboard is used here to emphasize that you can interact with the configuration dialog box
and the main one-line diagram window at the same time. The use of a modeless interface greatly simplifies
the process of adding network elements and relays to a configuration, as you will see in the instructions
below under the headings of To Add Network Components to a Configuration and To Add Relay
Components to a Configuration.
TO OPEN THE CONFIGURATION DASHBOARD:
1. Select Tools | Configuration Dashboard command.
The Configuration Dashboard will appear.
TO CREATE A NEW CONFIGURATION:

1. Press the New config. button.
Enter a configuration name with up to 49 characters. The

configuration name must be unique among all the configurations.
Enter a description of the configuration in the edit box labled Memo.
Press OK.

The configuration name will appear in the left-hand pane of the
Dashboard. The characters [A] will appear before the configuration
name if the current state of the configuration components already agree
with their applied state. In other words, applying this configuration
now will produce no change in any network or relay elements in the
feeder.
TO ADD NETWORK COMPONENTS TO A CONFIGURATION:
With the Configuration Dashboard visible in the foreground, select a
network element in the one-line diagram with the left mouse button.
The selected element will turn dotted red.
Press the Add selected 1-line component button on the Dashboard.
A dialog box will appear to let you specify the applied state of the
selected element. The dialog box is different for different components.
For 2- and 3-way switches, they looks like this.
For lines, transformers, generators, loads, shunts, and other network

elements, the dialog box looks like this.
Mark the appropriate check boxes or radio button to indicate the

applied state of the configuration component. Press OK.
TO ADD RELAY COMPONENTS TO A CONFIGURATION:
With the Configuration Dashboard visible in the foreground, select a
breaker/relay group, a fuse, a recloser or a sectionalizer in the one-
line diagram with the left mouse button.
The selected element will turn dotted red.
Press the Add selected 1-line component button on the Dashboard.

A dialog box will appear to let you specify the applied state of the
selected element. The dialog box is different for different type of
components. If you selected a breaker/relay group, the relays within the
group are listed individually, as show below. OCP and OCG stand for
overcurrent phase and overcurrent ground. DSP and DSG stand for
distance phase and distance ground.
Select one or more relays in the group and specify their applied
state with the radio buttons below. Press OK.
For fuses, reclosers and sectionalizers, the dialog box looks like this.
Specify the applied state with the radio buttons. Press OK.
TO APPLY CONFIGURATION(S) TO THE FEEDER:
1. Select one or more configurations that you want to apply in the list.
You can use the Ctrl or the Shift key on the keyboard to select multiple
entries.
2. Press Apply Config. to put components of the selected
configuration(s) into their apply state.
The program records the state of the components before the
configuration changes are applied. This information enables us to undo
the last apply configuration at a later time -- before you close the file
or exit the program.
TO UNDO PREVIOUS APPLIED CONFIGURATION(S):
1. Press the Undo last Apply button.
The program will restore the configuration components to their state before
you last pressed the Apply Config. button.
TO DELETE CONFIGURATIONS OR CONFIGURATION COMONENTS:
1. Select the item you wish to delete and press the Delete or the
Remove item(s) button, respectively.

TO EDIT CONFIGURATIONS AND CONFIGURATION COMONENTS:
1. Select the item you wish to edit and press the Edit or the Edit item
button, respectively. You can alternatively double-click on the item.

Main Window
TOOLS MENU
RUN COMMANDS
The Tools | Run Configuration Program command launches the DistriView Configuration Program. More
information on this program is available under the command Help | Getting Started Help Contents.
The Tools | Run Distance Relay Editor command launches the DistriView Distance Relay Editor and opens the
distance relay library that is being referenced by the program. More information on this program is available
under the command Help | DS Relay Editor Help Contents. See, also, APPENDIX B: DISTANCE RELAY
LIBRARY.
The Tools | Run Overcurrent Curve Editor command launches the DistriView Overcurrent Curve Editor. More
information on this program is available under the command Help | OC Curve Editor Help Contents. See,
also, APPENDIX A: OVERCURRENT CURVE LIBRARY.
The Tools | Run Conductor Library Editor command launches the DistriView Conductor Library Editor and
opens the conductor library that is being referenced by the program. More information on this program is
available in APPENDIX C: CONDUCTOR LIBRARY EDITOR.

Main Window
TOOLS MENU
UPDATE KEY MEMORY COMMAND
The Update Key Memory command helps you update the internal memory of an ASPEN key using a binary file
from ASPEN. The reasons for updating the key memory include:
Adding or removing authorization for various ASPEN programs in the key.
Resetting the counter and termination date for lease keys.
When the need arises, ASPEN will send you a binary file with HMF extension.
TO UPDATE KEY MEMORY:
1. Start DistriView. Do not open or create any files.
2. Select the Tools | Update Key Memory command.
A standard file-open dialog box will appear.
Select the HMF file and press OK.
After a brief pause, the program will inform you that the key has been update.
DistriView will close automatically.
3. Optional: Delete the HMF file. It can be used only once.

Main Window
HELP MENU
HELP CONTENTS COMMANDS
The commands in the Help Menu are shortcuts to opening the help files of:
DistriView Users Manual
Getting Started with DistriView Manual
Overcurrent Curve Editor Users Manual
Distance Relay Editor Users Manual
TO VIEW THE ON-LINE VERSION OF THE DISTRIVIEW USERS MANUAL:

1. Select the Help | DistriView Help Contents command.
TO VIEW THE ON-LINE VERSION OF THE GETTING STARTED WITH DISTRIVIEW MANUAL:
1. Select the Help | Getting Started Help Contents command.
TO VIEW THE ON-LINE VERSION OF THE OVERCURRENT CURVE EDITOR USERS MANUAL:
1. Select the Help | OC Relay Editor Help Contents command.
TO VIEW THE ON-LINE VERSION OF THE DISTANCE RELAY EDITOR USERS MANUAL:
1. Select the Help | DS Relay Editor Help Contents command.

Main Window
HELP MENU
DEVICE LIST COMMANDS
These two Device List commands under the Help menu are shortcuts to the lists of overcurrent devices, and
constructions and table entries for lines and cables.
TO VIEW THE LIST OF OVERCURRENT CURVES AVAILABLE
1. Select the Help | List of Overcurrent Devices command.
The help file will open to show you a list of relay, fuse and recloser curves
in the overcurrent curve library, which is made up of about forty binary files
with .RLY extension. Please refer to APPENDIX A:
OVERCURRENT CURVE LIBRARY for more information.
TO VIEW THE LIST OF LINE/CABLE CONSTRUCTIONS AND TABLE ENTRIES
1. Select the Help | Conductor Library Contents command.
The help file will open to show you a list of constructions and line-table
entries that are within the MASTER.CDB file. The constructions are mostly
standard pole configurations from REA handbooks. The line-table entries
are mostly for different cable types. Please refer to APPENDIX C:
CONDUCTOR LIBRARY EDITOR for instructions to transfer these data
from MASTER.CDB to ASPEN.CDB, the conductor library referenced by
DistriView.

3.3 CURVES WINDOW COMMAND
The Curves Window displays the time-current curves of overcurrent relays, fuses, reclosers and CCOC
devices. You can open this window through the Relay | VIEW RELAY CURVES COMMAND from the
Main Window. You can have up to 15 relay, fuse and recloser curves on the same plot. You can also
have up to 6 transformer damage curves, conductor annealing curves and other damage curves
There are no zoom commands in the Curves Window, but you can change the magnification of the plot by
making the window wider or narrower.
You can change the parameters of any protective equipment or damage curves by double-clicking on
its curve or its caption box. The curves are redrawn immediately after you change the parameters.
The Curves Windows offers a wide variety of grid styles, colors and time units. The relay curves can be
shifted or not shifted depending on your preference.
You can move the caption boxes for protective equipment and damage curves by dragging with either
mouse button. The fault description is also moveable.
You can store the curves being displayed in the Curves Window to a curve collection in a PCC file.
When you recall the curve collection later with the Relay | Open Curve Collection command in Main
Window, or with the Misc | View Curve Collection command in the Curves Window, the relay curves,
damage curves, relay descriptions, annotations, the fault description and the legend will reappear in the
exact same arrangement on the window.
The cursor coordinates are shown next to the mouse cursor when you drag with the right mouse button.
If you drag the mouse with the <Ctrl> key held down, DistriView will trace an L-shaped symbol
spanning the initial mouse position and the current mouse position. In addition, the current cursor
coordinates and the extent of the L-shaped symbol are shown next to the mouse cursor.
Clicking the right mouse on the Curves Windows will bring up a floating menu of commonly used
commands. The commands within the floating menu vary depending on the item you clicked on.
You can edit the legend at the bottom of the graph by double-clicking on it. You can also add annotations
anywhere on the graph.
You can work on the Curves Window and the Main Window at the same time. If you have a large
monitor, you can arrange the windows side by side and execute commands in both windows. When you
display a fault in one of the windows, the same fault is displayed on the other window. If your monitor is
not large enough to see both windows at the same time, you can minimize the Curves window while you
view the one-line diagram. To restore the Curves window, simply press the symbol in the Main
Windows toolbar or double-click on the window icon at the bottom of the screen.
The commands in the Curves Window are described in this section.

Curves Window
MISC MENU
SELECT PRINTER COMMAND
The Misc | Select Printer command in the Curves Window allows you to change the current printer and to
set it up. The settings made in command will be used in all subsequent printouts from DistriView.
1. Select Misc | Select Printer command.
Please follow the procedure in your Windows Users Manual to configure

your printer.

Curves Window
MISC MENU
PRINT GRAPH COMMAND
The Print Entire Graph command in the Curves Window lets you print the entire x-y graph of relay
curves in the Curves Window. Even the portions of the graph that is not visible on your monitor will be
printed. For best results, the printer should be setup for the portrait orientation.
TO PRINT THE ENTIRE GRAPH:
1. Select the Misc | Print Entire Graph command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the printing parameters.
2. Use Curve width spin button to change the line width of the curves to
be printed.
Choose thicker line width to make the relay curves easier to read. All
relay curves on the screen will be printed with the specified line width.
3. Press Change to change the font.
The standard font dialog box will appear asking you to specify the font.
The fonts shown in the list box are those available on your printer.
Common fonts are Courier, Arial and Times Roman. Font size controls
the height of the type in units of points where one point is defined to be
1/72 of an inch. DistriView uses Arial to paint on the screen. You may
wish to select another font if 1) Arial is not available on your printer or
2) you prefer the appearance of another font.
Use the controls in the standard font selection dialog box to select the
font, font style and size you want. Press OK.
4. Click on "Print black and white" to print the curves in black and white.
5. Enter a scaling factor in "Scaling factor".
The scaling factor allows you to adjust the amount of the graph that will
be printed. When the scaling factor is 1.0, the contents of the curves
window is scaled to fit on the paper. When the scaling factor is less than
1.0, the entire graph will be printed, only smaller. When the scaling
factor is larger than 1.0, only a portion of the graph will not appear on
the paper. The scaling factor does not affect the font size.
6. Select Date stamp this printout to place current date in the legend
on the curve printout.

7. Press Edit to enter curve printout legend.
A dialog box will appear for you to enter the curve legend.
Press OK to close the dialog box when you have entered all the fields.
8. Press OK to print the graph.

Curves Window
MISC MENU
COPY GRAPH TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Copy Graph to Clipboard command in the Curves Window copies the entire graph being displayed to
the Window clipboard, in the form of a Windows metafile. You can later paste the graphics into other
Windows programs such as MS Word.
TO COPY THE SCREEN GRAPHICS TO THE WINDOWS CLIPBOARD:

1. Select the Misc | Copy Graph to Clipboard command.
A dialog box will appear informing you that the graphics have been
copied.
Curves Window
MISC MENU
EXPORT GRAPH COMMAND
The Misc | Export Graph command in the Curves Window saves the relay curves being displayed to a
Window Metafile or Enhanced Window Metafile. The metafiles are vector graphic files that can be
imported to other Windows programs such as MS Word.
TO SAVE RELAY CURVES TO A METAFILE:
1. Select the Misc | Export Graph command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the file name.
of the file.
choice. A message box will appear informing you that the file has been
created.

Curves Window
MISC MENU
VIEW CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND
This command is the same as the Relay | OPEN CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND in the Main
Window. Please refer to that command for instructions.

Curves Window
MISC MENU
SAVE THIS CURVE COLLECTION COMMAND
The Save This Curve Collection command saves the current state of the Curves Window as a curve
collection in a previous-collection file (PCC file).
TO SAVE A CURVE COLLECTION:
1. Select the Misc | Save This Curve Collection command.
If only the last two radio buttons are visible, skip down to step 3.
The following dialog box appears when you have opened a PCC file
earlier in the session. The file name is shown above the radio buttons.
2. Select where you want to save the curve collection.

Click
on:
"Append" to add the curve collection to the existing PCC file.
"Replace" to replace the curve collection of the same name in the
PCC
file.
"Append to another PCC file" to open another PCC file and add the
curve collection to it.
"Save to a new PCC file" to create a new PCC file and add the curve
collection to it.
A PCC file can have multiple curve collections. You must name each of
the collections in such a way that you can tell them apart later on.
If you click on an option other than Replace, a dialog box will
appear asking you to name the new curve collection. The name can
have up to 20 characters.
Enter the name for the new curve collection and click on
"OK".
If you selected "Append to another PCC file" or "Save to a new PCC
file", a file dialog box will appear.
Use the controls in the curve collection file dialog box to enter the
PCC file name. Click on "OK".

Skip the remaining
instructions.

3. If a PCC file has not been opened when the Save This Curve
Collection command is executed, a dialog box with only two options
will appear asking you where to save the current curve collection.
Click on:
"Append to another PCC file" to open another PCC file and add the
curve collection to it.
"Save to a new PCC file" to create a new PCC file and add the curve
collection to it.
A file dialog box will appear.
Use the controls in the curve collection file dialog box to enter the
PCC file name. Click on "OK".
a dialog box will appear asking you to name the new curve collection.
Enter the name for the current curve collection and press OK.

Curves Window
MISC MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
The Options command in the Curves Window lets you specify the options for the Curves Window.
These include the (1) unit of time, (2) grid color and style, (3) layout and style of the axes, (4) shifted
curve style,
(5) curve description location, (6) whether to fill in fuse curves, (7) whether to display the relay
test quantity in the TTY window, (8) test point, (9) font size and (10) line width.
TO SPECIFY THE OPTIONS FOR THE CURVES WINDOW:
1. Select the Misc | Options command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the options for the
overcurrent relay plot.
2. Select the units of time. Click on one of the three options: Seconds,
Cycles 60 Hz, or Cycles 50 Hz.
Note: Be sure the system frequency you pick here agrees with the system
frequency of the Conductor Library (see status bar).
3. Select the Grid Color. Click on Light green, Light blue or Yellow.
4. Select the Grid Style. Click on Full grid or Decades only.
5. Select the Axes style. Click on Log-log or Semi-log.
The log-log plot uses a logarithmic scale for both axes. The semi-log
plot uses a logarithmic scale for the horizontal axis (current) and a
mixture of logarithmic and linear scales for the vertical axis (time). The
axis is linear below 2 seconds and logarithmic above 2 seconds.
Note: The semi-log option is not recommended for production use, as
the line and transformer damage curves and inrush curves may not be
drawn correctly under this option.

6. Select the units for the X axis. Click on:
"in A": To display the horizontal axis in amperes.
"in MVA": To display the horizontal axis in MVA. This option takes
effect only for "Automatically shifted" curves when a 3-
phase or single-line-to-ground fault is displayed.
7. Select where you would like the X axis to start. The options are 1A,
10A or 100A.
Note: If you selected In MVA in item 6, the starting point you specify here
will change the starting point of the MVA axis when 3LG and 1LG fault
currents are being displayed.
8. Specify whether you want the automatically shifted curves to
continue beyond the total fault current. Click on Stop at fault I or Do
not stop.
The "Stop at fault I" option display the relay curves only for currents
less than the fault current. The "Do not stop" option extends the curves
beyond that point.
9. Select the Location of the Curve Description. Click on "Left"
or "Right".
The program will use the left side or the right side of the grid as the
default location of the relay curve descriptions. The other side of the
grid is the default location of the damage curve descriptions. The fault
description, if any, is below the last relay curve description. As always,
you can move the descriptions with the mouse.
10. Click on "Hatch" in "Fuse Curve" group box to fill the area between
the total-clear curve and the minimum-melt curve with a hatch pattern.
11. Click on "Shown in TTY" to display the Relay Test Quantity on the
TTY Window.
The pre- and post-fault voltage and secondary current of the relays will
be displayed in TTY Window when executing the Relay Operations for
1 Fault command. You can select and copy the relay test quantities in
the TTY Window to the clipboard, and then paste the data from the
clipboard to your text data file for relay testing.
12. Enter the test point in "Test Point".
The program will show in the relay description the time delay at a test
point, in the form, TP=xxx. The default value of 5.0 means that the
time delay is for 5 times the pickup setting. If the test point is set to 0.0,
the TP=xxx entry will not be shown in the relay description.
13. Click on Font Size drop-down list and select the desired font.
Font sizes 8 to 28 are available. DistriView will use the selected font size
for the text in the client area of the Curve Window.
14. Click on Line Size drop-down list and select the line width.
The line for drawing the curves can be 1 pixel, 2 pixels or 3 pixels wide.
15. Press OK
The dialog box will disappear and the graph will be redrawn with the
options you selected. Your options are stored in the Windows registry.
They will be used automatically from now on, unless you change them
with this command.

Curves Window
MISC MENU
CLOSE WINDOW COMMAND
The Close Window command in the Curves Window closes the Curves Window and return to the Main
Window.
TO CLOSE THE CURVES WINDOW:
1. Select the Misc | Close Window command to close the Curves Window.

Curves Window
ADD MENU
RELAY CURVES IN VICINITY COMMAND
The Relay Curves in Vicinity command in the Curves Window allows you to add relay, fuse and recloser
curves to the plot.
TO ADD RELAY CURVES IN VICINITY:
1. Select the Add | Relay Curves in Vicinity command.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if there are
already 15 curves on the plot.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select one or more curves to
be added to the plot.
The list box shows one or more protective devices in the vicinity of the
first curve that is already in the plot. The devices are listed in
ascending order of their distances from the first device.
Each device is identified by its name, the branch it protects, and its tier
number. The tier number is 0 if it is in the same breaker/relay group
as the first relay, 1 if it is 1 bus away, etc.
2. The list contains initially devices within vicinity of the first curve. You
can alternatively select Relay on remote bus from the dropdown list
at the upper-left corner to view devices at the opposite end of the same
branch. This is an unlikely application for distribution feeders.
Each relay in the list is identified by the relay name, the branch name, and
the branch name.
3. Select one or more relays by marking the check box in front of the
relay name.
Press OK when done.
The dialog box will disappear and the relay curves you selected will be
displayed on the plot.

Curves Window
ADD MENU
CONDUCTOR DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND
The Conductor Damage Curve command in the Curves Window allows you to add a conductor damage
curve to the overcurrent relay plot.
TO ADD A CONDUCTOR DAMAGE CURVE:
1. Select the Add | Conductor Damage Curve command.
already 6 damage curves on the plot.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the conductor damage curve
parameters.
ENTER THE VALUE OF K MANUALLY:

2a. In the drop-down combo box, select User defined.
3a. Enter the conductor and insulation parameter (k) in 'k'.
This parameter, k, is a function of the conductor and insulation type.
The following are some typical values of k for various conductors:
AAC:
ACAR:
For insulated cables with aluminum conductor, the value of k for the
damage curve is given by the formula:
k2 = 0.0125 log ((T2+228)/(T1+228))
where T1 is maximum operating temperature and T 2 is the maximum
short circuit temperature, both in C. (Source: Aluminum Electrical
Conductor Handbook, 3rd Ed., The Aluminum Association, 1989. pp. 9-
17 to 9-20.) The table below lists some typical values for insulated
aluminum cables.
Insulation
Polyvinyl chloride
Thermoplastic polyethylene
Rubber-insulated
XLPE
XLPE
Note: Before using any of the k values, you should make sure that the
temperature assumptions are consistent with your companys policies.

4a. Enter the conductor cross-sectional area (in circular mills) in 'A'.
5a. Enter any comments (up to 32 characters) in 'Comments'.
6a. Click on "OK" to draw the damage curve.
HAVE DISTRIVIEW ENTER THE VALUE OF K FOR YOU:
2b. In the drop-down combo box, select one of the following strings.
"Conductor AAC, "Conductor ACAR", "Conductor ACSR,
"Conductor Copper", "Cable Polyvinyl chloride 75C/150C", "Cable
Thermoplastic polyethylene 75C/150C", "Cable Rubber insulated
75C/200C", "Cable XLPE 75C/250C", "Cable XLPE 90C/250C".
The corresponding value of k will appear in the edit box. You will not
be able to edit this value.
3b. Enter the conductor cross-sectional area (in circular mills) in 'A'.
4b. Enter any comments (up to 32 characters) in 'Comments'.
5b. Press OK to draw the damage curve.

Curves Window
ADD MENU
TRANSFORMER DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND
The Add | Transformer Damage Curve command in the Curves Window lets you add a transformer
damage curve and an inrush curve to the overcurrent-relay plot. The transformer damage curve conforms
to the ANSI/IEEE C57.109 standard of 1993. You can enter the damage- and inrush-curve parameters
manually or have DistriView compute them for you automatically.
You can use automatic option if (1) the transformer has at least one relay group that contains a fuse, relay
or recloser, and (2) one or more of these protective devices are being displayed in the Curves Window.
Under the automatic option, the program automatically shifts the damage curve by the ratio:
Relay current in primary amps / Maximum winding current
This extra adjustment is the key to drawing the transformer damage curve correctly for all fault types and
winding configurations.
We recommend that you use the automatic option whenever possible.
Under the manual option, you must enter the the 3-phase MVA rating, the winding base current, the
leakage impedance, the nominal kV, and a shift factor. The shift factor allows you to for shifting the
damage curve correctly to account for the difference between the relay current and the maximum
winding current.
The inrush curve is plotted as a continuous curve. Inrush current withstand time are taken from the
Electrical Distribution System Protection handbook, published by Cooper Power Systems, 1990. The
inrush curve is not adjusted by the ratio of the relay current and the maximum winding current.
TO ADD DAMAGE CURVE AND INRUSH CURVE USING THE AUTOMATIC FEATURE:
1a. Select the Add | Transformer Damage Curve command.
When the dialog box appears, click on the radio button labeled
Automatic.

Note: The Add | Transformer Damage Curve command is gray and cannot be
activated if there are already six damage curves on the plot. The Automatic
radio button is gray and cannot be selected if none of the protective devices
being shown on the plot is in a relay group that resides on a transformer
terminal.
1b. Select a protective device in the drop-down list box immediately below.
A device is include in the list if (1) it is a relay, fuse or recloser whose
curve is being plotted in the Curves Window, and (2) the device is in a
relay group that resides on the primary, secondary or tertiary leg of a 2-
or 3-winding transformer. Once you link the damage curve to a
protective device, DistriView deduces, from the location of the relay
group, which side of the transformer winding (primary, secondary or
tertiary) the damage curve is intended.
Several transformer parameters are copied to the transformer-data group
box below.
Note: Protective devices on 3-winding transformers are restricted to
those with wye-wye-delta and wye-wye-wye winding configurations.
1c. Verify the 3-phase MVA rating.
Make sure the MVA Rating being shown in the 3-Ph. MVA rating
drop-down combo box is the correct 3-phase OA rating for the
transformer side you selected implicitly in step 1b.
The ratings in this drop-down combo box are the MVA ratings of the
transformer. (Ratings that are equal to zero are omitted.) If none of
these is the correct rating, you can enter the 3-phase MVA rating of the
winding into the edit box by hand. As you change the MVA rating, the
program will update the winding impedance automatically.
1d: Very Important: The position of the damage curve will vary by fault type.
Under the automatic option, DistriView will automatically shift the
damage curve to account for the difference between the relay current
and the maximum winding current when a fault solution is being
displayed with the Show | Relay Operations for One Fault command.
The classical example is a delta-wye distribution transformer, with the
delta winding on the high side. When a single-line-to-ground fault is
applied to the low side, the current sensed by a relay on the high side is
the same as the maximum current on the delta winding. When a 3-phase
fault is applied, the relay current on the high side is a factor of 1.732
higher than the maximum winding current. This causes the 3-phase-
fault damage curve to be plotted to the right of the single-line-to-ground
damage curve by a factor of 1.732.
Skip to step 3 below.
TO ADD DAMAGE CURVE AND INRUSH CURVE MANUALLY:
2a. Select the Add | Transformer Damage Curve command.
When the dialog box appears, click on the radio button labeled
Manual.
Note: The Add | Transformer Damage Curve command is gray and
cannot be activated if there are already six damage curves on the plot.

2b. Press the Get data from a transformer button if you want the program to
help you fill in the transformer data. Otherwise, skip to step 2c and
enter the values by hand.
A dialog box will appear showing a list of 2- and 3-winding transformers
in the vicinity of the first relay.
Select a transformer in the list by clicking on it.

Click on the dropdown list to select the side of the transformer
(primary, secondary or tertiary) that is being protected by the relay,
fuse or recloser.
Select a ratings in the 3-Phase MVA rating drip-down combo box
or type in a value by hand. Within the MVA rating dropdown list
are the MVA base of the transformer. If none of these is the correct
rating of the transformer winding, you can enter the 3-phase OA rating
of the winding into the edit box by hand.
Press OK to close the Transformers in Vicinity dialog box.
DistriView will fill in the five parameters within the Transform Data
group box.

Make sure the transformer data are consistent with the following
definitions.
3-Phase MVA Rating: The 3-phase MVA rating of the transformer
winding on the side (primary, secondary, tertiary) of
interest. We suggest you use the transformers OA
rating. For a single-phase transformer, the MVA rating
has been multiplied by a factor of 3.
Winding Base Current: The 1 pu base current for an individual
transformer winding, in amperes. You can compute the
base winding current with this formula: M x 1000 / (3 *
V) where M is the 3-phase MVA rating of the transformer
winding, and V is the voltage in kV across an individual
tranformer winding when a 1 pu positive-sequence
voltage is at the transformer terminal.
Impedance: The transformer leakage reactance in per unit based on the
transformer's MVA rating. The value of X is between
5% and 15% for most transformers.
Base kV: The 1 pu line-to-line nominal kV at the transformer
terminal. This parameter is used for the inrush
curve.
Shift factor: The parameters above will yield a damage curve for the
case where the maximum winding current is the same as
the relay current. If this is not the case, the you need to
enter the ratio (relay current / maximum winding current)
as the shift factor. In the classical example cited in step
1d, you must increase the winding base current has by a
factor of 1.732, for the damage curve on the delta side
during a 3- phase fault
Skip Step 2c and go to step 3.
2c. Input the damage- and inrush-curve parameters by hand.
Please see definition of the parameters in step 2b.
3. Enter comments with up to 63 characters in 'Comments'.
The comments will be displayed on the screen as part of the curve
identification.
4. Mark the Show inrush curve also check box if you want the
program to draw an inrush curve in addition to the damage curve.
5. Press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the transformer damage curve will be
drawn on the plot. See sample below.

Curves Window
ADD MENU
DAMAGE CURVE FROM LIBRARY COMMAND
The Damage Curve From Library command in the Curves Window allows you add a damage curve from
the relay library to the plot. Any damage curve can be shown here, including conductor burn down
curves and insulation damage curves. In order to show a damage curve with this command, the curve
must have been entered into a relay library specifically as a damage curve. See ASPEN Overcurrent
Relay Editor User's Manual for details.
TO ADD A DAMAGE CURVE FROM A RELAY LIBRARY:
1. Select the Add | Damage Curve from Library command.
already 6 damage curves on the plot.
The Curve Selector will appear.
2. Select a damage curve from the Curve Selector.

3. Enter comments with up to 32 characters in 'Comments'.
Your comments will be displayed on the screen as part of the curve
identification.
4. Press "Select this curve".
The dialog box will disappear and the damage curve will be drawn on
the plot.

Curves Window
ADD MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Add | Annotation command in the Curves Window lets you add an annotation anywhere in the plot.
You can use the annotations to label the curves or to mark certain features and modifications that warrant
special attention. You can also use the annotations as temporary labels for printing and delete them
immediately afterwards. The user interface for the annotations is the same as that in the Main Window.
The annotations can be saved with a curve collection into the PCC file. To execute this command you
must first select a location with the right mouse button.
TO ADD A NEW ANNOTATION:
1. Select the annotation location.
Click the right mouse button once on the desired location of the new
annotation.
A red crosshair will appear at that location.
2. Select the Add | Annotation command.
3. Enter annotation (up to 50 characters) in the edit box.

4. Click on "Mark the annotation" to put a diamond shaped marker
just left of the text.
5. Press OK.
The dialog box will close and the crosshair will be replaced by the new
annotation.

Curves Window
ADD MENU
TIME DIFFERENCE SLIDERS COMMAND
The Add | Time Difference Sliders command in the Curves Window lets you add two sliders to the plot.
Each slider is a vertical line that you can move horizontally with the mouse. When the slider intersects a
relay curve, it will show the y coordinate of the intersecting point in seconds or cycles. In addition, it will
show the time difference between adjacent intersecting points. The time difference sliders are stored in the
PCC file when you save the curve collections.
TO ADD TIME DIFFERENCE SLIDERS:
1. Select the Add | Time Difference Sliders command.
Two dotted, vertical lines will appear on the screen. These are the
sliders. The x coordinate of each slider, in amps or MVA, is shown at
the top and bottom of the plot where the slider intersects the horizontal
axis.
2. Move the sliders left and right as needed to show the operating time
and coordinating margins between the curves.
See picture below.

Curves Window
ADD MENU
PICTURE FROM CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Add | Picture from Clipboard command in the Curves Window lets you paste a picture that you have
previously copied to the Windows clipboard. The picture can come from the main window of DistriView,
or from another drawing program. You can paste up to 16 pictures. The pictures are saved when you save
a curve collection to a PCC file. To execute this command you must first select a location with the mouse
button.
TO ADD A NEW PICTURE TO THE CURVES WINDOW:
1. Select the picture location.
picture.
2. Select the Add | Picture from Clipboard command.
The picture will be displayed at the location you have selected.
Note: The command will be dimmed if the windows clipboard contains
no picture in compatible format. One way to solve this problem is to first
paste the picture into MS Word, and then copy it again to the Windows
clipboard.
3. Resize and move pictures.
To move the picture click left mouse button inside the picture
and drag to the new location.
To resize the picture, click left mouse button near an anchor point
on picture side or corner and drag the mouse until the new size has
been achieved.

Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
RELAY CURVE COMMAND
The Relay Curve command in the Curves Window lets you remove a relay, fuse or recloser curve from
the overcurrent relay plot.
TO REMOVE A RELAY OR FUSE CURVE:
1. Select the Remove | Relay Curve command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the plot
contains only a single relay curve.
2. Select the curve to be removed and press OK.

The dialog box will close and the relay, fuse or recloser curve will be
removed from the plot.

Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
DAMAGE CURVE COMMAND
The Damage Curve command in the Curves Window lets you remove a damage curve from the overcurrent
relay plot.
TO REMOVE A DAMAGE CURVE:
1. Select the Remove | Damage Curve command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the damage curve to be
removed.
2. Select the damage curve to be removed and press OK.

The dialog box will close. The damage curve will be removed from the
plot.

Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
ST
ALL BUT 1 RELAY CURVE COMMAND
st
The Remove | All But 1 Relay Curve command lets you remove all but the first relay curve from the
plot. All the damage curves will also be removed.
TO CLEAR ALL BUT THE FIRST RELAY CURVE:
1. Select the Remove | All But 1st Relay Curve command.
The screen will be redrawn showing only the first relay curve.
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
PICTURE COMMAND
The Remove | Picture command in the Curves Window lets you remove a picture. To execute the
command, you must first select a picture with the mouse.
TO REMOVE A PICTURE:
1. Select the picture you want to delete.
Click the left mouse button once on the annotation you want to
delete.
The picture frame will become dotted.
2. Select the Remove | Picture command.
The picture will be removed from the screen.
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Remove | Annotation command in the Curves Window lets you remove an annotation. To execute the
command, you must first select an annotation with the mouse.
TO REMOVE AN ANNOTATION:
1. Select the annotation you want to delete.
Click the right mouse button once on the annotation you want to
delete.
The annotation will be highlighted.
2. Select the Remove | Annotation command.
The annotation will be removed from the screen.

Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
FAULT COMMAND
The Remove | Fault command removes short-circuit and locked-rotor result from the Curve Window. To
execute the command, you must be showing relay operation for one fault or for all faults.
TO REMOVE FAULT:
1. Select the Remove | Fault command.
The fault description caption will be removed and the curve screen will
be redrawn.
Curves Window
REMOVE MENU
TIME DIFFERENCE DIVIDER COMMAND
The Remove | Time Difference Sliders command in the Curves Window lets you remove the time
difference sliders.
TO REMOVE THE TIME DIFFERENCE SLIDERS:
1. Select the Remove | Time Difference Sliders command.
All the time difference sliders will disappear from the screen.
Follow the instructions below if there are two time difference sliders on
the screen and you wish to remove just one of them.
TO REMOVE A SINGLE TIME SLIDER:
1. Select the time slider you want to remove.
Click the right mouse button once on any part of the slider.
When you release the mouse button, a floating menu will appear.
2. Select the Remove Time Difference Slider command in the floating menu.
The slider will disappear from the screen.

Curves Window
EDIT MENU
CURVE PROPERTIES COMMAND
The Curve Properties command lets you adjust the settings of one of the protective devices being displayed
in the Curves Window.
TO ADJUST THE PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING:
1. Select the Edit | Curve Properties command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a curve that you want
to adjust.
2. Select a protective device and press OK.

The adjust-relay dialog box will disappear. The info dialog box for
the selected device will appear. See the RELAY MENU commands
under the Main Window for details on these protective devices.
3. Make the necessary adjustments in the parameters dialog box and press
OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the selected device will be updated
to reflect the new parameters.

Curves Window
EDIT MENU
TRIAL RELAY ADJUSTMENT COMMAND
The Edit | Trial Relay Adjustment command in the Curves Window lets you examine, for a given relay
current, how the relay operating time varies with changes in time-dial and pickup settings.
Starting with version 10, this command lets you examine how the fuse operating time varies with
different fuse sizes. In addition you can use this command to see the variation in curve shape even when
there is no fault current available.
The program redraws the relay or fuse curve continuously as you vary the relay parameters and fuse size.
The changes are made final only when you press the Apply It button.
TO MAKE TRIAL RELAY AND FUSE ADJUSTMENTS WITH FAULT
CURRENT:
1. Select the Edit | Trial Relay Adjustment command.
Note: This item is dimmed and cannot be activated unless you have (1)
simulated a fault using the Fault | Specify command in the Main
Window and (2) displayed a specific fault with the Show | Relay
Operations for 1 Fault command in the Curves Window.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a relay curve. CCOC
devices are not included in this list.
Select a relay or a fuse and press OK.

IF YOU SELECTED A RELAY
A second dialog box will appear allowing you to adjust the time dial and
pickup setting.

1. Press Change in the Relay Amps group box to use a current other
than the actual fault current for trial adjustments.
Another dialog box will appear asking for the relay
current.
Enter a current in 'Amps' and press

OK.
The program will use the relay current you specified to compute the trial
setting, and display the relay current and operating time in the dialog
box titled 'Trial Adjustments'.
2. Manipulate the scroll bar to change the relay settings.
The relay current and operating time are shown. An operating time of
9999s means the current is too low to trip the relay.
Adjust the time dial setting with the vertical scroll bar.
Adjust the pickup setting with the horizontal scroll bar.
The relay curve and the operating time are updated continuously as you
make these adjustments.
3. Press Apply It to transfer the new time dial and pickup settings to
the relay.
IF YOU SELECTED A FUSE

A second dialog box will appear allowing you to adjust the fuse size and the
minimum melt/total clear setting.
1. Press Change in the Relay Amps group box to use a current other
than the actual fault current for trial adjustments.
Another dialog box will appear asking for the fuse
current.

Enter a current in 'Amps' and press
OK.

The program will use the fuse current you specified to compute the trial
setting, and display the fuse current and operating time in the Trial
Adjustment dialog box.
2. Manipulate the vertical scroll bar to toggle between the minimum
melt curve and the total clear curve.
The words Min melt and Total clear will appear at the bottom of the
vertical scroll bar.
The fuse operating time is updated automatically as you make this
adjustment.
3. Manipulate the horizontal scroll bar to change the fuse size.
The updated curve name will appear underneath the horizontal scroll,
and the curve will be redrawn.
The fuse operating time and the fuse curve are updated as you make this
adjustment.
4. Press Apply It to transfer the new curve type and the minimum
melt/total clear setting to the fuse object.
TO MAKE TRIAL RELAY AND FUSE ADJUSTMENTS WITHOUT FAULT CURRENT:
The following assumes that the curves in the Curves Window are being displayed
without any fault currents or fault description.
1. Select the Edit | Trial Relay Adjustment command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a relay or fuse curve.
Select a relay or fuse and press OK.
IF YOU SELECTED A RELAY
A second dialog box will appear allowing you to adjust the time dial and
pickup setting.
1. Manipulate the scroll bar to change the relay settings.

Adjust the time dial setting with the vertical scroll bar.
Adjust the pickup setting with the horizontal scroll bar.
The relay curve is updated continuously as you make these adjustments.

2. Press Apply It to transfer the new time dial and pickup settings to
the relay.
IF YOU SELECTED A FUSE

A second dialog box will appear allowing you to adjust the fuse size.
1. Manipulate the vertical scroll bar to toggle between the minimum

melt curve and the total clear curve.
The words Min melt or Total clear will appear at the bottom of the
vertical scroll bar.
2. Manipulate the horizontal scroll bar to change the fuse size.
The program redraws the curve as you make changes.
3. Press Apply It to transfer the new curve type and the minimum
melt/total clear setting to the fuse object.

Curves Window
EDIT MENU
SHIFTING FACTOR COMMAND
The Shifting Factor command in the Curves Window allows you to shift the relay curves or damage
curve in the plot by specifying their horizontal and vertical shifting factors. The shifting factors affect
the shape and position of the relay curves as well as their operating times shown on the Curves Window.
They have no effect on the relay operating time on the one-line diagram in the Main Window, however.
The shifting factors are stored in the PCC file when you save the curve collections.
You should modify the horizontal shift factors only if you plan on using the manual shifting method
in plotting relay curves for a fault. DistriView will override your horizontal shift factor if you choose
one of the automatic Align curves with methods.
Vertical shifting factor can be used to show the effective coordination-time between a recloser and a
fuse that takes into account the reduction in fuse melting time due to heating in prior reclosing
operations.
1. Select the Edit | Shifting Factor command.
A dialog box will appear displaying the shifting factors for all the curves
being displayed.
TO SHIFT THE
CURVES:
2. Select a relay curve and click on action "Change shifting factor".
A dialog box will appear asking you for the horizontal-shifting factor H,
and the vertical-shifting factors B and C.
The program uses the following formulas to shift the curve:

i' = H * i
t' = B * t + C
The curve is not shifted if the shifting factors are at their default values:
H=1, B=1, and C=0.
Note: For damage curves, you can change only horizontal shifting factor,
H. Edit boxes for B and C will be fixed at 1 and 0 respectively.

3. Enter the horizontal-shifting factor, H, in 'H'.
This shifting factor moves the curve horizontally. The curve is moved
to the right if H is greater than 1, and to the left if H is less than 1.
Horizontal shifting is used most commonly to account for the difference
in current on the two sides of a transformer. You have the option of
specifying the shifting factor manually (as you do here), or let the
program shift the curves automatically when you execute the Show |
Relay Operations for 1 Fault command.
4. Enter the vertical-shifting factor, B, in 'Time Multiplier B'.
The vertical-shifting factor B is a time multiplier. The curve moves up
when B is greater than 1.0, and moves down when B is less than 1.0.
5. Enter the vertical shifting factor, C, in 'Time Adder'.
The factor C is a time adder. This factor, along with the vertical-shifting
factor, B, lets you stretch and move the curves in the vertical direction.
6. Press OK.
The 'Change Shifting Factor' dialog box will disappear. The list box will
be changed showing the latest shifting factors. The relay curves and
operating points will be updated to reflect the new shifting factors.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all the relays and damage curves that
you want to shift manually.
TO APPLY FUSE COORDINATION MULTIPLIER TO RECLOSER CURVES:
8. Select a recloser fast curve and click on action "Apply load side fuse
coordination time multiplier" or select a recloser slow curve and click
on action "Apply source side fuse coordination time multiplier".
The program will compute and apply to the curve vertical shifting
factors B based on the reclosers number of operations and reclosing
interval according to the method described in the book Electrical
Distribution System Protection by Cooper Power Systems, 1990.
TO RESET ALL SHIFTING FACTORS:
9. Select action "Reset all" to reset all of the shifting factors to their
default values.
Each of the relay parameter boxes on the plot will display its shifting
factors if they are not at the default values.
Note: If you specify vertical shifting factors other than the default
values, the relay operating time on the Curves Window will not agree
with those on the one-line diagram in the Main Window.

Curves Window
EDIT MENU
DAMAGE CURVE PROPERTIES COMMAND
The Edit | Damage Curve Properties command in the Curves Window lets you to change the parameters
of a damage curve being displayed in the Curves Window.
TO CHANGE DAMAGE CURVE PARAMETERS:
1. Select the Edit | Damage Curve Parameters command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a damage curve.
2. Select a damage curve and press OK.

The 'Adjust Damage Curve' dialog box will disappear. Another dialog
box for the selected damage curve will appear. See the Add | Conductor
Damage Curve, Add | Transformer Damage Curve and Add | Damage
Curve from Library commands in the Curves Window for details on the
damage curves.
3. Modify the parameters in the dialog box and press OK.
The dialog box will disappear and the selected damage curve will be
redrawn reflecting the new parameters.

Curves Window
EDIT MENU
LEGEND COMMAND
The Edit | Legend command in the Curves Window allows you to edit the legend of the plot that appears
at the bottom of the Curves Window. The legend can be saved with a curve collection into the PCC file.
TO EDIT THE LEGEND OF A PLOT:
1. Select the Edit | Legend command.
A dialog box will appear with the existing legend.
2. Enter the desired text.

@ Voltage: kV rating of distribution line the relay group is protecting.
By: Name or initials of person who edited the curves.
For: Name of distribution line.
No.: Numerical identifier.
Comments: Notes or helpful comments concerning this plot.
Date: The date on which revisions were made.
Both 'For' and 'Comment' edit boxes can have up to 80 characters. The
rest can have up to 12 characters.
3. Press OK when you have finished editing the legend box.
The dialog box will disappear and the legend will appear at the bottom of
the plot, under the horizontal axis.

Curves Window
EDIT MENU
TRANSPARENT PICTURE COMMAND
The Edit | Transparent Picture command in the Curves Window toggles the background of a picture
between transparent and opaque. Transparent picture background let you see other elements of the plot
that are located underneath the picture. You will need to select a picture before issuing this command.
TO CHANGE THE OPACITY OF THE PICTURE BACKGROUND:
1. Select the picture by clicking left mouse button
2. Select the Edit | Transparent Picture command
If the picture background is currently opaque, it will become
transparent, or vice versa.

Curves Window
EDIT MENU
REARRANGE CAPTIONS COMMAND
The relay and damage curve descriptions can be moved anywhere on the plot. The Edit | Rearrange
Captions command in the Curves Window places them back in their default locations.
TO PUT THE CAPTIONS BACK AT THEIR DEFAULT POSITIONS:
1. Select the Edit | Rearrange Captions command
The captions of all the curves will be relocated to their default positions
in the Curves Window. The relay curve descriptions will be on the left
or the right, depending on your preference in the Misc | Options
command in the Curves Window. The damage curve descriptions will
be located opposite of the relay curve descriptions. The fault
description, if any, is placed below the last relay curve description.

Curves Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS COMMAND
This command shows graphically the relay operating points (current, time) for all the faults that have
been simulated. A tabular output is also written to the TTY Window.
TO SHOW THE RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS:
1. Select the Show | Relay Operations for All Faults command.
Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if no faults have been
simulated or if you have modified the network since the last fault simulation.
The screen will be redrawn to show on each relay curve the operating
points (current, time) for all the faults that have been simulated. These
points are indicated by small rectangles. If you have specified
horizontal and vertical shifting factors in the Edit | Shifting Factor
command, the curves and operating points will be shifted by those
factors.
This command will also automatically produce a table of relay currents

and operating times in the TTY Window.
2. Select the Show | TTY Window command to open the TTY Window.
Any fault solutions being displayed in the Main Window prior to this
command will be cleared.

Curves Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR 1 FAULT COMMAND
The Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault command in the Curves Window lets you show graphically
the operating points (current, time) on the curves for a fault that was simulated previously. The curves
and operating times on the plot can be shifted manually or automatically. The program will display the
same solution on the one-line diagram in the Main Window.
TO SHOW THE RELAY OPERATIONS FOR A FAULT:
1. Select the Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault command.
Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if no faults have been
simulated or if you have modified the network since the last fault simulation.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a fault. The list box will
contain all the faults that have been simulated.
2. Select a fault.
If the fault description takes more than one line, you can select it by
clicking on any one of those lines.
3. Enter a positive number in 'Current Multiplier' to multiply the
relay current by a constant.
The current multiplier is set to 1.0 by default. You can change this value to
scale all the relay currents. This option is most commonly used to check relay
coordination with relay currents that are larger or smaller than the actual fault
currents.
4. Specify how you want the curves shifted.
Click on the drop-down list and select one of the following:
- 'Manual': to shift each of the curves horizontally by the factor 'H'
you specified in the Edit | Shifting Factor command. No shifting will
take place if the horizontal shifting factors are left to the default value
of 1.0.
- 'Align curves with total fault current': to shift each of the device
curves horizontally by the factor: (total fault current) / (device
current). Horizontal shifting factors H are ignored.
- 'Align curves with custom current': to shift each of the device
curves horizontally by the factor: (custom current) / (device current),
where custom current is a current that you will supply. Horizontal
shifting factors H are ignored.
- 'Align curves with device #xx ': to shift each of the device curves
horizontally by the factor: (device #xx current) / (relay current),
where

xx is 1 for the first curve, 2 for the second curve, and so on. The
result you will see is that curve #xx stays fixed while all the other curves
are shifted so that their operating points align vertically with that of the
curve
#xx. Horizontal shifting factors H are ignored. Note: if device #xx does
not operate on the fault, the shifting factors will be based on the total
fault current.
Note: In all cases, the program will use the vertical shifting factors 'B'
and 'C' you specified.
5. Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear. If you selected the Align curves with
custom current option, a dialog box will appear to ask you for the
custom current.
Enter a positive current and press OK.

The Curves Window will be redrawn to show the operating point
(primary current, time) for each of the curves. The fault description is
shown. In addition, the relay current and operating time are added
below the relay identifiers. See example below.
A summary of the fault is written to the TTY Window. The relays

operating quantities are also written to the TTY Window.

6. Select the Show | TTY Window command to open the TTY Window.
The Main Window will be also redrawn to show the same fault on the
one-line diagram. The shifting factors and options have no effect on
the relay operating time on the one-line diagram.

Curves Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY AND RECLOSER TEST VALUES COMMAND
The Show | Relay and Recloser Test Values command in the Curves Window lets you compute a set of test
values for a relay or recloser that is being displayed. The test values are in the form of (X times pickup, Y
seconds delay). The test values are unaffected by any of the shifting factors.
TO OBTAIN THE TEST VALUES:
1. Select the Show | Relay and Recloser Test Values command.
A dialog box will appear listing the relays being displayed in the Curves
Window. CCOC devices are not included in this list.
A table of the time delays versus test currents will be shown on the
TTY window. If the time unit for the Curves Window is in cycles (50
or 60 Hz), the table will also list the time delays in cycles.
2. Select one of the relays and Press OK.
3. Select Menu | Close Window to close the TTY Window.


Curves Window
SHOW MENU
TTY WINDOW COMMAND
This command opens the TTY Window.
TO SHOW THE TTY WINDOW:
1. Select the Show | TTY Window command.
The TTY Window will appear on top of the Curves Window.
2. Use the scroll bars to view different parts of the window.
The horizontal and vertical scroll bars let you browse through the
contents of the window.

Curves Window
SHOW MENU
CURVE SEPARATION COMMAND
The Show Curve Separation command in the Curves Window computes the time separation between any
pair of curves on the Curves Window.
If you are interested in checking the coordinating margin between two devices, please consider the
alternative of using the Check | Protective Device Coordination command.
TO COMPUTE THE VERTICAL SEPARATION BETWEEN TWO CURVES:
1. Select the Show | Curve Separation command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select two curves.
2. Select the two curves you would like to compare by clicking on

their names.
The curve names will be highlighted.
3. Click on "OK".
A dialog box will appear listing the current flowing through each
device. These will be the maximum current at which the curve
separation is computed.
If the results of a fault are being displayed on the Curves Window prior
to Step 2 above, both 'Current' edit boxes will contain the actual current
going through the two devices. Go to step 3.
If the maximum currents are zero in the edit boxes, you must enter
the them manually.
4. Click on "OK" to compute the curve separation.
The TTY Window will appear displaying the separation times between
the two curves.

In the case of a fuse, the program will use either the minimum-melt or the
total-clear curve, depending on which is being used for time computation.
You can change from one curve to the other in the info dialog box of the
fuse.
In the case of a recloser, the program will use either the fast curve or the
slow curve, depending on which is being used for time computation.
Again, you can change from one curve to the other in the info dialog box
of the recloser.

3.4 DS RELAYS WINDOW COMMANDS
The DS Relays Window displays the characteristics of distance relays. You can open this window with the
View | Relay Curves command from the Main Window. Up to two distance-relay characteristics can be
displayed in this window at one time. The axes are in primary ohms. An optional circular grid can be
toggled on and off with the Misc | Grid On/Off command.
The relay parameters are shown within rectangular description boxes. You can move these boxes with
either mouse button. You can open the info dialog box by double-clicking the left mouse button within
the description box.
When the characteristics of a second relay are being displayed, you can view the offset and the direction
(forward or reverse) of this relay by double clicking the left mouse button on the small crosshair at its
origin. You can change the offset of the relay with respect to the origin of the graph by dragging the
crosshair with the mouse.
The cursor coordinates are shown in the lower left portion of the window when you drag with either mouse
button. Clicking the right mouse button on the DS Relays Window will bring up a floating menu of
commonly used commands.
You can work on the DS Relays Window and the Main Window at the same time. If you have a large
monitor, you can arrange the windows side by side and execute commands in both windows. When you
display a fault in one of the windows, the same fault is displayed on the other window. If your monitor is
not large enough to see both windows at the same time, you can minimize the DS Relays Window while
you view the one-line diagram. To restore the DS Relays Window, simply double-click on the window
icon at the bottom of the screen.
There is a zoom control in the DS Relays Windows tool bar, with which you can adjust the zoom setting
continuously. .
The old keyboard shortcuts of typing 1, 2, 3, etc. on the keyboard still work.
The commands in the DS Relays Window are described in this section.

DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
SELECT PRINTER COMMAND
The Misc | Select Printer command in the DS Relays Window allows you to change the current printer and
to set it up. The settings made in command will be used in all subsequent printouts from DistriView.
1. Select Misc | Select Printer command.
Please follow the procedure in your Windows Users Manual to

configure your printer.

DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
PRINT GRAPH COMMAND
This Misc | Print Graph command in the DS Relays Window lets you print the contents of the DS Relays
Window. For best results the printer should be set up for the landscape orientation.
TO PRINT THE CONTENTS OF DS RELAYS WINDOW:
1. Select the Misc | Print command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the printing parameters. The
current typeface and font size are shown within the Font group box.
2. Click on "Change" to change the font.

A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the font.
Use the controls in the standard font selection dialog box to select the
font, font style and size you want. Click on "OK".
3. Enter a scaling factor in "Scaling factor".
The scaling factor allows you to adjust the size of the image on the
printed page. When the scaling factor is less than 1.0, a larger portion
of the plot will be printed. The scaling factor does not affect the font
size.
4. Click on "Print black and white" to print the curves in black and white.
5. Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and printing will begin.

DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
EXPORT GRAPH COMMAND
The Misc | Export Graph command in the DS Relays Window saves the relay characteristics being
displayed to a Window Metafile or Enhanced Window Metafile. The metafiles are vector graphic files
that can be imported to other Windows programs such as MS Word.
TO SAVE RELAY CHARACTERISTICS TO A MATAFILE:
1. Select the Misc | Export Graph command.
of the file.
choice. A message box will appear informing you that the file has been
created.

DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
The Misc | Copy Graph to Clipboard command in the DS Relays Window lets you copy the entire graph
being displayed to the Window clipboard. The picture is stored in the clipboard in the enhanced Windows
metafile format. You can paste the picture into other Windows programs such as MS Word.
TO COPY THE SCREEN GRAPHICS TO THE WINDOWS CLIPBOARD:

copied.

DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
OPTIONS COMMAND
The Misc | Options command in the DS Relays Window lets you specify the options for the distance-relay
Window. These include the (1) unit of time, (2) color of the grid, (3) whether to display the relay test
quantity in the TTY Window and (4) font size.
TO SPECIFY THE OPTIONS FOR THE DS RELAYS WINDOW:
1. Select the Misc | Options command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the options for various
aspects of the distance plot.
2. Select the units of time. Click on:

"Seconds" to use seconds as the units of time.
"Cycles 60 Hz" to use cycles as the units of time, assuming 60 hertz.
"Cycles 50 Hz" to use cycles as the units of time, assuming 50 hertz.
3. Select the Grid Color. Click on "Light green", "Light blue" or
"Yellow".
Note: Use the Misc | Grid On/Off command in the DS Relays Window to
display the gird.
4. Click on "Shown in TTY" to display the Relay Test Quantity on the
TTY Window.
The pre- and post-fault voltage and secondary current of the relays will
be displayed in TTY Window when executing the Relay Operations for
1 Fault command. You can select and copy the relay test quantities in
the TTY Window to the clipboard, and then paste the data from the
clipboard to your text data file for relay testing.
5. Click on "Font size" and select the desired font.
Font sizes 8 to 14 are available. DistriView will use the selected font size
for the text in the client area of the DS Relays Window.
6. Click on "Show dynamic characteristics" to display the relays
dynamic characteristics on the screen. This option works only on mho
relays.
7. Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the graph will be redrawn with the
options you selected. Your options will be stored in the Window
registry and will be used automatically from now on.

DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
GRID ON/OFF COMMAND
This command lets you turn the circular grid on or off.
TO TURN THE CIRCULAR GRID ON OR OFF:
1. Select the Misc | Grid On/Off command.
The graph will be redrawn with the circular grid on or off.

DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
LOAD REGION COMMAND
The Load Region command displays a specified load region on the complex plane. This is designed as an
aid to avoid load encroachment on distance characteristics.
TO DISPLAY THE LOAD REGION:
1. Select the Misc | Load Region command.
A dialog box will appear asking for the load region parameters.
2. Enter the maximum load in MVA.

3. Enter the minimum power factor of the load.
4. Enter the load kV.
This value is set initially to the nominal kV of the relay bus.
5. Click on "Show" to display the load region.
The dialog box will disappear and the load region will appear on the
Distance Relays Window.
6. Remove the load region from the Distance Relays Window.

Select the Misc | Load Region command.
The previous dialog box will appear.
Click on "Hide.

DS Relays Window
MISC MENU
The Close Window command in the DS Relays Window closes the window and returns the focus to the
Main Window.
TO CLOSE THE DS RELAYS WINDOW:
1. Select the Misc | Close Window command.
The DS Relays Window will disappear.

DS Relays Window
ADD MENU
RELAY IN VINCINITY COMMAND
The Add | Relay in Vicinity command in the DS Relays Window lets you add a distance relay that is in the
vicinity of the first relay to the plot in either the forward or reverse direction.
TO ADD A SECOND DISTANCE RELAY TO THE PLOT:
1. Select the Add | Relay Characteristics command.
Note: This menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if two relay
curves are already being displayed.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the relay to be added.
2. The list contains initially devices within vicinity of the first curve. You
can alternatively select Relay on remote bus from the dropdown list
at the upper-left corner to view devices at the opposite end of the same
branch. This is an unlikely application for distribution feeders.
Each relay in the list is identified by the relay name, the branch name, and the
branch name.
3. Select the relay want to add to the plot by marking its check box.
4. Specify the position of the origin for the second relay.
Enter the coordinates in polar form; with the magnitude (in primary
ohms) and angle (in degrees) in the Ohm and Deg. edit boxes,
respectively.
The offset is initialized to the magnitude and characteristic angle of the
line impedance if the branch of the first relay group is a line.
5. Select the orientation.
Click on "Forward" to display the second relay characteristics with
a forward orientation. Click on Reverse to display in the opposite
orientation.
6. Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the characteristics of the selected
relay will be displayed on the same plot. The parameters of the added
relay will be shown in a box to the right of the plot.

DS Relays Window
ADD MENU
REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES COMMAND
The Add | Remote Branch Impedances command in the DS Relays Window shows graphically the
impedance of lines and cables that are attached to the remote bus. This graphical display is useful for
checking the coverage of zone 2 as a percentage of the remote line impedances.
TO ADD REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES:
1. Select the Add | Remote Impedances command.
The impedances of the remote lines will be displayed as dotted lines on
the plot. The length and orientation of the dotted lines reflect the
impedance of the lines in primary ohms. The program displays line
information in separate notation boxes. You rearrange position of these
notation boxes using the mouse
Note: Because of infeeds, you should not expect the impedance of faults
on these remote lines to always lie directly on the line characteristics.

DS Relays Window
ADD MENU
PICTURE FROM CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Add | Picture From Clipboard command in the DS Relays Window lets you paste a picture that you
have previously copied to windows clipboard anywhere in the plot. The picture can come from the Main
Window of DistriView, or from another drawing program such as AutoCad. You can paste up to 16
pictures. To execute this command you must first select a location with the mouse button.
TO ADD A PICTURE TO THE DS RELAYS WINDOW:
1. Select the picture location.
picture.
2. Select the Add | Picture from Clipboard command.
The picture will be displayed at the location you have selected.
Note: The command will be dimmed if the Windows clipboard contains
no picture in compatible format. One way to solve this problem is to
first paste the picture in MS Word, and then copy it again to the
Windows clipboard.
3. Resize and Move picture.
To move the picture click left mouse button in side the picture and
drag to the new location.
To resize the picture, click left mouse button near an anchor point
on picture side or corner and drag the mouse until the new size has
been achieved.

DS Relays Window
ADD MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Add | Annotation command in the DS Relays Window lets you add an annotation anywhere in the
plot. You can use the annotations to label the relay characteristics or to mark certain features and
modifications that warrant special attention. You can also use the annotations as temporary labels for
printing and delete them immediately afterwards. The user interface for the annotations is the same as that
in the Main Window. To execute this command you must first select the annotation location with the left
mouse button.
TO ADD A NEW ANNOTATION:
1. Select the annotation location.
annotation.
2. Select the Add | Annotation command.
3. Enter an annotation with up to 50 characters in the edit box.

4. Click on "Mark the annotation" to put a diamond shaped marker
just left of the text.
5. Click on "OK".
The dialog box will close and the crosshair will be replaced by the new
annotation.

DS Relays Window
REMOVE MENU
ST
ALL BUT 1 RELAY COMMAND
st
The Remove | All But 1 Relay command in the DS Relays Window removes the second distance relay
from the plot.
TO REMOVE THE SECOND DISTANCE RELAY FROM THE PLOT:
1. Select the Remove | All But lst Relay command.
The screen will be redrawn to show only the characteristics of the first
relay.

DS Relays Window
REMOVE MENU
REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES COMMAND
The Remove | Remote Branch Impedances command in the DS Relays Window removes the remote-branch
impedances that was added using the Add | Remote Branch Impedances command.
TO REMOVE REMOTE BRANCH IMPEDANCES:
1. Select the Remove | Remote Branch Impedances command.
The screen will be redrawn to show only the characteristics of the relays.

DS Relays Window
REMOVE MENU
PICTURE COMMAND
The Remove | Picture command in the DS Relays Window lets you remove a picture. To execute the
command, you must first select a picture with the mouse.
TO REMOVE A PICTURE:
1. Select the picture you want to delete.
Click the left mouse button once on the picture you want to delete.
The picture frame will become dotted.
2. Select the Remove | Picture command.
The picture will be removed from the screen.

DS Relays Window
REMOVE MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Remove | Annotation command in the DS Relays Window lets you remove an annotation. To
execute the command, you must first select an annotation with the mouse.
TO REMOVE AN ANNOTATION:
1. Select the annotation you want to delete.
Click the right mouse button once on the annotation you want to
delete.
The annotation will be highlighted.
2. Select the Remove | Annotation command.
The annotation will be removed from the screen.

DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
RELAY SETTING COMMAND
The Edit | Relay Settings command in the DS Relays Window allows you to change the settings of one of
the relays being displayed.
TO CHANGE THE RELAY SETTINGS:
1. Select the Edit | Relay Setting command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the name of the relay to
edit.
2. Select the relay you want to edit and click on "OK".

The dialog box will be replaced by the Info dialog box for the selected
distance relay.
3. Modify the parameters in the Info dialog box and then click on "OK".
The Info dialog box will disappear and the characteristic curves of
the relay will be redrawn to reflect the new parameters.

DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
ANNOTATION COMMAND
The Edit | Annotation command in the DS Relays Window allows you to edit a notation that you have
placed on the plot. You will need to select an annotation before issuing this command.
TO EDIT ANNOTATION:
1. Select the Annotation by clicking left mouse button on it.
2. Select the Edit | Annotation command
A dialog will appear to allow you to edit the content of the selected
annotation.

DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
TRANSPARENT PICTURE COMMAND
The Edit | Transparent Picture in the DS Relays Window command toggles the background of a picture
between transparent and opaque. Transparent picture background let you see other elements of the plot that
are located underneath the picture. You will need to select a picture before issuing this command.
TO CHANGE THE OPACITY OF THE PICTURE BACKGROUND:
1. Select the picture by clicking left mouse button
2. Select the Edit | Transparent Picture command
If the picture background is currently opaque, it will become
transparent, or vice versa.
DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
FIND ORIGIN COMMAND
The Edit | Find Origin command in the DS Relays Window causes the window to be refreshed with the
origin of the plot back to its default location near the lower left corner of your monitor. This command is
useful after you have scrolled the DS Relays Window or changed the zoom size.
TO REDRAW THE DS RELAYS WINDOW WITH THE ORIGIN AT THE LOWER LEFT CORNER:
1. Select the Edit | Find Origin command.
The axes and characteristics of the relays will be redrawn on the
plot using the default position of the origin.

DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
SECOND RELAY ORIGIN COMMAND
The Edit | Second Relay Origin command in the DS Relays Window lets you adjust the position of
second relay shown on the plot. When you add a second relay to the DS Relays Window with one the
commands under the Add menu, you can specify the origin and orientation of the second relay. This
Second Relay Origin Command lets you change the position of the second relay characteristics at any
time if the default position does not suit your needs.
TO SPECIFY THE POSITION AND ORIENTATION OF THE 2ND RELAY CHARACTERISTICS:
1. Select the Edit | Second Relay Origin command.
Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if the characteristics
of only one relay are being displayed.
2. Specify the position of the origin for the second relay.

Enter the coordinates in polar form, with the magnitude (in primary
ohms) and angle (in degrees) in the Ohm and Deg. edit boxes,
respectively.
3. Select the orientation.
Click on "Forward" to display the second relay characteristics with a
forward orientation. Click on Reverse to display in the opposite
orientation.
4. Click on "OK" to close the dialog box.
The second relay will be redrawn with the new origin and orientation
you specified.

DS Relays Window
EDIT MENU
REARRANGE CAPTIONS COMMAND
The relay descriptions can be moved anywhere on the plot. The Edit | Rearrange Captions command in
the DS Relays Window command causes all the descriptions to be put back to their default locations.
This command is useful after you have moved the relay descriptions, scrolled the DS Relays Window, or
changed the zoom size of the plot.
TO REARRANGE THE CAPTIONS:
1. Select the Edit | Rearrange Captions command.
The captions of all the relays will be relocated to their default positions
in the DS Relays Window. The relay descriptions will be at the upper
right corner. The fault description, if any, will be located below the last
relay description.

DS Relays Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS COMMAND
The Show Relay Operations for All Faults command in DS Relays Window lets you graphically display the
operations of the selected distance relays for all the faults that were simulated.
TO SHOW RELAY OPERATIONS FOR ALL FAULTS:
1. Select the Show | Relay Operations for All Faults command.
Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if no faults have
been simulated or if you have modified the network since the last fault
simulation.
The screen will be redrawn to show the fault impedances for all the
faults that have been simulated. This command will also automatically
write a table of relay zones, operating times and apparent impedances to
the TTY Window.

DS Relays Window
SHOW MENU
RELAY OPERATIONS FOR 1 FAULT COMMAND
The Relay Operations for 1 Fault command in DS Relays Window lets you show graphically the
operations of the selected distance relays for a fault that was previously simulated.
TO SHOW RELAY OPERATIONS FOR A FAULT:
1. Select the Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault command.
Note: The menu item is dimmed and cannot be activated if no faults
have been simulated or if you have modified the network since the last
fault simulation.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select a fault. The list box will
contain all the faults that have been simulated.
2. Select a fault and then click on "Display".

If the fault description takes more than one line, you can select it by
clicking on any one of those lines.
The dialog box will disappear and the window will be redrawn to
show the apparent impedances. The program will simultaneously
update the solution on the one-line diagram in the Main Window.
The fault description is shown below the relay parameter box. The
apparent impedances that are plotted vary depending on the relay type.
For most phase relays, the following 3 quantities are plotted:
B-C Unit: (Vb-Vc)/ (Ib-Ic)
C-A Unit: (Vc-Va)/ (Ic-Ia).
A-B Unit: (Va-Vb)/ (Ia-Ib)
For most ground relays, the following 3 quantities are
plotted: A Unit: Va / (Ia+3KIo)
B Unit: Vb / (Ib+3KIo)
C Unit: Vc / (Ic+3KIo).
Va, Vb, and Vc are the phase voltages. Ia, Ib, and Ic are the phase
currents. Io is the zero sequence current. K = (Zo-Z1)/(3Z1).

It is important to note that the graphical characteristics and the apparent
impedances shown are for information purposes only. The logic that
determines tripping is completely separate from the logic that draws the
relay characteristics and the apparent impedances.
The result of the tripping logic is shown in text below the apparent
impedances. It indicates which units are tripped and which are
restrained. The units that are tripped are highlighted by a red check
mark. The time delay is also shown. (Details on the tripping logic can
be found in Section 2 of the Distance Relay Editor Users Manual.)
The relay characteristics shown are the so-called static characteristics
that assume no cross polarization or voltage memory. The actual tripping
area can be larger than the static characteristics. It is possible, therefore,
for a relay to trip when the apparent impedance is outside of the static
characteristics. When in doubt, you should rely on the tripping results
shown in text, and not on the graphical display of the relay
characteristics or the apparent impedances.
A summary of the fault is written to the TTY Window. This includes all of
the operating quantities used to determine whether the relay trips or not. The
relay test quantities (consisting of the currents and voltages before and after
the fault) are also written to the TTY Window if the Relay Test Quantities
option is selected within the Misc. | Options command.

DS Relays Window
SHOW MENU
TTY WINDOW COMMAND
The Show | TTY command in DS Relays Window lets you open the TTY Window to view its contents.
TO SHOW THE TTY WINDOW:
1. Select the Show | TTY Window command.
The TTY Window will appear on top of the DS Relays Window.
2. Use the scroll bars to view different parts of the window.
The horizontal and vertical scroll bars let you browse through the
contents of the window.

3.5 TTY WINDOW COMMANDS
The TTY Window displays program output in the traditional text form. (Historical note: TTY stands for
"Teletype", the text-only terminal used with early computers.) DistriView writes to the TTY Window
whenever there is a need to output textual information.
The TTY Window opens automatically when you execute certain commands, such as the Check | Protective
Device Coordination command in the Main Window. Other times, DistriView may be writing to the TTY
Window without you noticing it. You can open the TTY Window manually, at any time, by executing the
View | TTY Window or Show | TTY Window command, which is available in all graphical windows.
The program stores the contents of the TTY Window in a buffer. The size of the buffer grows as more
text is put into it, until the size reaches 10,000 lines (or roughly 120 pages) of text. Thereafter, any
additional text is wrapped around to the beginning of the buffer. You can clear the TTY buffer at any time
with the Menu | Clear command.
You can select lines of text with the mouse, or all the text with the Edit | Select All command. Once
you have selected the text, you can execute various commands to save them to the Windows clipboard,
print them, or save them to a file.
The commands in the TTY Window are described in this section.

TTY Window
TTY MENU
CLEAR TTY COMMAND
The Clear TTY command removes all the text from the TTY Window.
TO CLEAR THE CONTENTS OF THE TTY WINDOW:
1. Select the TTY | Clear command.
The TTY Window will be redrawn to show a blank screen.
TTY Window
TTY MENU
SELECT FONT COMMAND
This Select Font command lets you choose the typeface, style, and size of the font for the TTY Window.
TO SELECT THE FONT USED IN THE TTY WINDOW:
1. Select the TTY | Select Font command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the font.
Use the controls in the standard font-selection dialog box to select

the typeface, style and size. Press OK.
Your selection will take effect immediately.

TTY Window
TTY MENU
PRINT SELECTED TEXT COMMAND
This Print Selected Text command prints the text that you selected. You must select one or more lines
of text before issuing this command.
TO PRINT SELECTED TEXT:
1. Select the text that you want to print.
Drag the mouse over the lines of text that you want printed.
The selected text will become highlighted.
2. Select the TTY | Print Selected Text command.
Note: This command is dimmed and cannot be activated if no text has
been selected.
The standard font dialog box will appear asking you to specify the font.
3. Use the controls in the standard font-selection dialog box to select the
font you want for printing.
For best effects, you should select a fixed-pitch font, such as Courier,
Courier New or LinePrinter.

TTY Window
TTY MENU
SAVE SELECTED TEXT COMMAND
This Save Selected Text command lets you save the text that you selected to a text file with .TXT
extension. You must select one or more lines of text before issuing this command
TO SAVE SELECTED TEXT TO A FILE:
1. Select the text that you want to save.
Drag the mouse over the lines of text that you wish to copy.
2. Select the TTY | Save Selected Text command.
been selected.
A dialog box will appear asking you to specify the name of the output
file.
3. Use the controls in the standard file dialog box to specify the output
file name.
4. Click on "OK".
The dialog box will disappear and the selected text will be written to the
file.

TTY Window
TTY MENU
This Close Window command closes the TTY Window.
TO CLOSE THE TTY WINDOW:
1. Select the TTY | Close window command.
The TTY Window will disappear. The contents of the TTY Window are
not affected by this command.
TTY Window
EDIT MENU
SELECT ALL COMMAND
This Select All command lets you select all the text in the TTY Window.
TO SELECT ALL OF THE TEXT IN THE TTY WINDOW:
1. Select the Edit | Select All command.
All the text in TTY Window will become highlighted.
TTY Window
EDIT MENU
COPY SELECTED TEXT TO CLIPBOARD COMMAND
The Copy Selected Text to Clipboard command copies the text you selected to the Windows clipboard.
This command is designed to help you transfer text to other Windows programs, such as NotePad or MS
Word. You must select one or more lines of text before issuing this command.
TO COPY SELECTED TEXT TO CLIPBOARD:
1. Select the text that you want to print.
Drag the mouse over the lines of text that you wish to copy.
2. Select the Edit | Copy Selected Text to Clipboard command.
been selected.
The selected text will be copied to the Windows clipboard.

TTY Window
EDIT MENU
FIND COMMAND
This Find command lets you search for a string in the TTY text buffer. You can search for multiple
occurrences of the string in forward or backward direction from current selection
TO FIND A TEXT STRING:
1. Select the Edit | Find command.
A Search TTY dialog box will be shown.
2. Type the search string into the edit box labeled Find text.
3. Click on Find Forward or Find Backward to look for the string in
the corresponding direction from currently selected line.
If a match is found, the line will be highlighted on TTY window. You
can continue to search either forward or backward till the last occurrence
of the search string in that direction.
4. Press Done when the search is completed.
The search window will be closed.

3.6 PROFILE WINDOW COMMAND
The Profile Window displays the current and voltage profile for a feeder. Each profile consists of one or
more curves. For the voltage profile, for example, there are three curves for the three phases (a, b and
c or ca, ab and bc). The leftmost end of the curves is always the substation bus. The rightmost end
is always the node that you selected on the one-line diagram prior to opening the Profile Window. The
points on the curves are drawn with different symbols so that you can tell which curve is for which
phase(s).
You can open this window in one of several ways:
In the Main Window, perform a voltage-drop, short-circuit or locked-rotor simulation. Click the
right mouse button on one of the nodes in the feeder and then select the View | VOLTAGE
PROFILE COMMAND from the pop-up window. The Profile Window will show you a plot of the
solution voltages between the selected node and the substation bus.
In the Main Window, perform a voltage-drop simulation. Click the right mouse button on one of
the nodes in the feeder and then select the View | POWER PROFILE COMMAND from the pop-up
window. The Profile Window will show you a plot of the real and reactive power entering each
node from upstream neighbors.
In the Main Window, perform a voltage-drop simulation. Click the right mouse button on one of the
nodes in the feeder and then select the View | POWER PROFILE COMMANDNEUTRAL
CURRENT PROFILE COMMAND from the pop-up window. The Profile Window will show you a
plot of the neutral current (3Io) entering each node from upstream neighbors.
In the Main Window, perform an All Bus Fault simulation. Click the right mouse button on one of the
nodes in the feeder and then select the View | All-Bus-Fault Current Profile command from the pop-
up window. In this case, the Profile Window will show you how the fault currents vary between the
selected node and the substation bus.
The Profile Windows offers a variety of display options in the Misc | PREFERENCES COMMAND
dialog box. These include the unit of length for the horizontal axis, choice of line-to-line and line-to-
neutral voltages, and the position of the minimum and maximum voltage lines.
With the mouse, you can move the graph legend that explains the meaning of the curves.
You can edit the text at the top of the graph by double-clicking within the rectangular
box.
The Profile Window always labels the nodes at the two end points of the curves. The names of the
intermediate nodes are shown on the plot only if space permits and if the bus identifiers are visible in the
one-line diagram. You can also direct the program omit all but the identifiers of the end buses in the Misc
| Preferences dialog box.
There is an one-the-fly bus identification feature to help you identify the nodes that are not labeled.
To see the name of any of the nodes, simply click the left mouse button on, or near, any of the node
symbols on the three curves and hold the mouse button down. The program will show you the node
identifier at the lower left corner of the Profile Window.
You will find the usual Print and Copy to Clipboard commands under the Misc menu.
The commands in the Profile Window are described in this section.

Profile Window
MISC MENU
PRINT COMMAND
The Print command in the Profile Window prints the graphical contents of the Profile Window.
TO PRINT THE PROFILE WINDOW:
1. Select the Misc | Print command.
The standard Print dialog box will appear. Select the printer and press
OK to start printing.
Profile Window
MISC MENU
SAVE GRAPH TO FILE COMMAND
The Misc | Save Graph To File command in the Profile Window saves the curves being displayed to a
Window Metafile or Enhanced Window Metafile. These metafiles stores the graphics in a vector form
(and not in a bitmap form). You can import them to other Windows programs such as AutoCAD.
TO SAVE THE VOLTAGE-PROFILE PLOT AS A METAFILE FILE:
1. Select the Misc | Save Graph To File command.
In the Save as type drop-down list box, specify whether the output
should be a window metafile or an enhanced window metafile.
of the file.
If you do not enter a file extension, he extension of the file will be
automatically set depending on your choice of file type. A message box
will appear informing you that the network data has been exported.

Profile Window
MISC MENU
The Copy Graph to Clipboard command in the Profile Window copies the graphical contents of the
Profile Window to the Windows clipboard. You can past this picture into other Windows programs such
as MS Word.
TO COPY THE GRAPHICS IN THE PROFILE WINDOW TO CLIPBOARD:

copied.
Profile Window
MISC MENU
EXPORT PROFILE DATA COMMAND
The Export Profile Data command in the Profile Window copies the information being plotted in the
Profile Window to a CSV-formatted text file.
TO EXPORT PROFILE DATA TO A CSV FILE:

1. Select the Misc | Export Profile Data command.
The standard save-file dialog box will appear asking you for the name
of the CSV file to be created.
Use the controls in the dialog box to specify the file name and press
Open.
An example output for a short-circuit voltage profile is shown below.

Profile Window
MISC MENU
PREFERENCES COMMAND
The Preference command in the Profile Window lets you specify the various options available for the
Profile Window. The program stores your preferences in the Windows Registry and will use them in
future sessions.
TO SPECIFY OPTIONS FOR THE PROFILE WINDOW:
1. Select the Misc | Preferences command.
A dialog box will appear to let you specify your preferences.
Within the Plot Voltages in group box, specify:

a) Whether the vertical axis should be in per-unit or in per-unit
multiplied by 120 volts. Note: You can change the multiplier
120 in the V_Drop | View Voltage Drop Solution on 1-Line
command.
b) Whether to plot line-to-neutral voltages or line-to-line
voltages. Within the Voltage Limits group box, enter the
maximum and
minimum voltage in per unit. These values are used to draw the
horizontal dotted lines in voltage profiles. You can direct the program to
omit these lines by enter a value 0. These lines are visible when plotting
current or power.
To the right of Length Unit, specify your preferred unit of length.
This option affects the appearance of the horizontal axis.
Specify the font size in the Font Size drop-down list box.
Mark the Hide all node names checkbox if you want the program to
show only the bus identifier at the two ends of the curves and not
show any of the intermediate node identifiers.
Within the Vertical Axis Scaling group box, mark the Automatic
check box if you want the program to scale the vertical axis based on
the values of the data points. Remove the mark from the Automatic
check box if you want to scale the vertical manually. Minimum is the
value at the bottom of the axis. Increment is the change in value
between successive tick marks on the vertical axis.
Press OK to close the dialog box.
Your preferences will take effect immediately.

SECTION 4 NETWORK DATA FORMAT
4.1 INTRODUCTION
The text data file is a text file that contains the parameters of the power network. The text data file is
intended primarily as a medium of exchange between DistriView and GIS, and between DistriView and
data conversion programs.
DistriView can import a text data file under the File | OPEN TEXT DATA FILE COMMAND. It can also
create a text data file under the File | EXPORT NETWORK COMMAND.
The text data file contains the following information:
Miscellaneous system parameters
File comments
Bus data
Spot load data
Induction machine data
Synchronous machine data
Shunt and harmonic filter data
Load group data
Grounding transformer data
Line and cable data
Section load allocation parameters
Section load data
Two-winding transformer data
Voltage regulator data
Three-winding transformer data
Switch data
3-Way switch data
Harmonic current source data
Protective device data
Configuration data
The format of these data is described in this section.
The text data file format is designed for computer readability and not for human readability. Users should
not try to decipher the text data file or edit it by hand.
The following guidelines pertain to the text data file format:
1. All alphanumeric data must be within double quotation marks unless noted otherwise.
2. Adjacent data items must be separated by one or more spaces.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 4 NETWORK DATA FORMAT

3. Adjacent sections are separated by one blank line.
4. If the data for an object takes more than one line, add the character \ to the end of each line --
except the last line -- to let the program know that more data for the same object will follow.
The sections do not have to be in the order shown, except (a) the [DISTRIVIEW DATA]
section must be first, (b) the [BUS DATA] section must precede sections that refer to bus
names. (c) If theres any [SECTION LOAD DATA] and [SECTION LOAD ALLOCATION
PARAMETERS DATA], they must be preceded by the [LINE / CABLE DATA] section.
The [PROTECTIVE DEVICE DATA] and the [CON FIGURATION DATA] sections have to
be the last sections.
The data that are new or modified in version 10 are underlined.
4.2 FILE HEADER

The file contains the name and version of the program that created the text file.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [DISTRIVIEW DATA]. This is followed by the data described
below. A blank line ends the section.
File Header Format
The file information begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Application Program Name
The program that created this file. It is usually ASPEN DistriView, or the name of a data conversion
program. Program name must be enclosed in double quotation marks and preceded by 'app= '.
2. Program Version Number
The information on this line consists of a numeric version number, following by one or more characters
within double quotes, and then the official version designation. Version number will be preceded by 'ver= '.
3. Creation Date
Date the text data file was created. The date is enclosed in double quotation marks and preceded by 'date= '.
An example of this section is shown below.
[DISTRIVIEW DATA]
app= "ASPEN DistriView"
ver= 2012 " " 10.1
date= "Tue DEC 9 11:12:42 2014"
4.3 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

This section contains the system MVA and a number of parameters that are used in DistriView.
Section Header
The first line in the section must say [SYSTEM PARAMETERS]. This is followed by the data described
System Parameters Format
The system parameters begin immediately after the section header. Only the Base MVA item is required.
The others can be omitted or entered in any order. The data format is described below.
1. Base MVA
System per-unit base MVA. The default value is 10. The MVA value is preceded by 'mva= '.

2. Maximum Iterations
Maximum number of iterations performed during voltage drop calculation. The iterative solution will stop
when the iteration count reaches this number, even if the voltage drop has not converged. The maximum
iterations is preceded by 'maxIter=. The default value is 30.
3. Convergence Tolerance
Voltage tolerance in per-unit. The solution is considered converged if the maximum change in bus voltage
between two successive iterations is less than the tolerance specified here. The voltage tolerance is
preceded by 'tolV='. The default is 0.001 per-unit.
4. Voltage Regulator Enforcement Flag
1 if the program is to enforce voltage regulators during voltage drop simulations; 0 if not. This flag is
preceded by 'Vreg='. The default value is 0.
5. Switchable Shunt Enforcement Flag
1 if the program is to adjust switchable shunts during voltage drop simulations; 0 if not. This flag is
preceded by 'shunt='. The default value is 0.
6. Bus Voltage Multiplier Flag
1 if the program is to multiply the per unit bus voltage by a value listed in 'Vmult' (listed in step #7 below);
0 if not. This flag is preceded by 'Vstyle='. The default value is 0.
7. Bus Voltage Multiplier
Value by which per unit bus voltage is multiplied. The Bus Voltage Multiplier is preceded by 'Vmult='.
The default value is 120.
8. Branch Overload Multiplier
When displaying a voltage-drop solution, the current and kVA ratings of distribution lines, switches, voltage
regulators and transformers are modified by this number. The program flags the branches as overloaded
when the phase current or transformer loading exceeds this modified rating.
9. Minimum Voltage Threshold
Minimum voltage threshold in per unit. The threshold voltage is preceded by 'minV='. The default value is
0.9.
10. Maximum Voltage Threshold
Maximum voltage threshold in per unit. The threshold voltage is preceded by 'maxV='. The default value is
1.1.
11. Unit of Length
Default unit of length. The unit of length is preceded by 'lengthUnit='. The available choices are "mi", "ft",
"kt" (1000 ft), "m" or "km".
12. Line Rating Names
Each line has four current ratings. You can give each of these ratings a name with up to 12 characters. The
rating names must be double quotes, separated by commas. They must be preceded by lineRatingName1=.
13. Synchronous Machine Impedance
Enter 0 for subtransient impedance, 1 for transient, and 2 for synchronous. The numeric option must be
preceded by synchronousZtype=. This option tells DistriView which of the positive-sequence impedances
of the synchronous machines is to be used for short-circuit and locked-rotor simulations.
14. Prefault Voltage Option for Short Circuit and Locked Rotor Studies
Enter 0 for linear network solution with loads and shunts, and 1 for a full voltage-drop study. The numeric
option must be preceded by prefault voltages=.
An example system-parameters section is shown
below.
[SYSTEM PARAMETERS]
mva= 100
maxIter= 200
tolV= 0.001
Vreg= 0
shunt= 0
Vstyle= 1
Vmult= 120
CurPerc= 0.8
minV= 0.993
maxV= 1.05
lengthUnit= mi
lineRatingName1= "Summer","Winter","Emergency","PANIC"
synchronousZtype= 0
prefaultVoltages= 0
4.4 FILE COMMENTS

This section contains the file comments. The comments can be any description or notes the user may
want to attach to the file.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say [FILE COMMENTS].
File Comments Section Format
This is followed by the comments, which can have up to 10 lines of up to 80 characters each. Each line
must be enclosed by double quotation marks. A blank line ends the section.
An example file comments section is shown below.
[FILE COMMENTS]
"This is an eleven bus system."
4.5 BUS DATA

This section contains the names and other parameters for substation buses and distribution nodes.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say [BUS DATA]. This is followed by data described below. A
blank line ends the section.
The bus data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each bus is the following.
Bus Data Format for a Substation Bus
1. Bus Name
A 12-character name for the bus, enclosed in double quotation marks. Any alpha-numeric characters can be
used, except for # , $ and '"' (double quotation marks).
2. Base kV
Nominal kV (line-to-line) of the bus.
3. Bus Number
Numerical identifier for the bus. Each bus may be assigned a number between 0 and 99999, inclusive. The
bus number is optional. However, if the bus number is not 0, it must be unique.
4. Area Name
An area name with up to 6 characters, enclosed in double quotation marks. The default value is 1.
5. X-Coordinate
State plane coordinate of the bus along the x-axis. This is a floating-point number.

6. Y-Coordinate
State plane coordinate of the bus along the y-axis. This is a floating-point number.
7. Bus Type
1 for a substation bus.
8. R
Positive-sequence Thevenin resistance in per unit.
9. X
Positive-sequence Thevenin reactance in per unit. The value R+jX cannot be zero.
10. R0
Zero-sequence Thevenin resistance in per unit.
11. X0
Zero-sequence Thevenin reactance in per unit. The value Ro+jXo cannot be zero.
12. R2
Negative-sequence Thevenin resistance in per unit.
13. X2
Negative-sequence Thevenin reactance in per unit. The value R2+jX2 cannot be zero.
14. Scheduled Voltage
Magnitude of voltage, in per unit, that the substation bus will maintain. The default value is 1.0.
15. Hide or Show Bus ID flag
1 to show, and 0 to hide.
16. Show Line-to-Neutral Nominal kV
1 to show kV line-to-neutral, and 0 to show kV line-to-line.
17. Level
1. Substation buses are always of level 1.
18. Memo
Any text with up to 512 characters for this substation bus.
Bus Data Format for a Distribution Node

1. Bus Name
A 12-character name for the bus, enclosed in double quotation marks. Any alpha-numeric characters can be
used, except for # , $ and '"' (double quotation marks).
2. Base kV
Nominal kV (line-to-line) of the bus.
3. Bus Number
Numerical identifier for the bus. Each bus may be assigned a number between 0 and 99999, inclusive. The
bus number is optional. However, if the bus number is not 0, it must be unique.
4. Area Name
An area name with up to 4 characters, enclosed in double quotation marks. The default value is 1.
5. X-Coordinate
State plane coordinate of the bus along the x-axis. This is a floating-point number.
6. Y-Coordinate
State plane coordinate of the bus along the y-axis. This is a floating-point number.
7. Bus Type
0 for a distribution node

8. Hide or Show Bus ID flag
1 to show on one-line, and 0 to hide.
9. Show Line-to-Neutral Nominal kV
1 to show line-to-neutral kV, and 0 to show line-to-line kV.
10. Level
0, 1, 2 or 3.
11. Memo
Any text with up to 512 characters for this node, enclosed in double quotation marks.
An example bus data section is shown below. The first two entries are for nodes. The last is for a
substation bus.
[BUS DATA]
"1201BusA" 12= 0 "AABBCC" 0 0 0 0 0 1 This is a new bus
"1201BusB" 12= 0 "" 0 0 0 0 0 1 This bus is old
"NE_Sub." 69= 2 "A23456" 0 0 1 0.002 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.002 0.01 1.02 0 0 1 Cool
4.6 SPOT LOAD DATA

This section contains spot-load parameters. A spot load is a large load connected to a distribution node or
substation bus.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say [SPOT LOAD DATA]. This is followed by data described below. A
Spot Load Data Format
The spot load data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each spot load is as
follows.
1. Bus Name
Name of the bus to which the spot load is attached, enclosed in double quotation marks.
2. Base kV
Nominal kV of the bus to which the spot load is attached.
3. Load Unit ID
A 2-character ID enclosed in double quotation marks. This ID is ignored by the program.
4. In-Service Flag
1 if the spot load is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
5. Active Phases Identifier
Integer equivalent of a three digit binary number representing which phases are active. A 1 indicates that the
phase is active; 0 if not. The right most bit is for phase 'a', middle bit for phase 'b' and left most bit for phase
'c'. For example, the integer equivalent of all three phases active (111) would be 7. The integer equivalent
for phases 'b' and 'c' active (110) would be 6. The default value is 7.
6. Connection Type Identifier
0 if the spot load is connected line-to-neutral; 1 is the spot load is connected line-to-line. The default value
is 0.
7. Phase 'A' (or phase AB) kVA
8. Phase 'A' (or phase AB) Power Factor
The default value is 0.9.

9. Phase 'A' (or phase AB) Percentage of Constant Power Loads
Percentage of constant-power load. The program will use this value for all three phases. The program
will subtract the percentage of constant-power and constant-current loads from 100% to determine the
percent of constant impedance loads.
10. Phase 'A' (or phase AB) Percentage of Constant Current Loads
Percentage of constant-current load. The program will use this value for all three phases. The program
will subtract the percentage of constant-power and constant-current loads from 100% to determine the
percent of constant impedance loads.
11. Phase 'B' (or phase BC) kVA
12. Phase 'B' (or phase BC) Power Factor
The default is 0.9.
13. Phase 'B' (or phase BC) Percentage of Constant Power Loads
This value is ignored by DistriView. See item 9 above.
14. Phase 'B' (or phase BC) Percentage of Constant Current Loads
15. Phase 'C' (or phase CA) kVA
16. Phase 'C' (or phase CA) Power Factor
The default value is 0.9.
17. Phase 'C' (or phase CA) Percentage of Constant Power Loads
18. Phase 'C' (or phase CA) Percentage of Constant Current Loads
19. Name
A 12-character name for the load, enclosed in double quotation marks.
20. Zone Number
An integer between 0 and 999, inclusive.
21. Memo
Any text with up to 512 characters, enclosed in double quotation marks.
An example spot load data section is shown below.
[SPOT LOAD DATA]

"1251AB" 12 "1"= 1 3 0 100 0.5 0 0 /
100 0.5 0 0 10 0 0 0 "" 0 Walmart
"1260B" 12 "1"= 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 /
100 0.7 0 0 0 0 0 0 "" 0 Raleys
4.7 INDUCTION MACHINE DATA

This section contains parameters for induction machines. An induction machine can be a generator or a load
depending on the real-power output. All per-unit impedances are based on the machine base, and not the system
base.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say [INDUCTION MACHINE DATA]. This is followed by data
described below. A blank line ends the section.

Induction Machine Data Format
The induction machine data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each
induction machine is as follows.
1. Bus Name
Name of the bus to which the machine is attached, enclosed in double quotation marks.
2. Base kV
Nominal kV of the motor/generator bus.
3. Motor/Generator Unit Identifier
4. In-Service Flag
1 if the motor/generator is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
5. Connected Phases Identifier
Enter 7 for a 3-phase machine. Otherwise, enter 1, 2 or 4 for a single-phase machine connected to phase A,
B and C. Enter 8, 16 or 32 for a machine connected between phases AB, BC and CA, respectively.
6. Machine Type Identifier
1 to indicate that this is an induction machine.
7. Rating
kVA rating. The impedances are based on this rating.
8. Real Power Output
Real power output of machine in kW. Positive for a generator; negative for a motor.
9. R
The positive-sequence resistance in per-unit on the machine base.
10. X
The positive-sequence reactance in per-unit on the machine base. The impedance R+jX cannot be zero.
11. R2
The negative-sequence resistance in per-unit on the machine base.
12. X2
The negative-sequence reactance in per-unit on the machine base. The negative-sequence impedance
R2+jX2 cannot be zero. The negative-sequence impedance is not used for single-phase machines, but a non-
zero value is required. We suggest you give R2+jX2 the same value as R+jX for single-phase machines.
13. R0
The zero-sequence resistance in per-unit on the machine base.
14. X0
The zero-sequence reactance in per-unit on the machine base. The impedance Ro+jXo cannot be zero. The
zero-sequence impedance is not used for single-phase machines, but a non-zero value is required. We
suggest you give Ro+jXo the same value as R+jX for single-phase machines.
15. Rg
Neutral grounding resistance in ohms (do not multiply by 3).
16. Xg
Neutral grounding reactance in ohms (do not multiply by 3).
17. Starting Method
An integer code between 0 and 4 that specifies the starting method: (0) direct, (1) wye-delta switch, (2)
series impedance, (3) shunt capacitance, and (4) transformer.

18. Starting Parameter #1
First parameter for the starting method. For Direct and Wye-Delta Switch starting no additional parameters
are required. For Series Impedance starting this parameter is the resistive component of the impedance in
ohms. For Shunt Capacitance starting this parameter is the capacitance in kVAR. For Transformer starting
this parameter is the resistive component of the transformer impedance in ohms.
Second parameter for the starting method. Direct and Wye-Delta Switch methods require no additional
parameters. For Series Impedance starting this parameter is the reactive component of the impedance in
ohms. Shunt Capacitance starting does not require a second parameter. For Transformer starting this
parameter is the reactive component of the transformer impedance in ohms.
Third parameter for the starting method. This parameter is only used for the Transformer starting method.
It is the transformer tap setting in per-unit.
21. Power Factor at 0.5 Per-Unit Voltage
26. Name
A 12-character name for the machine, enclosed in double quotation marks.
27. Memo
An example induction machine data section is shown below. The first is for a single-phase induction machine,
and the second is for a 3-phase induction machine.
[INDUCTION MACHINE DATA]

"1250" 12 "1"= 1 1 1 500 -100 0.1 0.1 0 0.1 0 0.1 /
0 0 0 0 0 0 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 "MC-01020" Big pump
"1260" 12 "1"= 1 7 1 1000 -100 0.00678 0.16986 0.00678 0.16986 0.00678 0.16986 /
0 0 0 0 0 0 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 "MC-120004" Little big pump
4.8 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE DATA

This section contains parameters for synchronous machines. A synchronous machine can be a generator or a
load depending on the real-power output. All per-unit impedances are based on the machine base, and not the
system base.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say [SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE DATA]. This is followed by data
Synchronous Machine Data Format
The machine data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each synchronous
machine is described below.
1. Bus Name
Name of the bus to which the machine is attached, enclosed in double quotation marks.

2. Base kV
Nominal kV of the motor/generator bus.
3. Motor/Generator Unit Identifier
4. In-Service Flag
1 if the machine is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
Enter 7. This value is ignored by the program because all synchronous machines are assumed to be 3-phase.
6. Machine Type Identifier
Enter 0 to indicate that this is a synchronous machine.
7. Rating
kVA rating. The machine impedances are based on this rating.
8. Real Power Output
Real power output of the machine in kW. Positive for a generator; negative for a motor.
9. R
The positive-sequence subtransient resistance in per-unit on the machine base.
10. X
The positive-sequence subtransient reactance in per-unit on the machine base. The impedance R+jX cannot
be zero.
11. R2
The negative-sequence resistance in per-unit on the machine base.
12. X2
The negative-sequence reactance in per-unit on the machine base. The impedance R2+jX2 cannot be zero.
13. R0
The zero-sequence resistance in per-unit on the machine base.
14. X0
The zero-sequence reactance in per-unit on the machine base. The impedance Ro+jXo cannot be zero.
15. Rg
Neutral rounding resistance in ohms (do not multiply by 3).
16. Xg
Neutral rounding reactance in ohms (do not multiply by 3).
17. Scheduled Voltage
Magnitude of the terminal voltage (in per unit) that the synchronous machine will maintain. This value is
used only if the control mode is PV. It is ignored if the control mode is PQ.
18. Minimum kVAR
Minimum kVAR output. The default is 9999.0. This value is used only if the control mode is PV. It is
ignored if the control mode is PQ.
19. Maximum kVAR
Maximum kVAR output. The default is 9999.0. This value is used only if the control mode is PV. It is
ignored if the control mode is PQ.
20. Control Mode
0 if the machine holds the real power and voltage magnitude constant (PV); 1 if the machine holds the real
and reactive power constant (PQ).
21. Name
A 12-character name for the machine, enclosed in double quotation marks.

22. Reactive Power Out
Reactive power output of the machine in kVAR. Positive for leading power factor (i.e., injecting VARs into
the network); negative for lagging power factor. This value is used only if the control mode is PQ. It
is ignored if the control mode is PV.
23. Rt
The positive-sequence transient resistance in per-unit on the machine base.
24. Xt
The positive-sequence transient reactance in per-unit on the machine base. The impedance Rt+jXt cannot be
zero.
23. Rs
The positive-sequence synchronous resistance in per-unit on the machine base.
24. Xs
The positive-sequence synchronous reactance in per-unit on the machine base. The impedance Rs+jXs
cannot be zero.
25. Memo
An example synchronous-machine data section is shown below.
[SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE DATA]

"1201BusA" 12 "1"= 1 0 0 100000 500 0.00256 0.14998 0.00256 0.14998 0.00256 0.14998 /
0 0 1.02 -9999 9999 0 "" 0 0.00256 0.14998 0.00256 0.14998 Generator at Cable Car Museum
4.9 SHUNT AND HARMONIC FILTER DATA

This section contains parameters of capacitors, reactors and harmonic filters that are attached to substation
buses and distribution nodes.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [SHUNT DATA]. This is followed by the data described below.
A blank line ends the section.
Shunt/Harmonic Filter Data Format
The shunt/harmonic filter data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus Name
Name of the bus to which the device is attached, enclosed by double quotation marks.
2. Base kV
Nominal kV of the bus.
3. Shunt Unit Identifier
4. In-Service Flag
1 if the device is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
If the shunt is connected phase-to-neutral: 1 means phase a is connected; 2 means phase b is connected,
and 4 means phase c is connected. When more than one phase is connected, the values are joined by a
binary AND operation. For example, a 7, or 111 binary means all three phases are connected.
If the shunt is connected phase-to-phase: 1 means phase ab is connected; 2 means phase bc is
connected, and 4 means phase ca is connected. The values are likewise joined by a binary AND
operation. Harmonic filters are assumed to be connected to all three phases.

6. Rated Voltage
The shunts rated voltage in kV. The default value is the nominal line to neutral bus voltage. This value
should be raised if the shunt is connected line-to-line.
7. Phase A (or phase AB) kVAR
For a shunt, this is the reactive-power injected into Phase A of the network at 1 per-unit voltage. (Phase
AB if the shunt is connected line-to-line.) A harmonic filter is made up of a capacitor in series with a
reactor. The kVAR you specify here is for the capacitor only. DistriView will automatically size the reactor
such that the series combination of the reactor and the capacitor will have the desired tuning frequency.
kVAR is positive for capacitors and harmonic filters, and negative for reactors.
8. Phase B (or phase BC) kVAR
Reactive-power injected into Phase B of the network at 1 per-unit voltage. (Phase BC if the shunt is
connected line-to-line.) kVAR is positive for capacitors and harmonic filters, and negative for reactors. See
note on harmonic filters in item 7.
9. Phase C (or phase CA) kVAR
Reactive-power injected into Phase C of the network at 1 per-unit voltage. (Phase CA if the shunt is
connected line-to-line.) kVAR is positive for capacitors and harmonic filters, and negative for reactors. See
note on harmonic filters in item 7.
10. Connection Type Identifier
0 if the shunt is connected line-to-grounded-neutral, 1 if it is connected line-to-ungrounded-neutral, 2 if it is
connected line-to-line, and 3 if it is a harmonic filter. The default value is 0.
11. Regulating Type
Both capacitors and reactors can be regulated. Enter 0 if the shunt is not regulated, 1 if it is controlled by the
bus voltage, 2 if controlled by the current magnitude, and 3 if controlled by the magnitude of the reactive
current. The shunt is on-line all the time when it is not regulated. Otherwise, the shunt is switched on and
off depending on the magnitude of the controlled quantity.
12. Capacitor ON Value (or Reactor OFF Value)
If the shunt is a capacitor, the program turns it on when the controlled quantity is below this value. If the
shunt is a reactor, the program turns it off when the controlled quantity is below this value. The threshold
for voltage controlled capacitors is in per-unit. Otherwise the value is in Amps. The default is 0.95.
13. Capacitor OFF Value (or Reactor ON Value)
If the shunt is a capacitor, the program turns it off when the controlled quantity is above this value. If the
shunt is a reactor, the program turns it on when the controlled quantity is above this value. The threshold for
voltage controlled capacitors is in per-unit. Otherwise the value is in Amps. The default is 1.05.
14. Name
A 12-character name for the shunt, enclosed in double quotation marks.
15. Capacitor default status flag
1- Normaly off-line; 0- Normaly online.
16. Harmonic filter tuning frequency
Tuning frequency of the filter expressed as a multiple of the fundamental frequency. When this value is set
to a positive number, DistriView will model this equipment as a harmonic filter that is tuned to the
given frequency.
17. Memo
Any text with up to 512 characters, enclosed in double quotation marks .
An example shunt data section is shown below.
[SHUNT DATA]
"1201BusB" 12 "1"= 1 7 6.9282 10 10 10 0 0 0.95 1.05 "NE CAP1002" 1 0 Big capacitor

4.10 LOAD GROUP DATA
This section contains parameters of the four load groups that are in every DistriView data file.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [LOAD GROUP DATA]. This is followed by the data for
four load groups, as described below. A blank line ends the section.
Load Data Format
The load group data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Load Group Name
A 12-character name for the load group, enclosed in double quotation marks. Any alpha-numeric characters
can be used, except for # , $ and '"' (double quotation marks).
2. Allocation Method Identifier
0 if kWH, 1 if kVA, and 2 if REA.
3. Percentage of Constant Power Loads
Percentage of constant-power loads.
4. Percentage of Constant Current Loads
Percentage of constant-current loads. The program will subtract the percentage of constant-power and
constant-current loads from 100% to determine the percent of constant-impedance loads.
5. Power Factor
Load groups default power factor, between 0.0 and 1.0.
An example load group data section is shown below.
[LOAD GROUP DATA]

"Residential" 2 0 0 0.8
"Commercial" 0 0 0 1
"Industrial" 0 0 0 1
"Irrigation" 1 0 0 1
4.11 GROUNDING TRANSFORMER DATA

This section contains parameters for grounding transformers that are attached to distribution nodes and
substation buses.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [GROUNDING TRANSFORMER DATA]. This is followed
by data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Grounding Transformer Data Format
The grounding transformer data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each
grounding transformer is described below.
1. Bus Name
Name of the bus to which the grounding bank is attached, enclosed by double quotation marks.
2. Base kV
Nominal kV of the bus.

3. Grounding Transformer Unit Identifier
4. In-Service Flag
1 if the grounding transformer is in-service; 0 if it is not.
5. kVA
Three-phase short-time KVA rating of the transformer.
6. R0
Zero-sequence short-circuit resistance in per-unit, based on the transformers kVA rating.
7. X0
Zero-sequence short-circuit reactance in per-unit, based on the transformers kVA rating. The impedance
Ro+jXo cannot be zero.
8. Name
A 12-character name for the grounding transformer, enclosed in double quotation marks.
9. Memo
An example grounding transformer data section is shown below.
[GROUNDING TRANSFORMER DATA]

"1201BusA" 12 "1"= 1 500 0.3456 1.1428 "X132" /
Zig-zag transf. for detecting 1LG faults
4.12 LINE AND CABLE DATA

The line/cable data section contains parameters for distribution lines and cables. In the following we will
use the word 'line' to refer to both overhead lines and underground cables.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [LINE / CABLE DATA]. This is followed by the data described
Line/Cable Data Format
The line data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Name
Bus name at one end of the line, enclosed in double quotation marks.
2. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
3. Bus2 Name
Bus name at the other end of the line, enclosed in double quotation marks.
4. Bus2 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus2.
5. Circuit Identifier
A one-character circuit identifier enclosed in double quotation marks. Lines with terminal buses in
common must have different circuit identifiers.
6. In-Service Flag
1 if the line is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.

Integer equivalent of a three-digit binary number indicating the connected phases. A 1 indicates that the
phase is connected; 0 if not. The rightmost digit is for phase 'a', the middle digit for phase 'b', and the
leftmost digit for phase 'c'. The identifier for a three-phase line is 7 (111). The identifier for a two-phase
line is 3 (011 for phases a and b), 5 (101 for phases a and c) or 6 (110 for phases b and c). The
identifier for a single-phase line is 1 (001 for phase a), 2 (010 for phase b) or 4 (100 for phase c).
8. Branch Name
A 12-character name for the line, enclosed in double quotation marks.
9. Unit of Length
Unit of length, enclosed in double quotation marks. The unit of length must be one of the following: 'kt'
(for 1000 feet), 'ft', 'mi', 'm' or 'km'.
10. Length
Physical length of the line. It must be greater than 0.
11. Line Type Flag
1 if an underground cable; 0 if an overhead line.
12. Neutral Flag
1 if the line has a neutral conductor; 0 if not.
13. Number of current ratings to follow.
This number must be 4.
14. Current Rating #1
Current rating in amperes. The program used this value to flag overloaded lines after a voltage-
drop simulation.
18. Load Zone
A zone number for the lines section load. The zone number must be between 0 and 999, inclusive.
2
19. I T Rating
2 2
The I T rating of the line, in Ampere Second.
20. Line Parameter Type Flag
0 for manually entered data; 1 for construction; 2 for line table.
Items 21a to 27a are applicable to line with manually entered parameter only:
21a. R
Positive-sequence resistance in per unit (based on system MVA and the lines nominal kV).
22a. X
Positive-sequence reactance in per unit. The impedance R+jX cannot be zero.
23a. B
Positive-sequence shunt susceptance in per unit.
24a. R0
Zero-sequence series resistance in per unit.
25a. X0
Zero-sequence series reactance in per unit. The impedance Ro+jXo cannot be zero.

26a. B0
Zero-sequence shunt susceptance in per unit.
27a. Load Connection Flag
0 if the section load is connected line to neutral; 1 if connected line-to-line.
Continues with item 28.
Items 21b to 22b are applicable to lines referencing a line-table entry:
21b. Line Table Entry Name
A 39-character name for line table entry used to calculate the electrical parameters for the line. The name
is enclosed in double quotation marks.
22b. Load Connection Flag
0 if the load is connected line to neutral; 1 if connected line-to-line.
Items 21c to 27c are applicable to a line referencing a
construction: 21c. Construction Name
A 39-character name for the construction used to calculate the electrical parameters for the line. The
name is enclosed in double quotation marks.
22c. Phase A Conductor
A 39-character conductor name for phase 'a', enclosed in double quotation marks.
23c. Phase B Conductor
A 39-character conductor name for phase 'b', enclosed in double quotation marks.
24c. Phase C Conductor
A 39-character conductor name for Phase 'c', enclosed in double quotation marks.
25c. Neutral Conductor
A 39-character name for the neutral conductor, enclosed in double quotation marks.
26c. Load Connection Flag
0 if the load is connected line to neutral; 1 if connected line-to-line.
27c. Pole height offset
Amount of offset to be added to the construction height defined in the conductor library. Use positive
value to make it higher, and a minus value to make it shorter.
Items below are common to all line types:
28. Fault frequency
Number of faults on the line each year.
29. Percent transient fault
Transient faults are defined as faults that can be cleared with a reclosing device without having to
permanently disconnect the line from the network.
30. Average repair time
Repair time, in hours/repair.
2
31. I T Rating Multiplier
A floating point multiplier for adjusting the I2T rating to account for reclosing.
32. Memo

An example distribution line data section with three lines is shown below. The electrical parameters of the
first line are manually entered. The second line references a line-table entry. The last line references a
'construction' type.
[DSTV LINE / CABLE DATA]

"1201BusA" 12 "1250" 12 " "= 1 7 "" "mi" 2 0 0 /
4 40 40 40 40 0 10000 0 0.13097 0.10736 0 0.21903 0.3556 0 0/
0 0 0 1.25 /
"Manually entered parameters line."
"BUS11" 12 "1251AB" 12 " "= 1 3 "" "ft" 2000 0 0 /
4 10 12 15 20 0 20000 2 "Example 2Ph" 0 /
0 0 0 1.66 /
"Line-table line"
"BUS10" 12 "1201BusB" 12 " "= 1 7 "1260A" "ft" 5280 0 1 /
4 10 10 0 0 0 10000 1 /
"REA/C9" "AAAC5005 26. 7/0 #6 25C" "AAAC5005 26. 7/0 #6 25C" /
"AAAC5005 26. 7/0 #6 25C" "AAAC5005 26. 7/0 #6 25C" 0 0 /
0.04717 0.1 2 1 /
"Construction line"
4.13 SECTION LOAD DATA

This section contains parameters for section loads. Section loads are distributed loads on distribution
lines and cables. This section must come after Line/Cable data section in the input file. In the following
we will use the word 'line' to refer to both overhead lines and underground cables.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [SECTION LOAD DATA]. This is followed by data described
Section Load Data Format
The section load data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each section load
is described below.
1. Bus1 Name
2. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
3. Bus2 Name
4. Bus2 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus2.
A one-character circuit identifier for the line, enclosed in double quotation marks.
6. Load Group #1 Phase A (or phase A-B) kVA
Kilovolt-ampere of section load on phase 'A' or phase A-B under load group #1.
7. Load Group #2 Phase A (or phase A-B) kVA
8. Load Group #3 Phase A (or phase A-B) KVA
9. Load Group #4 Phase A (or phase A-B) KVA

10. Load Group #1 Phase A (or phase A-B) PF
Power factor of section load on phase 'A' or phase A-B under load group #1.
14. Load Group #1 Phase B (or phase B-C) KVA
Kilovolt-ampere of section load on phase B or phase B-C under load group #1.
18. Load Group #1 Phase B (or phase B-C) PF
Power factor of section load on phase B or phase B-C under load group #1.
22. Load Group #1 Phase C (or phase A-C) KVA
Kilovolt-ampere of section load on phase C or phase A-C under load group #1.
26. Load Group #1 Phase C (or phase A-C) PF
Power factor of section load on phase C or phase A-C under load group #1.

An example of section load data section is shown below.
[SECTION LOAD DATA]

"1201BusA" 12 "1250" 12 " "=/
26 0 0 0 0.8 0 0 0 /
28 0 0 0 0.8 0 0 0 /
24 0 0 0 0.8 0 0 0
"1250" 12 "1251C" 12 " "=/
97.2467 0 0 0 0.8 0 0 0 /
97.2467 0 0 0 0.8 0 0 0 /
97.2467 0 0 0 0.8 0 0 0
4.14 LOAD ALLOCATION PARAMETERS

This section contains load allocation parameters. This section must come after Line/Cable data section
in the input file. In the following we will use the word 'line' to refer to both overhead line and
underground cable.
Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [SECTION LOAD ALLOCATION PARAMETERS DATA].
This is followed by data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Section Load Allocation Parameters Data Format
The section load data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Name
2. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
3. Bus2 Name
4. Bus2 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus2.
A one-character circuit identifier for the line, enclosed in double quotation marks.
6. Load Group #1 Phase A (or Phase A-B) kWH
The kilowatt-hour consumed for phase 'A' under load group #1. This parameter is used for both the kWH and
REA method of load allocation.
7. Load Group #1 Phase A (or Phase A-B) Consumers
Number of consumers connected to phase 'A' under load group #1. This parameter is used for the REA method
of load allocation.
8. Load Group #1 Phase A (or Phase A-B) kVA
The total rating (in kVA) of all the transformers that are connected to phase 'A' under load group #1. This
parameter is used for the kVA method of load allocation.
The kilowatt-hour consumed for phase 'A' under load group #2.
Number of consumers connected to phase 'A' under load group #2.
The total rating (in kVA) of all the transformers that are connected to phase 'A' under load group #2.

The kilowatt-hour consumed for phase 'A' under load group #3.
The kilowatt-hour consumed for phase 'A' under load group #4
18. Load Group #1 Phase B (or phase B-C) kWH
The kilowatt-hour consumed for phase 'B' under load group #1.
19. Load Group #1 Phase B (or phase B-C) Consumers
Number of consumers connected to phase 'B' under load group #1.
20. Load Group #1 Phase B (or phase B-C) kVA
The total rating (in kVA) of all the transformers that are connected to phase 'B' under load group #1.
30. Load Group #1 Phase C (or phase A-C) kWH
The kilowatt-hour consumed for phase 'C' under load group #1.
31. Load Group #1 Phase C (or phase A-C) Consumers
Number of consumers connected to phase 'C' under load group #1.
32. Load Group #1 Phase C (or phase A-C) kVA
The total rating (in kVA) of all the transformers that are connected to phase 'C' under load group #1.

The total rating (in kVA) for all the transformers that are connected to phase 'C' under load group #2.
A sample section-load allocation parameters section is shown below.
[SECTION LOAD ALLOCATION PARAMETERS DATA]

"1201BusA" 12 "1250" 12 " "= /
500 600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /
500 600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /
500 600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4.15 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER DATA

This section contains data for two-winding transformers.
All per-unit impedances and admittances for two-winding transformers are based on the transformer's kVA
rating (not the system base MVA) and the tap voltages (not the nominal voltages).
2-Winding Transformer Data Section Header
The first line this section must say: [2W TRANSFORMER DATA]. This is followed by data described
2- inding Transformer Data Format
The 2-winding transformer data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each
transformer is described below.
1. Bus1 Name
Bus name at one end of the transformer, enclosed in double quotation marks.
2. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
3. Bus2 Name
Bus name at the other end of the transformer, enclosed in double quotation marks.
4. Bus2 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus2.
A one-character circuit identifier enclosed in double quotation marks. Transformers with terminal buses in
common must have different circuit identifiers.

6. Transformer Type
0 if it is a balanced transformer. 1 if it is a general transformer.
Items 7a to 37a are for a balanced transformer:
7a. In-Service Flag
1 if the transformer is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
8a. Branch Name
A 12-character name for the transformer, enclosed in double quotation marks.
9a. First kVA/Phase Rating
kVA/phase rating of the transformer. The kVA ratings of the three windings are assumed to be the same. The
transformer impedances are based on a 3-phase kVA rating that is equal to 3.0 times this rating.
10a.Second kVA/Phase Rating
kVA/phase rating of the transformer. This value is used for overload checking only.
11a.Third kVA/Phase Rating
kVA/phase rating of the transformer. This value is used for overload checking only.
12a.Winding Configuration on Bus1 Side
A single-character configuration code enclosed by double quotation marks. Allowable configurations are
G for wye, D for delta, and Z for zigzag.
13a.Winding Configuration on Bus2 Side
G for wye, D for delta lagging, E for delta leading, and X for wye winding of a zigzag-wye
transformer where the wye leads the zigzag by 30 degrees.
14a.Auto-Transformer Flag
1 if this is an auto-transformer; 0 if it is not.
15a.Tap Voltage on Bus1 Side
The Bus1 tap voltage in kV line-to-line.
16a.Tap Voltage on Bus2 Side
The Bus2 tap voltage in kV line-to-line.
17a.R
Resistive component of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance in per-unit (based on the transformer
three phase kVA and tap voltages), measured at the Bus1 terminal with the Bus2 terminal short circuited.
18a.X
Reactive component of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance in per-unit (based on the transformer
19a.Ro
Resistive component of the zero-sequence short-circuit impedance in per-unit (based on the transformer
20a.Xo
Reactive component of the zero-sequence short-circuit impedance in per-unit (based on the transformer
21a.RG1
Neutral resistance in ohms (do not multiply by 3). RG1+jXG1 is connected to the neutral on Bus1 side.
22a.XG1
Neutral reactance in ohms (do not multiply by 3).
23a.RG2

24a.XG2
Neutral reactance in ohms (do not multiply by 3).
25a.RGN
Grounding resistance in ohms (do not multiply by 3). RG1+jXG1 and RG2+jXG2 are connected to a middle
node, which is grounded through the impedance RGN+jXGN.
26a.XGN
Grounding reactance in ohms (do not multiply by 3).
27a.LTC Flag
0 if this transformer does not have a load tap changer (LTC); 1 otherwise. If there is no LTC on the
transformer, omit the data of items 28a through 37a and skip to item 39.
28a.LTC Side
1 if the movable tap is on the BUS1 side. 2 if the movable tap is on the BUS2 side.
29a.Controlled Bus Name
Name of the bus whose voltage is being controlled by the LTC, enclosed by double quotes. This bus has to
be either Bus1 or Bus2 of the transformer.
30a.Controlled Bus Nominal kV
Nominal kV of the bus whose voltage is being controlled by the LTC.
31a.LTC Target Voltage
Target voltage in per-unit. Default is 1.0.
32a.LTC Step Size
Step size in per-unit. Enter 0 for a continuous tap. Default is 0.00625.
33a.LTC Minimum Tap
Lowest LTC tap position in per-unit center-tap kV. Default is 0.8.
34a.LTC Maximum Tap
Highest LTC tap position in per-unit center-tap kV. Default is 1.2.
35a.Zcomp, real part
Real part of compensation impedance in Ohm.
36a.Zcomp, reactive part
Reactive part of compensation impedance in Ohm.
37a.LTC Center Tap kV
Center tap position of the LTC in kV.
Continues at item 39.
Items 7b to 38b are for a general transformer. A general transformer can have one, two or three windings.
Winding numbering and phase connection are shown in the General transformer input data dialog box.
7b. In-Service Flag
8b. Branch Name
A 12-character name for the transformer, enclosed in double quotation marks.
9b. First kVA/Phase Rating for Winding 1
kVA/phase rating of the winding. The per-unit impedance of this winding is based on this rating. Set the kVA
to zero if this winding is not present.
10b.Second kVA/Phase Rating for Winding 1
kVA/phase rating of the winding. This value is used for overload checking only.
11b.Third kVA/Phase Rating for Winding 1
kVA/phase rating of the winding.. This value is used for overload checking only.

12b.First kVA/Phase Rating for Winding 2
15b.First kVA/Phase Rating for Winding 3
18b.Winding Configuration on Bus1 Side
G for wye, and D for delta.
19b.Winding Configuration on Bus2 Side
G for wye, D for delta lagging, and E for delta leading.
20b.Auto-Transformer Flag
Enter 0. Auto-transformer is not allowed for general transformers.
21b.Tap Voltage for Winding 1 on Bus1 Side
The tap voltage in kV measured across the winding on Bus1 side.
27b.R of Winding 1
Resistive component of the short-circuit impedance in per-unit (based on this windings kVA and tap
voltages).
28b.R of Winding 2
voltages).
29b.R of Winding 3
voltages).
30b.X of Winding 1
Reactive component of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance in per-unit (based on this windings
kVA and tap voltages).

31b.X of Winding 2
32b.X of Winding 3
33b.RG1
34b.XG1
See explanation for RG1. This is the imaginary part.
35b.RG2
36b.XG2
37b.RGN
38b.XGN
See explanation for RGN. This is the imaginary part.
Continues at item 39.
The following items are common to all transformer types
39. Failure rate
Transformer failure rate, in times/year.
Transformer average repair time, in hours/repair.
41. Input to LTC Controller
0 if the input is the average of the phases voltages, 1 if the input is phase a voltage, 2 if the input is phase
bvoltage,and3iftheinputisphasecvoltage. Enter 0 for a transformer that has no LTC.
42. Memo
An example 2-winding transformer data section is shown below.

[DSTV 2W TRANSFORMER DATA]
"1201BusA" 12 "NW Sub." 69 " "= 0 1 "" 2000 1166.67 2700 "G" "E" 0 12 69 /
0 0.11 0 0.11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /
0 0 0
/
"Balanced transformer."
"1201BusB" 12 "NE_Sub_L" 34.5 "1"= 1 1 "" 33333.3 0 0 33333.3 0 0 33333.3 0 0 "G" "E" 0 6.9282
6.9282 6.9282 34.5 34.5 34.5 /
0.03 0.03 0.03 0.1 0.1 0.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 /
0 0 0 /
"General transformer"

4.16 3-WINDING TRANSFORMER DATA
This section contains data for 3-winding transformers.
All per-unit impedances for a 3-winding transformer are based on the transformers 3-phase kVA rating (not the
system MVA rating) and the tap voltages (not the nominal voltages).
3- inding Transformer Data Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [3W TRANSFORMER DATA]. This is followed by data
3-Winding Transformer Data Format
The 3-winding transformer data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each 3-
winding transformer is as follows.
1. Bus1 Name
Bus name at one end of the transformer, enclosed in double quotation marks.
2. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
3. Bus2 Name
Bus name at the other end of the transformer, enclosed in double quotation marks.
4. Bus2 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus2.
5. Tertiary-Bus Name
Bus name at the tertiary terminal, enclosed in double quotation marks.
6. Tertiary-Bus Nominal kV
Nominal kV (line-to-line) of the tertiary-terminal bus.
A one-character circuit identifier enclosed in double quotation marks. Transformers with two or more
terminal buses in common must have different circuit identifiers.
8. In-Service Flag
9. Branch Name
A 12-character name for the transformer, enclosed in double quotation marks. The branch name is blank by
default.
10. First KVA rating
Per phase KVA rating of the transformer. The transformer impedances are based on a 3-phase kVA rating
that is equal to 3.0 times this value.
11. Second KVA rating
Per phase KVA rating of the transformer. This rating is for overload checking only.
12. Third KVA rating
Per phase KVA rating of the transformer. This rating is for overload checking only.
13. Tap Voltage on Bus1 Side
The Bus1 winding tap voltage in kV line-to-line.
14. Tap Voltage on Bus2 Side
The Bus2 winding tap voltage in kV line-to-line.

15. Tertiary Tap Voltage
The tertiary tap voltage in kV line-to-line.
16. Auto-Transformer Flag
1 if the transformer is an auto-transformer; 0 if it is not.
17. RPS
Real part of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the Bus2
terminal short circuited and the tertiary terminal open. This and other impedances are based on the
transformers 3-phase kVA rating and the tap kVs.
18. XPS
Imaginary part of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the
Bus2 terminal short circuited and the tertiary terminal open.
19. RPT
Real part of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the tertiary
terminal short circuited and the Bus2 terminal open.
20. XPT
Imaginary part of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance measured at the Bus1 terminal with the
tertiary terminal short circuited and the Bus2 terminal open.
21. RST
Real part of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance measured at the Bus2 terminal with the tertiary
terminal short circuited and the Bus1 terminal open.
22. XST
Imaginary part of the positive-sequence short-circuit impedance measured at the s Bus2 terminal with the
tertiary terminal short circuited and the Bus1 terminal open.
23. nZ0Method
0 if the zero-sequence parameters are short-circuit impedances; 1 if they are impedances of the classical T
model. The T-model option is available for the wye-wye-delta and the auto-wye-delta configurations only.
24. RPS0 or RPM0
This value is interpreted as either RPS0 or RPM0, depending on whether nZ0Method is 0 or 1. The
parameter RPS0 had the same meaning as RPS, except RPS0 is for the zero sequence. RPM0 is the real part
of the impedance between BUS1 and the middle, fictitious bus of the classical T model.
25. XPS0 or XPM0
See explanation for RPS0. This is the imaginary part.
26. RPT0 or RSM0
This value is interpreted as either RPT0 or RSM0, depending on whether nZ0Method is 0 or 1. The
parameter RPT0 had the same meaning as RPT, except RPT0 is for the zero sequence. RSM0 is the real part
of the impedance between BUS2 and the middle, fictitious bus of the classical T model.
27. XPT0 or XSM0
See explanation for RPT0. This is the imaginary part.
28. RST0 or RMG0
This value is interpreted as either RST0 or RMG0, depending on whether nZ0Method is 0 or 1. The
parameter RST0 had the same meaning as RST, except RST is for the zero sequence. RMG0 is the real part
of the impedance between the middle, fictitious bus of the classical T model and ground.
29. XST0 or XMG0
See explanation for RST0. This is the imaginary part.
30. Bus1 Winding Configuration
A single-character configuration code enclosed in double quotation marks. "G" if wye connected, or "D" if
delta lagging.

31. Bus2 Winding Configuration
A single-character configuration code enclosed in double quotation marks. "G" if wye connected, "D" if
delta lagging and "E" if delta leading.
32. Tertiary Winding Configuration
A single-character configuration code. "G" if wye connected, "D" if delta lagging and "E" if delta leading.
33. Bus2 Winding Configuration in Test
Must be the same as the Bus2 Winding Configuration.
34. Tertiary Winding Configuration in Test
A single-character configuration code. Must be G if Bus1 winding configuration is G; otherwise
it should be D.
35. RG1 in Ohms
36. XG1 in Ohms
37. RG2 in Ohms
38. XG2 in Ohms
39. RG3 in Ohms
Grounding resistance in ohms (do not multiply by 3). RG2+jXG2 is connected to the transformer neutral on
the Bus2 side.
40. XG3 in Ohms
41. RGN in Ohms
42. XGN in Ohms
43. LTC Flag
0 if this transformer does not have a load tap changer (LTC); 1 otherwise.
If there is no LTC on the transformer, omit the data of items 44 through 53 and skip to item 54.
44. LTC Side
1 if the movable tap is on the BUS1 side, 2 if on BUS2 side, or 3 if on BUS3 side.
45. Controlled Bus Name
Name of the bus whose voltage is being controlled by the LTC, enclosed by double quotes. This bus has to
be either Bus1, Bus2 or Bus3 of the transformer.
46. Controlled Bus Nominal kV
Nominal kV of the bus whose voltage is being controlled by the LTC.
47. LTC Target Voltage
Target voltage in per-unit. Default is 1.0.
48. LTC Step Size
Step size in per-unit. Enter 0 for a continuous tap. Default is 0.00625.
49. LTC Minimum Tap
Lowest LTC tap position in per-unit center-tap kV. Default is 0.8.
50. LTC Maximum Tap
Highest LTC tap position in per-unit center-tap kV. Default is 1.2.

51. Zcomp, real part
Real part of compensation impedance in Ohm.
52. Zcomp, reactive part
Reactive part of compensation impedance in Ohm.
53. LTC Center Tap kV
Center tap position of the LTC in kV.
54. Failure rate
Transformer failure rate, in times/year.
Transformer average repair time, in hours/repair.
56. Input to LTC Controller
0 if the input is the average of the phasesvoltages,1iftheinputisphaseavoltage,2iftheinputisphase
bvoltage,and3iftheinputisphasecvoltage. Enter 0 for a transformer that has no LTC.
57. Memo
An example 3-winding transformer data section is shown below.

[DSTV 3W TRANSFORMER DATA]
"NE_Sub." 69 "NE_Sub_L" 34.5 "BUS7" 6.9 " "= 1 "" 33333.3 0 0 69 34.5 6.9 0 /
0.02 0.1 0.03 0.3 0.05 0.5 0 0 0.055 0 0.3 0 0.5 /
G G D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 /
0 0 0 /
"Memo.
4.17 VOLTAGE REGULATOR DATA

The voltage regulator data section contains parameters for voltage regulators and boosters.
Voltage Regulator Data Section Header
The first line in this section must say: [VOLTAGE REGULATOR DATA]. This is followed by data
described below. A blank line ends the section. A regulator can have up to three banks. If the regulator is
connected line-to-ground, the banks 1, 2 and 3 are for phase a, b and c, respectively. If the regulator is
connected line-to-line, the banks 1, 2 and 3 are for phases ab, bc and ac respectively.
Voltage Regulator Data Format
The voltage regulator data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each voltage
regulator is as follows.
1. Bus1 Name
Bus name at one end of the voltage regulator, enclosed in double quotation marks.
2. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
3. Bus2 Name
Bus name at the other end of the voltage regulator, enclosed in double quotation marks.
4. Bus2 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus2. This must be the same as Bus 1 Base kV.
5. In-Service Flag
1 if the voltage regulator is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.

6. Regulator type
An integer designating the winding configuration in use: (0) 3-phase auto wye grounded, (1) 3-phase auto
wye ungrounded, (2) 3-phase auto delta, (3) auto wye grounded with phase a open, (4) auto wye grounded
with phase b open, (5) auto wye grounded with phase c open, (6) auto delta with ab open, (7) auto delta
with bc open, (8) auto delta with ac open, (9) single-phase auto for phase a, (10) single-phase auto for
phase b, (11) single-phase auto for phase c
7. Branch Name
A 15-character name for the voltage regulator, enclosed in double quotation marks.
8. Nameplate kVA rating of bank 1
Enter 0 if this bank is not in use. The impedance of this bank is based on this kVA rating.
9. Current rating of bank 1 in amps
The default is 0.0, which means dont care.
10. Nominal boost/buck position of bank 1 in %
Enter a positive percentage for boost and a negative percentage for buck. The power flow will begin the
solution at this position. For a booster, this value indicates the designed position.
11. Max % boost of bank 1 in %
The default value is 10. This value is ignored for a booster.
12. Max % buck of bank 1 in %
The default value is 10. This value is ignored for a booster.
13. Step size of bank 1 in %
Size of the incremental step in percent. Default is 0.625. Enter 0 if continuous. This value is ignored for a
booster.
14. Voltage target of bank 1 in per-unit
Voltage target of bank 1 in per-unit. The default value is 1.00. This value is ignored for a booster.
15. Z of bank 1 in per-unit
Impedance of bank 1 in per-unit, based on the units nameplate kVA rating.
16. Locked flag for bank 1
Enter 0 if this bank can regulate voltage. Enter 1 for a fixed booster. A value of 1 will cause all the banks to be
locked.

35. Rcomp1
Resistive component of compensating impedance in ohms. Rcomp1+jXcomp1 is used when the regulator is
controlling the voltage of BUS1.The compensating impedance Rcomp+jXcomp tricks the voltage
regulator into regulating the voltage at a bus further downstream in the direction of BUS1, instead of the
voltage at one of its BUS1 terminal. This value is ignored for a booster.
36. Xcomp1
Reactive component of compensating impedance in ohms. See Rcomp1.
37. Rcomp2
Same as Rcomp1, except that Rcomp2+jXcomp2 is used when the regulator is controlling the voltage of
BUS2.
38. Xcomp2
Reactive component of compensating impedance in ohms. See Rcomp2.
39. Controlled side
1 to control voltage at Bus1; 2 to control voltage at Bus2; 0 to let the program decide which side to control.
This value is ignored for a booster.
40. Failure rate
Regulator failure rate, in times/year.
Regulator average repair time, in hours/repair.
42. Memo
Any text with up to 512 characters, enclosed in double quo tation marks.
An example voltage-regulator data section is shown below.

[VOLTAGE REGULATOR DATA]
"1249B" 12 "BUS6" 12 = 1 0 "" 33333.3 55 0 10 10 0.625 1.01 0.003 0 /
33333.3 55 0 10 10 0.625 1.01 0.003 0 33333.3 55 0 10 10 0.625 1.01 0.003 0 0 0 0 0 0 /
0.02 5 /
Memo
4.18 SWITCH DATA

This section contains data for switches.
Switch Data Section Header
The first line in this section must say [SWITCH DATA]. This is followed by data described below. A
Switch Data Format
The switch data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each switch is as follows.
1. Bus1 Name
Bus name at one end of the switch, enclosed in double quotation marks.
2. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.

3. Bus2 Name
Bus name at the other end of the switch, enclosed in double quotation marks.
4. Bus2 Base kV
5. In-Service Flag
1 if the switch is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
6. Switch Name
A 12-character name for the switch, enclosed in double quotation marks.
7. Switch Status
0 if open; 1 if phase a is closed; 2 if phase b is closed; 3 if phases a and b are closed, 4 if phase c is
closed; 5 if phases a and c are closed, 6 if phases b and c are closed, 7 if all three phases are closed.
8. Current Rating
Current rating of the switch in amperes. This value is used for overload checking.
9. Memo
An example switch data section is shown below.

[SWITCH DATA]
"1250" 12 "BUS11" 12= 1 "S3423" 7 100 /
"MEMO."
4.19 3-WAY SWITCH DATA

This section contains data for 3-way switches.
3-Way Switch Data Section Header
The first line in this section must say [3-WAY SWITCH DATA]. This is followed by data described
3- ay Switch Data Format
The 3-way switch data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each 3-way switch is as
follows.
1. Bus1 Name
Bus name at one end of the switch, enclosed in double quotation marks.
2. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
3. Bus2 Name
4. Bus2 Base kV
5. Bus3 Name
6. Bus3 Base kV
7. In-Service Flag
1 if the switch is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.

8. Switch Name
A 12-character name for the switch, enclosed in double quotation marks.
9. Switch Status at the Bus1 Terminal
0 if open; 7 if closed.
12. Current Rating
Current rating of the switch in amperes. This value is used for overload checking.
13. Memo
An example 3-way switch data section is shown below.

[3-WAY SWITCH DATA]
"1201BusA" 12 "1201BusB" 12 "BUS9" 12= 1 "3W-Switch1" 7 0 7 1000 /
"MEMO."
4.20 HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCE DATA

This section contains data for harmonic current sources on spot loads, section loads, and induction
machines.
Harmonic Current Source Data Section Header
The first line in this section must say [HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCE DATA]. This is followed by
data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Harmonic Current Source Data Format
The harmonic current source data begins immediately after the section header. Each harmonic source must be
associated with an induction machine, a spot load or a section load. The data format for each harmonic source is
as follows.
1. Associated equipment type
Single character indicating driver equipment type: I for induction machine; L for sport load; S for section
load.
Entries 2a through 3a are for harmonic sources on spot loads and induction machines only
2a. Bus1 Name
Bus name at the source location.
3a. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
Continue at item 7
Entries 2b through 6b are for harmonic sources on section loads only
2b. Bus1 Name
Bus name at the source location.
3b. Bus1 Base kV
Nominal kV of Bus1.
4b. Bus2 Name
Bus name at the other end of the line on which the section load is located.

5b. Bus2 Base kV
6b. Circuit ID
Circuit ID of the line on which the section load is located. The ID must be between double quotes.
Items below are for all harmonic current sources
7. Source Name
Source name, enclosed in double quotation marks.
8 In-Service Flag
1 if the harmonic source is in-service; 0 if it is not. The default value is 1.
9. Number of harmonic
Number of harmonics to follow. Each harmonic is defined by a harmonic number, a magnitude and an
angle, as shown below.
Entries 10a, 10b and 10c are repeated for each harmonic. The total number of harmonics was specified
in item 9.
10a. Harmonic number
Multiple of the fundamental frequency.
10b. Harmonic magnitude
The harmonic at the frequency specified in 7a is expressed as a multiple of the fundamental current of
the associated device. The harmonic magnitude and angle together make up this multiplier.
10c. Harmonic angle
Harmonic angle in degree. See item 7b for explanation.
11. Memo
An example harmonic current source data section is shown below.
[DSTV HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCE DATA]

S "1201BusA" 12 "1250" 12 " " =/
"HARM1" 1 2 /
2 0.12 15 /
3 0.05 12 /
"Harmonics on section load"
L "1251AB" 12 =/
"HARM2" 1 2 /
4 0.24 1 /
5 0.01 2 /
"Harmonic source on spot load"
4.21 PROTECTIVE DEVICE DATA

This section contains the full path name of a DistriView protective device text data file (.RYT) that you
want to import into the network. For full details on the RYT file format, please refer to Section 6.1
INTRODUCTION on Protective Device Format.
This section is added in DistriView v10 because the configuration data (see Section 4.22) may refer to the
state of protective devices.
Note: The Protective Device data section has to be placed in the text data file after all data sections for
network equipment, and before the data section for configurations.

Protective Device Data Section Header
The first line in this section must say [PROTECTIVE DEVICE DATA]. This is followed by data
1. Protective Device Data File Pathname
Path name of a protective device data file, enclosed in double quotation marks. If only file name is specified
without directory and/or drive letter, the program wi ll look for the file in the same folder where DistriView
text network data file is located.
An example protective device data section is shown below.
[PROTECTIVE DEVICE DATA]

"c:\Data\MyRelays.RYT"
4.22 CONFIGURATION DATA

This section contains data for configuration.
The configuration data section has to be preceded by data sections for all the network elements. If the
configurations refer to protective devices, the configuration data section must also be preceded by a
Protective Device Data Section.
Configuration Data Section Header
The first line in this section must say [CONFIGURATION DATA]. This is followed by data described
Configuration Data Format
The configuration data begins immediately after the section header. The data format for each configuration is as
follows.
1. Na me
Configuration name enclosed in double quotation marks. Name field can have up to 48 characters.
2. Component count
The number of network equipment and protective devices in the configur ation.
Entries 3a and 3b are repeated for each configuration component. The total number of components was
specified in item 2.
3a. ComponentstatusinconfigurationsAppliedstate
For a 2-way switch, enter an integer to indicate the open/close positionsofphasesc,banda. Enter 0 if
the switch is open; 1 if phase a is closed; 2 if phase b is closed; 3 if phases a and b are
closed, 4 if
phasecisclosed;5ifphasesaandcareclosed,6ifphasesbandcareclosed,7ifall three phases
are closed.
For 3-way switch, enter an integer with three rightmost bits set to 1 or 0 to indicate open/close status of
three switch terminals. For example, the number 6, or 110 in binary, means the Bus3 and Bus2 terminals
are closed, and the Bus1 terminal is open.
For all other components, enter 1 for in-service and 2 for out-of-service.
3b. Component reference data
Each component is referenced by following data fields, which must be separated by at least one blank space:
< Begin-of-component-data token indicator
Type code Object code of the component. It must be one of the
following: GENERATOR Synchronous generator/motor
LOAD Spot load
LINE overhead or underground
cable XFORMER 2-winding transformer

CAPACITOR Capacitor bank
XFORMER3 3-winding
transformer SWITCH 2-way switch
GNDXF Grounding bank
INDMOTOR Induction
generator/motor REGULATOR Voltage
regulator/booster SWITCH3 3-way switch
RLYOCG Ground overcurrent
relay RLYOCP Phase overcurrent relay
RLYDSG Ground distance relay
RLYDSP Phase distance relay
RCLSR Recloser
RLYFSE Fuse
RLYCCOC Compounded curve overcurrent (CCOC)
device RLYSSR Sectionalizer.
Device name [Required only for protective device (codes: RLYOCG, RLYOCP, RLYDSG, RLYDSP,
RCLSR, RLYFSE, RLYCCOC and RLYSSR)] Device name enclosed in double quotation
marks. Name of recloser must end with a '_P' for phase unit and _G for ground unit.
Location Component location string which consists of bus name, kV and branch circuit ID when
applicable. Name and circuit IDs must be enclosed in double quotation marks. Enter
data fields that match component type as follow:
BusName1kV1 for GENERATOR, LOAD, CAPACITOR, GNDXF, INDMOTOR.
BusName1kV1BusName2kV2 circuitIDfor LINE, XFORMER, SWITCH,
and REGULATOR.
BusName1kV1BusName2kV2BusName3kV3circuitIDfor XFORMER3,
SWITCH3.
L BusName1kV1BusName2kV2 circuitIDfor protective device on
terminal Bus1 side of a line or cable.
T BusName1kV1BusName2kV2 circuitIDfor protective device on
terminal Bus1 side of a 2-winding transformer.
X BusName1kV1BusName2kV2 BusName3kV3circuitIDfor protective
device on a terminal Bus1 side of a 3-winding transformer
> End-of-component-data token indicator
4. Memo
Any text with up to 512 characters enclosed in d ouble quotation marks.
An example configuration data section is shown below.

[CONFIGURATION DATA]
"Max load" 4 /
1 < GNDXF "1201BusA" 12 > /
1 < LINE "BUS11" 12 "1251AB" 12 " " > /
1 < XFORMER "1201BusB" 12 "NE_Sub_L" 34.5 "1" > /
1 < RLYOCG "New" X "NE_Sub." 69 "NE_Sub_L" 34.5 "BUS7" 6.9 " " > /
"Max loading condition"
"Emergency" 2 /
1 < XFORMER "1201BusA" 12 "NW Sub." 69 " " > /
1 < INDMOTOR "1250" 12 > /
"Contingency"

SECTION 5 CHANGE FILE FORMAT
5.1 INTRODUCTION TO CHANGE FILE

You can use a change file to apply changes to a DistriView binary file in a batch mode. The procedure is
as follows:
1. Create a Change File in the form described in this document. This file should have a .DVT
extension. You are responsible for this step. Note: If you are a OneLiner user, you can
create a DistriView change file with the File | DistriView Interface command.
2. Start DistriView and open the file that you wish to modify.
3. Execute the File | Read Change File command in the Main Window and select the change
file of step 1.
The Change File is a text file. You can use it to modify these objects:
Substation buses and distribution nodes
Spot loads
Section loads
Section load allocation parameters
You can also use the Change File to execute the Load Allocation command in a batch mode. A possible
application of this feature is the automatic updating of the section loads based on billing data. Specifically, you
can create a change file to:
1. Modify the load-allocation parameters based on billing information (See Section 5.6), and then
2. Reallocate the section loads using the command described in Section 5.7.
The Change-File format is described in this section. Please be aware of the following general guidelines:
1. All alphanumeric data must be within double quotation marks.
4. If the data for an object takes more than one line, add the character \ to the end of each
line (except the last one) to let the program know that more data for the same object will
follow.
5. In general the sections do not have to be in the order shown. The program will carry
out network modification in the order the data being read in.
6. Each object must have all the values listed before the equal sign, which are needed
for identification purposes.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 5 CHANGE FILE FORMAT

5.2 FILE HEADER
This section identifies the file as Change File. It also contains the version number of DistriView that created
it and the creation date.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [DISTRIVIEW CHANGE FILE]. This is followed by the
File Header Format
Program that created this file. Program name must be enclosed in double quotation marks and preceded by
'app= '.
Major Version Number, Minor Version Number and a version character enclosed in double quotation marks.
Version number will be preceded by 'ver= '.
3. Creation Date
Date the network text file was created. The date is enclosed in double quotation marks and preceded by
'date= '.
[DISTRIVIEW CHANGE FILE]

app= "ASPEN Change file generator"
ver= 2010 " " 9.0
date= "Thu Jun 24 11:30:00 2011"
5.3 BUS DATA

The commands in this section lets you add new buses or modify existing buses.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say one of the following:
[ADD BUS DATA] if the bus is to be added
[MODIFY BUS DATA] if the bus is to be modified
This is followed by the data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Bus Data Format
The bus data must follow the format described in section 4.5.

5.4 SPOT LOAD DATA
The commands in this section let you delete, add or modify sport loads.
Section Header
[DELETE SPOT LOAD DATA] if the load is to be deleted
[ADD SPOT LOAD DATA] if the load is to be added
[MODIFY SPOT LOAD DATA] if the load is to be modified
Spot Load Data Format
The spot load data must follow the format described in section 4.6. If the action is to delete a spot load,
only part of the data preceding the = character which identifies the object is used by the program.
5.5 SECTION LOAD DATA

The commands in this section let you delete, add or modify section loads. Setting section load to 0 is
equivalent to deleting it from the network.
Section Header
[ADD SECTION LOAD DATA] if the load is to be added
[MODIFY SECTION LOAD DATA] if the load is to be modified
This is followed by the data described below. A blank line ends the
section.
Section Load Data Format
The section load data must follow the format described in section 4.13.
5.6 SECTION LOAD ALLOCATION PARAMETERS

The commands in this section let you add or modify section load allocation parameters data.
Section Header
[ADD SECTION LOAD ALLOCATION PARAMETERS] if the parameters are to be added
[MODIFY SECTION LOAD ALLOCATION PARAMETERS] if the parameters are to
be modified
Section Load Allocation Parameter Data Format
The section-load allocation parameters must follow the format described in section 4.14.

5.7 ALLOCATE SECTION LOAD
The commands in this section let you allocate a specified amount of kVA load to lines downstream from
certain point in a feeder.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say the following:
[ALLOCATE SECTION LOAD]
This is followed by data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Allocate Section Load Data Format
The Allocate Section Load data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described
below.
1. Line_or_Bus flag
Enter 1 to start load allocation at a line.
Enter 0 to start load allocation at a bus.
2. Bus1 Name
The name of the near-end bus enclosed by double quotation marks. The name must match exactly a bus
name in the short circuit data. The bus name can have at most 12 characters.
3. Bus1 Base kV
The nominal kV (line-to-line) of the near-end bus.
If Line_or_Bus flag is 1, items 3a through 3c are needed
3a. Bus2 Name
The name of the far-end bus enclosed by double quotation marks.
3b. Bus2 Base kV
The nominal kV (line-to-line) of the far-end bus.
3c. Circuit ID
The circuit ID enclosed by double quotation marks. The circuit ID can have at most 1 character.
End of Line specific data
4. Allocation method
0 - allocate load using line section load allocation parameters.
1 - allocate load using line length.
5. Percent flag
0 if load data is given in kVA for each load group.
1 if load data is given as load group percent share and the total kVA amount.
6. Load amount/percent: Load group #1 Phase A or A-B
Percent flag = 0: kVA amount to be allocated to load group #1, phase A (or A-B)
Percent flag = 1: percent of phase total to be allocated to load group #1, phase A (or A-B)
7. Load amount/percent: Load group #1 Phase B or B-C
Percent flag = 0: kVA amount to be allocated to load group #1, phase B (or B-C)
Percent flag = 1: percent of phase total to be allocated to load group #1, phase B (or B-C)
8. Load amount/percent: Load group #1 Phase C or A-C

Percent flag = 0: kVA amount or percent of total to be allocated to load group #2, phase B (or B-C)
16. Load amount load group #4 /Phase total: Phase A or A-B
Percent flag = 0: kVA amount to be allocated to load group #4 phase A (or A-B)
Percent flag = 1: kVA amount to be allocated to all the groups on this phase.
17. Load amount load group #4 /Phase Total: Phase B or B-C
Percent flag = 0: kVA amount to be allocated to load group #4 phase B (or B-C)
18. Load amount load group #4 /Phase Total: Phase C or A-C
Percent flag = 0: kVA amount to be allocated to load group #4 phase C (or A-C)

SECTION 6 PROTECTIVE DEVICE FORMAT
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This data format is designed to facilitate the transfer of a large amount of protective device data from an external
source, such as a GIS, into DistriView. The procedure to import protective device data into DistriView is as
follows:
1. Create a text file in the format described in this document. This file should have a .RYT extension.
You are responsible for this step.
2. Start DistriView and open the file that you wish to modify.
3. Execute the Relay | IMPORT RELAY COMMAND in the Main Window and select the text file
you created in step 1.
You can use this method to import data for these protective devices:
Overcurrent ground relays
Overcurrent phase relays
Distance ground relay
Distance phase relays
Fuses
Circuit Breakers
Reclosers
Sectionalizers
Compounded curve overcurrent (CCOC) devices.
The data format is described in this section. Please be aware of the following general guidelines:
follow.
5. In general the sections do not have to be in the order shown except the [DISTRIVIEW
RELAY DATA] section must be first, followed immediately by the [BREAKER DATA]
section.
The data that are new or modified in version 10 are underlined.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 6 PROTECTIVE DEVICE FORMAT

6.2 FILE HEADER
This section identifies the file as a Relay Data File. It also contains the name and version of the program
that created the file, as well as the creation date.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [DISTRIVIEW RELAY DATA]. This is followed by the
File Header Format
Program that created this file which will be ASPEN DistriView. Program name must be enclosed in double
quotation marks and preceded by 'app= '.
Major Version Number, Minor Version Number and a version character enclosed in double quotation marks.
Version number will be preceded by 'ver= '.
3. Creation Date
Date the network text file was created. The date is enclosed in double quotation marks and preceded by 'date= '.
[DISTRIVIEW RELAY DATA]

app= "ASPEN DistriView"
ver= 2010 " " 9.0
date= "Thu Jun 24 11:30:00 2011"
6.3 OC PHASE RELAY DATA

The OC Phase Relay Data section contains overcurrent phase relay parameters.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [DSTV OC PHASE RELAY DATA]. This is followed by the
OC Phase Relay Data Format
The overcurrent phase relay data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described
below.
1. Bus1 Number
The bus number of the near-end bus. This value is currently ignored by the program.
2. Bus1 Name
The name of the near-end bus enclosed by double quotation marks. The name must match exactly a bus name in
the short circuit data. The bus name can have at most 12 characters.
3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number
The bus number of the far-end bus. This value is currently ignored by the program.
5. Bus2 Name

6. Bus2 Base kV
7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
The branch type. Set type to 1 for a line or cable, 2 for a transformer or voltage regulator, and 10 for a 3-winding
transformer.
9. Relay ID
An identifier for the relay. The relay ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in double quotation marks. It
must be unique among all the relays in the same breaker/relay group.
10. Active Flag
1 for active, and 2 for out of service.
11. CT Ratio
CT ratio expressed as a single number, e.g., set CTR to 120 for a 600A:5A CT.
12. Time Dial Setting
13. Definite Time Element Setting
Definite time element pickup in primary amps. Set to 0.0 if the relay has no instantaneous and definite time unit.
14. Characteristic Angle
Characteristic angle in degrees. This is used only if the relay is directional. Please refer to "Section 3: Main
Window: Relay Menu, New | Breaker/Relay Group Command " in the On-Line Help for definition.
15. Time Element Directionality Flag
Set to 1 if the time element is directional. Set to 0 if the time element is not directional.
16. Definite-Time Element Directionality Flag
Set to 1 if the element is directional. Set to 0 if the instantaneous element is not directional.
17. Relay Type
Relay type enclosed by double quotation marks. The relay type can have at most 12 characters. It must match
exactly an available relay type in the Library Directory.
18. Tap Type
Tap type, up to 8 characters, enclosed by double quotation marks. Enter N/A if not in use. Otherwise, it must
match exactly an available tap type in the Library Directory.
19. Pickup Setting
Pickup in secondary amps.
20. CT Connection
Set to 0 if the CT is in wye connection. Set to 1 if the CT is in delta connection.
21. Definite Time Element Delay
Time delay in seconds. Enter 0 if the element is instantaneous.
22. Time Multiplier
Set to 1 if not needed.
23. Time Adder
24. Reset Time
Reset time in seconds when the time dial is at maximum value.
25. DC Offset Flag
Not used in this version. Set to 1 if the relay instantaneous element is sensitive to DC offset. Otherwise enter 0.

26. CT Ratio String
CT ratio as string in one of the following format X, X:Y or X/Y. Can have up to 12 characters enclosed in double
quotation marks. This string must match the CT ratio field entered earlier.
27. Memo
Text enclosed by double quotation marks. The memo can have up to 512 characters.
28. Always-Flat Flag
This flag is meaningful only if the relay has a nonzero instantaneous setting and a nonzero definite-time element
delay.
29. Relay Library Name
Name of the RLY file where the curve is found. The file name must be enclosed by double quotes.
30. Voltage-Control/Restrained Flag
Set to 1, 2, 3 or 4 for a voltage retrained relay. Set to 11, 12, 13, 14 for a voltage controlled relay. 1 and 11 are for
L-L Type 1. 2 and 12 are for L-L Type 2. 3 and 13 are for L-N Type 1, and 4 and 14 are for L-N Type 2.
31. Voltage-Control Threshold/Voltage-Restrained Minimum Voltage
A voltage-controlled relay is disabled if the per-unit voltage drops below this value. For a voltage-restrained
relay, the pickup decreases linearly as voltage until the per-unit voltage reaches this value.

[DSTV OC PHASE RELAY DATA]
0 "1201BusA" 12 0 "1250" 12 " " 1 "1201/51" = 1 120 1 0 -30 0 0 "CO-8" "GC1" 3 0 /
0 1 0 0 0 "120:1" "" /
0 "ABB" 0 0
6.4 OC GROUND RELAY DATA

The OC Ground Relay Data section contains overcurrent ground relay parameters.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [DSTV OC GROUND RELAY DATA]. This is followed by
the data described below. A blank line ends the section.
OC Ground Relay Data Format
The overcurrent phase relay data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described
below.
1. Bus1 Number
2. Bus1 Name
The name of the near-end bus enclosed in double quotation marks.
3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number
5. Bus2 Name
6. Bus2 Base kV

7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
transformer.
9. Relay ID
An identifier for the relay. The relay ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in double quotation marks. It
must be unique among relays in the same breaker/relay group.
10. Active Flag
11. CT Ratio
12. Time Dial Setting
13. Definite Time Element Setting
Definite time element pickup in primary amps. Set to 0.0 if the relay has no such unit.
14. Characteristic Angle
Characteristic angle in degrees. This is used only if the relay is directional. Please refer to "Section 3: Main
Window: Relay Menu, New | Breaker/Relay Group Command " in the On-Line Help for definition.
15. Time-Element Directionality Flag
Set to 1 if the time element is directional. Set to 0 if the time element is not directional.
16. Instantaneous-Element Directionality Flag
Set to 1 if the instantaneous element is directional. Set to 0 if the instantaneous element is not directional.
17. Relay Type
exactly an available relay type in the Library Directory.
18. Tap Type
Tap type, up to 8 characters, enclosed by double quotation marks. Enter N/A if not in use. Otherwise, it must
match exactly an available tap type in the Library Directory.
19. Pickup Setting
Pickup in secondary amps.
20. CT Location
Set to 1 if the CT is on the branch terminal. Set to 2 if the relay is on a transformer and the CT is on the neutral of
BUS1. Set to 3 if the relay is on a transformer and the CT is on the neutral of BUS2.
21. Previous State
Previous state of overcurrent relay created in DistriView 1.0. This is set to 0 if the relay had 3I0 and V0 as its
operating and polarizing quantities respectively. This is set to 1 if the relay had 3I0 and V2 as its operating
and polarizing quantities respectively. This is set to 2 if the relay had 3I2 and V2 as its operating and
polarizing quantities respectively.
22. Operating Quantity
Set to 0 if the relay operates on 3I0. Set to 1 if the relay operates on 3I2. Set to 2 if the relay operates on I0. Set
to 3 if the relay operates on I2.
23. Polarization Quantity
Set to 0 if the relay is polarized by Vo and Io. Set to 1 if the relay is polarized by V2 and I2.
24. Definite Time Element Delay
Time delay in seconds. Enter 0 if the element is instantaneous.

25. Time Multiplier
26. Time Adder
27. Reset Time
Reset time in seconds when the time dial is at maximum value.
28. DC Offset Flag
Not used in this version. Set to 1 if the relay instantaneous element is sensitive to DC offset. Otherwise enter 0.
29. CT Ratio String
quotation marks. This string must match the CT ratio field entered earlier.
30. Memo
31. Always-Flat Flag
This flag is meaningful only if the relay has a nonzero instantaneous setting and a nonzero definite-time
element delay.
33. Voltage-Control/Restrained Flag
Set to 0. This value is ignored by the program.
34. Voltage-Control Threshold/Voltage-Restrained Minimum Voltage
Set to 0. This value is ignored by the program.

[DSTV OC GROUND RELAY DATA]
0 "1201BusA" 12 0 "1250" 12 " " 1 "1201/50" = 1 120 1 0 -90 0 0 "CO-8" "GC1" 1.5 1 0 0 0 /
0 1 0 0 0 "120:1" " To be inspected in Q2, 2015" /
0 "ABB" 0 0
6.5 OC FUSE DATA

This section contains fuse parameters.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [OC FUSE DATA]. This is followed by the data described below.
A blank line ends the section.
OC Fuse Data Format
The fuse data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Number
2. Bus1 Name
The name of the near-end bus enclosed by double quotation marks.
3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number

5. Bus2 Name
6. Bus2 Base kV
7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
transformer.
9. Fuse ID
An identifier for the fuse. The fuse ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in double quotation marks. There
are no uniqueness requirements for fuses.
10. Current Divider Ratio
Normally, the ratio is 1.0 for a fuse, but you can set it to 2, for example, to simulate a parallel fuse configuration.
11. Operating Curve
Curve used for time calculations: 1 for minimum melt curve; 2 for total clear curve.
12. Fuse Type
Fuse type enclosed by double quotation marks. The fuse type can have at most 12 characters. It must match
exactly an available fuse type in the Library Directory.
13. Minimum-Melt Time Multiplier
Multiplier for the minimum-melt curve. This number must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
14. Memo
15. Momentary Rating
Momentary rating of the fuse holder in amperes.
17. Active Flag

[OC FUSE DATA]
1 "NW Sub." 69 0 "1201BusA" 12 " " 2 "NW69 FUSE1" = 1 1 "153-151-025" 1 /
" To be inspected in Q2, 2003" 0 "S&C", 1
6.6 DISTANCE PHASE RELAY DATA

The Distance Phase Relay Data section contains distance phase relay parameters.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [DSTV DS PHASE RELAY DATA]. This is followed by the
Distance Phase Relay Data Format
The distance relay data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Number

2. Bus1 Name
3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number
5. Bus2 Name
6. Bus2 Base kV
7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
transformer.
9. Relay ID
Relay identifier. The relay ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in double quotation marks. It must be
unique among all the relays in the same breaker/relay group.
10. Active Flag
11. CT Ratio
12. PT Ratio
PT ratio expressed as a single number.
13. Relay Type
exactly an available distance phase relay type in the Distance Relay Library file (.DRL) being referenced.
14. Additional type information
It can have most 12 characters enclosed by double quotation marks. This field is used for informational purposes
only.
15. Minimum Current
The minimum phase current, in secondary amps, that must be exceeded in order for relay to operate.
16. Zone 2 OC Relay Pickup
The zone-2 overcurrent relays pickup setting in secondary amps.
17. Zone 2 OC Relay Time Dial
The zone-2 overcurrent relays time dial.
18. Zone 2 OC Relay Type
The zone-2 timer type enclosed by double quotation marks. Set this value to Fixed if zone 2 has a fixed time
delay; otherwise specify a relay type. The relay type can have at most 12 characters. It must match exactly an
available relay type in the Library Directory.
19. Parameter Index and Value
Pairs of index number and value for each parameter of the relay type. For manufacturer-specific distance relay
types, the index values must match the values hard coded in DistriView. For other distance relay types, the
index values must match those defined for the relay type in the Distance Relay Library file being referenced.

20. CT Ratio String
quotation marks.
21. PT Ratio String
PT ratio as string in one of the following format X, X:Y or X/Y. Can have up to 12 characters enclosed in double
quotation marks
22. Memo
Text enclosed by double quotation marks. The memo can be up to 512 characters long.
23. Zone 1 Delay
Zone-1 time delay in seconds. Default is zero.
24. PT Bus Name
Name of the PT bus enclosed in double quotation marks.
25. PT Bus kV
Nominal kV of the PT bus.
26. Overcurrent Relay Library Name
Name of the RLY file where the curve of the zone-2 OC relay type is found. The file name must be enclosed by
double quotes.

[DSTV DS PHASE RELAY DATA]
0 "ABC" 10 0 "BUS0" 10 "2" 1 "DS RELAY1" = 1 10 10 "CEY" "Westinghouse" 0.1 /
0 0 " Fixed" 13 /
10200 "5" /
10300 "75" /
20000 "0" /
20100 "0" /
20200 "0" /
20300 "75" /
20400 "0" /
30000 "0" /
30100 "0" /
30200 "0" /
30300 "75" /
30400 "0" /
30500 "1" /
"10" "10" "This relay was tested in 2014." 0 /
"ABC" 10 /
""
6.7 DISTANCE GROUND RELAY DATA

The Distance Ground Relay Data section contains distance phase relay parameters.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [DSTV DS GROUND RELAY DATA]. This is followed by
the data described below. A blank line ends the section.
Distance Ground Relay Data Format
The distance relay data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Number
2. Bus1 Name

3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number
5. Bus2 Name
6. Bus2 Base kV
7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
transformer.
9. Relay ID
Relay Identifier. The relay ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in double quotation marks. It must be
unique among all the relays in the same breaker/relay group.
10. Active Flag
11. CT Ratio
12. PT Ratio
PT ratio expressed as a single number.
13. Relay Type
exactly an available distance phase relay type in the Distance Relay Library file (.DRL) being referenced.
14. Additional type information
It can have most 12 characters enclosed by double quotation marks. This field is used for informational purposes
only.
15. Zero Sequence Compensation Factor K for Zone 1 - Magnitude
The magnitude of the parameter K. K is usually set equal to (Zo-Z1)/(3Z1), where Z1 and Zo are the positive-
and zero-sequence impedance of the line.
16. Zero Sequence Compensation Factor K for Zone 1 - Angle
The angle of the parameter K in degrees.
17. Zero Sequence Compensation Factor K for Zone 2 and Higher - Magnitude
The magnitude of the parameter K.
18. Zero Sequence Compensation Factor K for Zone 2 and Higher - Angle
The angle of the parameter K in degrees.
19. Minimum Current
The minimum neutral current (3Io), in secondary amps, the fault current must exceed in order for relay to operate.
20. Zone 2 OC Relay Pickup
The zone-2 overcurrent relays pickup setting in secondary amps.
21. Zone 2 OC Relay Time Dial
The zone-2 overcurrent relays time dial.

22. Zone 2 OC Relay Type
The zone-2 timer type enclosed by double quotation marks. Set this value to Fixed if zone 2 has a fixed time
delay; otherwise specify a relay type. The relay type can have at most 12 characters. It must match exactly an
available relay type in the Overcurrent Relay Library Directory.
Name of the RLY file where the Zone 2 OC Relay Type is found. The file name must be enclosed by double
quotes.
24. Parameter Index and Value
Pairs of index number and value for each parameter of the relay type. The index values must match those
defined for the relay type in the ASPEN Distance Relay Editor.
25. CT Raito String
quotation marks.
26. PT Ratio String
PT ratio as string in one of the following format X, X:Y or X/Y. Can have up to 12 characters enclosed in double
quotation marks.
27. Memo
28. Zone 1 Delay
Zone-1 time delay in seconds. Default is zero.
29. PT Bus Name
Name of the PT bus enclosed in double quotation marks.
30. PT Bus kV
Nominal kV of the PT bus.
31. Overcurrent Relay Library Name
Name of the RLY file where the curve of the zone-2 OC relay type is found. The file name must be enclosed by
double quotes.

[DSTV DS GROUND RELAY DATA]
0 "ABC" 10 0 "BUS0" 10 "2" 1 "DST GROUND" = 1 120 10 "CEY" "ABB" 0 0 0 0 0.1 /
10 2 "SEL-STI" 13 /
10200 "0" /
10300 "75" /
20000 "0" /
20100 "0" /
20200 "0" /
20300 "75" /
20400 "0" /
30000 "0" /
30100 "0" /
30200 "0" /
30300 "75" /
30400 "0" /
30500 "1" /
"120" "10" "This relay was tested in 2013." 0 /
"ABC" 10 /
"SEL"

6.8 BREAKER DATA
The Breaker Data section contains breaker parameters.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [BREAKER DATA]. This is followed by the data described
Breaker Data Format
The breaker data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Number
2. Bus1 Name
3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number
5. Bus2 Name
6. Bus2 Base kV
7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
The branch type. Set the type to 1 for a line and 2 for a transformer.
9. Breaker ID
An identifier for the breaker. The breaker ID can have up to 12 characters enclosed in double quotation marks.
There are no uniqueness requirements for the breaker ID.
10. Manufacturer
Manufacturer's type designation enclosed by double quotation marks. It can have up to 12 characters.
11. Style
Breaker style enclosed by double quotation marks. The breaker style can have at most 16 characters.
12. Max kV
Maximum kV rating of breaker. The default value is the terminal bus voltage.
13. kA
Rated current rating in kilo-amperes at maximum kV.
14. Cycles
Breaker clearing time in cycles.
15. Number of operations
It can be 1, 2, 3 or 4. 1 means one normal trip and no reclosing. 2 means one normal trip plus one reclosing
operation, etc.
16. First reclosing interval in seconds
17. Second reclosing interval in seconds

18. Third reclosing interval in seconds
19. Memo
20. Disable instantaneous unit of overcurrent relays when enclosing
1 to disable the instantaneous unit. 0 to not disable.
[BREAKER DATA]
0 "1201BusA" 12 0 "1250" 12 " " 1 "NW BREAKER1" = "GE" "A-20402-1" 100 20 5 1 0 0 0 "Memo" 1
6.9 RECLOSER DATA

The Recloser Data section contains recloser parameters. Each recloser object on the one-line diagram
actually consists of two reclosers: the ground unit and the phase unit (in that order.) The phase and ground unit
must have the same ID, except the phase-unit ID must end with _P and the ground-unit ID with _G.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [RECLOSER DATA]. This is followed by the data described
Recloser Data Format
The recloser data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Number
2. Bus1 Name
3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number
5. Bus2 Name
6. Bus2 Base kV
7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
9. Recloser ID
An identifier for the recloser. Phase units must end with an '_P' and ground units must end with an '_G'. The
recloser ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in double quotation marks. There are no
uniqueness requirements for the recloser ID.
10. Fast Type
Fast recloser type enclosed by double quotation marks. The recloser type can have at most 12 characters. It must
match exactly an available recloser type in the Library Directory. Enter N/A if the curve is not in use.

11. Slow Type
Slow recloser type enclosed by double quotation marks. The recloser type can have at most 12 characters. It
must match exactly an available recloser type in the Library Directory. Enter N/A if the curve is not in use.
12. Number of Fast Operations
Number of fast operations which must be greater than, or equal to zero, and less than, or equal to the number of
operations to lock-out. The same number applies to both units.
13. Total Number of Operations
Total number of operations required to lock out the recloser. This number must be 1, 2, 3 or 4. The same number
applies to both units.
14. Recloser Type
1 for ground; 0 for phase.
15. Operating Curve
Recloser curve used for calculating the operating time. 1 for fast; 0 for slow.
16. Rated Momentary Amps
17. Interrupt Time in seconds
18. Pickup Setting for the Slow Curve
Set the pickup current (in A) to 1.0 if the 'slow' recloser curve is drawn as operating time versus amperes.
Otherwise, enter the pickup setting if the curve is draw as time versus multiples of pickup.
19. Pickup Setting for the Slow Curve
Set the pickup current (in A) to 1.0 if the fast recloser curve is drawn as operating time versus amperes.
Otherwise, enter the pickup setting if the curve is draw as time versus multiples of pickup.
20. First Reclosing Interval
First reclosing interval in seconds. The reclosing interval is the elapse time between successive recloser opening
and reclosing. You must enter (n-1) positive values, where n is the total number of operations to lock-out.
21. Second Reclosing Interval
Second reclosing interval in seconds.
22. Third Reclosing Interval
Third reclosing interval in seconds.
23. Slow Curve Time Adder
'Time Adder' in seconds for the slow operating curve. This factor along with the 'Time Multiplier' lets you stretch
and move the curves in the vertical direction.
24. Fast Curve Time Adder
'Time Adder' in seconds for the fast operating curve.
25. Slow Curve Time Multiplier
'Time Multiplier' for the slow operating curve.
26. Fast Curve Time Multiplier
'Time Multiplier' for the fast operating curve.
27. Slow Curve Minimum Response Time
Minimum Response Time for the slow operating curve. Please see documentation for the Relay | New Recloser
command for the meaning of the minimum response time and high current trip.
28. Fast Curve Minimum Response Time
Minimum Response Time for the slow operating curve.
29. High Current Trip
High-current trip setting in amperes.

30. High Current Trip Delay
High-current trip delay in seconds.
31. Active Flag
32. Memo

[RECLOSER DATA]
0 "1201BusB" 12 0 "BUS10" 12 " " 1 "NE RECLSR2_G" = "ME-427-A1" "ME-427-C" 2 4 1 0 0 0 /
1 1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Memo for the ground unit
0 "1201BusB" 12 0 "BUS10" 12 " " 1 "NE RECLSR2_P" = "ME-427-A1" "ME-427-C" 2 4 0 0 0 0 /
1 1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Memo for the phase unit
6.10 SECTIONALIZER DATA

The Sectionalizer Data section contains sectionalizer parameters.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [SECTIONALIZER DATA]. This is followed by the
Sectionalizer Data Format
The section data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Number
2. Bus1 Name
3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number
5. Bus2 Name
6. Bus2 Base kV
7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
9. Sectionalizer ID
An identifier for the sectionalizer. The sectionalizer ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in double quotation
marks. There are no uniqueness requirements for the sectionalizer ID.
10. Total Operations
Number of current interruptions required to open and lock out the sectionalizer.
11. Minimum Trip
Actuating current in amperes.

12. Memory Time
The duration in seconds in which the operations count is stored. This number must be positive if the Total
Operations count is greater than 1.
13. Voltage Restraint
1 if the sectionalizer has 'voltage restraint' -- i.e., the sectionalizer is inhibited from counting when a healthy
voltage is present on its terminals; 0 if not.
14. Peak Current Rating in
Amperes 15. Active Flag
16. Memo
[SECTIONALIZER DATA]
0 "1260" 12. 9 "1260B" 12. " " 1 "NE SECT01" = 3 640 60 0 1 Memo for sectionalizer
6.11 COMPOUNDED CURVE OC DEVICE DATA

The CCOC Device Data section contains data of compounded curve overcurrent devices.
Section Header
The first line in this data section must say: [CCOC DEVICE DATA]. This is followed by the data
Compounded Curve OC Device Data Format
The section data begins immediately after the section header. The data format is described below.
1. Bus1 Number
2. Bus1 Name
3. Bus1 Base kV
4. Bus2 Number
5. Bus2 Name
6. Bus2 Base kV
7. Circuit ID
8. Branch Type
9. Device ID
An identifier for the device. The ID can have up to 20 characters enclosed in double quotation marks. There are
no uniqueness requirements for the ID.

10. Device type
CCOC type enclosed by double quotation marks. The type name can have at most 12 characters. It must match
exactly an available device in the Overcurrent Curve Library.
11. Library name
Name of the Overcurrent Curve Library file. This file must be located in the current default OC library directory.
12. Operating Curve
Curve used for time calculations: 1 for minimum response curve; 2 for maximum clear curve.
13. Long-time trip pickup
Long-time trip pickup setting in multiple of rated continuous current. Set this parameter to zero to disable the
function.
14. Short-time trip pickup
Short-time trip pickup setting in multiple of rated continuous current. Set this parameter to zero to disable the
function.
15. High-current trip pickup
High-current trip pickup setting in multiple of rated continuous current. Set this parameter to zero to disable the
function
16. Ground trip pickup
Ground trip pickup setting in multiple of rated continuous current. Set this parameter to zero to disable the
function
17. Long-time trip delay
Long-time trip delay, calibrated at 5 times curve pickups when applicable. Set this parameter to -1 to disable
this function.
18. Short-time trip delay
Short-time trip delay, calibrated at 5 times curve pickups when applicable. Set this parameter to -1 to disable this
function.
19. High-current trip delay
High-current trip delay, calibrated at 5 times curve pickups when applicable. Set this parameter to -1 to disable
this function.
20. Ground trip delay
Ground trip delay, calibrated at 5 times curve pickups when applicable. Set this parameter to -1 to disable this
function.
21. Cutoff current
Rated interrupting current in amperes.
22. Rating continuous current
The devices continuous current rating in amperes.
23. Memo
Text enclosed by double quotation marks. The text can have up to 512 characters.
24. Active Flag

[CCOC DEVICE DATA]
0 "1201BusA" 12 0 "1250" 12 " " 1 "SC3507" = "705502" "00CCOC" /
1 0.75 6 8 0 12 0.18 -1 -1 15000 25 /
"This device had an unexplained trip." 1

SECTION 7 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION REPORT
7.1 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION IN TEXT FORMAT

You can generate a textual output of short-circuit or locked-rotor solutions in DistriView in one of two
ways:
Selecting the Report | Solution Report command in the Main Window. You have the option of viewing
the report on the TTY window, printing the report, or saving the report to a text file.
Clicking the "Write to TTY Window Also" option in the dialog box for the S_Ckt | View Short Circuit
and Locked-Rotor Solution on 1-Line command in the Main Window. The output is written to the TTY
Window.
7.2 TITLE PAGE

The first page of the output is a title page that contains some basic information about the output and
the system statistics. An example follows:
-- ASPEN DistriView --
VERSION 10.1
DATE AND TIME: Tue Aug 10 12:44:24 2014

BINARY FILE NAME: C:\ASPENDV07\Sample1.dtv
BASE MVA = 100.
THIS FILE HAS: 2 SUBSTATION BUSES

15 NODES
3 INDUCTION MACHINES
1 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES
2 LOADS
1 SHUNTS
1 GROUNDING BANKS
7 LINES
6 2-WINDING TRANSFORMER
4 VOLTAGE REGULATORS
1 SWITCHES
1 3-WAY SWITCHES
FILE COMMENTS:
This is an eleven bus system.
PREFAULT VOLTAGE: From a linear network solution without loads or shunts

INDUCTION MACHINE CONTRIBUTIONS: excluded.
REGULATORS AND LTCS WERE RESET TO THEIR NEUTRAL POSITION.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 7 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION REPORT

7.3 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTIONS
Following the title page are reports of one or more short circuit or locked-rotor simulations. In DistriView,
the solutions are in the order they were simulated. The output for each fault begins and ends with a long
line of equal signs. The electrical quantities in the report are in amperes for current and per unit for the
prefault and fault voltages.
Fault Summary:
The fault summary at the beginning of each fault solution contains the following:
Fault description: This includes the fault type and the fault location.
Fault current: This is the total current at the fault point.
Thevenin Impedances. These impedances are shown only for buses with all 3 phases energized. DistriView
computes short circuits in the phase domain, and not in the sequence domain. The sequence impedances
shown here are exact only if the network is completely balanced.
X/R ratio, where R+jX is the total fault impedance.
Maximum asymmetric current. See APPENDIX G: ASYMMETRIC FAULT CURRENT for details.
The fault summary ends with a line of dashes. An example of a fault summary is shown below:
======================================================================================================
1. 1LG (A) Bus fault on:
1201BusA 12kV
FAULT CURRENT(A @ DEG): PHASE( A
4851.8@ -89.4
Thevenin Impedances (in ohms): Z+ = 0.02395 + j 1.39198, Z0 = 1.65E-6 + j 1.5039
(in PU): Z+ = 0.01663 + j 0.96666, Z0 = 1.15E-6 + j 1.04437
X/R ratio= 89.5 Max asymmetric current=8441.4A
The output ends here if you specified a tier limit of -1. Otherwise, the bus-oriented outputs follow.
Bus-Oriented Output
The remaining output for a fault is organized by buses. The output for each bus begins and ends with
a long line of dashes. The output for each bus includes:
The bus identifiers: number, name, kV rating, area and tier number.
Pre-fault voltage in per unit.
Post-fault voltage in per unit.
Synchronous motor or generator currents ( in amperes), if any.
Branch currents in amperes.
The number of buses in the output depends on the tier limit you specified. If the fault solution covers
more than one bus, the bus-oriented outputs are arranged by the tier number, or the proximity to the fault.
Buses that are closest to the fault are shown first. Buses that are within the same tier are arranged in
ascending order of the bus name.
The following is a sample output for the two buses: 1260 and NE Sub. A detailed explanation follows:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BUS
6 1260 12.0KV AREA BB TIER 3
Va Vb Vc
PRE-FAULT VOLTAGE (PU)
FAULTED VOLTAGE (PU)
SHUNT CURRENTS (A)
FROM GENERATOR
BRANCH CURRENT (A) TO
7 1260B 12.0
4 1201BusB 12.0 T 6989.1@ -83.5 6989.0@ 156.5 6989.0@ 36.5 0.1@-100.8
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BUS
2 NE Sub. 69.0KV AREA AA TIER 3
Va Vb Vc
PRE-FAULT VOLTAGE (PU) >
FAULTED VOLTAGE (PU) >
BRANCH CURRENT (A) TO >
4 1201BusB 12.0 3T
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. Bus identifier: The identifier includes the bus number, bus name, nominal kV and area name.
On the same line with the identifiers is the tier number. Tier 0 includes the faulted bus. Tier 1
includes buses that are 1 bus away from the fault, etc.
2. Pre-fault voltage: The pre-fault voltage in per unit is listed on the line following the bus identifiers.
3. Post-faulted voltage: The post-faulted voltage in per unit of the bus is located on the line that begins with
the word 'Faulted Voltage'.
4. Shunt currents: You will see a 'Shunt Currents From Generator' section if there are
synchronous motors or generators attached to the bus. The current is in amperes.
5. Branch Currents: This section lists the currents flowing on all the branches attached to the bus. The
current is considered positive if it flows away from the bus. You can deduce the current direction
from its phase angle (with the assumption that the system is primarily reactive): The current is
leaving the bus if its angle is in the vicinity of -90 degrees. The current is coming into the bus if its
angle is in the vicinity of 90 degrees.
The lines following the header 'Branch Current' lists the bus number, bus name, nominal kV, branch
type, and fault currents for the branch attached to the bus. The branch type specifies the type of
branch. An 'L' is used for distribution lines, an 'S' for switches, a 'R' for voltage regulators and a 'T' for
two- winding transformers. Non-zero circuit identifiers for two-winding transformers will precede the
branch type, (i.e., '3T' would represent a two-winding transformer with the number 3 for the circuit
identifier).
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 7 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION REPORT

SECTION 8 VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION REPORT
8.1 VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION IN TEXT FORMAT

You can generate a textual output of the voltage drop solution in DistriView by selecting the Report |
Solution Report command in the Main Window. You have the option of viewing the report on the TTY
window, printing the report, or saving the report to a text file. The voltage drop solution report has two
main parts. The first is a node-by-node report. The second is a set of summaries. You can omit the first
part and have only the summaries included in the report.
There are three different styles of node-by-node reports. These styles are explained in Section 8.3. The
format of the summary reports is explained in Section 8.4.
8.2 TITLE PAGE

The first page of the output is a title page that contains some basic information about the output and
the system statistics. An example follows:
-- ASPEN DistriView Version 10.1 --
DATE AND TIME: Fri Nov 14 11:26:41 2014

DATA FILE NAME: C:\ASPENDV06\Sample1.dtv
BASE MVA 100.
2 SUBSTATION BUSES
11 NODES
2 INDUCTION MACHINES
1 SPOT LOADS
1 SHUNTS
1 GROUNDING BANKS
6 LINES
1 VOLTAGE REGULATORS
1 3-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
1 SWITCHES
0 3-WAY SWITCHES
FILE COMMENTS:
This is an eleven bus system.
ALL LENGTHS ARE IN: ft

LINE RATING IN USE: Summer
TRANSFORMER RATING IN USE: 1
BRANCH OVERLOAD THRESHOLD: 80 Percent
ADJUSTED VOLTAGE REGULATORS: No
ADJUSTED SWITCHABLE CAPACITORS AND REACTORS: No
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 8 VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION REPORT

8.3 NODE ORIENTED REPORT
Following the title page is the node-oriented solution report. There are three different styles. They are
described in the following under the heading of Style 1, Style 2, Style 3 Line-to-neutral, and
Style 3 Line-to-line.
The node-oriented report includes either all the nodes in the active feeder or a subset thereof, depending on
the options you have chosen when you generated the report. The nodes in the report are sorted in ascending
order of either bus name or bus number. You can change the sort order in the Diagram | Options dialog
box.
The node-oriented output can alternatively be arranged in the form of a tree walk, where the output
follows a depth-first traversal of the feeder. Each path starts from the trunk of the feeder and stops at
the tip of a tree branch. The logic then back tracks to the trunk and goes down another tree branch that
has not been traversed. The tree walk ends when all the nodes in the feeder have been encountered.
Style 1:
The output for each node begins and ends with a long line of dashes. An example is shown below. This
bus has a spot load and is connected to a line.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BUS
0 1250 12kV AREA BB VA=6.8255(0.985pu) VB=6.9951(1.010pu) VC=7.103(1.025pu) VMIN*120=118.2V
DIST=10560
TO NODE
0 1201BusA
0 BUS11
0 BUS0
INDUC_MOTOR:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The first line identifies the node by its number, name, nominal kV (always line-to-line), and area name.
The rest of the line gives the voltage of the three phases and distance from the nearest substation. (Note:
The unit of length is shown on the title page.) The phase-to-ground voltage is shown as N.E. if a phase
is not energized.
Following the first line, the output shows the flows away from this node through one or more branches. The
information for each branch include:
The identifier of the node at the opposite end of the branch.
A one-letter circuit identifier, if any.
A letter that identifies the branch type. L is for lines, T for transformers, R for regulators, X for
3-winding transformers, S for switches, and W for 3-way switches.
PHS: The phases on the bus that are connected to the branch. For example, BC means phases b
and c of the bus is connected to the branch, but phase a is not. This implies that the branch is a 2-
phase line, a V-phase transformer, or a voltage regulator.
Section type: The construction or line-table-entry name if the branch is a line; the tap ratios if
the branch is balanced transformer; or the switch position if the branch is a switch.
Length: The length of the line. This entry is left blank for other branch types. The unit of length
is shown on the title page.
Phase currents in amperes. The values shown are the magnitude of the currents. They are
always positive or zero.
Power flow in kW and kVAR. A positive number means power is flowing away from the node.
A negative number means power flowing toward the node.
kW and kVAR loses.
%Duty: The branch flow as a percentage of its rating. A duty greater than 100% means the flow
exceeded the rating. For lines and switches, this is the ratio of the maximum phase current divided by
the branchs current rating, in percent. For transformers, the duty is the ratio of the kVA flow across a
bank divided by the banks kVA rating, in percent. The duty shown is the largest duty of the banks in
use. For voltage regulators, the duty is the ratio of the current flow across a bank, divided by the banks
current rating. Again, the duty shown is the largest duty of the banks in use.

For 3-winding transformers and 3-way switches, you will see an additional text line showing the
identification of the other remote bus. No current or power flow is shown on this second text line,
because the flows on the previous line are the sum of currents and power flowing toward the two remote
buses.
Following the branch-flow outputs, the report shows flows to spot loads, shunts, induction or synchronous
machines, and grounding banks. The flows to each of these devices occupy one line in the report. The
currents and power flows follow the same convention as that for the branches.
Style 2:
The output for each node begins and ends with a long line of dashes. An example is shown below. This
bus has a spot load and is connected to a line.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BUS
0 1250 12kV AREA BB VA=6.8255(0.985pu) VB=6.9951(1.010pu) VC=7.103(1.025pu) VMIN*120=118.2V DIST=10560
TO NODE
0 1201BusA
0 BUS11
0 BUS0
INDUC_MOTOR: MC-01020 C 2 -10 -5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The first line identifies the node by its number, name, nominal kV (always line-to-line), and area name.
The rest of the line gives the voltage of the three phases. The phase-to-ground voltage is shown as N.E.
if a phase is not energized.
Following the first line, the output shows the flows away from this node through one or more branches.
The output for each branch takes up to three text lines, with an active phase on each line. The information
for each branch include the following:
The identifier of the node at the opposite end of the branch.
A one-letter circuit identifier, if any.
A letter that identifies the branch type. L is for lines, T for transformers, R for regulators, X for
3-winding transformers, S for switches, and W for 3-way switches.
PH: The phase being reported. It is either A, B or C.
Section type: The construction or line-table-entry name if the branch is a line; the tap ratios if the
branch is balanced transformer; or the switch position if the branch is a switch.
Length: The length of the line. This entry is left blank for other branch types. The unit of length
is shown on the title page.
Domestic Consumers: The three columns under this heading , labeled No., KWH, and KW,
are meaningful only for lines and cables with load-allocation parameters. The number under No.
is the total number of consumers for the four load groups. The number under KWH is the average
kilowatt-hour among the four load groups. The number is KW is the sum of kilowatts for the four
load groups. .(Note: Load groups that employ the REA method is excluded from this summary.)
Phase current in amperes. The value shown is the magnitude of the current.
Power flow in kW and kVAR. A positive number means power is flowing away from the node. A
negative number means power flowing toward the node.
Voltage drop: Two numbers are shown. The first is the voltage drop across the branch. The second
is the voltage drop from the nearest substation. The unit is volts i.e., the per-unit voltage times a
multiplier (which is usually 120.0 volts).
kW loses. For transformers, the loss cannot be computed on a per-phase basis (because the phase
shift of a wye-delta transformer scrambles the phase quantities, making the per-phase loss
meaningless.) We solve this problem by computing the total loss among the active phases and divide
them evenly among the phases present.
%Duty: The branch flow as a percentage of its rating. A duty greater than 100% means the
flow exceeded the rating. For lines and switches, this is the ratio of the phase current divided
by the

branchs current rating, in percent. For transformers and regulators, the same duty is reported on all the
phases. The duty shown is the highest duty among the banks present.
For 3-winding transformers and 3-way switches, you will see an additional text line showing the
identification of the other remote bus. No current or power flow is shown on this second text line, because
the flows on the previous lines are the sum of currents and power flowing toward the two remote buses.
Style 3:
The report begins with a title page. The rest of the report is tabular, with each text line corresponding to
a line, cable, transformer or voltage regulator/booster in the feeder. An example is shown below.
LOAD UPSTR ----- VOLTS ----- ---- AMPS ---- --- INPUT --- LOSS SPOT_LOAD CAP --- SECTION LOAD
-- BUSBUS A B C A B C DUTY KW KVAR KW KW KVAR KVAR LENG KV KVA1 KVA2 KVA3
KVA4
2 1 121.0 122.8 123.1 7 7 7 0.72 135 68 0 5280 12
4 3 118.1 121.2 123.0
6 4 120.9 122.7 123.0
11 8 121.0 122.8 123.1
52 15 121.0 121.2 120.8
77 54 118.0 121.1
80 77 120.4
The first text line in this example is for a line connecting node 2 and node 1. (Note: all the nodes are
identified by their bus numbers.). Node 2 is the load bus, or the downstream node of the line. Node 1 is
the upstream node. The information on the rest the text line is the following:
VOLTS: These are the voltage magnitude of phases a, b and c at the load bus for a Style 3 Line-to-
neutral report, or magnitude of phases ab, bc and ca for a Style 3 Line-to-line report. The unit is
volts (i.e., per-unit voltage times a multiplier, which is usually 120 volts.) A blank means the
corresponding phase is not energized.
AMPS: The three numbers are the magnitude of the phase currents flowing into the line at the upstream
side. A blank means that the line does not have a conductor on that phase.
INPUT KW and KVAR: The power entering the upstream side of the line.
KW LOSS. The sum of losses among the phases present.
Spot load KW and KVAR. This is the total spot load connected to the load bus. A blank means there is no
spot load at the load bus.
CAP KVAR. The total capacitor KVARs connected to the load bus. A blank means there is no capacitor
at the load bus.
LENG: The length of the line. The unit of length is shown on the title page of the report. This field is
blank for a transformer.
KV: The nominal kV of the line. This is always a line-to-line quantity. For a single-phase line, this value
is 1.732 times the nominal line-to-ground kV.
SECTION LOAD: The scheduled KVAs of the four load groups of the section load.
8.4 SUMMARIES
The following summaries are available:
Branch overload summary
Voltage violation summary
Spot load summary
Generator and motor summary
Section load summary
Out-of-service equipment summary
Capacitor summary
Voltage regulator summary.

Branch Overload Summary:
This summary lists all the overloaded branches. Specifically, a branch is listed if its percentage duty is
greater than the overload threshold you specified. You can find the overload threshold on the title page of
the report. You can change this threshold in the V_Drop | View Voltage Drop Solution on 1-Line dialog
box.
A sample branch overload summary is shown below.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERLOADED LINE SUMMARY
BUS1 BUS2 AMP(A B C) %DUTY_
0 BUS11 12kV - 7 1251AB 12kV L 14 15 0 146
OVERLOADED TRANSFORMER SUMMARY

BUS1 BUS2 KVA(1 2 3) %DUTY_
0 BUS1 34.5kV - 0 1201BusB 12kV 1T 149 106 134 7475
OVERLOADED VOLTAGE REGULATOR SUMMARY

BUS1 BUS2 AMP(1 2 3) %DUTY_
0 1249B 12kV - 0 BUS6 12kV T 7 7 7 144
OVERLOADED VOLTAGE BOOSTER SUMMARY

BUS1 BUS2 AMP(1 2 3) %DUTY_
0 1250 12kV - 0 BUS0 12kV T 7 0 0 344
OVERLOADED SWITCH SUMMARY

BUS1 BUS2 AMP(A B C) %DUTY_
0 1250 12kV - 0 BUS11 12kV W 14 15 0 1455
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Please note that the kVAs for transformers are computed on a per-bank (and not per-phase) basis.
The percent duty for transformer is computed based on the ratio of actual kVA and the rated KVA of
the transformer. The percentage duty shown for each of these objects is the highest duty of all the
banks present.
The currents for voltage regulators and booster are computed on a per-bank basis. The percent duty
for these devices are computed based on the ratio of the actual current and the rated current.
The overloaded branches in each category are not sorted.
Voltage Violation Summary:

This summary lists all the nodes with over- or under-voltage problems. Specifically, a node is listed in the
over-voltage table if the voltage magnitude at one or more phases exceeds the maximum voltage limit.
Similarly, a node is listed in the under-voltage table if the voltage magnitude is below the minimum
voltage limit. The voltage limits are shown at the beginning of each of the tables. You can change these
voltage limits in the V_Drop | View Voltage Drop Solution on 1-Line dialog box.
A sample under-voltage summary is shown below. Entries in the table are sorted either by bus number
or by bus name. You can change the sort order in the Diagram | Options dialog box.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VOLTAGE VIOLATION SUMMARY
5 BUSES HAVE VOLTAGE UNDER 1.000 PU:

BUS_NAME KV_AREA KV(A B C) Vmin(V) PUmin
0 1250
0 BUS0
0 BUS11
7 1251AB
8 1251C
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Spot Load Summary:
This summary lists all the spot loads in the feeder. The values under KW and KVAR are the actual power
consumed, taking into account the solution voltage at the loads. The total KW and KVAR of all the entries
are listed at the bottom line.
A sample spot load summary is shown below. Entries in the table are sorted either by bus number or by
bus name. You can change the sort order in the Diagram | Options dialog box.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SPOT
LOAD SUMMARY
BUS_NAME KV_AREA KV(A B C) KW KVAR KVA PF
0 1260A
7 1251AB
Total spot Load in Summary: 239 240
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Generator and Motor Summary:

This summary lists all the induction machines in the feeder. A positive value under KW means that the
machine is generating power. A negative value under KVAR means that the machine is absorbing reactive
power from the network (i.e., it has a lagging power factor).
A sample induction machine summary is shown below. Entries in the table are sorted either by bus
number or by bus name. You can change the sort order in the Diagram | Options dialog box.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INDUCTION MACHINE SUMMARY
BUS_NAME KV_AREA KV(A B C) KW KVAR KVA PF RATING START
0 1250
0 BUS10
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Section Load Summary:

Section loads are the distributed loads within the lines and cables. This summary lists all the section loads
in the feeder. The loads are computed based on the solution voltage. They may differ from the schedule
value if the section loads have constant-current and constant-impedance components. (You can see the
section loads composition in the Network | Edit Section Loads dialog box.)
A breakdown of the total section loads by load group is shown at the end of the summary, under the
heading SCHEDULED SECTION LOAD BY LOAD GROUP. Please note that these are
schedule values, and not computed values.
A sample section load summary is shown below. Entries in the table are sorted either by bus number or by
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION LOAD SUMMARY
ACTUAL LOAD
Note: The actual load is shown in the table below. The actual load may deviate from the
scheduled load if the load has constant-current or constant-impedance components.
LINE ZONE KW KVAR KVA PF_

0 1201BusA
0 BUS0
0 BUS9
Tota
l
SCHEDULED SECTION LOAD BY LOAD GROUP

Load_Group 1
KW
KVAR
P.F.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Out-Of-Service Equipment Summary:
This summary lists all the out-of-service equipment in the file. If your file has more than one feeder, some
Capacitor Summary:
This summary lists all the capacitors in the feeder. The value under KVAR is the actual KVAR injected by
the capacitor, taking into account the solution voltages.
A sample capacitor summary is shown below. Entries in the table are sorted either by bus number or by
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAPACITOR SUMMARY
----- SCHEDULED -----
BUS_NAME AREA KVAR1 KVAR2 KVAR3 KVAR CON VA VB VC REGULATED_
0 BUS10
TOTAL
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage Regulator Summary:

This summary shows the status of all the voltage regulators in the feeder. This summary is useful only
when the regulators were adjusted during the voltage-drop simulation. (Otherwise, all the taps are set at
nominal.) You can see whether they were adjusted on the title page of the report.
The values under WINDING VOLTAGE are the voltages across the three banks, plus any additional
voltages that resulted from the compensation impedance. The TARGET VOLTAGE is the desired bank
voltages you entered in the regulator dialog box. Finally, under the BOOST/BUCK PERC. are the tap
position of the three banks. A positive percentage denotes boost. A negative percentage denotes buck. The
boost/buck position percentage is followed by the letter M if the tap is at the maximum, and by the letter
m if the tap is at the minimum.
A sample regulator summary is shown below. Entries in this table are not sorted.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VOLTAGE REGULATOR SUMMARY
WINDING VOLTAGE TARGET VOLTAGE BOOST/BUCK PERC.

REGULATED SIDE THE OTHER SIDE (1 2 3) (1 2 3) (1 2 3)_
0 BUS6 12kV -
0 BUS0 12kV -
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SECTION 9 DETAILS AND TECHNIQUES
9.1 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MAIN WINDOW

Getting Information on a Piece of Equipment
The fastest way to open the Info dialog box on a piece of equipment is to double-click the left mouse
button on the equipment of interest.
Copying and Pasting System Components to a Bus or Branch
Click the right mouse button on a spot load, generator, shunt, grounding transformer, or any protective
equipment you would like to copy. When the floating menu appears, click on the Copy command.
Then, click the right mouse button on the bus or branch to which you would like to paste the device.
When the floating menu appears, click on the Paste command.
Copying and Pasting Branches Connected Between Two Buses
Click the right mouse button on a line, transformer, voltage regulator or switch that you would like to
copy. When the floating menu appears, click on the Copy command. Then, click the left mouse button on
the first bus, then, with the <Shift> key held down, click the right mouse button on the second bus.
When the floating menu appears, click on the Paste Device command. If you are pasting a wye-delta
transformer, the wye winding will be connected to the first bus you selected.
Scrolling
You can scroll the one-line diagram both horizontally and vertically by pressing the arrow keys in
the numerical keypad. This is equivalent to clicking the mouse on the horizontal and vertical scroll
bars.
If you have wheel mouse, you can scroll the screen vertically with the wheel.
Viewing Different Faults
The "+" and '-" keys on your keypad lets you sequence through the different faults you have
simulated: Hitting the "+" key shows the next fault on the one-line; hitting the "-" key shows the
previous fault.
Shutting Down DistriView
You can exit DistriView by double-clicking on the control menu box in the upper-left corner of the Main
Window. This is equivalent to executing the File | Exit command.
Panning the One-Line
While holding down the Alt key on the keyboard, press down and drag the left mouse button. A hand
icon will appear, and the picture will move with the mouse. You may find this a quicker and easier way to
move the viewpoint than clicking on the scrollbars. If you have wheel mouse, you can perform panning
by pressing down the wheel without holding down the Alt key.
DistriView Version 10 SECTION 9 DETAILS AND TECHNIQUES

9.2 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CURVES WINDOW
Scrolling
Rolling the mouse wheel scrolls the diagram up and down.
Changing Relay Settings or Damage Curve Parameters
You can bring up the info dialog box of a relay or a damage curve by double-clicking the left mouse
button on the curve. This is equivalent to executing the "Edit | Relay Setting" or Edit | Damage Curve
Parameter command and selecting a relay or damage curve from the dialog box.
Making Trial Adjustments and Computing Test Values
Click the right mouse button on the relay curve. A floating menu will appear when you release the mouse
button. Click on Trial Relay Adjustment and Show Relay Test Value command.
Opening the TTY Window, Adding Relay Curves and Other Commands.
Click the right mouse button on an area not occupied by the description boxes or the legend box.
A floating menu will appear with some commonly used commands.
Opening the Dialog Box for the Legend Box
Double click the left mouse button anywhere within the legend box. A dialog box will appear to let you
edit the legend box. This is equivalent to executing the Edit | Legend command.
Closing the Curves Window
You can close the Curves Window by double-clicking on the control menu box in the upper-left corner.
This is equivalent to executing the Misc | Close Window command.
9.3 SHORTCUTS FOR THE DS RELAY WINDOW

Scrolling
Press the arrow keys in the numerical keypad to scroll the one-line diagram both horizontally and
vertically. Rolling the mouse wheel also scrolls the diagram up and down.
Zoom and Out
Hold down the <Ctrl> key and roll the mouse wheel to change the zoom setting continuously.
Pan the Diagram
Press down the mouse wheel and drag the mouse to pan the diagram.
Changing Relay Settings
You can bring up the info dialog box of the relay being shown by double-clicking the mouse button on
the description box. This is equivalent to executing the Edit | Relay Setting command and then selecting
the relay from the dialog box.
Changing the Offset and Orientation of the Second Relay Characteristics
You can drag the origin of the second relay to change its position. Alternatively, double click the
left mouse button on the origin to open a dialog box in which you can specify the position and
orientation (forward or reverse) of the second relay.
Resizing Relay Description Caption Boxes
You can resize the caption box encapsulating the distance relay description by clicking on the right vertical
edge of the box and dragging it to the desired position.

Opening the TTY Window
You can bring up the TTY Window by double-clicking the mouse button in an area not occupied by
the description boxes. This is equivalent to executing the "Show | TTY Window" command.
Closing the DS Relays Window
You can close the DS Relays Window by double-clicking on the control menu box in the upper-left corner.
This is equivalent to executing the Misc | Close Window command.
9.4 SHORTCUTS FOR THE TTY WINDOW

Selecting Everything from the Mouse Position Onward
Double-click the right mouse button on a line of text selects that line and all the lines that follow.
Closing the TTY Window
Double-clicking on the control menu box of the TTY Window closes the window. This is equivalent
to executing the "Menu | Close Window" command.
9.5 SHORTCUTS FOR THE DIALOG BOXES

Pushing the OK Button
Pushing the <Enter> key on the keyboard is equivalent to clicking once on the OK button.
Pushing the Cancel Button
Pushing the <Esc> key on the keyboard is equivalent to clicking once on the Cancel button.
9.6 KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

While the mouse is the simplest way to execute commands in DistriView, experienced users will find that
the fastest way to do certain operations is to use the keyboard accelerators. For example, using the View |
Find Bus By Name command with the mouse means moving the mouse to the View menu, clicking on the
menu and selecting the Find Bus By Name command. But you can do the same thing by striking the F
key on the keyboard.
The keyboard-accelerator equivalent of a command, if available, is shown directly on the pop-up menu.
For example, on the View | Find Bus By Name command, you will see:
Find Bus By Name F
The accelerators for the various windows are listed below. (You can use either upper or lower case
characters.)
Main Window Accelerator Command
+ (on the numeric keypad) Diagram | Bus Symbol | Longer*
- (on the numeric keypad) Diagram | Bus Symbol | Shorter*
<Ctrl> and C Network | Copy
<Ctrl> and V Network | Paste
<Ctrl> and Up arrow View | Go to Upstream Node
<Ctrl> and Down arrow View | Go to Downstream Node
<Ctrl> and Home View | Go to Nearest Substation
<Ctrl> and Left arrow View | Go to Sibling Branch
<Ctrl> and Z Tools | Undo

1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 View | Zoom | Size 1 through View | Zoom | Size 5
A Network | New | Annotation
B Network | New | Distribution Node
C Relay | View Relay Curves
D Network | Delete or Relay | Delete
<Delete> Network | Delete or Relay | Delete
E View | Go To End Bus
F View | Find Bus By Name
G Network | New | Synchronous Motor/Generator
L Network | New | 3-Phase Line/Cable
N View | Find Bus By Number
P File | Print One-line
R Relay | New Breaker/Relay Group
S S_Ckt | Solve Short Circuit
T S_Ckt | Stepped Event Analysis
V S_Ckt | Short Ckt. or Locked Rotor Solution on 1- Line
W Tools | Data Browser
X View | Plain 1-Line
Z Diagram | Place Buses
<F1> Get on-line help.
<F6> When using split window, make the other pane active.
<F9> View | Refresh Screen
* These shortcuts apply only when a bus symbol is selected. Otherwise, the + and - shortcuts cause
the next or previous fault solutions to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
OC Curves Window Accelerator Command
<Ctrl> and A Add | Relay Curves in Vicinity
<Ctrl> and D Add | Conductor Damage Curve
<Ctrl> and F Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault
<Ctrl> and G Add | Transformer Damage Curve
<Ctrl> and P Misc | Print Entire Graph
<Ctrl> and T Edit | Rearrange Caption
<Ctrl> and U Show | Relay Operations for all Faults
DS Relays Window Accelerator Command

<Ctrl> and A Add | Relays in Vicinity
<Ctrl> and F Show | Relay Operations for 1 Fault
<Ctrl> and G Misc | Grid On/Off
<Ctrl> and L Misc | Show Load Region
<Ctrl> and O Edit | Find Origin
<Ctrl> and P Misc | Print Graph
<Ctrl> and R Add | Relays on Remote Bus
<Ctrl> and T Edit | Rearrange Captions
<Ctrl> and U Show | Relay Operations for all Faults
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 Zoom | Size 1 through Zoom | Size 8

9.7 ONLINE HELP
The on-line help of DistriView has the exact same contents as the printed manual. You can access the
online help in one of three ways:
1. Get help through the Table of Contents.
Click on the Help | Contents command. The keyboard shortcut is
the key <F1>.
The Help Window will appear. The left pane of the Contents tab shows
the table of contents of the Users Manual.
2. Get help on a specific command on the menu bar.

Click on the top menu to bring down the list of menu commands. Use the
up or down arrow keys on your keyboard to highlight the menu item of
interest. Then press the <F1> key.
3. Press the Help button in any dialog box.
The Help Window will appear showing the help topic of the corresponding
command.
Note: To access on-line help for dialog boxes with multiple pages: press the
<F1> key while the dialog box is displayed.
9.8 COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS

You can supply DistriView executable file with command-line parameters to perform special operations
at program start-up. These parameters can be used in a GIS-DistriView interface where DistriView is
started up with text data files extracted from the GIS database.
The command-line parameters can also be used within the Target line in a shortcut property dialog box to
perform certain operations immediately after the program starts up for example, to open a certain binary
data file or to maximize the Window.

In the following, C:\ASPENDIR\dstview.exe is the full path name of the DistriView executable
file. TO START DistriView WITH THE WINDOW MAXIMIZED:
Use command line:

C:\ASPENDIR\dstview.exe -M
TO START DistriView WITH NO WARNING MESSAGES:
Use command line:

C:\ASPENDIR\dstview.exe Q
TO START DistriView AND OPEN A BINARY DATA FILE:
Use command line:

C:\ASPENDIR\dstview.exe DTVFileName
where DTVFileName is the full path name of a binary data file (with .DTV extension) enclosed
by double quotation marks. Immediately after DistriView starts, it will read the binary data
file with the File | Read Binary Data File command.
TO START DistriView WITH NETWORK AND TEXT DATA FILES AND A GRAPHICS
TEMPLATE FILE:
Use command line:

C:\ASPENDIR\dstview.exe -T DVTFileName RYTFileName TEMPLATEFileName
where:
DVTFileName is the full path name of a text network data file (with .DVT extension) enclosed
by double quotation marks.
RYTFileName is the full path name of a text relay data file (with .RYT extension) enclosed by
double quotation marks. Enter two consecutive quotation marks if an RYT file is not used.
TEMPLATEFileName is the full path name of a binary data file (with .DTV extension) enclosed
by double quotation marks. Enter two consecutive quotation marks if a graphics template
file is not used.
Immediately after DistriView starts, it will first read the text network data file with the File | Read
Text Data File command. The program automatically placed the nodes with nonzero state-plane
coordinates, as well as branches between these nodes.
If RYTFileName is not blank, the program will read in the text relay data file with the Relay | Import
Data command and create breaker/relay groups, overcurrent and distance relays, fuses, recloser and
sectionalizers.
Finally, if TEMPLATEFileName is not blank, the program will execute the Diagram | Acquire Graphics
from Another File command using TEMPLATEFileName as the template.

APPENDIX
DistriView Version 10 APPENDIX

APPENDIX A: OVERCURRENT CURVE LIBRARY
A.1 INTRODUCTION
ASPEN provides you with an overcurrent curve library that contains time-current characteristics of
overcurrent relays, fuses and reclosers. This appendix gives tips on how to manage this library of curves.
A.2 OVERCURRENT CURVE LIBRARY

The overcurrent curve library is a collection of binary file that stores the parameters of curves for
overcurrent relays, fuses, reclosers, compounded overcurrent curves. These files have file extension
of
.RLY.
The following .RLY files are shipped with this version of
DistriView: ABB.rly
AREVA.rly
ASPEN_Taps.rly
Basler.rly
Beckwith.rly
Bussmann.rly
Calor_Emag.rly
Chance.rly
Combined_Tech.rly
Cooper.rly
Cutler_Hammer.rly
Elastimold.rly
ElectroFusi.rly
Federal_Pioneer.rly
Fuji.rly
G&W_Electric.rly
GE.rly
Hi_Tech.rly
Hitachi.rly
Hubbell.rly
Joslyn.rly
Kearney.rly
Littelfuse.rly
Merlin_Gerin.rly
Misubishi.rly
Multilin.rly
Nu-Lec.rly
NxtPhase.rly
Omron.rly
Reyrolle.rly
RTE.rly
S&C.rly
Schneider_Electric.rly
SEL.rly
Shawmut.rly
Siba.rly
Siemens.rly
Southern_States.rly

Standard.rly
Toshiba.rly
ZIV.rly
There are over 3000 sets of curves in these files. Please use the Help | List of Overcurrent Devices
command to view a complete list of devices in these files.
You can use the ASPEN Overcurrent Curve Editor to create your own relay curves. Please refer to the
command Help | OC Curve Editor Help Contents.
LIBRARY DIRECTORY
When you install DistriView, the setup program copies the above .RLY files to a dedicated directory called
the Library Directory. You can change the Library Directory at any time with the DistriView
Configuration Program.
Within DistriView you can select curves in any of these files. The tool that facilitates access to the curves is
called the Curve Selector.
MANAGING THE OVERCURRENT CURVE LIBRARY

Use a common library for all users: In an organization with many DistriView users, we strongly
recommend that you store the .RLY files in a directory on a file server and make that directory the
Library Directory for all the users. This practice will greatly simplify the task of keeping the relay curves
up to date.
Do not edit the .RLY files provided by ASPEN. The reason is that these files will be automatically
overwritten when you install a maintenance update from ASPEN.
Store curves you made or modified in separate files. If you wish to add relay curves or damage
curves to the relay library, we recommend that you store them in separate .RLY files. You will be able
to access the curves you created once you move these custom .RLY files to the Library Directory.
VERIFYING THE CURVES
The curves within the overcurrent relay libraries were created by ASPEN and by users like you.
ASPEN has not verified the correctness of all the curves. It is important that you check the curves
against manufacturers' specifications before you use them in DistriView.
If you have created new relay curves that may be useful to other users, you are urged to submit them to
ASPEN for distribution. We also welcome suggestions on which relays and fuses that you would like to
see added to the relay libraries.

APPENDIX B: DISTANCE RELAY LIBRARY
B.1 INTRODUCTION
ASPEN DistriView provides you with a distance relay library that contains characteristics of different
distance relays. This section describes these library files and gives you suggestions on how to
manage them.
B.2 THE DISTANCE RELAY LIBRARY

When you install DistriView, the setup program copies the following distance relay library files to a
dedicated directory called the Library Directory. You can change the Library Directory at any time with the
DistriView Configuration Program.
ABB.drl
ALSTOM.drl
ASPEN.drl
SIEMENS.drl
ASPEN DistriView reads the file ASPEN.DRL (or another name you specify in the Configuration
Program) when it begins execution. The program then uses the parameters within the relay library to
compute the time delay of relays and to plot their characteristics..
The default relay library ASPEN.DRL that comes with DistriView contains some of the more commonly
used relay types. The other three .DRL files contain additional distance relay types. If you wish to use
relays types in these files, you must first move them to the default relay library using the Distance Relay
Editor. The procedure is as follows:
1. Start DistriView. Execute the Tools | Run Distance Relay Editor
command. This command will launch the Distance Relay Editor and
open the default library at the same time.
2. Within the Distance Relay Editor, execute the Type | Copy from Another
Library command. Follow instructions to copy one or more distance relay
types from another library into ASPEN.DRL.
3. Exit Distance Relay Editor and save changes you made to ASPEN.DRL.
Close DistriView now and start it again. You should see the new relay types listed in the distance relay
dialog box.
You can use the Distance Relay Editor to edit existing relay types and to create new distance relay types.
Please see the on-line help file DS Relay Help for more information.
Notes: Relay types with names that end with _ (e.g., D60G_ , SEL-421G ) are manufacturer-
specific relay models that are hard-coded into DistriView and cannot be changed with the Distance Relay
Editor.

APPENDIX C: CONDUCTOR LIBRARY EDITOR
INTRODUCTION
The Conductor Library Editor helps you maintain your conductor library, which is a repository for data on
overhead lines and underground cables. Once you enter the line and cable data in the conductor library, you
can reference them in DistriView as a basis for line and cable parameters.
When you install DistriView, the setup program copies the file ASPEN.cdb to a dedicated directory
called the Library Directory.
There are three types of data within a conductor library: construction data, conductor data and line-table
entries.
A construction can be for an overhead line or an underground cable. The construction stores the
physical position of the phase and neutral conductors. You can also specify a default phase conductor for
each construction. The Editor does not compute the electrical parameters of the constructions. The
calculation is done within DistriView, after you have specified the conductors to be strung onto the
construction.
The conductor data for overhead lines are physical data for wires, such as ACSR or steel wires. The
data for each wire type include the resistance, reactance, geometric mean radius (GMR), and outside
diameter. The conductor data for underground cables are cables. The data for cables include the GMR,
resistance, outside diameter, etc. for the phase and neutral conductors. The default conductor library,
ASPEN.CDB, has data for several hundred commonly used wires and cables.
The line table entries within a conductor library are pre-computed electrical parameters of lines and
cables, in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer. You should model a line or cable with table entries if
you already know its electrical parameters.
ASPEN DistriView reads the file ASPEN.cdb (or another name you specify in the Configuration Program)
when it begins execution.
How to Start the Conductor Library Editor

1. Double-click on the Conductor Library Editor icon in the
ASPEN DistriView program group.
The Main Window will appear when the program starts up. The Main
Window is gray until you open or create a library.

How to Create a New Conductor Library File
1. Select the File | New command.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the frequency and whether
you want to use English or metric units of length.
2. Click on either 'English' or 'Metric' to select the unit of length to be

used in this library.
3. Click on either '60 Hz' or '50 Hz' to select the system frequency to
be used in this library.
4. Press Done.
The 'New Conductor Library' dialog box will disappear. The frequency
and type of units selected for this library will be listed in the status bar
for the Main Window.
How to Open an Existing Conductor Library File

1. Select the File | Open command.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the Conductor
Library file (.CDB) you would like to open.
the conductor library file.
Click on "Open".
Once the Conductor Library Editor accepts the file name the standard file
dialog box will disappear and the conductor library statistics of will be
displayed in the Main Window

How to Add Data from a Conductor Text Data File
1. Select the File | Read Conductor Text Data File command.
This command is design to read in conductor data from an external
source, in the form of a text file. The most common application of
this command is to read in the conductor data from a data conversion
program.
Each Conductor Text Data File can contain data for many conductors,
constructions and table entries. The format of the Conductor Text
Data File is explained at the end of this Appendix.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the Conductor Text
Data File (.CDT) you want to import.
the Conductor Text Data File.
Click on "Open".
Once the Conductor Library Editor accepts the file name, the standard
file dialog box will disappear. The editor will automatically add all the
data in the conductor text data file to the conductor library. Use the Edit
| Construction command to view the expanded list of conductors,
constructions and table entries.
How to Add Data from an Existing CDB file

1. Select the File | Add from Existing CDB file command.
This command adds to the current library the conductor data from another
CDB file. In effect, this command merges the contents of two CDB
libraries into one.
A dialog box will appear asking you for the name of the conductor library
file from which the data will be taken.
the file.
Click on "Open".
Once the Conductor Library Editor accepts the file name, the standard
file dialog box will disappear.
Note: The program will not merge libraries that have different length
units or system frequencies.
2. Select the components in the selected CDB file that you want to import
to the current library.
A dialog box will appear asking you to select the components in the
conductor library file (.CDB) you would like to import. Available
selections are: Line construction, cable construction, line table entries,
aerial wire, underground cable. A check box is inactive (grayed out)
if the incoming library does not have any such data type.

Press OK to start importing.
When the program finishes, a dialog will appear with a summary of what
was being imported.
How to Add a New Wire

1. Select the Edit | Wire command.
A dialog box will appear showing you the existing wires in the Conductor
Library file.
2. Click on "New" to add a new wire to the Conductor Library file.

A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the conductor parameters.
3. Using the dropdown list box labeled Method, select one of two
possible forms for the wire data: Reactance or GMR.
The labeling on the dialog box changes depending on your selection.

REACTANCE METHOD
GMR METHOD
4. Enter the overhead conductor parameters and click on "Save".
How to Edit the Data for an Existing Wire

1. Select the Edit | Wire command.
A dialog box will appear showing you the existing wires in the Conductor
Library file.

2. Select wire to be edited by clicking on its name in the list box.
The conductor name will become highlighted.
3. Click on the "Edit" button.
A similar dialog box will appear displaying the conductor parameters.
4. Make any necessary changes and click on "Save".
The 'Add/Edit An Aerial Wire' dialog box will disappear.
5. Press Done to close the 'Conductor Add/Edit' dialog box.
How to Add a New Cable

1. Select the Edit | Cable command.
A dialog box will appear displaying the existing underground cables
contained in the Conductor Library file.
2. Click on "New" to add a new underground cable to the

Conductor Library file.
A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the cable parameters.

3. Enter the underground cable parameters.
4. Click on either 'Concentric' or 'Tape Shield' to select the neutral type.
Then click on the 'Neutral Data' tab at the top of the dialog box.
A cable with a concentric neutral has a number of individual neutral
conductors wrapped on the outside of each of the phase conductors.
A cable with a tape shield neutral has a metal tape wrapped around the
outside of the phase conductors. The program logic assumes that the
tape shield is 5 mils thick and is made of copper.
Depending on the type of neutral you select, one of the two dialog boxes
displayed on next page will appear on the Neutral Data page.
5. Enter the neutral parameters and click on "OK".
The 'Add/Edit Cable Data' dialog box will disappear and a new cable will
be added to the Conductor Library file. The dialog box will be displayed.
CONCENTRIC NEUTRAL:
TAPE SHIELD NEUTRAL:

How to Edit the Data for an Existing Cable
1. Select the Edit | Cable command.
A dialog box will appear displaying the existing underground cables
contained in the Conductor Library file.
2. Select the underground cable to be edited by clicking on its name in

the list box. Click on the Edit button.
The conductor name will become highlighted.
3. Make any necessary changes and click on "OK".
4. Click on "Done" to close the 'Conductor Add/Edit' dialog box.
How to Add a Construction

1. Select the Edit | Constructions and Table Entries dialog box.
A dialog box will appear displaying all of the existing constructions and
line table entries. The type name is followed by:
(Line): For constructions for overhead lines.
(Cable): For constructions for underground cables.
(Table): For line table entries (both overhead and underground).

2. Click on 'New Construction' to add a new construction.
A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the new construction data.
3. Enter the name of the construction type.

4. Select the conductor type. Click on either:
Line: For a construction for overhead
lines.
Cable: For a construction for underground cables.
5. Click on the drop down list box and select the default conductor.
The default conductor will be used to fill in Phase 'A' of the distribution
line within DistriView.
6. Enter the resistivity (ohm-m) of the earth.
100 ohm-m is the default.
7. Click on the 'Geometric Data' tab at the top of the dialog box.
The page used for entering the geometric coordinates of the
conductors will appear.
8. Enter the position of the three phase conductors in feet (in meter
if metric).
There is no absolute reference for the horizontal position, x. Only the
relative difference is important. The vertical position, y, is 0 at the
ground level, and positive above ground.

9. For lines, enter the position of the neutral conductors in feet (in meter
if metric). The neutral conductor is not available to cables.
Enter x=0 and y=0 for the neutral conductor if this construction cannot
support a neutral conductor.
10. Click on "OK".
The Construction Data dialog box will disappear and a new construction
type will be added to the Conductor Library file.
How to Edit a Construction

1. Select the 'construction' to be edited by clicking on its name in the
list box.
The construction name will become highlighted.
A similar dialog box will appear displaying the construction parameters.
The 'Line Construction Data' dialog box will disappear.
4. Click on Done to close the Constructions dialog box.
How to Add a Line Table Entry

1. Select the Edit | Constructions and Line Table Entries dialog box.
A dialog box will appear displaying all of the existing constructions and
line table entries.
2. Click on 'New Table Entry' to add a new line table entry.
A dialog box will appear asking you to enter the parameters of the new
line table entry.
3. Enter the name of the line table entry.

4. Select the conductor type. Click on Line for overhead lines or
Cable for underground cables.

5. Enter the electrical parameters.
R: Positive-sequence resistance in ohms/mi (ohms/km if metric).
X: Positive-sequence reactance in ohms/mi (ohms/km if metric).
B: Positive-sequence shunt susceptance in
micromhos/mi (micromhos/km if metric).
Ro: Zero-sequence resistance in ohms/mi (ohms/km if metric).
Xo: Zero-sequence reactance in ohms/mi (ohms/km if metric).
Bo: Zero-sequence shunt susceptance in
micromhos/mi (micromhos/km if metric).
Note: Ro, Xo and Bo of single-phase lines (or cable) should be
identical to R, X and B. Impedance of single-phase lines (or cables)
must include impedance of return path.
6. Input the current ratings (in A) in the four edit boxes.
These values are used to highlight overloaded distribution lines after
simulating a voltage drop study. Please refer to the V_Drop | View
Voltage Drop Solution on 1-Line command for more information.
7. Click on the 'Phases' drop down list box and select the number of
phase conductors.
8. Click on 'Has Neutral' if the line or cable has a neutral conductor.
9. Click on "OK" to close the dialog box.
The new line table type will be added to the Conductor Library file
and the dialog box will appear.
How to Edit a Line Table Entry

1. Select the line table type to be edited by clicking on its name in the
list box.
The line table entry name will become highlighted.
A similar dialog box will appear displaying the line table parameters.
4. Click on "Done" to close the Line Table dialog box.
How to Exit the Conductor Library Editor

The main window for the Conductor Library Editor will close and you
will be returned to the Windows desktop.

Conductor Text Data File Format
A conductor text data file is a text file that contains data for conductors, constructions and table entries. The File |
Read Conductor Text Data command of the editor is designed to accept files of this type. The conductor text file is
most commonly used as an intermediate medium for transferring conductor, construction and table-entry data from a
foreign data source to DistriView.
A conductor text data file can have up six different sections:
File header
Wire data section
Cable data section
Wire construction data section
Cable construction data section
Table entry data section
The File Header section is mandatory and must appear first. The other sections are optional and can be in any
order. The data format of the conductor text data file is described in the following. Please be aware of these
general guidelines:
follow.
File Header
This section identifies the file as a conductor text file. It also contains the name and version of the program
that created the file, as well as the creation date, units and system frequency.
The first line in this data section must say: [ASPEN CONDUCTOR DATA]. This is followed by the
information described below. A blank line ends the section.
The name of the program that created this file. Program name must be enclosed in double quotation marks
and preceded by 'app= '.
2. Program Version Information
Version number of the program that generated this file. The version number may be followed by a minor
release letter enclosed in double quotation marks, e.g., 2000 A. The version information must be
preceded by 'ver= '.
3. Creation Date
Date the conductor text file was created. The date must be within double quotes and preceded by 'date= '.
4. Unit
The unit being used: enter either unit=English or unit=Metric for English or metric units. The default is
English.
5. Frequency
The system frequency being used: enter either freq=50 or freq=60 for 50 or 60 hertz. The default is 60 hertz.
6. Earth Resistivity
The earth resistivity in ohm-meter. The default is 100 ohm-meter. The resistivity value must be preceded by
earthr=.

Wire Data
The first line in this data section must say: [WIRE DATA]. This is followed by the data described
1. Wire Name
Name of the wire within double quotes. The maximum length is 39 characters. This name must be unique
among all the cables and wires. This datum is followed by an equal sign, and then by following data
separated by one or more blanks.
2. Method
Enter 0 for the reactance method, and 1 for the GMR method.
3. Current rating in amperes.
4. Outside diameter
Outside diameter of the wire. Unit is feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if metric.
5. Resistance
Enter the ac resistance for the reactance method, or dc resistance for the GMR method. Unit is ohms per
mile if English units are in use, or ohms per kilometer if metric.
6. Reactance or GMR
Enter the reactance for the reactance method, or the geometric mean radius for the GMR method. Unit for
the reactance is ohms per mile if English units are in use, or ohms per kilometer if metric. Unit for GMR is
feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if metric.
Cable Data
The first line in this data section must say: [CABLE DATA]. This is followed by the data described
below. A blank line ends the section. Two different formats are used for cables depending on whether the
neutral is in the form of individual concentric strands or a taped shield. First, the data format for cables
with concentric neutral strands:
1. Cable Name
Name of the cable within double quotes. The maximum length is 39 characters. This name must be unique
among all the cables and wires. This datum is followed by an equal sign, and then by the following items
2. Neutral Type
Enter 0 for concentric neutral strands.
4. Diameter of the phase conductor
Unit in feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if metric.
5. Resistance of the phase conductor
DC resistance in ohms per mile if English units are in use, or ohms per kilometer if metric.
6. GMR of the phase conductor
Geometric mean radius of the phase conductor in feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if metric.
7. Dialetric constant
Relative dialetric constant of the insulating material. Default is 2.4.
8. Capacitive charging power factor
Default is 0.01.
9. Number of neutral strands

10. Diameter of each neutral strand
Unit is feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if metric.
11. Resistance of each neutral strand
12. GMR of each neutral strand
Geometric mean radius of each neutral strand. Unit is in feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if
metric.
13. Diameter over the neutral strands
The following is the data format for cables with taped shield neutrals:
1. Cable Name
Name of the cable within double quotes. The maximum length is 39 characters. This name must be unique
among all the cables and wires. This datum is followed by an equal sign, and then by the following items
2. Neutral Type
Enter 1 for taped-shield type neutral.
4. Diameter of the phase conductor
5. Resistance of the phase conductor
6. GMR of the phase conductor
Geometric mean radius of the phase conductor in feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if metric.
7. Dialetric constant
Relative dialetric constant of the insulating material. Default is 2.4.
8. Capacitive charging power factor
Default is 0.01.
9. Diameter over screens.
This is the inside diameter of the taped shield. Unit is in feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if
metric.
10. Overall diameter of the cable over jacket.
Unit is feet if English units are in use, or centimeters if metric. This value should be greater than the
diameter over screens.
Wire Construction Data

The first line in this data section must say: [WIRE CONSTRUCTION DATA]. This is followed by the
1. Construction Name
Name of the construction within double quotes. The maximum length is 39 characters. This name must be
unique among all the wire constructions. This datum is followed by an equal sign, and then by the
following items separated by one or more blanks.

2. x and y coordinates of phase a conductor
Horizontal and vertical coordinates are in feet if English units are in use, or meters if metric. Y should be
positive.
3. x and y coordinates of phase b conductor
Horizontal and vertical coordinates are in feet if English units are in use, or meters if metric Y should be
positive.
4. x and y coordinates of phase c conductor
Horizontal and vertical coordinates in feet if English units are in use, or meters if metric. Y should be
positive.
5. x and y coordinates of the neutral conductor
Horizontal and vertical coordinates are in feet if English units are in use, or meters if metric. Enter 0 0 if no
neutral is allowed. Otherwise, Y should be positive.
6. Default phase wire type
The most commonly used wire type for this construction. The name must refer to one of the existing wire
types, and enclosed in double quotes.
Cable Construction Data
The first line in this data section must say: [CABLE CONSTRUCTION DATA]. This is followed by the
1. Construction Name
Name of the construction within double quotes. The maximum length is 39 characters. This name must be
unique among all the cable constructions. This datum is followed by an equal sign, and then by the
following items separated by one or more blanks.
2. x and y coordinates of phase a conductor
Horizontal and vertical coordinates are in feet if English units are in use, or meters if metric. Y should be
negative if underground.
3. x and y coordinates of phase b conductor
Horizontal and vertical coordinates are in feet if English units are in use, or meters if metric Y should be
4. x and y coordinates of phase c conductor
Horizontal and vertical coordinates in feet if English units are in use, or meters if metric. Y should be
5. x and y coordinates of an additional neutral conductor Not used now.
Each cable conductor already has a neutral conductor in the form of concentric neutral strands or a tape
shield. In a future version, users will be able to model a cable circuit that has an additional neutral wire. For
now, enter 0 0.
6. Default cable type
The most commonly used cable type for this construction. The name must refer to one of the existing cable
types, and enclosed in double quotes.
Table Entry Data
The first line in this data section must say: [TABLE ENTRY DATA]. This is followed by the data
1. Table Entry Name
Name of the table entry within double quotes. The maximum length is 12 characters. This datum is followed
by an equal sign, and then by the following items separated by one or more blanks.
2. Number of phases: 1, 2 or 3.
3. Type code: 0 for line; 1 for cable.

4. Has neutral conductor: 1 if it has one; 0 if not.
5. Positive-sequence resistance.
Unit is ohms per mile if English units are in use, or ohms per kilometer if metric.
6. Positive-sequence reactance.
Unit is ohms per mile if English units are in use, or ohms per kilometer if metric.
7. Positive-sequence susceptance.
Unit is micromhos per mile if English units are in use, or micromhos per kilometer if metric.
8. Zero-sequence resistance.
Unit is ohms per mile if English units are in use, or ohms per kilometer if metric. (Enter the same value as
positive-sequence resistance if single-phase.)
9. Zero-sequence reactance.
Unit is ohms per mile if English units are in use, or ohms per kilometer if metric. (Enter the same value as
positive-sequence reactance if single-phase.)
10. Zero-sequence susceptance.
Unit is micromhos per mile if English units are in use, or micromhos per kilometer if metric. (Enter the
same value as positive-sequence susceptance if single-phase.)
11. Current ratings.
Up to four current ratings in amperes.
An example Conductor Text Data File:
[ASPEN CONDUCTOR DATA]

app= "WindMill-to-DistriView Conversion Program"
ver= 2010 "A"
date= "Fri Oct 21 13:21:51 2011"
unit= "English"
freq= 60
earthr= 100
[WIRE DATA]
"6 cu 25C"= 1 109 0.5 2.21 0.00568
"6 cu 50C"= 1 109 0.5 2.41 0.00568
[CABLE DATA]
"1/0AX-DT"= 0 168 0.0270833 0.951 0.01054 2.4 0.01 16 0.09125 0.868 0.0317574 0.10775
"1/0AX-DT"= 0 168 0.0270833 0.951 0.01054 2.4 0.01 16 0.0629167 0.868 0.0317574 0.0794167
[WIRE CONSTRUCTION DATA]

"F-4 (4kv)"= -4 22 0 24 4 22 0 28 "6 cu 25C"
[CABLE CONSTRUCTION DATA]

"SystemCnstDefault"= -4 -12 0 -14 4 12 0 0 "1/0AX-DT"
[TABLE ENTRY DATA]

Horz. Dove= 3 0 0 0.1663 0.5813 7.3637 0.4457 2.992 2.6185 4 100. 200. 300. 400.

APPENDIX D: VOLTAGE REGULATOR MODELING
In DistriView, voltage regulators are modeled as autotransformers with moveable taps that are controlled to
regulate voltage. This appendix covers these three topics:
Definition of the nameplate kVA rating
Typical impedance of regulators and boosters.
Current rating of voltage regulators.
Nameplate Rating Versus Pass-Through Rating
The nameplate rating of a voltage regulator is defined as the rated current in amperes, times the maximum voltage
change across the regulator in kV. For example, a regulator with a 2,000A rating, a nominal winding voltage of 5
kV, and a 10% boost/buck range has a nameplate rating of 2,000A * (5kV * 0.1) , or 1,000 kVA. (Note: In the
event the regulator manufacturer gives different current ratings for different tap settings, you should use the rating
at the maximum boost/buck setting to compute the nameplate rating.)
Typical Short-Circuit Impedance

The chart below show the measured short-circuit impedance of a regulators as a function of the tap position.
(Source: Cooper Corporation.) This regulator has a boost/buck range of 10%, with 16 steps in each direction. It is
apparent from this graph that the short-circuit impedance of a voltage regulator is a strong function of its tap
position. The impedance is zero when the tap is at the neutral position. The impedance increases when the tap is
raised or lowered. This variation of the impedance as a function of the tap position is modeled in DistriView.
The vertical axis of the charts is in percent, implying that the impedance shown is a per-unit quantity. Here is the
tricky part: The kVA base of the impedance plotted is computed based on the power passing through the regulator,
and not on its nameplate rating. In our example, the pass-through kVA base for the regulator impedance is equal to
2000A times 5kV, or 10,000 kVA. That is ten time the nameplate rating!
The typical range of impedance of most voltage regulators is around 0.3 to 0.5% based on the pass-through
kVA, when the tap is at the 10% boost or buck position. When referenced to the nameplate kVA (which is one
tenth the pass-through kV for a 10% boost/buck regulator), the typical impedance range is 0.03% to 0.05% (or
0.0003 per- unit to 0.0005 per-unit).

Typical Voltage Regulator Impedance in DistriView
For a regulator, DistriView requires that you enter the short-circuit impedance at the maximum boost/buck
position based on the nameplate kVA. Hence the typical value ranges from 0.0003 per-unit to 0.0005 per-unit.
DistriView will automatically adjust the impedance for other tap positions. Our technical analysis shows that
the impedance is a quadratic function of the tap position, with a minimum of zero at the neutral position.
Typical Booster Impedance in DistriView

For a booster, DistriView requires that you enter the actual short-circuit impedance at the fixed tap position based
on the nameplate kVA. The following table shows the impedance at different positions, based on the assumption
that the impedance is 0.0003 per-unit at 10%.
%_Boost_ Zpu
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
Current Rating of Voltage Regulators

The current rating of a voltage regulator varies as it changes its boost/buck position. The rating is highest at the
neutral position, and lowest at the maximum boost/buck position. In DistriView, the current rating you enter should
be the rating at the maximum boost/buck position. The rating at other boost/buck position is a multiple of this
rating. Cooper Power Systems gave the following table of multipliers to us for a regulator with range of 10% buck
to 10% boost:
% Boost/Buck
10.0
8.75
7.75
6.25
5.0
0.0
DistriView modifies the current rating with these multipliers when determining whether a voltage regulator is
overloaded. It should be noted that this table applies only to regulators with 10% boost/buck range. For regulators
with other boost/buck ranges, DistriView does not adjust the current rating as a function of the boost/buck
position.

APPENDIX E: RELIABILITY CLASS LIBRARY
The DistriView reliability class library contains typical reliability parameters for different types of
lines, voltage regulators and transformers. In the reliability-parameter dialog box, a Reliability Class
Browser helps you apply the parameters of a selected reliability class to speed up the data entry
process..
The reliability parameters in the Browser come from a Reliability Class Library file. The Reliability Class
Browser and the format of the Reliability Class Library file are described in this appendix.
E.1 RELIABILITY CLASS BROWSER

The Reliability Class Browser is shown below. The reliability classes are listed on the left pane in a tree
structure. Once you selected a reliability class, the program lists its parameters on the right pane.
Use controls in the browser dialog box select entry that best matches the current line, transformer or
voltage regulator.
Selected class equipment reliability parameters will be transferred to corresponding edit boxes in the
equipments reliability parameters screen.
Click on "Select" to close the reliability parameters dialog box.
E.2 RELIABILITY CLASS LIBRARY FILE FORMAT

The reliability class library is a text file with comma-delimited format. The default path name of the
reliability class library is C:\ASPENDV08\ASPEN.RLB. You can change this path name using the
DistriView Configuration Program. You can add, remove or modify entries in this file using any text
editor or spreadsheet program.
The Reliability Class library file must contain a header in following format:
# ASPEN DistriView Reliability Class Library
# Version 1.0
# Unit: English
The library Unit setting can be English or Metric (settings are case sensitive). When Unit is set to
English, the fault frequency of lines and cables must be entered in times/mile/year. When the Unit is set
to Metric, the unit must be in times/km/year.

For each entry in the library consists of the following data files, on a single line:
szName, szComment, nParamType, nEqmtType, fParam1, fParam2
1. szName:
Reliability class name. Name must be a string of at most 48 characters.
2. szComment:
Additional class information. Comment must be a string of at most 518 characters long.
3. nEqumtType:
Equipment type. 0- for lines, 1- for 2-winding transformers, 2- for 3-winding transformers, 3- for voltage
regulators.
4. nParamType:
Reliability class type. 0- for hazard class; 1- for repair readiness class.
5. fParam1:
For a Hazard class, enter failure rate in times/year per mile or kilometer (depending on the unit specify in
the header of this file) of line or times/year for transformers and voltage regulator. For Repair readiness
class enter mean restoration time in hours/incident.
6. fParam2:
For line and cable Hazard class entries, enter percentage of momentary fault. Leave this field blank for all
other equipment types.
Notes:
- If a text field contains comma character, the whole field must be enclosed by quotation marks.
- FParam1 and fParam2 cannot be negative.
- If the first character on a line is #, the whole line will be treated as comment. The line will
be ignored when the library is read into DistriView.
- DistriView reads the Reliability Class library file only once when the program is started. You
will have to restart DistriView after editing the library file to see the changes that you saved in
the library.

APPENDIX F: HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCES
F.1 INTRODUCTION
Harmonic current sources are network elements designed to model harmonic-producing equipment, such as
power converters and inverters, arc furnaces, static var compensators, pulse-width modulated drives, and
switch-mode power supplies. DistriView allows you to attach a harmonic current source to any spot load,
section load, or 3-phase induction motor/generator to describe the harmonics generated by the equipment.
This appendix describes the dialog box for entering the harmonic current source.
F.2 HARMONIC CURRENT SOURCE INFO DIALOG BOX

The following dialog box appears when you click on the Add/Edit harmonic current source button in
the property dialog box of spot loads, induction machines, and section loads. This dialog box has a data
grid that allows you to enter the parameters of the harmonic spectrum.
The harmonic spectrum is essentially a collection of mutlipliers at various frequencies. At each frequency,
the multiplier is the quotient (harmonic current)/(fundamental current).
1. Enter name of the harmonic current source.

2. Enter the harmonic current source spectrum.
For each frequency, enter the harmonic number, and the magnitude
and phase angle of the harmonic multiplier.
The Harmonic Number is the harmonic frequency expressed as a
multiple of the fundamental frequency.
The Harmonic Multiplier is the quotient (harmonic current)/(fundamental
current), which is, in general, a complex number. You must enter the
magnitude and angle (in degrees) of this complex number.

Note: You can enter harmonics in the spectrum in any order. The
program will automatically sort the list by harmonic number when
saving the data.
3. Store and recall harmonic current source spectrum.
Click Store button to save the content of harmonic spectrum data
grid to a CSV file.
Click Recall button to read the harmonic spectrum that was
previously stored in a CSV file.
4. Enter your notes in the Memo edit box.
The memo can have up to 95 characters.
5. Press OK to save the data and close the dialog box.

APPENDIX G: ASYMMETRIC FAULT CURRENT
G.1 ASYMMETRIC AND SYMMETRIC FAULT CURRENTS

The fault current immediately after the onset of a short circuit contains a transient dc component. The dc
component increases the magnitude of the peak current within the first cycle. See picture below. The peak
current is of special interest when evaluating the interrupt capability of fuse cutouts.
Most short circuit programs, including DistriView, do not simulate the physical phenomenon that gives rise
to the transient dc component. The fault current computed by these short circuit programs, called the
symmetric fault currents, is equal to the magnitude of the steady-state ac component.
The common practice to computing the peak current, or the asymmetric fault current, is to multiply the
symmetrical fault current by a multiplier. The multiplier is a function of the X/R ratio of the fault.
Generally speaking, higher the X/R ratio, higher is the asymmetric current peak. The theoretical upper
limit of the multiplier is the square root of 3. Please refer to the documentation for the SHORT CIRCUIT
& LOCKED ROTOR OPTIONS COMMAND for a plot of the asymmetric multiplier versus X/R ratio.
The asymmetric current and the asymmetric current multiplier are reported in the output of a number of
commands in DistriView, including S_Ckt | FAULT ALL BUSES COMMAND, Check | INTERRUPTING
DEVICE RATING COMMAND, and Report | SOLUTION REPORT COMMAND (for short circuit and locked-
rotor studies).

entering for a new file 81
Index
A
Acquire Graphics from Another File
206 All Bus Fault
current profile 241
simulate 296
view solution
237 Annotation
add to Curves Window 398,
399 add to DS Relays Window
437 add to one-line diagram
155 attach to objects 208
detached from linked object
208 find 214
highlight attached object 215
remove from Curves window
403
remove from Curves Window 403,
404 remove from DS Relays Window
441
Apparent Impedance
on one-line diagram 236
shown by Phasor Probe
234
Arc-Flash Hazard Calculator 300
ASEN Relay Database Setting Data
import from 265
Asymmetric Current Multiplier 314
Asymmetric Fault Current 314, 522, 565
B
Base MVA
changing
89
DistriView Version 10 Index
v Names on 1-Line 220
i Breaker/Relay Group
e parameters 250
w Browser See Data Browser and Solution
i Browser Bus
n data used for text file
g 464 delete 157
distribution node 100
8 fault all 296
8 find 212, 213
merge 177
B place and make visible 197
i remove tap 178
l show all hidden buses 204
l show and hide ID on one-line 201
i sort order in reports 195
n split 176
g substation
97 Bus
D Symbol
a change from bar to dot
t 200 change from dot to
a bar 200 made longer or
for shorter 200
load
alloca C
tion
91 Cable See also Line
Binar symbol selection 193
y Capacitor
Data switching parameters
File 116 text data format 471
19 Capacitor Placement 324
close 85 CCOC Device See Compounded Curve OC Device
create new 81 Change File
op format 497
en read 91
an Change nominal kV
ex 174 Check
ist I2T rating for each line in feeder 344
in interrupting device ratings in feeder
g 351
82 max fault clearing time for each node in feeder
sa 344 protective-device coordination 340
ve protective-device coordination in a feeder
85 344 relay tripping under normal conditions
Booster See 338
Voltage Circuit Breaker See Low Voltage Circuit
Booster Breaker check current rating 351
Branch properties 247
text data format 514

Close-In Fault 288 remove all but 1st relay curve
Cold Load Pickup 338 403 remove annotation 403
Color Code by Area Name 186, 194 remove curve 401
Color Code by kV 194, 196 remove picture 403
Command Line Parameters 537 remove relay or fuse curve 401
Compounded Curve OC Device remove time difference slider 404
271 show relay operations for 1 fault 417
check current rating 351 show relay operations for all faults
coordination checking 344, 416 show relay test values 420
350 text data format 518 show TTY window 421
Computer Hardware and Software Requirements trial relay adjustment 406
16 Conductor Damage Curve
add 390
edit parameters of D
412 remove 402 Damage Curve
Conductor Library Editor 374, 543 remove conductor or transformer 402
Configuration Dashboard 370 Damage Curve From Library
Configuration Program add 397
374 Convert Data Browser 361
generator bus to substation customization 364
165 line to switch 163 DC Offset 565
substation to generator bus 166 Definite-Time Overcurrent Relay 253
Coordination Checking 340, 344 Delete
Coordination Checking Margins annotation 157
350 Copy to Clipboard breaker/relay groups 285
graphical data from Curves Window 382 network equipment 157
graphical data from DS Relays Window objects outside region 159
428 graphical data from Main Window 209 objects within region 158
network and relay data in region 169 restore deleted branch
network data 169 162 restore deleted bus
protective-device data 160
169 CSV Formatted Report restore deleted generator, load, shunt 161
364 Current Profile 241 Device Palette 79
Current Ratings Display Next/Previous Fault Result 242
reload from library Distance from substation 223
190 Curve Collection Distance Ground Relay
defined 283 263 Distance Phase Relay
open in OC Curves Window 261 Distance Relay 510,
383 opening in Main Window 512
283 save curves to 384 dynamic characteristics 429
Curve Selector 252, 541 text data format 509, 511
Curve Separation Distance Relay Editor 374
422 Curves Window Distance Relay Library
add annotation 398 542 Distance Relays
add conductor damage curve 390 Window
add damage curve from relay library add annotation 437
397 add picture 400 add picture 436
add relay curves in vicinity add relay in vicinity 433
389 add time difference slides add remote branch impedances 435
399 commands 424
add transformer damage curve display load region 431
392 close 388 edit relay settings
edit legend 413 442 grid on/off 430
edit relay settings 405 options 429
edit shifting factors picture opacity 444
410 options 386 print 426
picture background 414 rearrange captions 446
rearrange captions 415 rearrange captions 443
remove all but 1st relay curve 438

remove annotation 441 parameters 268
remove picture 440 properties 247
remove remote branch impedances remove fuse curve 401
439 reset origin 444 text data format 508
set origin of second relay 445
show relay operations for 1 fault 448
show relay operations for all faults G
447 show TTY window 450 GE UR and 469 Data File
Distribution Transformer Fault import from 265
294 Drag-and-Drop Generator
modal 79 induction 107, 111
techniques 79 synchronous 104
DVC extension See Change file GIS-DistriView Interface 537
Dynamic Characteristics of Distance Relays 429 GPS Coordinates See State Plane Coordinates
Graphics
E acquire from another file 206
Grid On/Off 430
Editing Grid-Grip Option and Parameters 193
network objects 96 Grounding Transformer 119
Electronic Fuse text data format 473
Curves
modeled as CCOC device
271 Export Network Data 86 H
Export One-Line Graphics to Metafiles 95 Harmonic Current Source
dialog box 563
F from a spot load 103
from induction machine 110
Fault See Short from section load 123
Circuit Feeder text data format 493
Hide all buses outside 203 Harmonic Distortion Indicators 331
Hide all but the active trunk Harmonic Filter 115
203 Feeder Reliability Report Harmonic Load Flow
326 File view I.T factor on 1-line diagram
binary data files 333 view THD on one-line diagram
19 comments 87 333
export network data 86 Harmonic Probe
export relay (protective device) data 287 for frequency-scan results 334
import relay (protective device) data for harmonic load-flow results
286 OneLiner binary data files 83 335 Harmonics
output files 20 frequency scan 329
previous curve collection files load flow 331
20 relay data files 519 Help
text data file 84, 461 for a specific command 537 on-
Find Annotations 214 line 376, 537
Find Bus within dialog boxes 537
by bus number 213 Hide Bus 199
by name and nominal kV 212 hide all but those in active trunck 203
Font Size hide all outside feeder 203
Main Window 408 Hide in One-Line Diagram
Font Size on Screen bus numbers 194
195 Frequency nominal kV of buses
viewing 194
88 Fuse solution text for very short lines 195
add fuse curve in vicinity 389 solution text on one end of branch 194
change size with Trial Adjustment command
408 check current rating 351
coordination checking 340, 344 I
I2T Rating
checking 347, 354 Line Table Entry
parameter for lines and cables types 127, 543
122 IEEE 1584 Standard 300 Line-End Fault 288
Impedances on 1-Line Diagram
219 Import
network and relay data from OneLiner file 83
relay data from a DYT file 286
relay data from GE UR and 469 relay setting data
file 265
relay data from SEL-5010 MDB file 265
relay data from SEL-5030 RDB file 265
Induction Machine 3-
phase 107
single-phase 111
text data format
467
Instantaneous Overcurrent Relay 253
Instantaneous Unit of Relays Ignored
248 Intermediate Fault 288
K
K Factor
for fuse-recloser coordination 340
for ground distance relays 264
Keyboard Accelerators 535
L
Legend
edit parameters of in OC Curves Window
413 Library
distance relay 20, 542
Library Directory 541, 542, 543
conductory library ASPEN.CDB 20
distance relay library ASPEN.DRL 20
managing distance relay types 542
managing overcurrent curves 541
reliability class library ASPEN.RLB 20
Library File Name of Overcurrent
Devices reset 249
Line
2- phase 129
3- phase 121
convert to switch 163, 164
insert new segments to symbol 206
length and type displayed on one-line 223,
224 reload current ratings from library 190
section load on one-line 222
single phase 131
symbol selection
193 text data format
474
Line
Construction
types 543

List of Overcurrent Curves 377
Manufacturer-Specific Distance Relay Models
Load See Section Load and Spot Load
10 Memory Requirements 16
Load Allocation 181
Merge Buses 177
in batch mode using billing data 500
Merge Files 90
Load Allocation History
Motor
allocate loads using 183, 184
induction 107, 111
editing 184
synchronous 104
Load Flow See Voltage Drop
Moving Equipment Between Phases 192
Load Groups
edit 185
text data format 473 N
Load Region on DS Relays Window 431 N-1 Contingency Simulation 322
Load Tap Changer Navigation Commands
specifying parameters for 135, 143 go to end bus of a branch 216
Load Zone 188 go to nearest substation 216
for scaling spot loads and section loads go to upstream/downstream node 216
188 multiplier 188 Negative Sequence Relay See Overcurrent Ground
Locked Rotor Relay
simulate 291 Network
solution report in text 356 export network 86
solution report styles 521 merge files 90
Loses Probe 321
Network Browser See Data Browser
Losses Network Data
defined export 20
232 Neutral Current
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker 271 in phasor probe 234
Neutral Current Profile 240
M Node See Bus

Node Level 101 opacity in DS Relays Window 444
in voltage-sag studies 307 remove from overcurrent relay window 440
Node List Generator 366
Node Selctor Dialog Box
366 Nominal kV
change 174
O
One-Line
Diagram print
93
view at discrete zoom settings
211 OneLiner
convert generator bus to substation
165 DistriView interface 91, 497
open binary data file from 83
On-Line Help 376,
537 Open Delta
transformer 137
voltage regulator 145
Open Wye
transformer 137
voltage regulator 145
Options
DS Relays Window
429 Main Window 193
Overcurrent Relay Window
386 Profile Window 460
Output File 20
Over/Under Voltage Visualization
193 Overcurrent Curve Editor 374
Overcurrent Curves Library
list of devices 377
Overcurrent Curves
Library
files 540
Overcurrent Ground Relay
252 Overcurrent Phase Relay
256 Overcurrent Relay
text data format 504, 506
view curve 281
P
Palette See Device Palette
Panning the One-Line Diagram with Mouse
533 Paste from Clipboard
network and relay data in region 171
relay, fuse, recloser, sectionalizer
170
to create or update multiple generators
172 using drag/drop palette 80
Phasor Probe 233
Picture
add to Curves Window 400
add to DS Relays Window
436
Picture Background Protective Device Data
in Curves export to RYT file 287
Window 414 import from DYT file 286
Place Invisible Put Equipment In Service 167
Bus 197 Plain
1-Line 218 R
Power Flow See Voltage Drop
Power Flow on One-Line Reactor
Diagram 231 Power Profile switching parameters 116
239 text data format 471
Prefault Voltage Options 313 Rearrange Captions
Previous Curve Collection See Curve in DS Relays Window 446
Collection Print in overcurrent relay window 415, 443
contents of curves window Recloser 275
380 contents of DS Relays check current rating 351
Window 426 one-line coordination checking 340, 344
diagram 93 fuse coordinatin time multiplier
selected text in TTY Window 411 properties 247
453 Printer text data format 515
selection and setup 92 Recloser-fuse coordination time multiplier 411
selection and setup in Curves Window Refresh Screen 246
379 selection and setup in DS Relays Region
Window 425 copy 1-line graphics to clipboard
Profile 209 Regulator See Voltage Regulator
neutral current 240 Relay
power 239 CCOC device 271
solution currents of all-bus faults coordination checking 340, 344
241 solution voltages 238 delete 285
Profile Window distance ground 263
commands distance phase 261
457 overcurrent ground 252

overcurrent phase 256 short circuit and lock-rotor solution 521 Report
properties 247 voltage-drop solution 525 Reset
sample relay data file 519 Text Position 207 Restore Deleted
tripping under normal conditions
338 voltage controlled 259
voltage restrained 258, 259
Relay Curve
extraploate to 1 times pickup 248
remove all from DS Relays Window
438
remove relay or fuse curve 401
Relay Data
export to RYT file 287
import from DYT file 286
Relay Data File
19 sample 519
Relay Operating Time on One-Line Diagram
230
Relay Operations for 1 Fault
show in DS Relays Window 448
show in overcurrent relay window 417
Relay Operations for All Faults
show in DS Relays Window 447
show in overcurrent relay window 416
Relay Setting
edit in Curves window 405
edit in DS Relays Window
442
Relay Test Values
show 420
Relays in Vicinity
add characteristics to DS Relays Window 433
add curve to OC Curves Window 389
Reliability Class Library
561 browser 561
file format 561
Reliability
Indices MAIFI
326
SAIDI 326
SAIFI 326
Reliability Parameters
for lines and cables
127
for transformers 136, 139, 144
for voltage regulators and boosters 148,
150 viewing on one-line diagram 67
Remote Branch Impedances
add to DS Relays Window 435
remove from DS Relays Window
439
Remove Tap Bus 178
batch mode
180 Report
network data 364
protective device data
364
Report
branch 162 Shifting Curves in OC Curves Window 417
bus 160 Shifting Factor 410
generator, load, shunt 161 Short Circuit
distribution transformer low-side fault 294
S fault all buses 296
prefault voltage options 313
Scale Load simulate 288
from Data Browser 363 solution report in text 356
using load-zone synchronous generator impedance options 313
multiplier 188 Scale view voltage-sag results 306
One-Line Digram 210 Short Circuit Solution bus-
Section Load oriented output 522
allocate 181 report styles 521
displayed on one-line 222 summary 522
modify allocation parameters in batch mode Shortcuts
499 modify in batch mode 499 for dialog boxes 535
scale from Data Browser 363 for the Curves Window 534
text data format for the distance relay window 534
477 Sectionalizer for the Main Window 78, 533
check current rating 351 for the TTY window
parameters 279 535 using the keyboard
properties 247 535
text data format Solution Browser For Voltage Drop 320
517 SEL-5010 Solution Display on One-Line
MDB file all-bus-fault currents 237
import from 265 losses 232
SEL-5030 Relay negative-sequence quantities 226
Data neutral quantities 227
import from 265 phase quantities 228
Shift One-Line Diagram 210 positive-sequence quantities 225

real and reactive power 231 introduction to 461
relay operating time 230
short-circuit or locked-rotor study
292 Solution Report in Text
for locked rotor studies 521
for short circuit studies 521
for voltage drop studies
525
Sorting Preferences
195 Split a Bus in Two
176
Split Screen 27
Spot Load
modify in batch mode
499 parameters 102
scale from Data Browser
State Plane Coordinates
place buses using
205 Statistics 88
Stepped-Event Analysis 310
view results 311
view solution on one-line
312 Substation See also Bus
compute impedances from short circuit duty
98 convert from generator 165
convert to generator
166 parameters 97
Swap Phases 192
Switch
add in series with a branch 80
convert from distribution line 163, 164
parameters 151
toggle on and off 168
Switch Capacitor Voltage Rise
336 Switched Capacitor
Switched Capacitor 115
Switched Reactor 115
Symmetric Fault Current
565
Synchronous Condenser 104
Synchronous Machine
System Size 88
limitations 16
T
Take Equipment Out of Service
167 Tap Node
insert into a line 80, 178
remove from a line 178,
180 Tertiary Current
displayed by phasor probe 234
sensed by ground overcurrent relay
255 Text Data File
open 84 new 2-winding general 137
Text Orientation new 3-winding 140
Option 194 Text Transformer Damage Curve
Position add 392
reset 207 edit parameters of 412
Thevenin Impedance remove 402
522 Three Way Transformer symbol
Switch American 193
parame European (IEC) 193
ters 153 Trial Relay Adjustment
Three 406 TTY Window 243,
Way 451
Switch clear contents of 452
text data format close 455
492 Three commands 451
Winding copy selected text to clipboard
Transformer 455 find text 456
parameters 140 print selected text 453
tertiary current in phasor save selected text to file
probe 234 tertiary current 454 select all text 455
sensed by relay 255 text select font 452
data format 486 view in Curves Window 421
Time Difference Sliders view in DS Relays Window 450
399 Toggle Switch 168 Tutorial
Toolbar DistriView 23
show/hide command 244 Two Winding Transformer
symbols explained 78 data used for text file
Transformer 481 parameters 133, 137
grounding 119 text data format 481
neutral current in phasor Typical Value
probe 234 new 2-winding induction motor impedance 112
133 synchronous machine impedance 105
voltage regulator impedance 147

U X
Undo Command 360 X/R Ratio
does not work for the Change Base MVA command for computing assymmetric fault current 565
89 in short circuit summary 522
Unit
Length 195 Z
Time 193
Zoom
Update Key Memory 375
discrete settings for DS Relays Window
424 discrete settings for Main Window 211
V OC Curves Window 378
slider for DS Relays Window 424
View See also Profile
slider for Main Window 78, 211
apparent impedances on 1-line
236 branch names on 1-line 220
impedances on 1-line diagram 219
line length and type on 1-line 223
overcurrent relay curves 281
phases on 1-line 221
phasors 233
plain one-line
218 Voltage
Booster
modeling 559
parameters 145
typical impedances 560
Voltage Controlled Relay
259 Voltage Drop
convergence parameters and thresholds
325 neutral current profile 240
real and reactive power profile 239
simulate 315
solution browser 320
solution report in text 356, 357
solution report styles 525
view solution on one-line
318 voltage profile 238
Voltage Profile 238
view along feeder
64
Voltage Regulator
current rating 560
modeling 559
parameters 145
typical impedances
559
Voltage Restrained Relay 258, 259
Voltage Sag Analysis 302
batch mode 307
view solution on one-line 306
with stepped-event clearing time 303
W
Working Model 17

Users Manual Aspen Distriview

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Users Manual Aspen Distriview

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASPEN

Advanced Systems for Power Engineering, Inc.

HOW TO ORDER MORE

Mailing address: ASPEN

MultiSpeak is a registered trademark of National Rural Electric Cooperative Association.

SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL .................................................................................. 17

SECTION 3 COMMAND REFERENCE .............................................................................................. 77

DistriView Version 10 Contents

DistriView Version 10 Contents

DistriView Version 10 Contents

DistriView Version 10 Contents

SECTION 4 NETWORK DAT A FORM AT ........................................................................................ 461

DistriView Version 10 Contents

SECTION 5 CHANGE FILE FORM AT ............................................................................................. 497

SECTION 6 PROTECTIVE DEVICE FORMAT ................................................................................ 503

SECTION 7 SHORT CIRCUIT SOLUTION REPORT ....................................................................... 521

SECTION 8 VOLTAGE DROP SOLUTION REPORT ...................................................................... 525

DistriView Version 10 Contents

DistriView Version 10 Contents

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

1.3 NETWORK SUPPORT

1.4 SYSTEM SIZE LIMITATION

2.1 INSTALLING THE WORKING MODEL

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2.3 INSTALLING THE PRODUCTION VERSION

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

WITH IEC TRANSFOMER SYMBOLS AND SMALL SWITCH

2. Open the file SAMPLE1.DTV as follows.

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2. Click on the name 1260B 12kV 9 in the list box.

The one-line diagram will be shown in different magnifications as you

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2. Click on the "Zoom In" command in the floating menu.

2. Now drag the double bars to the center of the screen.

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2. Examine the distribution line parameters.

The per-unit values of positive- and zero-sequence impedance and shunt

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2. Click on the Properties command in the floating menu.

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2. Click on the Delete command in the floating menu.

3. Click on the "OK" button in the message box.

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

3. Enter the construction parameters.

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

2. Click on the Specify Fault command in the floating menu.

Note the five check boxes for the fault types:

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

Click on the View Phasors command in the floating menu.

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

DISPLAYING RELAY, FUSE AND RECLOSER CURVES

2. Click on the View Relay Curves command in the floating menu.

4. Add one more curves to this plot.

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

DistriView Version 10 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION AND TUTORIAL

A dialog box will appear.

GETTING RELAY TEST VALUES